Full text of "apple :: service :: PN 072-0228 Apple Service Technical Procedures Macintosh Family Volume Two-Mar 1992"

See other formats

)

Apple Service
Technical Procedures
Macintosh Family

Volume Two

PN: 072-0228

)

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Family

Volume Two

Table of Contents

-Title page (contains build date)

Macintosh LC/LC II -Table of Contents

—Basics
— Take-Apart
—Diagnostics
—Troubleshooting
—Additional Procedures
—Illustrated Parts List

Macintosh llsi -Table of Contents

—Basics

(except page 1.6)

—Take-Apart

(except pages 2.10, 2.11)

(except page 2.13)

—Diagnostics

—Troubleshooting

(except page 4.20)

(except pages 4.1-4.19)

(except page 4.22)

—Additional Procedures
(except page 5.6)

—Illustrated Parts List

(except page IPL.4)

(except page IPL.3)

Macintosh li/llx/llfx —Table of Contents

—Basics

(except page 1.2)

(except pages 1.4, 1.6, 1.21, 1.22)
—Take-Apart

(except page 2.21)

(except pages 2.8, 2.12-2.23)
(except pages 2.1, 2.9-2.11)
(except page 2.7)

Mar 1992

03/92

01/91

10/90

02/91

10/90

05/91

01/92

01/91

10/90

06/91

01/91

08/91

10/90

08/91

10/90

10/91

01/92

11/91

03/90

08/90

03/92

03/90

05/90

05/91

08/91

01/92

Main TOC / 1

Macintosh Family-Volume Two

—Diagnostics 05/90

(except page 3.1) 04/91

—Troubleshooting 05/90

(except pages 4.29, 4.30) 06/91

(except pages 4.1, 4.7-4.12, 01/91

4.17, 4.19, 4.24, 4.26, 4.28

(except pages 4.3, 4.6, 4.34) 03/92

—Additional Procedures 03/90

(except pages 5.1, 5.12, 5.14, 5.16, 5.17) 05/90

(except page 5.13) 07/90

(except pages 5.11, 5.17, IPL.3) 03/91

(except page 5.10) 03/92

—Illustrated Parts List 03/90

(except pages IPL.8, IPL.9) 04/90

(except page IPL.2) 05/91

(except pages IPL.5, IPL.7, IPL.12) 08/91

(except pages IPL.l, IPL.13) 11/91

(except pages IPL.l, IPL.3) 03/92

Macintosh llcx/llci/ -Table of Contents 10/91

Quadra 700 -Basics 10/91

(except page 1.11) 01/92

(except pages 1.12, 1.14, I.l6) 03/92

— Take-Apart 10/91

(except pages 2.21, 2.22) 12/91

(except pages 2.14, 2.17) 01/92

—Diagnostics 10/91

—Troubleshooting 10/91

(except page 4.8) 03/92

—Additional Procedures 10/91

(except pages 5.10-5.13) 01/92

(except pages 5. 6-5. 8) 03/92

—Illustrated Parts List 10/91

(except page IPL.ll) 11/91

(except page IPL.13) 01/92

(except pages IPL.2-IPL.7) 03/92

Macintosh -Table of Contents 12/91

Quadra 900 -Basics 10/91

(except pages 1.2-1. 7, 1.12-1.16, 12/91

1.18, 1.26, 1.27)

-Take-Apart 10/91

(except pages 2.10, 2.11) 12/91

(except page 2.9) 01/92

—Diagnostics 10/91

-Troubleshooting 10/91

(except pages 4.1, 4.5) 12/91

—Additional Procedures 10/91

(except pages 5.3, 5.4) 12/91

2 / Main TOC

Man 992

Macintosh Family-Volume Two

—Illustrated Parts List 10/91

(except page IPL.6) 01/92

(except pages IPL.2-IPL.5) 03/92

Macintosh Multiple -Table of Contents 03/92

Product Diagnostics -MacTest mp ii/91

(except page 1.10) 01/92

—Illustrated Parts List 03/92

Macintosh Family-Volume Two

Mar 1992

Main TOC / 3

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 -
Basics

1.2 Product Descriptions

1.2 Macintosh LC Features

1.2 Macintosh LC Configurations

1.3 Macintosh LC II Features

1.3 Macintosh LC II Configurations

1.4 Module Identification

1.6 Connector Identification

1.6 Back Panel

1.6 Internal Connectors

1.7 Macintosh LC and LC II System Features

1.7 Logic Board

1.10 Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive

1.11 Specifications

1.14 Theory of Operation

1.14 Introduction

1.14 System Startup

1.15 Logic Board

1.18 Input/Output Interfaces

1.23 Power Supply

Section 2 -
Take-Apart

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

2.3 Top Case

2.5 Flard Drive

2.7 Fan/Speaker Assembly (Macintosh LC Only)

2.8 Fan (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.9 Speaker (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.10 Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC Only)

2.11 Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.12 Power Supply

2.14 Main Logic Board

Section 3 — Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh

Diagnostics Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab.

Macintosh LC and LC II

rev. Mar 92

Contents / i

Section 4 -
Troubleshooting

4.2 Introduction

4.2 General Information

4.2 Before You Start

4.2 Error Chords

4.3 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board Configuration

4.5 Internal SCSI Hard Drive

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Startup Chord

4.6 Error Chords

4.8 Symptom Chart

4.8 Built-in Video Problems

4.9 Floppy Drive Problems

4.9 SCSI Problems

4.10 Peripheral Problems

4.11 Miscellaneous Problems

4.13 Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.14 Flowchart 1 Notes (LC or LC II)

4.16 Flowchart 2 Notes (LC Only)

4.18 Flowchart 3 Notes (LC or LC II)

4.19 Flowchart 4 Notes (LC Only)

4.20 Flowchart 5 Notes (LC Only)

4.22 DRAM SIMM Verification

4.22 Introduction

4.22 Verification Procedure

4.23 Battery Verification

4.23 Introduction

4.23 Verification Procedure

Section 5 -
Additional Procedures

5.2 Battery Replacement

5.2 Introduction

5.5 Materials Required

5.5 Remove

5.5 Replace

5.7 Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.7 Introduction

5.7 Identification

5.7 Upgrades

5.8 Video RAM (VRAM) Upgrade

5.8 Introduction

5.8 Upgrades

5.9 Macintosh LC II Upgrade

5.9 Introduction

5.9 Upgrade Procedure

ii / Contents

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Illustrated
Parts List

IPL.3 Macintosh LC and LC II - System Exploded View
(Figure 1)

©Apple Computer, Inc., 1990, 1991, and 1992. No portion of this document may be reproduced
in any form without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

Macintosh, A/UX, AppleTalk, MultiFinder, Apple, and the Apple logo are registered trademarks
of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Desktop Bus, SuperDrive, AppleColor, QuickDraw, MacTest, and Finder are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

NuBus is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Macintosh LC and LC II

rev. Mar 92

Contents / ill

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Section 1 - Basics

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh LC and LC II

1.2 Product Descriptions

1.2 Macintosh LC Features

1.2 Macintosh LC Configurations

1.3 Macintosh LC II Features

1.3 Macintosh LC II Configurations

1.4 Module Identification

1.6 Connector Identification

1.6 Back Panel

1.6 Internal Connectors

1.7 Macintosh LC and LC II System Features

1.7 Logic Board

1.10 Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive

1.11 Specifications

1.14 Theory of Operation

1.14 Introduction

1.14 System Startup

1.15 Logic Board

1.18 Input/Output Interfaces

1.23 Power Supply

Mar 92

Basics / 1.1

□ PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

Macintosh LC Features

Macintosh LC
Configurations

Enhancements

The Macintosh® LC and LC II are low-cost Macintosh
computers that offer many of the high-performance,
open-architecture characteristics of earlier Macintosh
computers.

The Macintosh LC includes the following features:

• 68020 microprocessor

• l6 MHz clock frequency

• 512K of ROM

• 2 MB RAM, upgradeable to 10 MB

• Eight-bit built-in video support

• 256k video RAM, upgradeable to 512K

• Sound input and output capabilities

• A 96-pin processor-direct slot (PDS) for system
expansion

The Macintosh LC comes in three configurations:

• 2 MB of RAM, one Apple® 1.4 MB SuperDrive™,
and one 40 MB SCSI hard drive

• 2 MB of RAM, one Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive, and
one 80 MB SCSI hard drive

• 2 MB of RAM and two Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrives

In addition to the standard features of the Macintosh
LC, you can add the following enhancements:

• Up to seven external SCSI devices (up to six
external devices for systems with an internal SCSI
drive)

• 2, 4, or 8 MB of expansion RAM on SIMM boards

• 512K video RAM SIMM (replaces 256K video RAM
SIMM)

1 .2 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Macintosh LC II Features The Macintosh LC II includes the following features:

Macintosh LC II
Configurations

Enhancements

• 68030 microprocessor

• l6 MHz clock frequency

• 512K of ROM

• 4 MB RAM, upgradeable to 10 MB

• Eight-bit built-in video support

• 256k video RAM, upgradeable to 512K

• Sound input and output capabilities

• A 96-pin processor-direct slot (PDS) for system
expansion

The Macintosh LC II comes in two configurations:

• 4 MB of RAM, one Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive, and
one 40 MB SCSI hard drive

• 4 MB of RAM, one Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive, and
one 80 MB SCSI hard drive

The following enhancements can be added:

• Up to seven external SCSI devices (up to six
external devices for systems with an internal SCSI
drive)

• 6, 8, or 10 MB of expansion RAM on SIMM boards
(however, the maximum usable RAM on a Macintosh
LC II is 10 MB)

• 512K video RAM SIMM (replaces 256K video RAM
SIMM)

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .3

Panel

Figure 1-2 Back Panel

Figure 1-3 Internal Connectors

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .5

□ CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION

Back

Panel

Internal Connectors

Macintosh LC

Macintosh LC ii

Figure 1-2. The Macintosh LC and LC II have the same
built-in ports and connectors on their back panels.

• Power switch

• AC power connector

• Video connector

• Serial port 1

• Serial port 2

• SCSI connector

• Apple Desktop Bus™ port

• Sound-out port

• Sound input port

• Expansion slot access panel

Figure 1-3. The internal connectors on the Macintosh
LC and LC II logic boards differ slightly.

The Macintosh LC internal connectors include;

• Video RAM SIMM connector

• Two DRAM SIMM connectors

• Power supply connector

• Internal 1.4 MB SuperDrive connector

• Fan/speaker connector

• Battery connector

• Internal SCSI hard drive connector

• Power connector for internal SCSI hard drive

• Second internal 1.4 MB SuperDrive connector

• 96-pin processor-direct slot (PDS) expansion
connector

The Macintosh LC II internal connectors include:

• Video RAM SIMM connector

• Two DRAM SIMM connectors

• Power supply connector

• Internal 1.4 MB SuperDrive connector

• Fan connector

• Speaker connector

• Battery connector

• Internal SCSI hard drive connector

• Power connector for internal SCSI hard drive

• 96-pin processor-direct slot (PDS) expansion
connector

1 .6 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ MACINTOSH LC and LC II SYSTEM FEATURES

Logic Board

The Macintosh LC and LC II logic boards include the
following components:

• MC68020 (LC) or MC68030 (LC II) microprocessor
running at l6 MHz

• 512K of ROM

• Built-in video chip (with optional VRAM)

• Serial communications controller (SCO chip

• ADB microcontroller chip

• SWIM disk controller chip

Figure 1-4. The Macintosh LC uses the Motorola 68020
microprocessor. The Macintosh LC II uses the Motorola
68030 microprocessor. These high-performance
microprocessors run at l6 MHz and support both 24-
and 32-bit processing modes. You can also enhance the
performance of the 68020 microprocessor by taking
advantage of separate video RAM, which eliminates
system delay for video updates.

The Macintosh LC and LC II logic boards include four
32-pin ROM chips. The ROM includes code that
supports the built-in video and 32-bit QuickDraw™.

The code also supports future upgrades to the Macintosh
operating system.

The built-in video chip controls all system timing, video
generation, memory mapping, sound, and clock
generation. The system can have 0, 256K, or 512K of
Video RAM (VRAM), which is installed in a 68-pin
SIMM socket. This SIMM socket uses the same pinouts
as the VRAM expansion sockets on the Macintosh
Display Card 8*24.

When VRAM is installed (256 k or 512K SIMM), video
data refreshes from the VRAM, leaving all cycles
available to the CPU. When VRAM is not installed, the
chip refreshes video from main memory. Video data
passes from the CLUT (color lookup table) to the DB-15
video port.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .7

The serial commvinications controller (SCC), an 8-MHz
AMD 85C80 chip, is also known as the combo chip
because it combines the functions of the SCC and the
SCSI controller into a single device. The SCC portion
of the chip controls the two RS-422 serial ports that
connect the Macintosh LC and LC II to networks,
printers, and modems. The SCSI (small computer system
interface) controller portion of the combo chip controls
the high-speed parallel port that connects as many as
seven external SCSI devices. The SCSI circuit includes
the 50-pin internal connector on the logic board and the
DB-25 external connector.

68020 (LC) ADB SCC Video

System

DRAM

The ADB 68HC05 microcontroller chip performs
keyboard scanning and ADB (Apple desktop bus)
interface functions, and stores 256 bytes of parameter
RAM (PRAM). The ADB chip also supplies control
signals to the DFAC (Digital Filter Audio Chip) analog
sound chip. When system power is off, the 68HC05
receives power from the backup battery and operates as
the real-time clock.

The SWIM disk controller chip enables the 1.4 MB

Apple SuperDrive to read and write GCR (group-coded
recording) and MFM (modified frequency modulation)
data formats. Refer to the following section, “Apple 1.4
MB SuperDrive,” for more information.

1 .8 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Figure 1-5 Identifying the Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive

MEDIA FORMAT

DRIVE

MEDIA

400K

(GCR)

800K

(GCR)

720K

(MFM)

1.4 MB
(MFM)

800K

Single-Sided

R/W/F

800K

Double-Sided

FUVJ/F

RA/V/F

800K

High-Density

1.4 MB

Single-Sided

WVJ/F

1.4 MB

Double-Sided

RA/V/F

1.4 MB

High-Density

RA/V/F

NR = Not Recommended
R = Read
W = Write
F = Format
X = Not Allowed

Figure 1-6 Drive/Media Compatibiiity Matrix

Macintosh LC and LC

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .9

Apple 1 .4 MB
SuperDrive

Identification

Drive/Media

Compatibility

1.10/ Basics

The Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive is a high-density 3.5-inch
floppy drive. In addition to high-capacity data storage,
the SuperDrive provides data exchangeability between
Apple (GCR data format) and MS-DOS (MFM data
format) systems. The Apple SuperDrive is also
backward-compatible with the 800K disk format.

Figure 1-5A. The Macintosh LC and LC II support 800K
drives and the Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive, but ship with
SuperDrives only. To differentiate between 800K and
1.4 MB drives, remove the top case and locate the
microswitches at the front of the drive. The Apple 1.4
MB SuperDrive has three microswitches; the 800K
drive has only two microswitches.

Figure 1-5B. You can also identify an Apple SuperDrive
by removing it from the computer and checking the
manufacturer's label on the bottom of the drive: all
high-density drives have 2MB on the label.

Figure 1-6. Special 1.4 MB data disks take full
advantage of the increased data storage capacity of the
Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive. Apple does not recommend
using 1.4 MB media in 800K disk drives, however. Data
saved to high-density media using 800K drives is
unreliable and could be lost.

CAUTION: High-density media (1.4 MB) are more
susceptible to problems than are low-density media
(400\^800K). To avoid media probiems, use oniy known-
good media or high-density media bearing the Appie iabel.

The 800K drives can read, write, and format single- and
double-sided media. The Apple SuperDrive can read,
write, and format single-sided C400K), double-sided
(800K), and high-density media. In addition, the
SuperDrive can read, write, and format 720K and 1.4 MB
double-sided MFM-format media.

Note: To help understand drive and media format
compatibility, think in terms of the drive/media of
lowest capacity. If your Macintosh LC system has an
internal 800K drive and an Apple SuperDrive, you must
always use 800K media (the drive and media of lowest
capacity) to ensure media compatibility between the two
drives.

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ SPECIFICATIONS

Processor

Clock Frequency
Addressing

Coprocessor

Memory

Slot Expansion
Sound System

Disk Drives

SCSI Port

Macintosh LC : MC68020 processor: 32-bit architecture
with 256-byte instruction caches

Macintosh LC II : MC68030 processor: 32-bit

architecture with 256-byte data and instruction
caches supporting burst reads

16 MHz

32-bit internal registers
1 6-bit address bus

None

512K on a ROM SIMM

256 bytes of parameter memory

256k of video RAM, expandable to 512K

Macintosh LC : 2 MB RAM, expandable to 10 MB

Macintosh LC II : 4 MB RAM, expandable to 10 MB

96-pin processor-direct slot (PDS)

Built-in speaker

External stereo headphone jack that plays in mono
Subset of Apple sound chip that enables sound
recording, playback, and playthrough (mixing)

Internal SCSI hard drive (optional on Macintosh LC)
Up to seven external SCSI drives (if no internal
SCSI drive is installed)

Internal Apple 1.4 MB SuperDrive
Macintosh LC : Optional second Apple 1.4 MB
SuperDrive

One external SCSI port (DB-25)
One internal 50-pin SCSI connector

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1.11

Serial Ports

Video Display

Keyboard

Mouse

Input Power

Output Power

Ciock/Calendar
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity

Altitude

Two RS-422/RS-232/AppleTalk® serial ports
(mini DIN-8)

Built-in video with external video port supports:

Macintosh 12-Inch RGB Display at 8 bits/pixel with
256 k VRAM (or l6 bits/pixel with 512K VRAM);
Apple High-Resolution Monochrome Monitor,
AppleColor”^” High-Resolution RGB Monitor, and
Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome Display at 4
bits/pixel with 256K VRAM or 8 bits/pixel with
512K VRAM

Apple Keyboard, Apple Keyboard II, or Apple Extended
Keyboard II connected through Apple Desktop Bus
ports (Mini DIN-4)

Apple Desktop Bus mouse (Mini DIN-4)

100 to 240 volts AC RMS automatically configured
50-60 Hz single-phase
130 watts maximum

DC power: 30 watts maximum

CMOS custom chip with long-life lithium battery

10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F)

-40° C to 47° C (-40° F to 116.6° F)

5% to 95% (noncondensing)
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)

1.12 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Figure 1-7 Macintosh LC and LC il Biock Diagram

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1.13

□ THEORY OF OPERATION

Introduction The Macintosh LC and LC II computers have three basic

modules: the logic board, the power supply, and the disk
drive(s). The Macintosh LC can have one or two internal
floppy drives; the Macintosh LC II supports only one
internal floppy drive. Both computers can have one
internal SCSI hard disk drive and up to six external SCSI
devices (drives, scanners, etc.).

The information in this section will assist you in
performing logical troubleshooting on the LC and LC II
computers. Figure 1-7 shows a block diagram of the
Macintosh LC and LC II computers.

System when you switch on the computer, the system begins a

Startup carefully synchronized sequence of events. First the

system software performs a memory test to determine
how much RAM is present and whether the RAM is
good.

The system then compiles separate 24-bit and 32-bit
memory maps describing the current memory-
configuration. The 24-bit memory map allows existing
Macintosh software to use a 24-bit address mode; the
32-bit memory map enables new software to use the full
32-bit address space.

The memory management unit (MMU) is then
programmed, based on the 24- and 32-bit memory maps,
to provide contiguous logical memory from the
potentially noncontiguous physical segments in bank A
(bank B is empty) and the RAM SIMM expansion slots.

At this point the disk startup process begins. The
system looks for a readable disk in the available disk
drives in the following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive(s)

2. Startup device set in the control panel

3. SCSI devices in declining order of device ID (from
6 to 0)

1.14/ Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Logic Board

Microprocessor

DRAM

Note: If the battery is removed or the contents of the
parameter RAM are destroyed, the setup device defaults
to the device with ID=0.

The system then finds a readable disk, reads the disk,
and completes the system startup process.

The logic board is the module that processes all
information. Below is a list of the major components of
the Macintosh LC and LC II logic boards and the
functions they perform.

By using the block diagram in Figure 1-7 as you read
through the various sections, you will get a clearer
understanding of how the logic boards work.

Macintosh LC : contains a Motorola 68020
microprocessor running at l6 MHz. The MC68020 is a
true 32-bit processor but also supports 24- and l6-bit
processing modes. When running in the 24-bit
addressing mode, the Macintosh LC is compatible with
the majority of existing Macintosh applications.

Macintosh LC II : contains a Motorola 68030
microprocessor running at l6 MHz. The MC68030 is a
true 32-bit processor but also supports 24- and l6-bit
processing modes. When running in the 24-bit
addressing mode, the Macintosh LC II is compatible
with the majority of existing Macintosh applications.

The random-access memory (RAM) interface on the logic
board supports up to 10 MB of DRAM. The first 10
megabytes of space available in main memory are
reserved for RAM.

On the Macintosh LC, the first two megabytes of DRAM
are soldered onto the logic board in bank A. The
Macintosh LC II ships with 4 MB of DRAM soldered
onto the logic board.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1.15

VRAM

ROM

Built-in

Chip

Two single in-line memory module (SIMM) sockets
provide memory expansion on the Macintosh LC and LC
II. These expansion RAM sockets can be empty or can
contain two SIMMs of the same density (two 1 MB
SIMMs, for instance).

RAM bank A and the two SIMM sockets do not occupy
contiguous address space, as they do on most previous
Macintosh products. The 68020 on-chip MMU joins the
noncontiguous blocks of physical memory to contiguous
logical memory for application software.

If the VRAM (video RAM) SIMM does not contain VRAM
(the SIMM contains two transparent latches only), then
on-board video operates out of main memory. Video
data resides in a video frame buffer that is in the
topmost megabyte of soldered RAM, thereby allowing
the video address to be independent of memory size.

If VRAM (256 k or 512K) is installed on the VRAM
SIMM, the video frame buffer is in the VRAM, and
video accesses do not affect memory access. Video data
can be fetched from VRAM without interrupting CPU
access to main memory or to I/O devices.

The Macintosh LC and LC II contain 512K of nonvolatile
read-only memory. The system ROMs contain the
Macintosh Toolbox, operating system support, and self-
tests. The ROMs are implemented with four 32-pin,
128K X 8 ROM chips.

Video The built-in video chip provides support for VRAM

and for the Ariel color lookup table (CLUT). The video
chip also includes a full-function VIAl (versatile
interface adapter) chip and VIA2 registers similar to
those implemented in the Apple Sound Chip.

1.16/ Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

If VRAM is not installed on the VRAM SIMM, the video
chip uses data stored in a buffer frame in bank A of
RAM to refresh screen video. The video chip requests
this video data as needed and refreshes video in 32-bit
bursts. If a video burst is in progress, CPU access to
RAM bank A is delayed, which slows the CPU. The
RAM SIMM expansion slots are not affected by video
refresh; the CPU has full access to these slots at all
times (the expansion slots are connected directly to the
CPU data bus).

When a monitor is connected to the built-in video port,
the monitor will ground certain pins on the connector.
The grounding pattern allows the video chip to identify
the type of monitor connected. The video chip
automatically selects the appropriate pixel clock and
sync timing parameters. If an unknown monitor is
plugged in or no monitor is plugged in, built-in video
output halts.

The video monitor connects to the computer through a
DB-15 female connector on the back of the CPU. Table 1
shows the pinouts for this connector.

Signal

Description

Signal

Description

R.GND

Red video ground

B.V.

Blue video

R.V.

Red video

ID3

Monitor ID bit 3

CSYNC

Composite H and V sync

GND

CSYNC ground

IDl

Monitor ID bit 1

VSYNC

Vertical sync

G.V.

Green video

B.GND

Blue video ground

G.GND

Green video ground

GND

HSYNC return

ID2

Monitor ID bit 2

HSYNC

Horiz sync (VGA only,
CSYNC otherwise)

Not used

Shell

S.GND

Shield ground

Table 1 External Video Connector Pinouts

Macintosh LC and LC II built-in video supports the
following monitors: the Macintosh 12-Inch RGB Display
(512 X 384 screen); the Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome
Display, AppleColor Hi-Res RGB Monitor, and Apple Hi-
Res Monochrome Monitor (640 x 480 screens); and VGA
monitors (512 x 384 screen).

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1.17

Input/Output

Interfaces

see ehip

when vising a video SIMM without VRAM, the built-in
video chip supports 640 x 480 screens only, at 1
bit/pixeL With 25 6K of VRAM, the Macintosh LC and
LC II can drive 640 x 480 and 560 x 384 screens at 4
bits/pixel, and 512 x 384 screens at 8 bits/pixel. With
512K of VRAM, these CPUs can drive 640 x 480 and
560 X 384 screens at 8 bits/pixel, and 512 x 384
screens at I 6 bits/pixel.

The video signals generated by the built-in video chip
pass through a GLUT (color lookup table) chip. The
lookup table has 256 three-byte entries (one byte each
for red, green, and blue). In monochrome mode, the
same signal drives red, green, and blue.

The input/output interfaces of the system include the
serial ports, the SCSI port, the internal floppy disk, the
ADB port, the sound system, and the expansion port.

The following chips control these ports and their
devices.

The see (serial communications controller) chip, an
8-MHz AMD 85C80, controls communications with the
serial ports. This chip is also known as the combo chip
because it combines the functions of the SCC and the
SCSI controller into a single device. The 85C80 is
transparent to operating software.

The SCC portion of the 85C80 has two independent
ports for serial communication. Each port can be
independently programmed for asynchronous,
synchronous, and AppleTalk protocols. The serial ports
conform to EIA standard RS-422. These ports are used
mainly for (though not limited to) connecting the CPU
to networks, printers, and modems.

1.18/ Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

To use the serial ports with RS-232 single-ended
devices, use the RS-422 TxD- for the RS-232 TxD, RS-
422 RxD- for the RS-232 RxD, and ground RxD+ to the
SG pin (see Figure 1-8).

GPi

RxD+

RxD-

HSKi

TxD+

TxD-

HSKo

Figure 1-8 Mini DIN-8 Connector

The second portion of the 85C80 combo chip is the
small computer system interface (SCSI) controller. The
SCSI portion of the 85C80 supports the SCSI as defined
by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
X3T9.2 Committee. This part of the device is compatible
with the 53C80 controller in the Macintosh II family.
The rest of the SCSI interface consists of an internal
50-pin connector for connecting an internal SCSI drive,
and an external DB-25 connector.

The combo chip connects directly to the internal 50-pin
connector and the external DB-25 connector, and the
chip controls the high-speed parallel port for
communicating with up to seven SCSI peripherals. (If
you have an internal SCSI drive, you can have only six
external SCSI devices.) The combo chip supports
arbitration of the SCSI bus, including reselection.

The 85C80 does not provide the internal SCSI disk
drive with termination power; the drive provides the
termination power.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1.19

SWIM Chip

ADB

Microcontroller

Chip

The SWIM chip (Sanders-Woz integrated machine)
controls the internal 3.5-inch floppy drive — ^the Apple
1.4 MB SuperDrive. The SWIM chip incorporates the
functionality of the IWM chip (integrated Woz machine),
and enables the high-capacity SuperDrive to read,
write, and format in GCR and MFM data formats.

The SWIM chip interprets, converts, and outputs dual-
disk (clock/time) and file (data) signals as appropriate for
either GCR (Apple 400K/800K) or MFM (MS-DOS 720K
and 1.4 MB, and Apple 1.4 MB) data formats. This
arrangement enables the Apple SuperDrive to exchange
data between Apple and MS-DOS® systems. For specific
compatibilities between drives and media, see Figure 1-6.

To translate the formatted data for use within an
application program, use an application-specific
translator within the Apple File Exchange utility
program or a third-party translator.

A custom Motorola 68HC05 microcontroller chip drives
the external ADB bus and reads the status of the
selected device. The Macintosh LC and LC II interface
with the microcontroller chip via an improved,
extended-handshake protocol with the VIAl register in
the built-in video chip.

The ADB is a serial communication bus that connects
keyboards, mouse devices, graphic tablets, and other
input devices to the system. It is a single-master,
multiple-slave serial bus using an asynchronous
protocol. The system microprocessor normally samples
the state of each of the devices by using the control
lines and shift register in VIAl to read or write bytes
over an internal serial link to the microcontroller. The
microcontroller drives the external bus and reads the
status of the selected device.

All Apple Desktop Bus devices have a microprocessor
that makes the devices intelligent. All ADB devices,
except the mouse, have ports for connecting to other
ADB devices. Because it has no port, the mouse must be
the last device on the Apple Desktop Bus.

1 .20 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

There are three Macintosh Apple ADB keyboards — the
Apple Keyboard, Apple Keyboard II, and Apple Extended
Keyboard II. The keyboards connect to the Apple
Desktop Bus port on the rear of the CPU. The
keyboards have their own microprocessors, called
keyboard microcontrollers. The keyboards operate
asynchronously, issue commands on the ADB, and
transmit and receive data to and from the ADB devices.

The ADB microcontroller chip includes other functions
that used to be provided by extra devices on the logic
board. The microcontroller includes a real-time clock
and parameter RAM, control bits for the soft power
control circuit, power-on reset capabilities, and
keyboard-controlled NMI functions. Each of these
functions is described below.

Sound The sound system includes an input jack, a built-in

System speaker, and a stereo headphone jack that plays in

mono. The system can record sounds digitally and
includes a playthrough feature that permits the user to
mix an external audio source with computer-generated
sound and to play the result through the speaker or
headphone jack.

The Macintosh LC and LC II use main memory for the
sound buffer. Sound data is written to memory and
played back using a first-in, first-out (FIFO) storage
method incorporated into the built-in video chip. The
FIFO address is a byte wide, and the sound buffer in
main memory is 1022 bytes long. A DFAC chip (digital
filter audio chip) controls all analog processing
functions. Control bits for the DFAC are in a shift
register loaded from the ADB microcontroller chip.

The sound input circuit consists of an input jack; a
preamplifier; a switched capacitor filter to provide
input filtering; an analog-to-digital converter; a first-in,
first-out memory to store the digitized data; and control
logic that allows software to control the circuitry.
Software uses sound control registers to control the
storage of data and the generation of interrupts. The
sound input control register controls the sample rate,
the record/play bit, and write/diagnostic address to the
FIFO memory. Sound samples can be made at 11 or 22
KHz with 8-bit resolution.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .21

Expansion

Slot

Sound input sources can be a microphone or an audio
line, either of which plugs into the sound input jack on
the rear of the computer. The input source should
provide a 20-mV amplitude and a 6 OO-Q input
impedance. A line input (1 volt, peak to peak) source —
such as a CD player, VCR, or tape player — provides a
higher voltage input level. Use an attenuating adapter
plug to decrease the level of these devices so they are
compatible with Macintosh LC and LC II input.

Apple provides an electret microphone that digitizes
voice inputs. Electret microphones require a bias
voltage. The Macintosh LC powers the electret via a
bias voltage at the second tip of the input connector.
This connection provides eight volts DC at up to 1 mA.
This bias voltage has no effect on input devices with
monophonic or stereo input plugs. However, plugging
some types of amplifiers into the sound input jack
instead of the sound output jack could damage the
amplifier.

CAUTION: The user must take care to ensure that the
connections to the rear of the computer are correct.
Incorrect connections could damage the computer or
external equipment.

The sound output circuit consists of the DFAC chip,
which filters the pulse-width-modulated (PWM) signal
and drives the internal speaker and headphone jack, and
a separate amplifier that mixes the right and left
channels before output.

The Macintosh LC and LC II each have one expansion
slot that accepts compatible expansion cards.

The expansion bus connector is a 96-pin DIN three-row
connector. The connector provides the 32-bit CPU data
and address buses, DMA control signals, other CPU
control signals, interrupt inputs, and status signals for
future expansion. Additionally, the slot outputs +5 V,
+12 V, and -12 V DC, and 4 watts of DC power. The
expansion card is installed horizontally, parallel to the
main logic board. There is sufficient clearance for
cooling air to flow between the boards.

1 .22 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Power

Supply

Power

Control

Real-Time

Clock

Macintosh LC and LC II

The power supply operates on standard line voltage and
outputs +5 V, +12 V, and -12 V DC voltages, which are
used by the logic board, the internal devices, and the
slots.

CAUTION: It is extremely important that you do not
exceed the ratings of the power supply. Exceeding the
ratings will damage the power supply and the logic board.
For maximum system ratings, see the specifications in this
section.

You cannot switch the Macintosh LC or LC II on or off
from the keyboard. You must use the on/off power
switch on the rear panel.

You can lock the rear-panel power switch in an ON
position, which allows the computer to restart as soon
as it detects AC power. If a power failure shuts off the
computer, it will start up as soon as power is
reinstated.

The Shut Down command in the Finder™ puts the
power-off function under software control. This soft-off
allows the computer to complete pending activity.

When the soft-off routine finishes, the monitor screen
displays the dialog box “You may now shut down your
Macintosh safely.” Use the rear panel power switch to
switch off power.

The ADB 68HC05 microcontroller chip incorporates the
real-time clock. The microcontroller chip contains 256
bytes of RAM that a battery powers when external
power is off. These RAM bytes are called parameter
RAM (PRAM). Parameter RAM stores the configuration
of ports, the clock setting, and other data that must be
preserved even when system power is not available.

The user accesses PRAM information through a new
pseudo device command protocol for the 68HC05. This
protocol is different from the protocols of previous
Macintosh computers. Software can use the driver
routines to access the clock and PRAM; however,
software that attempts to access these hardware devices
directly must be modified.

Mar 92

Basics / 1 .23

Interrupt/
Reset Circuit

The Macintosh LC and LC II provide a keyboard-
initiated nonmasked interrupt (NMI) and reset. To
produce a NMI, press <Command> and the power button
at the same time; to reset, press <Command>,

<Control>, and the power button at the same time.

Debugging software uses the NMI to stop an application
and change to a debugger for low-level software and
hardware testing. The NMI signal has an enable flag in
the PRAM of the 68HC05. When the 68HC05 initially
powers up, the flag resets and the keyboard cannot
generate the NMI. To use the debugging function,
debugging software must set the enable flag in the
PRAM so that the keyboard can generate the NMI.

The NMI reset is a hard reset, identical to the power-
on reset. All RAM contents are lost and the computer
behaves as if you just switched it on.

1 .24 / Basics

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Section 2 - Take-Apart

□ CONTENTS

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

2.3 Top Case

2.5 Hard Drive

2.7 Fan/Speaker Assembly (Macintosh LC Only)

2.8 Fan (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.9 Speaker (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.10 Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC Only)

2.11 Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC II Only)

2.12 Power Supply

2.14 Main Logic Board

Note: Detailed instructions for underlined steps are
elsewhere in this section.

Macintosh LC and LC

Mar 92

Take-Apart / 2.1

□ ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE PREVENTION

The Macintosh LC and LC II contain ROM and RAM
memory (which is installed on small separate boards
called SIMMs — single in-line memory modules) and
CMOS components. The CMOS components and the
SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD).

You must take preventive measures to avoid ESD
damage. When you unwrap, install, or replace modules,
observe the appropriate ESD precautions.

For complete ESD prevention information, refer to the
You Ougbta Know tab in the Apple Service Technical
Procedures.

If the proper ESD procedures are not available, then do
the following: switch off power and disconnect the
power cord. After removing the cover and before going
near the logic board, touch the metal of the power
supply case.

2.2 / Take-Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ TOP CASE

Materials Required
Remove

Replace

Medium Phillips screwdriver

1. Switch off power. Disconnect the power cord and
all cables from the rear of the computer.

2. If necessary, remove the case screw (Figure 2-1).

3. Lift the tabs at the back of the lid (Figure 2-1). Lift
the top case straight up and off the bottom case.

Figure 2-1 Removing the Top Case

1. Replace the front end of the top case on the front
end of the bottom case, and swing the lid down
toward the back of the unit. Press down on the
back of the top case until you hear it click into
place on the bottom case.

2. Replace the case screw, if present (Figure 2-1).

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart/ 2.3

□ HARD DRIVE

Materials Required

Remove

Note: If you are replacing the hard drive, you will
need a torque driver. Most hardware and automotive
supply stores carry torque drivers.

Medium Phillips screwdriver
Torque driver

1. Remove the top case .

2. Figure 2-2. Disconnect the HDA (hard disk
assembly) power cable from the HDA power
connector on the logic board. To remove this cable,
you must release the locking tab on the side of the
connector.

3. Figure 2-2. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the 50-
pin SCSI connector on the logic board.

4. Figure 2-2. Release the two plastic tabs on one side
of the hard drive, and lift the drive slightly. Repeat
on the other side of the hard drive and remove the
drive (with its carrier) from the computer.

CAUTION: DO NOT loosen or remove any of the torx
screws that secure the black cover to the drive
mechanism. Loosening or removing these screws can
cause irreparable damage to the hard drive.

5. Figure 2-3. If you are replacing the hard drive, turn
the drive over and remove the four Phillips screws
and lockwashers that secure the defective drive
mechanism to its carrier. You will need to use this
carrier when installing a new hard drive.

Note: If you are replacing the hard drive, detach
and retain the HDA power cable and the SCSI cable
from the bad drive. You will need these cables to
connect the new drive.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart / 2.5

Replace

If you are replacing a defective hard drive, begin with
step 1. If you are simply reinstalling the same drive
(which is already attached to the silver-colored
carrier), begin with step 5.

1. Figure 2-3. Using the screw hole marked B, align
the carrier on the bottom of the new drive
mechanism. Loosely fasten the carrier to the drive
with the four lockwashers and Phillips screws.

2. Figure 2-3. Using the torque driver and following
the sequence in Figure 2-3, torque the four Phillips
screws to 8.0 in-lbs.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the Phillips screws that you
removed in step 5 above and follow the installation
sequence in Figure 2-3. Failure to do so can damage the
drive.

3. Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the hard drive.

4. Connect the rectangular end of the HDA power cable
to the hard drive.

5. Figure 2-2. Position the hard drive so the metal
tabs on the carrier align with the four plastic
release tabs on the bottom case. Push the drive into
the bottom case until the drive snaps into place.

6. Figure 2-2. Connect the SCSI cable to the 50-pin
SCSI connector on the logic board.

7. Figure 2-2. Connect the square end of the power
cable to the HDA power connector on the logic
board. Be sure that the cable locks into place.

8. Replace the top case .

2.6 / Take-Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ FAN/SPEAKER ASSEMBLY (MACINTOSH LC ONLY)

Remove l. Remove the top case .

2. Release the plastic tab (Figure 2-4) on one end of
the fan/speaker assembly, and lift the assembly
slightly. Release the other plastic tab and remove
the fan/speaker assembly from the bottom case.

Figure 2-4 Removing and Installing the Fan/Speaker Assembly

Replace l. insert the two tabs on the fan end of the fan/

speaker assembly (Figure 2-4) under the logic board.
Push the assembly down until you hear it snap into
place.

2. Replace the top case .

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart/ 2.7

□ FAN (MACINTOSH LC II ONLY)

Remove l. Remove the top case .

2. Disconnect the fan cable from the fan connector
024) on the logic board (Figure 2-5).

3. Release the plastic tabs on the sides of the fan
(Figure 2-5) and lift the fan to remove it.

Fan Release

Figure 2-5 Removing and Installing the Fan

Replace l. Position the fan (logo side down) so that its cable

reaches the fan connector 024) (Figure 2-5).

IMPORTANT: You must install the fan with the logo side
down, or the fan may damage the computer.

2. Gently push down on the fan until you hear it snap
into place.

3. Connect the fan cable to the fan connector Q24) on
the logic board.

4. Replace the top case .

2.8 / Take-Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ SPEAKER (MACINTOSH LC fl ONLY)

Remove

Replace

1. Remove the top case .

2. Remove the hard drive .

3. Disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker
connector 025) on the logic board (Figure 2-6).

4. Release the plastic tabs on the sides of the speaker
(Figure 2-6) and lift the speaker to remove it.

Figure 2-6 Removing and Installing the Speaker

1. Slide the speaker under the front plastic tab that
holds the speaker in place; pull back on the bottom
tab (Figure 2-6). Push down on the speaker until it
snaps into place.

2. Thread the speaker cable through the top two
plastic brackets that hold the hard drive in place,
and connect the speaker cable to the speaker
connector Q25) on the logic board.

3. Replace the hard drive .

4. Replace the top case .

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take- Apart / 2.9

□ FLOPPY DRIVE (MACINTOSH LC ONLY)

Remove

Replace

1. Remove the top case .

2. Disconnect the floppy drive cable from the floppy drive
connector 013) on the logic board (Figure 2-7).

3. Release the plastic tabs (Figure 2-7) on one side of
the floppy drive, and lift the drive slightly. Repeat
on the other side and remove the drive.

Note: If you are replacing a bad drive, detach and keep

the floppy drive cable for use with the new drive.

Floppy Drive Cable

Floppy Drive

Figure 2-7 Removing the Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC Only)

IMPORTANT: Before you install a replacement 1.4 MB
floppy drive in a Macintosh LC, you must remove the dust
shield from the replacement drive.

1. Position the floppy drive so that the metal tabs on
the drive carrier align with the plastic release tabs
(Figure 2-7). Push the drive into the bottom case
until the drive snaps into place.

2. Connect the floppy drive cable to the drive (if
necessary) and to connector J13 (Figure 2-7) on the
logic board.

3. Replace the top case .

2.10 /Take- Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ FLOPPY DRIVE (MACINTOSH LC II ONLY)

Remove

Replace

1. Remove the top case .

2. Disconnect the floppy drive cable from the floppy drive
connector 02) on the logic board (Figure 2-8).

3. Release the two plastic tabs at the rear of the
floppy drive (Fig:ure 2-8), and lift the drive up and
out.

Note: If you are replacing a bad drive, detach and keep

the floppy drive cable for use with the new drive.

Figure 2>8 Removing the Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC II Only)

IMPORTANT: Before you install a replacement 1.4 MB
floppy drive in a Macintosh LC II, you must remove the
dust shield from the replacement drive.

1. Insert the metal locating screws on the front of the
drive carrier into the grooves on the plastic
brackets that hold the front of the drive (Figure
2-8). Push down on the back of the drive until the
drive snaps into place.

2. Connect the floppy drive cable to the drive (if
necessary) and to connector J2 (Figure 2-8) on the
logic board.

3. Replace the top case .

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart/ 2.11

□ POWER SUPPLY

(

Remove

1. Remove the tor

2. Disconnect the power supply cable from the power
supply connector (Figure 2-9) on the logic board.

3. Release the two plastic tabs (Figure 2-9) that secure
the front end of the power supply to the bottom
case, and at the same time lift the power supply up
and out of the case.

Replace

1. Slide the back end of the power supply over the
three plastic mounting tabs (Figure 2-9) at the rear
of the bottom case.

2. Push down on the power supply until it snaps into
place.

3. Connect the power supply cable to the power supply
connector (Figure 2-9) on the logic board.

Replace the the toi

2.12/Take-Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Figure 2-11 Removing the Main Logic Board

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart / 2.13

□ MAIN LOGIC BOARD

Materials Required

Remove

SIMM removal tool

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Remove the fan/speaker assembly (Macintosh LC
only).

3. Figure 2-10. Disconnect the following connectors
from the logic board:

• Power supply connector

• Internal floppy drive connector

• Fan connector (Macintosh LC II only)

• Speaker connector (Macintosh LC II only)

• 50-pin SCSI connector

• HDA power connector

• Expansion card (if installed) from the 96-pin
processor-direct slot

4. Figure 2-11. Use your thumbs to spread the two
plastic tabs that secure the logic board to the bottom
case. At the same time, use your forefingers to
slide the logic board toward the front of the case.
(Use the 96-pin expansion connector and the power
supply connector to push back the logic board.)

CAUTION: Be sure the power on/off button clears the rear
panel before you lift the logic board out of the case.

CAUTION: Because the oil from your skin can be harmful,
do not touch the "fingers" of the J28 or J29 connectors on
the Macintosh LC (Figure 2-1 1 ).

5. Gently lift the board completely out of the case.

6. Use the SIMM removal tool (see the instructions in
"SIMM Removal Tool" under the You Oughta Know
tab) to remove all DIb\M SIMMs and VRAM SIMMs
from the logic board. You must install the
customer's DRAM SIMMs and VRAM SIMMs on the
new logic board. Note the size and number of
SIMMs to ensure that the customer receives the
same DRAM and VRAM SIMM configuration that he
or she brought in.

2.14/Take-Apart

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Figure 2-12 Installing the Main Logic Board

Replace

)

1. Install the customer's DRAM SIMMs and VRAM
SIMM onto the replacement logic board.

2. Figure 2-12. Insert the logic board into the bottom
case so that the round slots in the logic board fit
over the plastic guide pins on the bottom of the
case.

3. Slide the logic board toward the rear of the case as
far as it will go. The board will click into place.

4. Figure 2-12. Connect the following connectors to
the logic board:

• Power supply connector

• Internal floppy drive connector

• Fan connector (Macintosh LC II only)

• Speaker connector (Macintosh LC II only)

• 50-pin SCSI connector

• HDA power connector

• Expansion card (if removed) from the 96-pin
processor-direct slot

5. Replace the fan/speaker assembly (Macintosh LC
only).

6. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Take-Apart/ 2.15

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Section 3 - Diagnostics

□ CONTENTS

Because the Macintosh Ilfx, Macintosh Ilsi, and
Macintosh LC computers use the same diagnostics
application {.MacTest MP), diagnostics procedures for
these products are in the Macintosh Multiple-Product
Diagnostics tab in Volume II of the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures.

Note: There are no diagnostics currently available for
the Macintosh LC 11.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Diagnostics / 3.1

(

A Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Section 4 - Troubleshooting

□ CONTENTS

4.2 Introduction

4.2 General Information

4.2 Before You Start

4.2 Error Chords

4.2 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.3 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board Configuration

4.5 Internal SCSI Hard Drive

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Startup Chord

4.6 Error Chords

4.8 Symptom Chart

4.8 Built-in Video Problems

4.9 Floppy Drive Problems

4.9 SCSI Problems

4.10 Peripheral Problems

4.11 Miscellaneous Problems

4.13 Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.14 Flowchart 1 Notes (LC or LC II)

4.l6 Flowchart 2 Notes (LC only)

4.18 Flowchart 3 Notes (LC or LC II)

4.19 Flowchart 4 Notes (LC only)

4.20 Flowchart 5 Notes (LC only)

4.22 DRAM SIMM Verification

4.22 Introduction

4.22 Verification Procedure

4.23 Battery Verification

4.23 Introduction

4.23 Verification Procedure

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.1

□ INTRODUCTION

General

Information

Before
You Start

Error Chords

How to Use
the Symptom
Chart

The following two disks test modules of the Macintosh
LC and/or Macintosh LC II:

• MacTest MP, version 1.1 or later (Macintosh LC
computer only)

• Macintosh Hard Disk Test (test hard disks on the
Macintosh LC or LC II computers)

Use this section to troubleshoot the Macintosh LC and
LC 11. If you are troubleshooting the Macintosh LC and
are unable to boot the MacTest MP disk or if the disk
is unable to detect a module failure, use this section
instead of MacTest MP. After you repair a Macintosh
LC system, run MacTest MP again to verify system
operation.

Read the subsections titled "Things to Remember,"
"Module Exchange Information," "Startup and Error
Chords," "DRAM SIMM Verification," and "Battery
Verification" before you begin troubleshooting. You
need the information in these subsections to
troubleshoot the CPU effectively.

When you switch on the Macintosh LC or LC II, the unit
executes a ROM-based self-test. If any part of the self-
test fails, a sequence of chords follows the initial
startup chord. To interpret this sequence of chords,
refer to "Startup and Error Chords."

To use the symptom chart, first find the symptom that
most nearly describes the problem; then perform the
first corrective action on the solution list. If that
corrective action does not fix the problem, go to the
next action. If you replace a module and find that the
problem remains, reinstall the original module before
you go to the next action.

If the symptoms displayed by the Macintosh LC or LC II
are not in the symptom chart, or if the system does not
have a clearly defined problem, refer to
"Troubleshooting Flowcharts."

4.2 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Note: When using the AppleColor High-Res RGB
Monitor with the Macintosh LC or LC II, the width of
the raster/image area shrinks 3/16 inch from each side
of the screen. To correct this problem, adjust the
horizontal size of the monitor (see the High-Res RGB
Monitor Technical Procedure^.

How to Use the There are five numbered flowcharts for the Macintosh

Troubleshooting LC. Only Flowcharts 1 and 3 pertain to the Macintosh

Flowcharts LC II, however. Begin with Flowchart 1 and continue

until you complete Flowchart 5. Reference notes on the
opposite page provide additional instructions or
referrals to other procedures.

Follow each flowchart from top to bottom. When you
arrive at a rectangular box containing a list of actions,
perform the actions in the sequence listed. On
completion, return to the preceding diamond box. If the

problem remains, reinstall the original module before
you go to the next action.

□ THINGS TO REMEMBER

1. When working on the CPU, follow all electrostatic
discharge (ESD) precautions. For additional
information refer to the You Oughta Know tab in
the Apple Service Technical Procedures.

2. If available, use a known-good monitor and
monitor cable to isolate the problem to the CPU,
internal drive, keyboard, or mouse.

3. Mark each known-good SIMM module on the
exchange logic board with white correction fluid or
a small sticker to prevent confusion during the
troubleshooting procedure.

4. Before you begin troubleshooting, remove the
expansion card (if installed) and disconnect any
external devices (printers, SCSI devices, and/or
ADB devices other than the keyboard and mouse).

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.3

After the CPU has passed the diagnostic tests, each
expansion card or peripheral must be installed and
tested. Install one device and test the system
before adding other devices. Repeat the install-and-
test process until all devices have been installed
and tested.

5. When troubleshooting the Macintosh LC, use a
known-good copy of the MacTest MP disk.

6. Perform the following quick checks:

• Check the power source and power connection.

• Check all cables and cable connections.

• Check the adjustment of all user controls.

• Check that no more than one system file is on
the startup device/disk.

• Check that the computer system and the system
software are compatible.

• Open the computer and verify that all circuit
boards, fuses, and chips are secure, clean, and
undamaged.

7. During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
soft chord sounds. If you do not hear the chord,
refer to "Startup and Error Chords" for additional
information.

8. To ensure that customers receive the same system
configurations they bring in, record:

• Type and number of floppy drives

• Size of SCSI drive (if present)

• Number and size of DRAM SIMMs

• Amount of video RAM

• Type and serial number of expansion card

9. Verify that Macintosh LC customers are using system
software version 6.0.7 and Finder 6.1 or later and
that Macintosh LC II customers are using system
software version 7.01 and Finder 7.0 or later. Using
earlier versions may destroy data or prevent the
CPU from booting.

4.4 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ MODULE EXCHANGE INFORMATION

Logic Board
Configuration

Internai SCSI
Hard Drive

Apple ships the Macintosh LC logic board service
exchange module without DRAM SIMMs and without
the video RAM (VRAM) SIMM. To make sure that
customers always receive the same logic board
configurations they brought in, be sure to record the
amount of memory installed and the size of the DRAM
SIMMs, and record the amount of VRAM on the VRAM
SIMM if installed.

All Macintosh LC and LC II logic boards ship with ROM
memory. This memory is soldered onto the board at the
locations marked UB2/LL, UC2/ML, UD2/MH, and
UE2/HH (between the 96-pin expansion connector and
the SIMM slots). When you return a defective logic
board, return it with the ROM, but without the DRAM
and VRAM SIMMs.

Internal SCSI hard drive service modules do not include
SCSI cables or SCSI power cables. These cables are
sold as separate replacement parts.

You must detach the SCSI cable and the SCSI power
cable from the customer’s defective drive and install
them on the replacement drive. Be sure to keep these
cables with the customer's system.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.5

□ STARTUP AND ERROR CHORDS

introduction

Startup Chord

Error Chords

DRAM SIMM Failure

when the computer is switched on, the ROM executes a
self-test. If any part of the self-test fails, a special
sequence of chords will sound, as explained below.

If you are unable to interpret the chords using the
following explanation, see "Macintosh LC Flowcharts"
and ignore the question about the startup chord on
Flowchart 1.

During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
chord is the only sound emitted; then a disk icon
appears on the screen. The disk icon will have a
flashing question mark (if a startup disk is not found)
or a smiling face (if a startup disk is found).

If a startup chord and additional chords sound, a failure
occurred during the initial hardware self-tests.

Macintosh LC : After the startup chord you will hear a
short, harsh error chord, followed closely by the test
monitor chord sequence (four chords, from low to high).
Following these chords, a blank gray screen usually
appears (see DRAM SIMM Failure).

Macintosh LC II : After the startup chord you will hear
a multi-tone error chord. Depending upon the type of
failure, this chord will be either an eight-tone chord
(see DRAM SIMM Failure) or a four-tone chord (see
Hardware Failure).

To correct a DRAM SIMM failure:

1. Exchange the DRAM SIMMs. (Refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

2. If DRAM SIMM exchanges do not work, exchange
the logic board. (Install the customer's DRAM
SIMMs on the exchange board.)

3. If the system still does not work, you will need to
perform the DRAM SIMM verification with the
exchange logic board.

4.6 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Hardware Failure

To correct a hardware failure:

1. Disconnect the SCSI hard drive power and cable
connectors, and reboot the system. If the startup
sequence is normal, run Macintosh Hard Disk Test
and replace the hard drive if necessary.

2. If the error chord(s) still sound at system startup,
disconnect the floppy drive cable connector and
reboot the system. If the startup sequence is
normal, replace the floppy drive.

3. If you still hear the error chord(s) at system startup,
exchange the logic board. (Install the customer's
DRAM and VRAM SIMMs on the exchange logic
board.)

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.7

□ SYMPTOM CHART

Built-in Video Problems

• Screen is dark, but
audio and at least one
drive operate, fan runs,
LED is lit, and boot
tone is normal

• Screen dark, no audio,
no drive, but fan is
running and LED
is lit

• Partial or whole
screen is bright and
audio is present, but
no video information
is visible

• Screen is completely
dark, fan is not
running, and LED is
not lit

• Vertical or horizontal
lines or snow appear
on screen, or screen is
completely dark, and
boot tone is normal

Solutions

1. Adjust brightness on monitor.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace video cable.

4. Replace existing video RAM SIMM, or if none is
present, install a video RAM SIMM.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

6. Replace power supply.

1. Remove expansion cards.

2. Remove all external peripherals.

3. Replace DRAM SIMMs (refer to "DRAM SIMM
Verification" in this section).

4. Replace logic board.

5. Replace power supply.

1. Replace video cable.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Make sure a video RAM SIMM is installed.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Plug the monitor directly into the wall socket, and
verify that the monitor has power.

2. Remove expansion card.

3. Remove all external peripherals.

4. Replace power supply.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace video cable.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace existing video RAM SIMM, or if none is
present, install a video RAM SIMM.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

5. Replace power supply.

Note: If replacing the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate Apple Service Technical
Procedures to obtain monitor replacement information.

4.8 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Floppy Drive Problems

• Audio and video
present, but
floppy drive
does not operate

• Disk ejects; display
shows Mac icon
with blinking "X"

• Disk will not eject

• Drive attempts to
eject disk, but
doesn’t

SCSI Problems

• Internal hard drive
is continuously active

• Internal hard drive
will not operate

Macintosh LC and LC II

Solutions

1. Replace floppy drive cable.

2. Replace floppy drive.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace disk with known-good disk.

2. Replace floppy drive cable.

3. Replace floppy drive.

4. Replace mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Switch off system and hold mouse button down
while switching on.

2. Try ejecting disk manually with paper clip.

3. Replace floppy drive cable.

4. Replace floppy drive.

1. Try pushing disk completely in.

2. Try ejecting disk manually with paper clip.

3. Check that front lid of case is completely on.

4. Replace floppy drive.

Solutions

1. Make sure system software is version 6.0.7 (or
later) for Macintosh LC computer or version 7.01 (or
later) for Macintosh LC II computer.

2. Replace internal SCSI cable.

3. Replace internal hard drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace internal SCSI cable.

2. Replace internal HDA power cable.

3. Replace internal hard drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.9

Peripheral Problems

• Peripheral works with
internal or external
SCSI device but will
not work with both

• Cursor does not move

• Cursor moves, but
clicking the mouse
button has no effect

• Cannot doubie-click
to open an application,
disk, or server

• No response to any
key on the keyboard

Solutions

1. Verify that SCSI select-level switch on external
device is set to a different priority from that of
internal device.

2. Verify that both ends of SCSI chain are terminated.

3. Replace terminator on the external device.

4. Verify that terminator is installed on the internal
SCSI drive.

5. Replace SCSI device select cable.

1. Reboot system.

2. Check mouse connection.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect the
mouse to the rear ADB port instead and disconnect
the keyboard. If mouse works, replace keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in the ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace mouse.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Remove extra system files on the hard disk.

2. Hold down <Option> <Command> <R> keys
at power on. Release keys after second startup
chord sounds. Reset mouse controls.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to
the rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in the ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Make sure system software is version 6.0.7 (or
later) for Macintosh LC computer or version 7.01 (or
later) for Macintosh LC II computer.

2. Check keyboard connection to ADB port.

3. Replace keyboard cable.

4. Replace keyboard.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

4.10 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

• Known-good
I mage Writer or
ImageWriter II
will not print

• Known -good
LaserWriter
will not print

Miscellaneous Problems

• System shuts down
intermittently

• System intermittently
crashes or locks up

1. Make sure Chooser and Control Panel are set
correctly.

2. Make sure system software is version 6.0.7 (or
later) for Macintosh LC computer or version 7.01 (or
later) for Macintosh LC II computer.

3. Check printer DIP switches.

4. Replace printer interface cable.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Make sure Chooser and Control Panel are set
correctly.

2. Make sure system software is version 6.0.7 (or
later) for Macintosh LC computer or version 7.01 (or
later) for Macintosh LC II computer.

3. Refer to the Networks tab in the Apple Service
Technical Procedures for more information.

Solutions

1. Make sure air vents on top and sides of top cover
are unobstructed. Thermal protection circuitry may
shut down the system. After 30 to 40 minutes,
system should be OK.

2. Replace power cable.

3. Replace power supply.

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification"

in this section).

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Make sure system software is version 6.0.7 (or
later) for Macintosh LC computer, or version 7.01
(or later) for Macintosh LC II.

2. Make sure to use known-good application software.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification"

in this section).

5. Replace power supply.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.11

• System intermittently
doesn't power on

• Clicking, chirping,
or thumping sound

• No sound from
speaker

• Clock not
running

• System seems to
boot; then message
"Finder is old version"
displays

• Monitor raster width
too narrow

• System does not
recognize more than
10 MB of RAM

4.12 / Troubleshooting

1. Check cables.

2. Plug monitor directly into wall socket and verify
that monitor has power.

3. Replace power cord.

4. Replace power supply.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace power supply.

2. Disconnect hard drive; replace if noise disappears.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Verify that volume setting in Control Panel is set to
1 or above.

2. Reseat speaker connector (Macintosh LC II only).

3. Replace speaker.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Replace battery (see "Battery Verification" in this
section).

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

1. Clear parameter RAM by holding down <Command>
<Option> <r> keys and restarting the system.
Continue holding down these keys. You will hear
the normal startup chords and about two seconds
later you will hear another chord. This second
chord means the parameter RAM has been cleared.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer’s SIMMs.

- If connected monitor is AppleColor High-Res RGB
(revision A only), perform width adjustments for the
monitor (see High -Res RGB Monitor Technical
Procedures) .

- Refer to "Logic Board RAM Identification and

Upgrades" for more information. Note that although
you can install 12 MB of RAM in a Macintosh LC II,
10 MB is the maximum amount of RAM the system
recognizes.

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS

Introduction

Macintosh LC and LC II

Flowcharts 1 through 5 on the following pages will
help you troubleshoot the Macintosh LC; only
Flowcharts 1 and 3 apply to the Macintosh LC II.
Reference notes on the opposite page provide
additional instructions or referrals to other procedures.

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.13

Flowchart 1

Notes

(LCor LCII)

During a normal startup sequence, you hear a
medium-pitched soft chord. If you do not hear this
startup chord, refer to "Startup and Error Chords"
for additional information. If you cannot interpret
the chords, continue with the flowchart.

If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate monitor technical
procedures to isolate the monitor problem to the
module level.

Refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification" for complete
instructions on verifying and troubleshooting the
SIMMs.

If known-good SIMMs do not correct the problem,
install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

4.14 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

C Flowchart 1}

Switch on the system
without installing a disk.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.15

Flowchart 2

Notes

(LCOnly)

Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

Refer to the SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

4.16 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Flowchart 3
Notes

(LC or LC II)

1. If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate monitor technical
procedures to isolate the monitor problem to the
module level.

2. Refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification" for complete
instructions on verifying and troubleshooting the
SIMMs.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

4.18 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Flowchart 4
Notes
(LC Only)

1. Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

2. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.19

Flowchart 5

Notes

(LCOnly)

Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Customers must always get back the same system
configurations they bring in. Refer to "Module
Exchange Information" in this section.

4.20 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.21

□ DRAM SIMM VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Procedure

The service exchange logic board ships without DRAM
SIMMs.

The DRAM SIMMs on the customer's logic board may be
defective. To verify a defective SIMM, remove all the
customer's DRAM SIMMs and install known-good
SIMMs. Mark each known-good DRAM SIMM with a
dot of white correction fluid or a small sticker that
will not come off during testing.

Two known-good SIMMs the same size as those on the
customer's logic board
SIMM removal tool

1. Remove the top case .

CAUTION: Before removing the SIMMs, be sure to use
proper BSD procedures to prevent damage to the logic
board. If an BSD pad is not available, touch bare metal
on the power supply before proceeding.

2. Remove the customer's DRAM SIMMs by using the
SIMM removal tool. See the You Oughta Know tab
for SIMM tool use.

3. Install two known-good DRAM SIMMs.

Note: Use only DRAM SIMMs with 100 ns (or
faster) fast-page-mode DRAM chips.

4. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the system works properly; you
can proceed to test the customer's DRAM SIMMs.

5. Switch the system off, remove one of the known-
good SIMMs, and install one of the customer's
SIMMs.

6. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the customer's DRAM SIMM is
good.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to test the other DRAM SIMMs.
Be sure to set defective SIMMs where you will not
mix them with good ones.

4.22 / Troubleshooting

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ BATTERY VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Procedure

The Macintosh LC and LC II logic boards each contain
one lithium thionyl chloride battery. This battery
maintains the clock and PRAM while the unit is
switched off.

WARNING: Lithium batteries, the type in the Macintosh
LC and LC II, have a potential for explosion if improperly
handled. Follow the verification procedure exactly.

Voltmeter

1. Be sure power is off. Remove the top case .

2. Set the voltmeter range to measure 10 volts DC.

3. Touch and hold the positive probe of the voltmeter
to the positive side of the battery (Figure 4-1).

Figure 4-1 Verifying Battery Voltage

4. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the battery.

5. The reading for a good battery should be above 3.0
volts. If the reading falls below 3.0 volts, replace
the battery. Refer to Section 5, Additional
Procedures, for replacement instructions.

Macintosh LC and LC il

Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.23

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Section 5 - Additional Procedures

□ CONTENTS

5.2 Battery Replacement

5.2 Introduction

5.5 Materials Required

5.5 Remove

5.5 Replace

5.7 Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.7 Introduction

5.7 Identification

5.7 Upgrades

5.8 Video RAM (VRAM) Upgrade

5.8 Introduction

5.8 Upgrades

5.9 Macintosh LC II Upgrade

5.9 Introduction

5.9 Upgrade Procedure

Note: Instructions for underlined steps are in Section 2,
Take-Apart.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.1

□ BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Introduction Lithium thionyl chloride batteries, the type in the

Macintosh LC and LC II, have a potential for explosion
or overheating if improperly handled. Take the
following precautions when storing, handling, or
disposing of lithium batteries:

• Store lithium batteries in a designated, well-marked
area with limited access.

• Apple's lithium batteries are sealed in individual
air-tight wrappers. Upon receipt, inspect the
wrappers for integrity. Store batteries in the same
packaging in which they were received or in a
similar closed, heavy plastic bag.

• Lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not
attempt to recharge the battery. Attempts at
recharging may cause the battery to overheat or
explode.

• Do not allow the leads or terminals to short-circuit.
A short-circuited battery may overheat or explode.

• Replace the battery with the correct Apple
replacement battery only. Using an incorrect
battery or a non-Apple battery may cause the battery
to overheat or explode.

• When installing the battery, verify the correct
polarity. The polarity markings on the battery must
match those on the battery holder or circuit board.
Failure to observe correct polarity may cause the
battery to overheat or explode.

• If the battery holder has a cover, be sure to replace
the cover.

• If the dead battery has leads, remove them before
disposing of the battery.

• Do not dispose of the battery in a fire or
incinerator — the battery may explode. Instead,
follow the disposal instructions on the next page.

5.2 / Additional Procedures

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

• In addition to its explosive potential, lithium is
water-reactive and must be disposed of as a
hazardous waste, as follows:

Place the dead battery into the air-tight wrapper
and packaging from which you took the replacement
battery. Mark the battery package DEAD and return
it to Apple for proper disposal Exception : If the
battery is physically damaged (for example, it is
leaking), do not return it to Apple; dispose of the
battery locally according to your local ordinances.

The long-life lithium battery in the Macintosh LC and
LC II should serve many years. Refer to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, to check the condition of the battery.

If the battery fails, replace it according to the
following procedure.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.3

(

5.4 / Additional Procedures

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

Grounded workbench and wriststrap
Small, flat-blade screwdriver

CAUTION: Use BSD precautions before removing or
replacing the battery. Failure to do so may result in logic
board failure.

1 . Remove the top cover .

2. Figure 5-lA. Locate the battery holder and battery
at the center of the logic board.

3. Figure 5-lA. On one side of the battery holder,
insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the top of
the holder and gently push the screwdriver down
until the side tab pushes out. The battery holder
cover will come loose; do the same on the other end
and remove the cover from the holder.

4. Figure 5-lB. Grasp the battery between your thumb
and forefinger and lift the battery from the holder.

1. Figure 5-lB. Insert the new battery so the positive
side of the battery is in the positive-marked side of
the holder.

CAUTION: Be sure the positive side of the battery is in the
correct location (see Figure 5-1). An incorrectly placed
battery can damage the logic board.

2. Replace the holder cover.

3. Replace the top cover .

4. Use the Control Panel to set the clock.

Note: On early models of the Macintosh LC, replacing
the battery may corrupt the system parameter RAM. To
reset the PRAM on these systems, press the red button
on the logic board.

Macintosh LC and LC II

Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.5

□ LOGIC BOARD RAM IDENTIFICATION AND UPGRADES

introduction The Macintosh LC contains 2 MB and the Macintosh

LC II 4 MB of DRAM soldered on the logic board in
bank A (Figure 5-2). You can install additional RAM in
packages known as single in-line memory modules
(SIMMs). A SIMM is a small circuit board with DRAM
chips that may be surface-mounted or mounted through
the board. Each SIMM board has contacts on one edge
that fit into sockets on the logic board. The Macintosh
LC and LC II each have two SIMM sockets.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

The Macintosh LC and LC n do not support 256K
SIMMs; both units require 100 ns (or faster) SIMMs.

You can mix SIMMs of different speeds, as long as
neither of the SIMMs is slower than 100 ns. Slower
SIMMs (120 ns, etc.) will cause serious timing
problems. The RAM speed is usually indicated by the -
XX number after the manufacturer's part number. For
example, -8 indicates 80 ns SIMMs.

Note: when you remove SIMMs from the logic board,
use the SIMM removal tool. Instructions for using this
tool are under the You Oughta Know tab.

The following chart summarizes the memory
configurations that the Macintosh LC and LC II support:

Identification

Upgrades

Lcn

Bank A

SIMM Sockets

Total RAM

✓

2 MB soldered RAM

Empty

2 MB

✓

2 MB soldered RAM

Two 1 MB SIMMs

4 MB

2 MB soldered RAM

Two 2 MB SIMMs

6 MB

2 MB soldered RAM

Two 4 MB SIMMs

10 MB

4 MB soldered RAM

Empty

4 MB

4 MB soldered RAM

Two 1 MB SIMMs

6 MB

4 MB soldered RAM

Two 2 MB SIMMs

8 MB

✓

4 MB soldered RAM

Two 4 MB SIMMs

10 MB*

*The maximum amount of DRAM that the Macintosh- LC II can
utilize is 10 MB.

CAUTION: Other configurations, such as a single SIMM
or a pair of different-size SIMMs, will not function correctly.

Macintosh LC and LC 11

Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.7

□ VIDEO RAM (VRAM) UPGRADE

Introduction Figure 5-3. The Macintosh LC and LC II computers are

available in 256K or 512K VRAM (video RAM)
configurations. Customers with 256K of VRAM can
upgrade their computers to 512K of VRAM (see the
chart below). Perform this upgrade by swapping VRAM
SIMM boards in the 68-pin SIMM socket on the logic
board.

Monitor

Display

VRAM

Depth

Shades

Colors

12-Inch Monochrome

640x480

256k

4 bits/pixel

512K

8 bits/oixel

256

Hi-Res Monochrome

640x480

256k

4 bits/pixel

512K

8 bits/pixel

256

Hi-Res RGB

640x480

256k

4 bits/pixel

1 6

512K

8 bits/pixel

256

12-Inch RGB

512x384

256k

8 bits/pixel

256

512K

16 bits/pixel

32,768

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

Upgrades Note: Use the SIMM removal tool to remove VRAM

SIMMs from the logic board. Instructions for using this
tool are in the You Oughta Know tab.

VRAM

SIMM

Board

Figure 5-3 Location of VRAM SIMM

5.8 / Additional Procedures

Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ MACINTOSH LC II UPGRADE

Introduction

Upgrade Procedure

Use a Macintosh LC II upgrade kit to upgrade a Macintosh
LC to a Macintosh LC 11. The upgrade kit includes the
following items:

• Macintosh LC II logic board

• Macintosh LC II top case

To upgrade a Macintosh LC, remove the LC fan/speaker
assembly and logic board. Install the LC II logic board,
and replace the fan/speaker assembly. Replace the
Macintosh LC top case with the LC II top case.

Refer to Section 2, Take- Apart, for instructions on how
to replace the main logic board and fan/speaker
assembly.

CAUTION: Take care that the connections to the sound-
out and sound input ports are correct Inserting
equipment into the wrong port could damage the
computer or equipment

Macintosh LC and LC

Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.9

(

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh LC and LC II

Illustrated Parts List

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 Macintosh LC and LC II - System Exploded View
(Figure 1)

Note: The figures and lists in this section include all
piece parts available from Apple for the Macintosh LC
and LC II computers, along with their part numbers.
These are the only parts available from Apple. Refer to
your Apple Service Programs manual for prices.

Macintosh LC and LC II

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1

Figure 1 Macintosh LC and LC II - System Exploded View

IPL.2 / Illustrated Parts List

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh LC and LC II

□ MACINTOSH LC and LC II - SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 1 )

Hem

Part No.

Descriotion

602-0164

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-inch, half-height

(replaced by 602-0282 or 602-0308)

602-0308

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-inch, 1 -inch-height,

without carrier (also used for 19 mm floppy drive)

630-0505

Top Case (Macintosh LC)

630-0507

Top Case (Macintosh LC or LC II)

805-1527

Disk Drive Slot Cover Shield (Macintosh LC)

815-1164

Disk Drive Slot Cover (Macintosh LC)

699-5071

Microphone Assembly

590-0524

Cable, Internal Floppy Drive

805-5111

Carrier, Internal Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC)

805-0961

Carrier, Internal Floppy Drive (Macintosh LC II)

661-0474

1.4 MB Mechanism, Apple SuperDrive

844-0018

Screw, SuperDrive Carrier to SuperDrive

630-0500

Bottom Case (Macintosh LC)

630-0501

Bottom Case (Macintosh LC II)

630-5058

Speaker/Fan Assembly (Macintosh LC)

609-0003

Speaker (Macintosh LC II)

600-0193

Fan (Macintosh LC II)

865-0066

Platinum Foot

V 14

66I-O614

HDA, Internal 3.5-inch SCSI, 1 -inch-height, 40 MB

/ 15

444-6104

Screw, 6-32 x .250 (HDA carrier to HDA)

805-0980

Carrier, HDA, Internal 3.5-inch SCSI

590-0303

Cable, Internal HDA Power

590-0228

Cable, Internal HDA

805-0137

Rear Case Access Cover Shield

815-1154

Rear Case Access Cover

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads)

661-0593

Logic Board, 2 MB RAM (Macintosh LC)

661-0729

Logic Board, 4 MB RAM (Macintosh LC II)

661-0609

VRAM SIMM, 256k, 100 ns

661-0649

VRAM SIMM, 512K, 100 ns

661-0520

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0643

DRAM SIMM, 2 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0719

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0594

Power Supply

590-0380

Cable, AC Power, 110 V (smoke)

430-1031

Screw, Cover (Macintosh LC)

Macintosh LC and LC II

rev. Mar 92 Illustrated Parts List / IPL.3

(

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llsi

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 - 1.2

Basics 1.2

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6
1.6
1.8
1.11

1.13

1.13
1.15
1.19
1.23

1.23

1.24

1.25

Product Description
Features

Macintosh Ilsi Configurations
Connector Identification
Back Panel
Internal Connectors
Module Identification
Macintosh Ilsi System Features
Macintosh Ilsi Logic Board
Apple FDHD/SuperDrive
Specifications
Theory of Operation
Introduction
System Startup
Logic Board
Input/Output Interface
Real-Time Clock
Power Control
Power Supply
Fuses

Internal Floppy Disk Drives
Internal Hard Disk SCSI
Expansion Slot

Section 2 - 2.2

Take-Apart 2.3

2.5

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

2.13

2.14
2.17

Electrostatic Discharge Prevention
Top Cover

Adapter Card and 030 Direct Slot Card
Adapter Card, Bracket, and NuBus Card
Fan

Power Supply
Hard Disk Drive
Floppy Disk Drive
Main Logic Board
Speaker

Macintosh Ilsi

rev. Jan 91

Contents / i

Section 3 -
Diagnostics

Section 4 -
Troubleshooting

Section 5 ~

Additional Procedures

Refer to the MacTest MP section under Xho-Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Apple Service Technical Procedures.

4.2 Introduction

4.2 General Information

4.2 Before You Start

4.2 Error Chords

4.2 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.3 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.4 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board Configuration

4.5 Internal Hard Disk SCSI

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Startup Chord

4.6 Error Chords

4.7 Symptom Chart

4.7 Built-in Video Problems

4.8 Floppy Drive Problems

4.8 SCSI Problems

4.9 Peripheral Problems

4.10 Miscellaneous Problems

4.12 Macintosh Ilsi Flowcharts
4.12 Flowchart 1 Notes

4.14 Flowchart 2 Notes

4.16 Flowchart 3 Notes

4.17 Flowchart 4 Notes

4.18 Flowchart 5 Notes

4.20 RAM SIMM Verification

4.20 Introduction

4.20 Verification

4.22 Battery Verification

5.2 Battery Replacement

5.2 Introduction

5.3 Materials Required

5.6 Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.6 Introduction

5.6 Identification

5.6 Upgrades

ii / Contents

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh Ilsi

Illustrated IPL.3 Macintosh Ilsi - System Exploded View

Parts List (Figure 1)

IPL.5 Adapter Cards (Figure 2)

©Apple Computer, Inc., 1990 and 1991. No portion of this document may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

FDHD, Apple Desktop Bus, SuperDrive, AppleColor, QuickDraw, MacTest MP, and Finder are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Macintosh, AAJX, AppleTalk, Apple, and the Apple logo are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.

UNIX® is a registered trademark of AT&T Information Systems.

NuBus™ is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

MS-DOS® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Macintosh Ilsi

rev. Jan 91

Contents /

4 Apple Technical Procedures

□ CONTENTS

Macintosh llsi

Section 1 - Basics

1.2 Product Description

1.2 Features

1.2 Macintosh llsi Configurations

1.3 Connector Identification

1.3 Back Panel

1.4 Internal Connectors

1.5 Module Identification

1.6 Macintosh llsi System Features

1.6 Macintosh llsi Logic Board

1.8 Apple FDHD/SuperDrive

1.11 Specifications

1.13 Theory of Operation

1.13 Introduction

1.13 System Startup

1.15 Logic Board

1.19 Input/Output Interface

1.23 Real-Time Clock

1.23 Power Control

1.24 Power Supply

1.25 Fuses

1.25 Internal Floppy Disk Drives

1.25 Internal Hard Disk SCSI

1.25 Expansion Slot

Oct 90

Basics / 1.1

□ PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Features

Macintosh llsi
Configurations

Enhancements

The Macintosh® Ilsi is a high-performance, open-
architecture Macintosh computer with the following
features:

• 68030 microprocessor

• Runs at 20 MHz

• Built-in video support (up to eight-bit)

• 512K of ROM

• 2 MB RAM, upgradeable to 17 MB

• Sound input and output capabilities

• A unique expansion slot that can be configured as
either a NuBus™ slot or an 030 Direct Slot

• An optional floating-point math coprocessor

• A locking power switch

The Macintosh Ilsi comes in two configurations:

• 2 MB of RAM, one Apple® FDHD™/SuperDrive™,
and one 40 MB hard drive

• 5 MB of RAM, one Apple FDHD/SuperDrive, and one
80 MB hard drive

The following enhancements can be added:

• Up to six external SCSI drives and either the BOOK,
3.5-inch disk drive or the 1.4 MB FDHD/SuperDrive
(The Macintosh Ilsi does not support 400K drives
and requires the HD20 driver to support the HD20.)

• Apple® low-profile, 3.5-inch internal SCSI hard disk
drive with 40 or 80 MB

1 .2 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

□ CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION

Back

Panel

The back panel of the Macintosh Ilsi has the
following built-in ports and connectors (see Figure 1-1).

• AC power connector

• Switched (courtesy) monitor connector

• Expansion slot for either a NuBus card or an 030
Direct Slot card

• Apple Desktop Bus™

• External disk drive port

• Video port

• SCSI port

• Serial port 1

• Serial port 2

• Stereo sound-out port

• Sound input port

• Locking power switch

• Security lock

AC Power Monitor

Locking Stereo

Power Sound-Out
Switch Port

Figure 1-1 Back Panel

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .3

Internal

Connectors

The Macintosh Ilsi logic board has the following
connectors and jumpers (see Figure 1-2):

(

• Expansion slot connector

• ROM SIMM connector

• Four RAM SIMM connectors

• Battery

• Fan connector

• Power supply connector for the logic board

• ROM jumper

• Internal disk drive connector

• Internal SCSI connector

• Speaker/LED connector

• Power connector for internal SCSI hard drive

Expansion ROM RAM

Slot SIMM SIMM Fan

Connector Connector Connectors Battery Connector

(

SCSI Speaker/LED Internal Internal ROM Power

Power Connector SCSI Disk Drive Jumper Supply

Connector (Bottom Connector Connector Connector

Side)

Figure 1-2 Logic Board

1 .4 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

□ MODULE IDENTIFICATION

Figure 1-3 shows the major modules of the Macintosh
Ilsi.

Figure 1-3 Modules

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .5

□ MACINTOSH llsi SYSTEM FEATURES

Macintosh llsi
Logic Board

The Macintosh llsi includes the following components:

• Motorola 68030 microprocessor running at 20 MHz

• 512K of ROM

• RBV (RAM-based video chip)

• MDU (memory decode unit)

• An optional adapter card for installing a NuBus card
or an 030 Direct Slot card

At the heart of the Macintosh llsi is the Motorola
68030 microprocessor (Figure 1-4). The 68030 is a true
32-bit microprocessor that is fully compatible with
earlier l6- and 24-bit Macintosh microprocessors. This
high-performance microprocessor runs at 20 MHz and is
designed to handle paged memory management, thereby
eliminating the HMMU (or PMMU). With this increased
speed, and by taking advantage of the 68030 burst
access capability (which enables the CPU to read groups
of instructions or data in fewer clock cycles than in
normal access mode), the Macintosh llsi is a very high
performance system.

The ROM on the Macintosh llsi logic board includes
code that supports the built-in video, parity, virtual
memory (used on A/UX® systems), and 32-bit
QuickDraw™. The code supports future upgrades to the
Macintosh operating system.

The M acintosh llsi has two possible locations for the
ROM — two ROM chips that are soldered to the logic
board or a ROM SIMM in a connector on the logic board
(Figure 1-4). If a ROM jumper is not installed, the
computer uses the ROM on the two soldered chips; if a
ROM jumper is installed, the computer uses the ROM on
the ROM SIMM. (However, if a ROM jumper is
installed and no ROM SIMM is present, the computer
defaults back to the ROM on the two chips.)

Having the RBV (RAM-based video) chip on the logic
board enables the Macintosh llsi to drive a 640 x 480
screen at up to 8 bits/pixel and a 640 x 870 screen at
up to 4 bits/pixel without the need for a video card.

The chip uses a section of the RAM as a screen frame
and retrieves the video data, which is then converted
for display by a video DAC (digital-to-analog converter)
and sent out through the DB-15 video port.

1 .6 / Basics

rev. Feb 91

Macintosh llsi

The MDU (memory decode unit) decodes device
selection for the physical address map, and addresses
both banks of RAM memory. This chip allows larger
amounts of memory to be installed in bank B.

The SWIM chip enables the Apple FDHD drive to read
and write GCR (group-coded recording) and MFM
(modified frequency modulation) data formats.

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .7

Apple FDHD/
SuperDrive

Identification

The Apple FDHD/SuperDrive is a high-density (1.4 MB),
3.5-inch disk drive. In addition to high-capacity data
storage, the Apple FDHD/SuperDrive provides data
exchangeability between Apple (GCR data format) and
MS-DOS (MFM data format) systems. The Apple
FDHD/SuperDrive is also fully backward-compatible
with the current 800K disk format.

The Apple FDHD/SuperDrive is the only internal drive
supported by the Macintosh Ilsi. If you suspect that an
BOOK drive has been installed internally, you can tell
by removing the top lid and locating the microswitches
(Figure 1-5) at the front of the drive. The Apple
FDHD/SuperDrive has three microswitches; the 800K
drive has only two microswitches.

Figure 1-5 Floppy Drive Identification

You can also identify an Apple FDHD/SuperDrive by
removing it from the Macintosh Ilsi and checking the
manufacturer's label (Figure 1-6) on the bottom of the
drive: all high-density drives have the note 2MB on
the label.

1 .8 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

High-Density

Figure 1-6 FDHD/SuperDrive Label

The Apple FDHD/SuperDrive can read, write, and
format 800K media data disks. However, special high-
density, 3.5-inch disks that take full advantage of the
increased capacity of the Apple FDHD/SuperDrive are
also available.

CAUTION: High-density media are more iikely to have
problems than low-density media. To avoid media -
related problems, use only known-good media or high-
density media bearing the Apple label.

As shown in the drive-and-media compatibility matrix
(Figure 1-7), 800K drives can read, write, and format
single- and double-sided media. However, Apple does
not recommend using high-density media in 800K disk
drives. Data saved to high-density media using 800K
drives is unreliable and could be lost later. The Apple
FDHD/SuperDrive can read, write, and format single-
sided, double-sided, and high-density media. In
addition, Apple FDHD/SuperDrives can read, write, and
format 720K and 1.4 MB double-sided MFM-format
media.

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .9

DRIVE

MEDIA

MEDIA FORMAT [

400K

(GCR)

800K

(GCR)

720K

(MFM)

1.4 MB
(MFM)

800K

Single-Sided

Fl/W/F

800K

Double-Sided

R/W/F

800K

High-Density

FDHD

Single-Sided

R/W/F

FDHD

Double-Sided

R/W/F

FFW/F

FDHD

High-Density

RAV/F

NR = Not Recommended
R = Read
W = Write
F = Format
X = Not Allowed

Figure 1-7 Drive/Media Compatibility Matrix

Note: To help understand drive and media format
compatibility, think in terms of the drive/media of
lowest capacity. For example, if your system has both
an external 800K drive and an Apple FDHD/SuperDrive,
to ensure media format compatibility between the two
drives you must use 800K media (the drive and media of
lowest capacity).

1.10/ Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

□ SPECIFICATIONS
Processor

Clock Frequency
Addressing

Coprocessor

Memory

Slot Expansion

Sound

Disk Drives

MC68030 processor: 32-bit architecture with 256K data
and instructional caches supporting burst reads

20 MHz

32-bit internal registers

32-bit address bus

Supports paged memory management

20 MHz MC68882 floating-point unit (FPU) included on
the optional adapter card

512K on a ROM SIMM
2 MB RAM, expandable to 17 MB
256 bytes of parameter memory

One slot for either a NuBus or an 030 Direct Slot card

Power available (15 watts maximum)

+5 V 2.000 Amp

+12 V .175 Amp

-12 V .150 Amp

Apple Sound Chip (ASC), including:

• Four-voice wave table synthesis

• Stereo sampling generator capable of driving stereo
mini phone jack headphones or stereo equipment

• Sound input capability

Internal SCSI hard disk

Internal Apple 1.4 MB, FDHD/SuperDrive

Up to six external SCSI drives

One external floppy drive (800K drive or

FDHD/SuperDrive; does not support 400K drive)

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .11

SCSI

Serial Ports

Video Dispiay

Keyboard

Mouse

input Power

System
Output Power

Clock/Calendar
Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Reiative Humidity

Aititude

One external SCSI port (DB-25)

Two RS-422/RS-232/AppleTalk® serial ports
(mini DIN-8)

Built-in video support with external video port to

support Macintosh 12-Inch RGB Display, Apple High-
Resolution Monochrome Monitor, AppleColor™
High-Resolution RGB Monitor, Macintosh Portrait
Display, and Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome Display

Apple Keyboard, Apple Keyboard II, or Apple Extended
Keyboard connected through Apple Desktop Bus
ports (Mini DIN-4)

Apple Desktop Bus mouse (Mini DIN-4)

100 to 240 volts AC RMS automatically configured
50-60 Hz single phase

130 watts maximum, not including monitor convenience
power connector load

Output receptacle: 100-240 volts AC, RMS (determined
by actual input voltage)

DC power: 47 watts maximum

CMOS custom chip with long-life lithium battery

10 ° C to 40 ° C
50° F to 104° F

-40° C to 47° C
-40° F to 116.6° F

5% to 95% (noncondensing)

0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)

1.12/ Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

□ THEORY OF OPERATION

Introduction

System

Startup

Macintosh llsi

The Macintosh Ilsi computer is made up of three basic
modules: the logic board, the power supply, and the
disk drives. The computer can have one internal floppy
disk drive, one internal SCSI hard disk drive, up to six
external SCSI devices (drives, scanners, etc.), and one
external floppy disk drive.

The information here will give you an understanding of
how the Macintosh Ilsi works. This understanding, in
turn, will assist you in performing logical
troubleshooting on this system.

Figure 1-8 shows a block diagram of the Macintosh Ilsi.

When the computer is turned on, the system begins a
carefully synchronized sequence of events. The
software determines the memory size and compiles a
table describing the current memory configuration. The
memory management unit (MMU) is then programmed,
based on this table, to provide contiguous logical
memory from the potentially noncontiguous physical
segments in banks A and B. The 24/32-bit memory map
allows existing Macintosh software to use a 24-bit
address mode; new software can use the full 32-bit
address space. The mapping is implemented simply and
directly.

At this point the disk startup process begins. The
system looks for a readable disk in the available disk
drives in the following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive

2. External floppy disk drive

3. Setup device set in the control panel

4. SCSI devices in declining order of device ID (from
6 to 0)

Note: If the battery is removed or the contents of the
parameter RAM are destroyed, the setup device defaults
to the device with ID=0.

The system finds a readable disk, reads the disk, and
completes the disk startup process.

Oct 90

Basics / 1.13

Physical

Figure 1-8 Block Diagram

1.14/ Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

Logic Board

Microprocessors

RAM

The logic board is the heart of the system, the place
where all processing of information takes place. Below
is a list of the major components of the Macintosh Ilsi
logic board and the functions they perform.

By using the block diagram in Figure 1-8 as you read
through the various sections, you will get a clearer
understanding of how the logic board works.

The Macintosh Ilsi contains a 68030 microprocessor,
which is a true 32-bit processor but also supports 24-
and 1 6-bit processing modes. The microprocessor runs
at 20 MHz for high performance. When running in the
24-bit addressing mode, the Macintosh Ilsi is compatible
with the majority of existing Macintosh applications.

When working in A/UX (Apple UNIX®), the 68030
microprocessor incorporates instruction sets for
handling paged memory management, thereby
eliminating the need for an HMMU or PMMU (as found
in the Macintosh II). When the 68030 seeks data from a
memory location that isn't in the RAM, the 68030 swaps
the page containing the data from the disk to the RAM.

The random-access memory (RAM) interface on the logic
board is designed to support from 1 MB to 65 MB of
RAM. The interface supports burst mode, which allows
a five-clock initial access followed by 3 two-clock
accesses. The first MB of RAM is found in eight 25 6K
X 4 fast-page-mode DRAMs that are soldered onto the
logic board. This RAM is called bank A. Bank A RAM
cannot be changed by technicians, but the logic board
can be manufactured with 4-Mbit parts to provide a 4
MB base memory configuration.

Four single in-line memory module (SIMM) sockets are
provided for memory expansion. This expansion RAM
is called bank B. Bank B can be empty or it can contain
four same-sized SIMMs. Table 1 shows the various
possible RAM configurations.

RAM banks A and B do not occupy contiguous address
space, as they do on most previous Macintosh products.
The 68030 on-chip MMU is used to join the
noncontiguous blocks of physical memory to current
contiguous logical memory for application software.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1.15

Bank A

1 MB on-board DRAM
1 MB on-board DRAM
1 MB on-board DRAM
1 MB on-board DRAM
1 MB on-board DRAM
1 MB on-board DRAM

BankB

Empty

Four 256 k SIMMs
F our 512K SIMMS
Four 1 MB SIMMs
Four 2 MB SIMMs
Four 4 MB SIMMs

RAM

1 MB

2 MB

3 MB
5 MB
9 MB
17 MB

Table 1 RAM Configurations

On-board video operates out of bank A, which is used
as the frame buffer. The RAM-based video (RBV) frame
buffer varies in size, depending on the currently
selected bit depth and on the size of the video monitor
plugged into the on-board video port. The RBV
requires only enough memory to hold the contents of
the screen; it does not require any additional memory
for the frame buffer. Software determines the maximum
video bit depth available at startup and sets aside the
needed memory.

Every time the Macintosh Ilsi is switched on, the
system software performs a memory test to determine
how much RAM is present and whether the RAM is
good.

Video accesses affect only bank A memory access
because the data bus between the RAM banks can be
disconnected by a bus buffer (Figure 1-9). This access
allows the RBV to fetch data from bank A without
interrupting CPU access to bank B or I/O devices. Each
bank of RAM is accessed independently by the memory
decode unit (MDU), so the MDU can decode addresses
for the CPU and the RBV at the same time without
interference.

ROM The ROMs are the system's nonvolatile read-only

memory. The earliest Macintosh Ilsi computers contain
a ROM SIMM; later units contain two 4-Mbit ROM
chips soldered on the logic board. These chips are
256 k X 16 devices in a 44-pin quad flat pack.

1.16/ Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

Built-in Video
RBVChip

The 64-pin ROM SIMM socket will allow the Macintosh
Ilsi to use new ROM SIMMs when they are available,
thus providing a simple method to upgrade the machine.

CPU

Motorola

MC68030

Figure 1-9 RAM/Video Diagram

The RBV (RAM-based video) consists of two functional
parts, the video interface and the VI A2. The video
portion of the RBV and bank A of RAM share a
separated RAM data bus, which can be connected to or
disconnected from the CPU data bus by bus buffers. The
RBV uses data stored in bank A of RAM to feed a
constant stream of video data to the display monitor
during the live video portion of each horizontal screen
line. The RBV asks the MDU (memory decode unit) for
data as needed. The MDU responds by disconnecting
the bank A RAM data bus from the CPU data bus and
performing a DMA burst read from bank A RAM while
clocking the read data into the RBV.

If a video burst is in progress, CPU access to RAM bank
A is delayed, effectively slowing the CPU. This effect
is more pronounced for the larger monitors and for
video configurations using more bits per pixel. Only
access to RAM bank A is affected by video. The
optional bank B of RAM connects directly to the CPU
data bus, and the CPU has full access to this bank at all
times, as it does to ROM and the I/O devices.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1.17

(

The video signals generated by the RBV chip are driven
through a CLUT/VDAC (color lookup table/video
digital-to-analog converter) chip. The lookup table has
256 three- byte entries (one byte each for red, green,
and blue), and triple 8-bit video D/A converters.

When a monitor is connected to the built-in video ports,
the monitor will ground certain pins on the connector.
The grounding pattern allows the RBV to identify the
type of monitor connected. The RBV automatically
selects the appropriate pixel clock and sync timing
parameters. If an unknown monitor is plugged in or no
monitor is plugged in, built-in video output is halted.
The MON. ID bits can specify eight possible
combinations, as shown in Table 2.

MON. iD

Monitor

Screen

Bit Depths

Refresh

Selected

Size

Supported

Rate

Unsupported monitor

15" Portrait Display (B/W)

640 X 870

1, 2, 4

75 Hz

Mac 12-Inch RGB Display

512 X 384

1, 2, 4, 8

60.15 Hz J

Unsupported monitor

Mac 12" B/W, 13" RGB,

640 X 480

1, 2, 4, 8

66.67 Hz

and Apple High Res B/W

No external monitor

Table 2 RAM-Based Video Monitors Supported

The VIA2 portion contains eight 8-bit registers for
miscellaneous inputs and outputs, video control, RBV
chip-testing modes, and interrupt handling. The CPU
communicates with these registers over an 8-bit
bidirectional data bus that is separate from the 32-bit
RAM data bus used by the video portion.

1.18/ Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

Input /Output
Interface

Serial

Communications

Controller

The input/output interfaces of the system are the
serial ports, the floppy disk, the SCSI port, the ADB
port, and the sound subsystem. The optional numeric
coprocessor, the VIA chip, the VIA2 (which is part of the
RBV chip), and associated circuitry are, to some extent,
considered input/output devices; however, one should
recognize that these components provide input/output to
the processor. They do not have external ports as the
system-level input/output circuitry does. Each of these
interfaces is designed to be backwards compatible, when
possible, with existing Macintosh systems.

The serial communications controller (SCO is an 8-MHz
AMD 85C30. This device, also known as the combo
chip, combines the functions of the SCC and the SCSI
controller into a single device. The 85C80 is designed
to be transparent to operating software. The SCC
portion of the 85C80 has two independent ports for
serial communication. Each port can be independently
programmed for asynchronous, synchronous, and
AppleTalk protocols. The serial ports conform to EIA
standard RS-422. These ports are used mainly for
(though not limited to) connecting the Macintosh Ilsi to
networks, printers, and modems.

To use the serial ports with RS-232 single-ended
devices, use the RS-422 TxD- for the RS-232 TxD, RS-
422 RxD- for the RS-232 RxD, and ground RxD+ to the
SG pin (Figure 1-10).

GPi

RxD+

RxD-

HSKi

Figure 1-10 Mini DIN-8 Connector

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1.19

Small Computer
System Interface

SWIM Chip

Sound Subsystem

Sound Output

The second portion of the 85C80 is the small computer
system interface (SCSI) controller. The SCSI portion of
the 85C80 supports the SCSI as defined by the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.2 Committee.
This part of the device is compatible with the 53C80
controller used in the Macintosh II family. The rest of
the SCSI interface consists of an internal 50-pin
connector and an external DB-25 connector.

The chip is connected directly to the internal 50-pin
connector and the external DB-25 connector, and it
controls the high-speed parallel port for communicating
with up to seven SCSI peripherals. (If you have an
internal SCSI drive, you can have only six external
SCSI peripherals.) This device supports arbitration of
the SCSI bus, including reselection. The chip is
controlled through a set of memory-mapped read-and-
write registers.

The 85C80 does not provide the internal SCSI disk
drive with termination power; the drive provides the
termination power.

The Sanders-Woz Integrated Machine (SWIM) interface
is the single chip that controls the internal 3.5-inch
floppy disk drive and the optional external 3.5-inch
drive. The SWIM incorporates the functionality of the
integrated Woz machine (IWM) and provides the
capability to read, write, and format in both GCR
(Apple) and MFM (MS-DOS and Apple high-density) data
formats. The SWIM chip controls the one internal
floppy disk drive and the one external floppy drive.

The sound subsystem offers new levels of functionality
not offered as standard features on previous Macintosh
computers. The sound input portion consists of discrete
logic and memory components.

The sound output circuit consists of the Apple Sound
Chip (ASC) and two Sony sound chips that filter the
pulse-width-modulated (PWM) signal and drive the
internal speaker or external stereo miniphone jack.

The speaker drive circuit utilizes a separate amplifier
that mixes the right and left channels to drive the
internal speaker.

1 .20 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

Sound Input

The sound input portion consists of an input jack; a
preamplifier; a switched capacitor filter to provide
input filtering; an analog-to-digital converter; a first-in,
first-out (FIFO) memory to store the digitized data; and
control logic that allows software to control the
circuitry. Sound control registers are used by software
to control the storage of data and the generation of
interrupts. The sound input control register controls
the sample rate, the record/play bit, and write/
diagnostic address to the FIFO. Sound samples can be
made at 11 or 22 KHz with 8-bit resolution.

Sound input sources can be either a microphone or an
audio line, either of which can be plugged into the
sound input jack on the rear of the computer. The
sound subsystem accommodates stereo output and
monaural input. If a stereo signal is fed into the sound
input section, the two sides will be summed (or mixed)
before being digitized.

Input devices can be connected to the microphone input
connector on the rear of the computer. The input
source should provide a 20-mV amplitude and a 600
input impedance. A line input source — such as a CD
player, VCR, or tape player — provides a higher input
level. Apple provides an attenuating adapter plug to
decrease the level of these devices so that they are
compatible with the Macintosh Ilsi input. Apple also
provides an electret microphone for users to digitize
voice inputs.

Electret microphones require a bias voltage. Most
external electret microphones provide a battery within
the microphone body to power the element. The Apple
electret is powered by the computer system with a bias
voltage provided at the second tip of the input
connector. This connection provides eight volts DC at
up to 1 mA. This voltage has no effect on input devices
that have a monophonic or stereo input plug.

CAUTION: If the user inadvertently plugs some types of
amplifiers into the sound input jack instead of the sound
output jack, the DC voltage goes to the amplifier inputs.
Damage to the amplifier could result. Care must be taken
to ensure that the connections to the rear of the computer
are made correctly.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1.21

Apple

Desktop Bus

The Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) interface in the
Macintosh Ilsi is implemented differently from the ADB
on previous Macintosh computers. An 8-bit custom
microcontroller is the heart of the design. This
microcontroller is a custom Motorola 68HC05 that
drives the external ADB bus and reads the status of the
selected device. The system interfaces with this new
custom device with an improved, extended handshake
protocol with the VIA chip.

The ADB controller also includes other functions that
used to be provided by extra devices on the logic
board. The controller includes a real-time clock and
parameter RAM, along with control bits for the soft
power control circuit, power-on reset, and keyboard-
controlled reset and NMI functions. Each of these
functions is described below.

The ADB is a serial communication bus used to connect
keyboards, mouse devices, graphic tablets, and other
input devices to the system. It is a single-master,
multiple-slave serial bus using an asynchronous
protocol. The processor normally samples the state of
each of the devices by using the control lines and shift
register in VIAl to read or write bytes over an internal
serial link to the ADB controller. This is a 4-bit
microprocessor that actually drives the external bus and
reads the status of the selected device. The mini-DIN
4-pin ADB connectors (Figure 1-11) connect the devices
to the Macintosh Ilsi.

Figure 1-11 ADB Connector

All devices that are made for the Apple Desktop Bus
have some kind of microprocessor that makes them
intelligent devices. All ADB devices, except the mouse,
have ports for connecting to other ADB devices.

Because it has no port, the mouse must be the last
device attached to the Apple Desktop Bus.

1 .22 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

There are three Macintosh Apple ADB keyboards — the
Apple Keyboard, Apple Keyboard II, and Apple
Extended Keyboard. The keyboards connect to the
Apple Desktop Bus port on the rear of the Macintosh
Ilsi. The keyboards have their own microprocessors,
which are called keyboard microcontrollers. The
keyboards operate asynchronously, issue commands on
the ADB, and transmit and receive data to and from the
ADB devices.

Real-Time The Macintosh Ilsi real-time clock is a custom

Clock chip. It contains 256 bytes of RAM that are powered by

a battery when external power is off. These RAM bytes
are called parameter RAM (PRAM). Parameter RAM
stores the configuration of ports, the clock setting, and
other data that must be preserved even when system
power is not available.

Access to PRAM information is accomplished using a
new pseudo device command protocol for use with the
68HC05. This protocol is different from the protocols
of previous Macintosh computers. Software can use the
driver routines to access the clock and PRAM; however,
software that attempts to access these hardware devices
directly must be modified.

Power The Macintosh Ilsi has a soft-off/hard-on circuit to

Control control the power supply. The circuit is designed to

control the power supply through the power fail
warning (PFW) signal to the power supply and the
expansion slot interface.

When either the keyboard on/off switch or the rear-
panel power switch is pressed, the PFW signal is
pulled high and the power supply turns the power on
within 1.5 seconds.

The rear-panel power switch can be locked in an ON
position, which allows the unit to restart itself as soon
as AC power is detected. In effect, when this switch is
locked in the ON position and a power failure causes
the unit to shut off, the unit will start up as soon as the
power is reinstated. Also, when the switch is locked in
the ON position, using the Shut Down command in the
Finder™ causes the unit to restart. This feature is most
valuable when using the unit as a file server.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .23

The Macintosh Ilsi provides two new power-up
capabilities:

Power

Supply

1 .24 / Basics

• A programmable file server flag in PRAM provides
the same functionality as the lockable power switch.

• The PRAM can be programmed to turn the system on
at a specified time.

The power-off function is under software control when
the Shut Down command in the Finder is used. This
soft-off allows the computer to clean up any pending
activity before switching off. In contrast, the power
on/off switch generates a hard off that turns off the
computer after 2 ms without going through software.

The Macintosh Ilsi also provides a keyboard-initiated
nonmasked interrupt (NMI) and reset. To produce a
NMI, press <Command> and the power button at the
same time; to reset, press <Command>, <Control>, and
the power button at the same time.

The NMI is used by debugging software to stop an
application and change to a debugger for low-level
software and hardware testing. The NMI signal has an
enable flag in the PRAM of the 68HC05. When the
68HC05 is initially powered up, the flag is reset and
the NMI cannot be generated by the keyboard.

Software that wishes to use this function needs to set
the enable flag in the PRAM so that the keyboard NMI
can be generated.

The reset is a hard reset, identical to the power-on
reset. All RAM contents are lost and the computer
behaves as if it were just switched on.

The power supply operates on standard line voltage and
outputs +5 V, +12 V, and -12 V DC voltages, which are
used by the logic board, the internal devices, and the
slots.

CAUTION: It is extremely important that the ratings of the
power supply not be exceeded. Exceeding the ratings
will result in damage to the power supply and the logic
board. See the specifications in this section for maximum
ratings for the system.

Oct 90

Macintosh ilsi

Fuses

Internal Floppy
Disk Drives

FDHD

Drive

internal Hard
Disk SCSI

Expansion Siot

Macintosh llsi

The logic board has three fuses that protect the
external connectors, SCSI, floppy disk drive, and ADB.
These fuses are resettable polyfuses and require about
four seconds to reset once blown by an overload.

The internal disk drive connects to the main logic board
through an internal connector. The flow of data
between the logic board and the disk drives is
channeled through the SWIM disk controller. The
SWIM controls reading and writing operations.

The SWIM disk controller enables the Apple
FDHD/SuperDrive to exchange data between Apple and
MS-DOS® systems. The SWIM chip interprets,
converts, and outputs dual-disk (clock/time) and file
(data) signals as appropriate for either GCR (Apple) or
MFM (MS-DOS and Apple high-density) formats. This
arrangement provides the capability to read, write, and
format Apple 800K data disks (GCR), MS-DOS 720K data
disks (MFM), and Apple or MS-DOS high-density (1.4
MB) data disks (MFM). For specific compatibilities
between drives and media, see Figure 1-7.

An application-specific translator within the Apple File
Exchange utility program, or provided by third parties,
must be used to translate the formatted data for use
within an application program.

The hard disk connects to the logic board through the
internal SCSI connector. Other SCSI devices may be
daisy-chained to the external SCSI port.

The Macintosh Ilsi has one expansion slot that can
accept a NuBus card or an 030 Direct Slot card.

The expansion bus connector is a 120-pin DIN-style
three-row connector. The connector provides the 32-bit
CPU data and address buses, DMA control signals, other
CPU control signals, interrupt inputs, and status signals
for future expansion. Additionally, +5 V, +12 V, and
-12 V power is provided. An adapter card allows the
expansion card to be installed horizontally, parallel to
the main logic board. There is sufficient clearance
provided by the adapter card for cooling air to flow
between the boards.

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .25

Numeric Coprocessor

NuBus Card

The installation process for a NuBus card is quite
different from the installation process for an 030 Direct
Slot card. When installing either card, be sure to
follow the directions that come with the adapter card.

The numeric coprocessor is located on the optional
adapter cards. The numeric coprocessor is an MC68882
device that provides a high degree of precision and
speed for numeric computations.

Note: Some software applications require that the
numeric coprocessor be on the logic board. Such
applications require special adaptations to run on the
Macintosh Ilsi.

The NuBus interface is based on the Apple NuBus
specification. This interface adds the NMRQ~ to the
IEEE NuBus definition of NuBus slots. The NMRQ-
line from the slot is wired to a pin of the RBV to allow
the immediate determination of interrupt source rather
than a polling of all possible interrupt sources.

Note: To guarantee that the Macintosh Ilsi meets all
specifications regardless of the operation conditions,
the power dissipation should not exceed 15 watts.

The NuBus interface supports the following features for
the Macintosh Ilsi:

• Geographic Addressing Each of the three slots has a
unique 4-bit value encoded into the slots, which
eliminates the need for DIP switches or other means
to uniquely address each card.

• Distributed Arbitration There is no central bus
master or daisy chain to assign bus mastership. The
bus mastership is performed with the geographic
addresses, thus allowing a priority within a group
of bus requesters but not an overriding control of
the bus. In theory, all requestors receive equal
access to the bus over time.

• Synchronous Transaction All bus transactions are
timed relative to a single asymmetric lO-MHz clock.

• 32-bit Address/Data The NuBus supports 4 GB of
address with justified 8-bit, 1 6-bit, and 32-bit data
transactions. The 68030 supports all these data
types through the use of dynamic bus sizing.

Dynamic bus sizing means word and long-word

1 .26 / Basics

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

Direct Slot Card

operations do not have to be aligned but instead
cause multiple NuBus transactions to perform the
proper alignment. The data bus from the 68030 to
NuBus is byte reversed to allow sequential byte
addresses to appear on the NuBus data ports in the
same order as the NuBus address implies.

• Bus Time-out The absence of a card on the NuBus
will not hang the bus by waiting for a reply. A
system resource errors-out any transaction taking
longer than 25.6 [is.

• Simple Interrupts Each card has the ability to
generate simple open-collector interrupts that allow
inexpensive cards to gain system attention without
having to become bus master.

The NuBus has three major states of communication

with the Macintosh Ilsi system:

• Processor-to-NuBus, which is activated whenever
the microprocessor generates a physical slot
address. If a device responds, the data is
transferred.

• NuBus-to-Processor Bus, which is for access to RAM
and ROM and for I/O to and from NuBus. Two
control functions are performed for this process.

One tracks the changes on NuBus, and the other lets
the 68030 tell NuBus what to do next.

• NuBus time-out, which is required to prevent access
to empty slots. Such access would hang the system.

The internal expansion connector can be used as an 030
Direct Slot. This enables Apple and third-party
expansion cards to directly access the 32-bit address
and data bus of the 68030 microprocessor. This slot
architecture delivers the improved performance of the
32-bit bus and has other benefits for expansion card
developers. However, the greater pin demands of the
32-bit bus require using a 120-pin connector. As a
result, most accelerator and video expansion cards
designed to utilize a l6-bit data bus cannot be used.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Basics / 1 .27

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llsi

Section 2 - Take-Apart

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh llsi

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

2.3 Top Cover

2.5 Adapter Card and 030 Direct Slot Card

2.7 Adapter Card, Bracket, and NuBus Card

2.8 Fan

2.9 Power Supply

2.10 Hard Disk Drive

2.13 Floppy Disk Drive

2.14 Main Logic Board

2.17 Speaker

Note: If a step is underlined, detailed instructions for
that step can be found elsewhere in the section.

Oct 90

Take-Apart / 2.1

□ ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE PREVENTION

The Macintosh Ilsi contains ROM and RAM memory
(which is installed on small separate boards called
SIMMs — single in-line memory modules) and CMOS
components. The CMOS components and the SIMMs are
very susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge
(BSD).

Preventive measures must be taken to avoid BSD
damage. When you unwrap, install, or replace modules,
observe the appropriate BSD precautions.

Bor complete BSD prevention information, refer to the
You Oughta Know tab in the Apple Service Technical
Procedures.

If the proper BSD procedures are not available, then do
the following:

Turn off the power and disconnect the power cord.

After removing the cover and before going near the
logic board, touch the metal of the power supply case.

2.2 / Take- Apart

Oct 90

Macintosh Ilsi

□ TOP COVER
Remove

Replace

1. Remove all cables that are attached to the rear of
the computer.

2. Push up on the tabs on the back of the cover
(Figure 2-1) and lift up the lid. The cover may make
a loud snap.

Figure 2-1 Top Cover

1, Insert the front end of the cover onto the front end
of the unit, making sure that the tabs on the cover
fit into the receptacles on the unit.

2. Swing the cover down toward the back of the unit,
pressing down on the back until you hear the case
click into place.

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Take-Apart/ 2.3

Hand Screws

030 Direct Slot Card

Power Supply

(

2.4 /Take- Apart

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

□ ADAPTER CARD AND 030 DIRECT SLOT CARD

CAUTION: Adapter and expansion cards are sensitive to
eiectrostatic discharge. To avoid damaging these cards,
foilow ail ESD safety procedures. For complete BSD
prevention information, refer to the You Oughta Know tab
in the Agjp\e Service Technical Procedures.

Remove

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Remove the screws that secure the 030 Direct Slot
card to the access port.

3. With a screwdriver, press down on the latch (Figure
2-2) that secures the plastic bracket to the power
supply. Remove the plastic bracket from the power
supply carefully so that you do not flex the 030
Direct Slot card.

4. Carefully, and without flexing either card, pull the
030 card out of the connector on the adapter card.

5. If you are replacing the adapter card, remove the
adapter card from the logic board by pulling straight
up on the adapter card.

Note: If you are replacing the 030 Direct Slot card,

detach the plastic bracket and keep it to use with the

replacement 030 Direct Slot card.

Replace

1. Attach the plastic bracket to the 030 Direct Slot
card. The bracket snaps into place on the side of
the Direct Slot card that is opposite the connector.

2. Attach the 030 Direct Slot card to the adapter card.

3. Attach the plastic bracket to the power supply.

4. Press the adapter card into the expansion slot on
the logic board.

5. Secure the external connector of the 030 Direct Slot
card to the access port.

6. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh lisi

Oct 90

Take-Apart / 2.5

(

Figure 2-3 Adapter Card, Bracket, and NuBus Card

2.6/Take-Apart

Oct 90

Macintosh llsi

□ ADAPTER CARD, BRACKET, AND NUBUS CARD

CAUTION: Adapter and expansion cards are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. To avoid damaging these cards,
follow all BSD safety procedures. For complete BSD
prevention information, refer to the You Oughta Know tab
in the Aggie Service Technical Procedures.

Remove

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Loosen the two screws that fasten the NuBus card to
the access port on the rear of the computer (Figure
2-3).

3. Pull straight up on the metal bracket to remove the
bracket, NuBus card, and adapter card from the
computer.

4. If you are replacing the NuBus card, rest the
adapter card on a flat surface, with the metal
bracket and NuBus card perpendicular, and carefully
pull the NuBus card out of the connector on the
adapter card.

Replace if the NuBus card is already attached to the adapter

card and bracket, begin with step 2.

1. Attach the NuBus card to the adapter card assembly.

• Rest the adapter card on a flat surface, with the
metal bracket perpendicular, and slide the NuBus
card into the bracket, making sure that the pin on
the bracket aligns with the slot on the NuBus
card.

• Press the NuBus card into the connector on the
adapter card.

2. Line up the connector on the adapter card with the
expansion slot on the logic board. Press down
gently but firmly on the adapter card until the
connector is fully inserted.

3. Replace the two screws that fasten the NuBus card
to the access port on the rear of the computer.

4. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Take- Apart / 2.7

□ FAN

Remove

1. Remove the top cover and remove the 030 Direct
Slot card , if one is installed.

2. With the front of the computer facing you, place
your thumbs under the fan (Figure 2-4) and pull
straight up. The fan will snap free. (You may need
to use moderate pressure to snap the fan free.)

Figure 2-4 Removing the Fan

Replace 1. Align the fan so that the plastic notches of the fan

assembly go into the plastic guides on the rear of
the case.

2. Push the fan all the way down until you hear the fan
snap into place. The fan must rest securely against
the logic board.

3. Replace the 030 Direct Slot card (if one was
installed) and the top cover .

2.8 / Take- Apart

Oct 90

Macintosh 1 1 si

□ POWER SUPPLY

Remove

1. Remove the top cover , the 0^0 Direct Slot card (if
one is installed), and the fan .

2. Near the rear end of the power supply, locate the
two metal tabs shown in Figure 2-5. Press in on the
tabs and lift the rear end of the power supply about
1/2 inch.

3. On the front end of the power supply (near the
floppy drive), locate the large plastic tab (Fig:ure
2-5) that latches the power supply to the bottom
case. Using a finger, push the tab toward the front
of the case and at the same time lift the power
supply up and out of the case.

Metal

Tabs

Power Supply

Floppy Drive

Plastic Release Tab
(Metal-Colored)

Figure 2-5 Power Supply

Replace l. Position the power supply so that the white

connector on the power supply fits into the white
connector on the logic board.

2. Slide the power supply into the case until the two
metal tabs near the rear of the computer and the
large plastic tab near the floppy drive hold the
power supply in place.

3. Replace the fan , the 030 Direct Slot card (if one was
installed), and the top cover .

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Take- Apart / 2.9

□ HARD DISK DRIVE

Note: If you are replacing the hard disk drive, you will
need a torque driver. Torque drivers are readily
available at most hardware or automotive supply stores.

Remove

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Disconnect the power cable from connector J14 on
the logic board (Figure 2-6). This connector has a
locking tab that you must release in order to
remove the cable.

3. Disconnect the 50-pin connector from the logic
board (Figure 2-6). You may have to gently rock the
cable from side to side to release the cable.

Note: If you are replacing the hard disk drive,
detach and retain the power cable and the 50-pin
connector cable from the drive. You will need them
to install the new drive.

4. Release the two metal-colored tabs (Figure 2-6), one
on each side of the hard disk drive, and lift the
drive (with its carrier) out of the computer.

Disk Metal-Colored

Drive Release Tabs

Figure 2-6 Hard Disk Drive

2.10 / Take-Apart

rev. May 91

Macintosh llsi

CAUTION: DO NOT loosen or remove any of the four torx
screws that secure the black cover to the drive.

Loosening or removing these screws can cause
irreparable damage to the hard drive.

5. If you are replacing the hard disk drive, remove the
defective hard disk drive from its silver-colored
carrier by removing the four Phillips screws and
lockwashers from the carrier.

Replace if you are replacing a defective hard disk drive, begin

with step 1. If you are simply reinstalling the same
drive (which is already attached to the silver-colored
carrier), begin with step 3.

1. Align the carrier screw hole marked A on the

replacement hard disk drive as shown in Figure 2-7.
Use the four lockwashers and Phillips screws to
loosely fasten the carrier to the drive.

Macintosh llsi

rev. May 91

Take-Apart / 2.11

2. Using the torque driver and following the sequence
shown in Figure 2-7, torque the four Phillips
screws to 8.0 in-lbs.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the Phillips screws that you
removed in step 5 above and follow the installation
sequence shown in Figure 2-7. Failure to do so can
damage the drive.

3. The hard drive goes over the speaker, with the
carrier side down and the connectors facing the rear
of the computer. Position the hard disk drive so
that the metal tabs on the carrier align with the
plastic release tabs on the bottom case (Figure 2-6).

4. Push the carrier and drive down into the bottom
case until the hard disk drive snaps into place.

5. Connect one end of the 50-pin cable to the hard
drive and the other end to connector J17 on the
logic board. (Note that the cable has a small tab in
the center of the connector at each end of the cable.
Align this tab with the slot in the connectors on the
logic board and on the hard disk drive.)

6. Connect the rectangular end of the the power cable
to the hard drive.

7. Connect the square end of the power cable to
connector Jl4 on the logic board. Be sure that the
cable locks into place.

8. Replace the top cover .

2.12/Take-Apart

Oct 90

Macintosh 1 1 si

□ FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

Remove

Replace

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Disconnect the 20-pin connector QIS) from the logic
board (Figure 2-8).

3. Release the two metal-colored tabs (Figure 2-8), and
lift the drive straight up and out of the computer.
Retain the 20-pin cable for the drive replacement.

IMPORTANT: Apple advises you to install dust shields on
1.4 MB floppy drives in all Macintosh llsi computers. You
must clean the drive before you slip on the dust shield.
See "Cleaning the Drive" in the Basic section of the
FDHD/SuperPrive tab of fhe Apple Technical Procedures.

Release Tabs

1. Connect the 20-pin cable to the new drive.

2. Position the drive so that the two plastic tabs of the
case align with the metal tabs of the drive. Push
the drive down until the tabs of the case snap into
position over the tabs of the drive.

3. Connect the 20-pin floppy cable to connector J18 on
the logic board.

4. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 92

Take-Apart/2.13

5. Gently lift the board completely out of the case.

CAUTION: Because the oil from your skin can be harmful
to the connectors, do not touch the connector "fingers" of
the speaker/LED (J20— located on the bottom side of the
logic board) or connector J19.

6. Use the SIMM removal tool (see the instructions in
"SIMM Removal Tool" under the You Oughta Know
tab) to remove the RAM SIMMs from the logic
board. You will need to install these SIMMs on the
new logic board.

Note the size and number of the customer's RAM
SIMMs. The customer must receive the same RAM
SIMM configuration as was brought in.

Replace

1. Install the customer's RAM SIMMs onto the
replacement logic board.

2. Insert the logic board into the case so that the
connectors align with the openings in the back
panel. The slots in the logic board fit over the tabs
on the bottom of the case.

3. With a slight downward pressure, slide the logic
board toward the rear of the case as far as it will
go. The board will click into place.

4. Reconnect connector J18 (the floppy disk drive) and
connectors J17 and Jl4 (the hard disk drive).

5. Re place the power supp ly, fan, adapter card (if you
removed one), and top cover .

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Take-Apart / 2.15

)

□ SPEAKER

Remove

Remove the top cover, adapter card (if installed),
fan. power suoolv. and hard disk drive.

Disconnect the floppy disk drive cable from
connector J18 on the logic board.

Remove the loeic board.

Remove the diode power light on the front of the
case by pushing the bulb back and pulling the diode
(Figure 2-10) from the holder. Carefully remove the
diode cables from the two cable holders.

Release the four clips that hold the speaker to the
bottom case (Figure 2-10). Lift the speaker out of
the bottom case.

Replace

)

1. Place the speaker face-down in the bottom case.

Push each of the four corners of the speaker firmly
down until the four clips snap into position over the
speaker. You may have to push back on the clips to
snap them over the speaker edges.

2. Replace the diode power light in its holder, and
place the diode cables in the two cable holders

(Figure 2-10).

3. Replace the logic board , making sure that the metal
connector fingers of the speaker contact the metal
fingers on the underside of the logic board.

4. Reconnect the floppy disk drive cable to connector
J18 on the logic board.

5. Replace the hard di.sk drive , power supply , fan,
adapter card (if you removed one), and top cover .

)

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Take-Apart / 2.17

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llsi

Section 3 - Diagnostics

□ CONTENTS

Refer to the MacTest MP section under the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Apple Service Technical Procedures.

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 91

Diagnostics / 3.1

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh ilsi

Macintosh Ilsi

Section 4 - Troubleshooting

4.2 Introduction

4.2 General Information

4.2 Before You Start

4.2 Error Chords

4.2 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.3 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.4 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board Configuration

4.5 Internal Hard Disk SCSI

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Startup Chord

4.6 Error Chords

4.7 Symptom Chart

4.7 Built-in Video Problems

4.8 Floppy Drive Problems

4.8 SCSI Problems

4.9 Peripheral Problems

4.10 Miscellaneous Problems

4.12 Macintosh Ilsi Flowcharts
4.12 Flowchart 1 Notes

4.14 Flowchart 2 Notes

4.16 Flowchart 3 Notes

4.17 Flowchart 4 Notes

4.18 Flowchart 5 Notes

4.20 RAM SIMM Verification

4.20 Introduction

4.20 Verification

4.22 Battery Verification

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.1

□ INTRODUCTION

General

Information

Before
You Start

Error Chords

How to Use
the Symptom
Chart

The following two disks may be used to test portions of
the Macintosh Ilsi system:

• MacTest MP

• Macintosh Hard Disk Test (version 1.0 or higher)

Use this troubleshooting section if you are unable to
boot MacTest MP or if MacTest MP is unable to detect
a module failure. After you repair the system, run
MacTest MP to verify system operation.

Note: See MacTest MP under the Macintosh Multiple-
Product Diagnostic tab in the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures for instructions on using MacTest
MP. See Macintosh Hard Disk Drive Diagnostic under
the SCSI Hard Disk Drives tab of Cross Family
Peripherals Technical Procedures for instructions on
using Macintosh Hard Disk Test.

Read the subsections titled "Things to Remember,"
"Module Exchange Information," "Startup and Error
Chords," "RAM SIMM Verification," and "Battery
Verification" before you begin troubleshooting. You
need the information provided in these subsections to
troubleshoot the Macintosh Ilsi effectively.

When switched on, the Macintosh Ilsi executes a ROM-
based self-test. If any part of the self-test fails, a
sequence of chords will sound. To hear a sample of
each sequence of chords, listen to the Diagnostic Sound
Sampler on the MacTest MP disk. (Refer to Section 3,
Diagnostics, for more information.)

If the symptoms displayed by the Macintosh Ilsi are not
listed in the symptom chart, or if the system is not
displaying a clearly defined problem, use the flowchart
subsection.

4.2 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh Ilsi

How to Use the

Troubleshooting

Flowcharts

There are five numbered flowcharts for the
Macintosh Ilsi. On completion of Flowchart 1, you
will be instructed to continue to the next flowchart.
Continue until you complete Flowchart 5.

Each of the flowcharts includes references to notes that
are above the flowchart or on the opposite page. These
notes provide additional instructions or referrals to
other procedures.

Starting at the top of Flowchart 1, answer the questions
and proceed down the chart. When you arrive at a
rectangular box containing a list of actions, perform the
actions in the sequence listed. On completion, return
to the preceding diamond box. If the problem remains,
reinstall the original module before you go on to the
next action.

Macintosh Ilsi

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.3

□ THINGS TO REMEMBER

ESD

Troubleshooting

Hints

Normal
Startup Tone

System

Configuration

1. Follow all electrostatic discharge (ESD)
precautions when working on the Macintosh Ilsi.
Refer to the You Oughta Know tab in the Apple
Service Technical Procedures for additional
information.

2. If available, use a known-good monitor and
monitor cable. Using them will isolate the problem
to the CPU, internal drive, keyboard, or mouse.

3. Before you begin troubleshooting, remove the
expansion and adaptor cards and disconnect any
external devices (printers, SCSI devices, and/or
ADB devices other than the keyboard and mouse).

After the Macintosh Ilsi has passed the diagnostic
tests, each expansion card or peripheral must be
installed and tested. Install one device and test the
system before adding other devices. Repeat the
install-and-test process until all devices have been
installed and tested.

4. Mark each known-good SIMM module on the
exchange logic board with white correction fluid or
a small sticker to prevent confusion during the
troubleshooting procedure.

5. Use a known-good copy of MacTest MP.

6. During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
soft chord sounds. If you do not hear the chord,
refer to "Startup and Error Chords" for additional
information.

7. To ensure that customers get back the same system
configurations that they bring in, record the
following information:

• The size of the SCSI hard disk (40 MB or
80 MB) if one is installed

• SIMM sizes

• Type and serial number of expansion card

• Whether a ROM SIMM is installed

4.4 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh Ilsi

System Software

8. Verify that the customer is using System 6.0.7 or
higher. Using earlier versions may destroy data or
prevent the computer from booting.

□ MODULE EXCHANGE INFORMATION

The Macintosh Ilsi logic board service exchange module
is shipped without RAM SIMMs. To make sure that
customers always get back the same logic board
configurations that they brought in, be sure to record
the amount of memory installed and the size of the RAM
SIMMs.

All Macintosh Ilsi logic boards are shipped with ROM
memory. This memory may be on a ROM SIMM or it
may be soldered onto the board at the locations marked
ROM 4MBIT (near the floppy disk cable connector, J18).
When you return a defective Macintosh Ilsi logic board,
return it with the ROM, but without RAM SIMMs.

The internal 40 MB and 80 MB SCSI hard disk service
modules are shipped without the SCSI cable connected.
Be sure to keep the SCSI cable with the customer's
Macintosh Ilsi system. The SCSI cable is sold as a
separate replacement part and is not part of a module.

The SCSI power cable is not included with the internal
SCSI drive modules. You must detach the power cable
from the old drive and install it on the replacement
drive.

Internal
Hard Disk
SCSI

Logic Board
Configuration

Macintosh Ilsi

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.5

□ STARTUP AND ERROR CHORDS

Introduction

Startup Chord

Error Chords

Initial Failure

when the Macintosh Ilsi is switched on, the ROM
executes a self-test. If any part of the self-test fails, a
sequence of chords will sound.

If you are unable to interpret the chords, use the
flowcharts and Ignore the question about the startup
chord on Flowchart 1.

During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
chord is emitted; then a disk icon appears on the screen.
The disk will have a flashing question mark (if a
startup disk is not found) or a smiling face (if a startup
disk is found).

If a startup chord and additional chords sound, a blank
gray screen will usually be all one sees. Three
sequences play whenever an error is encountered
during startup: startup chord first; then the short, harsh
error chord; followed closely by the test monitor
sequence (four chords, from low to high).

If you hear the above sequence, a failure has occurred
during the initial hardware self-tests. To correct the
problem:

1. Exchange the RAM SIMMs. (Refer to "RAM SIMM
Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

2. If RAM SIMM exchanges do not work, exchange the
logic board. (Install the customer's RAM SIMMs on
the exchange board.)

3. If the system still does not work, you will need to
perform the RAM SIMM verification with the
exchange logic board. (Refer to "RAM SIMM
Verification" in this section.)

4.6 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh Ilsi

□ SYMPTOM CHART

Built-in Video Problems

• Screen is dark, audio
and at least one drive
operate, fan is running,
and LED is lit

• Screen dark, no audio,
no drive, but fan is
running and LED
is lit

• Partial or whole
screen is bright and
audio is present, but
no video information
is visible

• Screen is completely
dark, fan is not
running, and LED is
not lit

Solutions

1. Adjust brightness on monitor.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace video cable.

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "RAM SIMM Verification"
in this section).

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

6. Replace power supply.

1. Replace video cable.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Remove any NuBus cards.

4. Remove all external peripherals.

5. Replace SIMMs (refer to "RAM SIMM Verification"
in this section).

6. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

7. Replace power supply.

1. Replace video cable.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Plug the monitor directly into the wall socket, and
verify that the monitor has power.

2. NuBus card is drawing too much power. Remove the
NuBus card and switch on power again.

3. Remove all external peripherals.

4. Replace power supply.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

Note: If replacing the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate Apple Service Technical
Procedures to obtain replacement information.

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.7

Floppy Drive Problems

Solutions

• Audio and video
present, but
internal floppy drive
does not operate

• Disk ejects; display
shows Mac icon
with blinking ”X”

• Disk will not eject

• Drive attempts to
eject disk, but
doesn't

SCSI Problems

• Internal disk drive
runs continuously

• Internal hard disk
will not operate

4.8 / Troubleshooting

1. Replace internal floppy disk drive cable.

2. Replace internal floppy disk drive.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace floppy disk with known-good disk.

2. Replace internal disk drive cable.

3. Replace internal disk drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Switch off system and hold mouse button down
while switching on.

2. Try ejecting disk manually with paper clip.

3. Replace disk drive.

1. Try pushing disk completely in.

2. Try ejecting disk manually with paper clip.

3. Replace disk drive.

Solutions

1. Replace internal SCSI drive cable.

2. Replace internal hard drive.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace SCSI cable.

2. Replace SCSI power cable.

3. Replace hard drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

Peripheral Problems

• Works with internal or
external SCSI device
but will not work
with both

• Cursor does not move

• Cursor moves, but
clicking the mouse
button has no effect

• Cannot double-click
to open an application,
disk, or server

• No response to any
key on the keyboard

Solutions

1. Verify that SCSI select-level switch on external
device is set to a different priority from internal.

2. Replace terminator on the external device.

3. Verify that terminator is installed on the internal
SCSI drive.

4. Replace SCSI device select cable.

1. Reboot system.

2. Check mouse connection.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect the
mouse to the rear ADB port instead and disconnect
the keyboard. If mouse works, replace keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in the ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace mouse.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Remove extra system files on the hard disk.

2. Clear parameter RAM. Hold down the <Shift>
<Option> <Command> keys and select Control Panel
from the Apple menu. Reset mouse controls.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to
the rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in the ADB port, replace the
mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Check keyboard connection to ADB port.

2. Replace keyboard cable.

3. Replace keyboard.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.9

• Known-good
Image Writer or
I mage Writer II
will not print

• Known-good
LaserWriter
will not print

Miscellaneous Problems

• Clicking, chirping,
or thumping sound

• System shuts down
intermittently

• System intermittently
crashes or locks up

• No sound from
speaker

• Clock not
running

4.10 / Troubleshooting

1. Make sure the System is version 6.0.7 (or higher).

2. Make sure that the Chooser and the Control Panel
are set correctly.

3. Check the printer DIP switches.

4. Replace printer interface cable.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Make sure the System is version 6.0.7 (or higher).

2. Make sure that the Chooser and the Control Panel
are set correctly.

3. Refer to the Networks tab in the Apple Service
Technical Procedures for more information.

Solutions

1. Replace power supply.

2. Disconnect hard disk; replace if noise disappears.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Make sure air vents on the back and top of the main
unit are clear. Thermal protection circuitry may
shut down the system. After 30 to 40 minutes, the
system should be OK.

2. Replace power cable.

3. Replace power supply.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Make sure the System is version 6.0.7 (or higher).

2. Make sure software is known-good.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "RAM SIMM Verification"
in this section).

5. Replace power supply.

1. Verify that the volume setting in the Control Panel
is set to 1 or above.

2. Replace speaker.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace battery (see "Battery Verification" in this
section).

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

• Systems seems to
boot, then message
"Finder is oid version"
dispiays

1. Clear parameter RAM by holding down the
<Command> <Option> <R> keys and restarting
the system. Continue to hold these keys down. You
will hear the normal startup chords and about two
seconds later you will hear another chord. This
second chord means the parameter RAM has been
cleared.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

• System restarts
itseif

Set the locking power switch on the rear of the unit
to the unlocked (horizontal) position.

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.11

□ MACINTOSH llsi FLOWCHARTS

Rowchart 1
Notes

1. During a normal startup sequence, a medium
pitched soft chord is emitted. If this does not
happen, refer to "Startup and Error Chords" for
additional information. If you cannot interpret the
chords, continue with the flowchart.

2. If exchanging the monitor will correct the problem,
refer to the appropriate Technical Procedures to
isolate the monitor problem to the module level.

3. Refer to "RAM SIMM Verification" for complete
instructions on verifying and troubleshooting the
SIMMs.

4. If the known-good SIMMs did not correct the
problem, install the customer's SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

4.12 / Troubleshooting

Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

C Flowchart 1 )

Power on the system
without installing a disk

Go to
Flow-
chart 3.

1 . Exchange monitor (see Note #2).

2. Exchange video cable.

3. Exchange RAM SIMMs
[see Note #3).

4. Exchange logic board (see Note #4).

5. Exchange power supply.

1. Exchange logic board (see

Note #4).

2. Exchange RAM SIMMs

(see Note #3).

3. Exchange power supply.

Go to Flowchart 3.

Go to Flowchart 4.

Macintosh llsi

Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.13

Rowchart 2
Notes

4.14 / Troubleshooting

1. Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

2. Refer to the SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.15

Rowchart 3
Notes

1. If exchanging the monitor will correct the
problem, refer to the appropriate Technical
Procedures to isolate the monitor problem to the
module level.

2. Refer to "RAM SIMM Verification" for complete
instructions on verifying and troubleshooting the
SIMMs.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

4.16 / Troubleshooting

Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

Rowchart 4
Notes

1. Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

2. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Macintosh llsi

Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.17

Flowchart 5
Notes

1. Refer to the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh
Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh
Family Technical Procedures for complete
information.

2. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

3. Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

4. Customers must always get back the same system
configurations they bring in. Refer to "Module
Exchange Information" in this section.

4.18 / Troubleshooting

Jan 91

Macintosh llsi

1 . Exchange SCSI power and

connector cable.

2. Exchange SCSI drive.

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board

(see Note #2).

1 . Exchange SCSI power and

connector cable.

2. Exchange SCSI drive.

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board

(see Note #2).

Macintosh llsi

Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.19

□ RAM SIMM VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

The service exchange logic board comes without RAM
SIMMs.

The RAM SIMMs installed on the customer's logic board
may be defective. To verify a defective RAM SIMM,
you must remove all the customer's RAM SIMMs and
install known-good RAM SIMMs. Mark each known-
good RAM SIMM with a dot of white correction fluid or
a small sticker. Whatever you use, be sure it will not
come off while you are testing.

SIMM removal tool

Four known-good SIMMs that are the same size (e.g.,
512K or 1 MB) as the SIMMs you are verifying

1. Remove the top cover .

CAUTION: Before removing the SIMMs, be sure to use
proper BSD procedures. If an BSD pad is not available,
touch bare metal on the power supply before proceeding.
Failure to use proper BSD procedures can damage the
logic board.

2. Remove the customer's RAM SIMMs by using the
SIMM removal tool. See the You Oughta Know tab
for SIMM tool use.

Note: Record the number and the sizes of the RAM
SIMMs. The customer should receive the same
number and sizes back!

3. Install four known-good RAM SIMMs.

Note: Use only RAM SIMMs with 100 ns (or faster)
fast-page-mode DRAMs. Do not use RAM SIMMs
with 120 or 150 ns DRAMs.

4. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the system is working properly
and you can proceed to test the customer's RAM
SIMMs.

4.20 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jun 91

Macintosh llsi

5. Switch the system off, remove one of the known-
good SIMMs, and install one of the customer's
SIMMs.

6. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the customer's RAM SIMM is good.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to test each of the RAM
SIMMs. Be sure to set defective RAM SIMMs
where they will not be mixed up with good ones.

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Troubleshooting / 4.21

□ BATTERY VERIFICATION

introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Procedure

The Macintosh Ilsi logic board contains one lithium
battery. This battery maintains the clock and PRAM
while the unit is powered off.

WARNING: Lithium batteries, the type used in the
Macintosh ilsi, have a potential for explosion if improperly
handled. Follow the verification procedure exactly.

Voltmeter

1. Be sure power is off. Remove the top lid .

2. Set the voltmeter range to measure 10 volts DC.

3. Touch and hold the positive probe of the voltmeter
to the positive side of the battery (Figure 4-1).

Figure 4-1 Verifying Battery Voltage

4. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the battery.

5. The reading for a good battery should be above 3.0
volts. If the reading falls below 3.0 volts, replace
the battery. Refer to Section 5, Additional
Procedures, for replacement instructions.

4.22 / Troubleshooting

rev. Aug 91

Macintosh Ilsi

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llsi

Section 5 - Additional Procedures

□ CONTENTS

5.2 Battery Replacement

5.2 Introduction

5.3 Materials Required

5.6 Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.6 Introduction

5.6 Identification

5.6 Upgrades

Note: If a step is underlined, instructions for that step
can be found in Section 2, Take- Apart.

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Additional Procedures / 5.1

□ BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Introduction

Lithium thionyl chloride batteries, the type used in the
Macintosh Classic, have some potential for explosion or
overheating if improperly handled. The following
precautions should be taken when storing, handling, or
disposing of lithium batteries:

• Store lithium batteries in a designated, well-marked
area with limited access.

• Apple's lithium batteries are sealed in individual
zip-lock wrappers. Upon receipt, inspect the
batteries for integrity of their wrappers, and store
them in the same packaging in which they were
received or in a similar closed, heavy plastic bag.

• Lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not
attempt to recharge the battery. Doing so may cause
the battery to overheat or explode.

• Do not allow the leads or terminals to short-circuit.
A short-circuited battery may overheat or explode.

• Replace the battery with the correct Apple
replacement battery only. Using an incorrect battery
or a non-Apple battery may cause the battery to
overheat or explode.

• When installing the battery, ensure the correct
polarity. The polarity markings on the battery must
match those on the battery holder or circuit board.
Failure to observe correct polarity may cause the
battery to overheat or explode.

• If the battery holder was provided with a cover, be
sure to replace it.

• If the dead battery has leads, remove them before
disposing of the battery.

5.2 / Additional Procedures

Oct 90

Macintosh 1 1 si

Materials Required

• Do not dispose of the battery in a fire or incinerator.
Doing so may cause the battery to explode.

• In addition to its explosive potential, lithium is
water-reactive and must be disposed of as a
hazardous waste, as follows:

Place the dead battery into the zip-lock wrapper and
paclu^Lng from which you took the replacement
battery. Mark the battery pack^eZ>£4X) and return
it to Apple for proper disposal Exception: If the
battery is physically damped (for example, leaking),
do not return it to Apple; dispose of the battery
locally accordii^ to your local ordinances.

The long-life lithium battery in the Macintosh Ilsi
should serve many years. Refer to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, to check the condition of the battery.

If the battery should fail for some reason, replace it
according to the following procedure.

Grounded workbench and wriststrap

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions before removing or
replacing the battery. Failure to do so may result in logic
board failure.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Additional Procedures / 5.3

Replace

Macintosh Ilsi

3. On one side of the battery holder, insert a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the top and gently push
the screwdriver down until the side tab pushes out.
The battery holder cover will come loose; do the
same on the other end and remove the cover from
the holder.

4. Grasp the battery between your thumb and
forefinger and lift out the battery.

1. Insert the new battery so the positive side of the
battery is inserted into the positive-marked side of
the holder (Figure 5-1).

CAUTION: Be sure the positive side of the battery is in the
correct location (see Figure 5-1). An incorrectly placed
battery can damage the logic board.

2. Replace the holder cover.

3. Replace the NuBus card , if one was installed, and
the top cover .

4. Set the clock using the Control Panel.

Oct 90 Additional Procedures / 5.5

□ LOGIC BOARD RAM IDENTIFICATION AND UPGRADES

Introduction

Identification

Upgrades

The Macintosh Ilsi contains 1 MB of RAM soldered on
the logic board (bank A). Additional RAM is available
in packages known as single in-line memory modules
(SIMMs), A SIMM is a small circuit board with memory
chips. The memory chips may be surface-mounted, or
they may be mounted through the board. Each SIMM
board has contacts on one edge that fit into the sockets
of bank B on the logic board.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

SIMMs are available with various amounts of RAM and
various speeds.

The four SIMM sockets (bank B) must be empty or be
filled with four same-sized SIMMs (e.g., 256K). You
cannot combine different-sized SIMMs.

IMPORTANT: A single SIMM or a pair of different-size
SIMMs will not function correctly.

You must use 100 ns (or faster) SIMMs on the
Macintosh nsL Slower SIMMs (e.g., 120 ns) will cause
serious timing problems. The RAM speed is usually
indicated by the -xx number after the manufacturer's
part number. For example, -8 indicates 80 ns SIMMs
and -12 indicates 120 ns SIMMs.

Note: when you are removing SIMMs from the logic
board, use the SIMM removal tool. Instructions for
using this tool are located in You Oughta Know.

The following chart summarizes the configurations that
the Macintosh Ilsi supports:

RAM

Bank A

BankB

1 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Empty

2 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Four 256 k SIMMs

3 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Four 512K SIMMs

5 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Four 1 MB SIMMs

9 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Four 2 MB SIMMs

17 MB

1 MB on-board RAM

Four 4 MB SIMMs

5.6 / Additional Procedures

rev. Aug 91

Macintosh Ilsi

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llsi

Illustrated Parts List

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 Macintosh Ilsi - System Exploded View
(Figure 1)

IPL.5 Adapter Cards (Figure 2)

The figures and lists in this section include all piece
parts that can be purchased separately from Apple for the
Macintosh Ilsi, along with their part numbers. These are
the only parts available from Apple. Refer to your Apple
Service Programs manual for prices.

Macintosh Ilsi

Oct 90

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1

□ MACINTOSH llsi - SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 1)

figm

Part No.

Description

602-0164

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height (replaced
by 602-0282 or 602-0308)

—

602-0308

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, 1 -Inch-Height,

without carrier (also used for 19 mm floppy drive)

076-0439

Dust Shield, 1.44 MB Apple SuperDrive, Package of 5

630-5804

Top Case

815-6247

Light Pipe, Power Indicator

810-6030

Fan Assembly

66 I-I 616

Power Supply

661-1615

Logic Board

805-0961

SuperDrive Carrier

661-0474

1.4 MB SuperDrive Mechanism

844-0018

Screw, SuperDrive Carrier to SuperDrive

591-0025

Cable, 1.4 MB SuperDrive, Internal

630-5803

Bottom Case

865-0024

Platinum Foot

810-6031

Speaker/LED Assembly

66 I-O 614

HDA, 40 MB, 3.5-Inch, 1-Inch-Height, SCSI

66 I-O 624

HDA, 80 MB, 3.5-Inch, 1-Inch-Height, SCSI

805-0980

Carrier, HDA, Internal, 3.5-Inch, SCSI

444-6104

Screw, 6 - 32 X 0.250 (HDA carrier to HDA)

591-0027

Cable, HDA, Power

591-0026

Cable, HDA, Internal

699-5071

Microphone Assembly

661-0519

SIMM, 256k, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0646

SIMM, 512K, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0520

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0546

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns. Parity

661-0643

SIMM, 2 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0719

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads)

590-0380

Cable, AC Power, 110 V, Smoke

IMPORTANT: Refer to # Quick Reference: SIMM
Compatibility chart for SIMM compatibility. Follow this
chart carefully! Some SIMMs that may appear to be
interchangeable with others are not.

Macintosh llsi

rev. Jan 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.3

□ ADAPTER CARDS (Figure 2)

Item

Part No.

Descriotlon

450-0032

Thumbscrew, NuBus Adapter Card

661-0645

NuBus Adaptor Card

661-0644

030 Adaptor Card

815-6246

Plastic Bracket, 030 Adapter Card

)

Macintosh llsi

Oct 90

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.5

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 - 1.3 Product Description

Basics 1.3 Features

1.5 Configurations

1.6 Options and Upgrades

1.7 Module Identification

1.9 Connector and Switch Identification

1.12 Theory of Operation

1.12 Introduction

1.12 Macintosh II and IIx Logic Boards

1.21 Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board

1.29 Power Supply

1.29 Floppy Disk Drives

1.29 SCSI Hard Disk Drives

1.30 Functional Overview

1.32 System Software

1.32 System Software 6.0.2

1.33 System Software 6.0.5

1.34 Other Information

1.34 High-Density Media

1.36 Programmer’s Switch

1.37 Materials Required to Service the Macintosh

Il/IIx/IIfx

1.38 Specifications

Section 2 -
Take-Apart

2.3 Top Cover

2.5 Power Supply

2.7 Floppy Disk Drives

2.9 SCSI Hard Disk Drive

2.11 Removing the Drive From Its Carrier

2.11 Replacing the Drive In Its Carrier

2.13 Identifying 20SC Revision A and B Drives

2.15 Drive Mount

2.17 SIMMs

2.21 Logic Board

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Nov 91

Contents / i

Section 3 -

3.3

Introduction to MacTest II/IIx

Diagnostics

3.4

Copying Mactest II/IIx Disk

3.4

Using Your Backup Disk

3.5

Running MacTest II/IIx

3.5

Materials Required

3.5

Starting MacTest II/IIx

3.7

Installing the Loopbacks

3.7

Using the MacTest II/IIx Menus

3.12

Running the Tests

3.14

Diagnostic Sound Sampler

3.14

Introduction

3.14

Materials Required

3.14

Procedure

3.15

Introduction to AppleCAT II/IIx

3.16

Running AppleCAT II/IIx

3.16

Materials Required

3.16

Setting Up Test Station and UUT

3.19

Establishing Communication

3.20

Using the AppleCAT II/IIx Menus

3.23

Running the Tests

3.25

Repair Confirmation Code (RCC)

3.26

SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure

3.26

To Determine If a Jumper Is Needed

3.27

To Install the Jumper

Section 4 -

4.2

Introduction

Troubleshooting

4.2

Before You Start

4.2

How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.2

How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3

Things to Remember

4.5

Module Exchange Information

4.5

Logic Board

4.6

Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.6

Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs

4.7

Startup and Error Chords

4.7

Introduction

4.7

Startup Chord

4.7

Error Chords

4.8

Summary

4.10

Symptom Chart

4.10

System Problems

4.11

Video Problems

4.13

Floppy Disk Drive Problems

4.14

SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.15

Peripheral Problems

4.17

Miscellaneous Problems

4.19

Troubleshooting Flowcharts

ii / Contents

rev. Nov 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Section 5 -

Additional

Procedures

illustrated
Parts List

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

4.28 SIMM Verification

4.28 Introduction

4.28 Isolating a Defective SIMM

4.29 Verification

4.30 Verification Flowchart Notes

4.32 Battery Verification

4.32 Introduction

4.32 Materials Required

4.32 Verification Procedure

4.34 Customer’s Configuration Chart

5.3

Batteries

5.3

Introduction

5.3

Overview

5.5

Battery Holder Board Installation

5.9

Battery Replacement

5.10

Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.10

Introduction

5.10

Identification

5.11

Upgrades

5.12

Logic Board Upgrades

5.12

Macintosh IIx Logic Board Upgrade

5.13

Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board Upgrade

5.14

Macintosh II

5.14

Paged Memory Management Unit Upgrade

5.15

FDHD SuperDrive Upgrade

5.18

Macintosh Ilfx

5.18

SCSI Termination

IPL.3

Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx - System Exploded

View (Figure 1)

IPL.5

Macintosh II - Logic Board (Figure 2)

IPL.7

Macintosh IIx - Logic Board (Figure 3)

IPL.9

Macintosh Ilfx - Logic Board (Figure 4)

IPL.ll

Macintosh Ilfx - Logic Board with Parity
(Figure 5)

IPL.13

Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx - Hard Drives (Figure 6

rev. Nov 91

Contents /

©Apple Computer. Inc. 1990 and 1991. No portion of this document may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleCAT, AppleTalk, A/UX, EtherTalk, HyperCard, ImageWriter,
LaserWriter, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Desktop Bus, AppleColor, FDHD, Finder, MacTest, QuickDraw, and SuperDrive are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Corporation. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox
Corporation. Sony is a trademark of Sony Corporation. NuBus is a trademark of Texas
Instruments. UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX Systems Laboratories. MS-DOS and
Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

iv / Contents

rev. Nov 91

Macintosh li/llx/llfx

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/ilx/llfx

Section 1 - Basics

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

1.3 Product Description
1.3 Features

1.5 Configurations

1.6 Options and Upgrades

1.7 Module Identification

1.9 Connector and Switch Identification

1.12 Theory of Operation

1.12 Introduction

1.12 Macintosh II and IIx Logic Boards

1.21 Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board

1.29 Power Supply

1.29 Floppy Disk Drives

1.29 SCSI Hard Disk Drives

1.30 Functional Overview

1.32 System Software

1.32 System Software 6.0.2

1.33 System Software 6.0.5

1.34 Other Information

1.34 High-Density Media

1.36 Programmer’s Switch

1.37 Materials Required to Service the Macintosh

Il/IIx/IIfx

1.38 Specifications

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .1

Internal Speaker

Figure 1-1

1 .2 / Basics

rev. Aug 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Macintosh® II, IIx, and Ilfx are high-performance,
open-architecture Macintosh computers. As the high-
end computers of the Macintosh line, they were
designed to run existing software while providing the
power, flexibility, and expandability necessary for
future applications.

Features Figure l-l. Features are divided into two categories —

those common to the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx and
features specific to each model. Features common to
each computer include:

• Two RS-422 serial interfaces

• SCSI interface with internal and external connectors

• Floppy interface supporting a maximum of two
drives

• Stereo audio with internal speaker and a connector
for attaching external speakers

• Two Apple Desktop Bus™ interfaces

• Battery backed-up real time clock chip

• Random-access memory packaged as single in-line
memory modules (SIMMs)

• Floating-point math coprocessor

• Supports a maximum of two floppy drives and one
half-height SCSI hard disk drive

• Six NuBus™ expansion slots

• “Soft” power switch

• 120 volt to 240 volt universal power supply

• 512K of ROM

Macintosh II The Macintosh II has these additional features:

• Motorola® MC68020 microprocessor operating at
16 MHz

• Motorola MC68881 math coprocessor

• Address management unit (AMU)

• Optional paged memory management unit (PMMU) to
support multitasking operating systems such as
Apple A/UX®

• 1 megabyte 120-nsec RAM, expandable to
8 megabyte

• One 800K 3.5-inch disk drive (second drive
optional)

• 200 percent faster than a Macintosh SE

• Macintosh system software version 6.0.2 or later

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .3

Macintosh llx

The Macintosh IIx has these additional features:

Macintosh llfx

• Motorola MC68030 microprocessor operating at
16 MHz

• MC68030 has an on-chip paged memory management
unit (PMMU) and a 256-byte data and instruction
cache

• Motorola MC68882 math coprocessor

• 4 megabytes of 100-nsec RAM, expandable to
8 megabytes

• One 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive’’^ (second drive
optional)

• 15 percent faster than Macintosh II

• Macintosh system software version 6.0.2 or later

The Macintosh Ilfx has these additional features:

• Motorola MC68030 microprocessor operating at
40 MHz

• MC68030 has on-chip paged memory management
unit (PMMU) and a 256-byte data and instruction
cache

• Motorola MC68882 math coprocessor

• 4 MB of 80-nsec RAM, expandable to 8 MB

• Two 1.4 MB SuperDrive floppy disk drives

• 120-pin processor-direct slot for high-speed
interfacing to the microprocessor

• SCSI interface supports direct memory access (DMA)
for faster transfers and compatibility with new,
higher-speed peripherals

• I/O processors for the two serial ports, two Apple
Desktop Bus ports, and SCSI port

• 32K of 25-nsec static RAM (data cache)

• 30 to 80 percent faster than Macintosh Ilci

• 130 to 300 percent faster than Macintosh IIx

• NuBus slots that implement 32-bit address and data
paths

• Macintosh system software version 6.0.5 or later

1 .4 / Basics

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Configurations

Macintosh II

Macintosh llx

Macintosh llfx

The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx are available from Apple
in various configurations. These configurations are
described below.

• Single BOOK 3.5-inch floppy disk drive

• Single BOOK 3.5-inch floppy disk drive and 40 MB
hard disk

• Single FDHD SuperDrive

• Single FDHD SuperDrive and BO MB hard disk

• Dual FDHD SuperDrives

• Dual FDHD SuperDrives and BO MB hard disk

• Dual FDHD SuperDrives and l60 MB hard disk

• Dual FDHD SuperDrives and BO MB hard disk with
Apple A/UX

• Dual FDHD SuperDrives, BO MB hard disk, and
parity memory

These are not the only possible configurations. Apple
offers a number of options to enhance the operation and
performance of these systems. These options are
described later in this section. Also, third-party
manufacturers offer a wide variety of products which
can be installed. You may see systems with different
amounts of RAM, different sizes and capacities of hard
disk drives, NuBus cards, and external peripherals.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .5

Options and
Upgrades

Revised
Macintosh H
Logic Board

A/UX Users

1 .6 / Basics

The following options and upgrades are available from

Apple:

• Second internal 800K floppy drive or Apple
SuperDrive

• 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive upgrade for the
Macintosh II

• 20-, 40-, 80-, and l60-megabyte internal and
external SCSI hard disk drives

• 68851 paged memory management unit (PMMU) for
the Macintosh II (required to run Apple A/UX)

• 1-, 2-, and 4-megabyte memory expansion kits

• Macintosh IIx logic board upgrade for the
Macintosh II

• Macintosh Ilfx logic board upgrade for the
Macintosh II and IIx

A revised logic board with upgraded ROMs is available
for the Macintosh II. This logic board has four revision
"B" ROMs. The revised logic board with upgraded
ROMs for the Macintosh II is not necessary unless you
are using a NuBus card that requires more than 1 MB of
address space.

To maintain system functionality, A/UX customers
planning to use the Macintosh IIx or Ilfx and/or Apple
SuperDrive must upgrade A/UX software to version

1 . 0 . 1 .

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Module Identification

An exploded view of the system unit with field
serviceable modules is shown in Figure 1-2. Additional
module identification is available in the Apple Service
Technical Procedures Module Identification manual.
Information in the Module Identification manual
supersedes the information available in this manual.

Figure 1-2

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .7

FDHD and 800K Figure 1-3. The FDHD disk drive cannot be

Drive Identification distinguished from the 800K format disk drive without

first removing the computer’s cover (see Section 2,
Take-Apart). With the cover removed, locate the
microswitches at the front of the drive. The FDHD has
three microswitches; the 800K drive has only two
microswitches.

Figure 1-4. You can also identify a FDHD drive by
checking the manufacturer’s label on the bottom of the
drive; 2MB has been added to the label on all high-
density drives.

SONY® 2MB

MODEL MP-FXXX-XXG

Made in Japan
4-873-458-01

v y

Figure 1-4

1 .8 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Connector and
Switch Identification

Figure 1-5. The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx have six
interface connectors, two power connectors, six NuBus
card openings, and a power switch on their rear panels.
The programmer’s switch is located at the right rear of
the computer. Pin-outs and signal descriptions for the
interface connectors can be found in the Apple Service
Technical Procedures Peripheral Interface Guide.

Figure 1-5

Figure 1-6. The Macintosh Ilfx has six NuBus slots, a
120-pin processor-direct slot; one ROM and eight
DRAM SIMM sockets; and connectors for power, two
floppy drives, the internal speaker, the SCSI hard disk
signal, and the SCSI hard disk power cable.

The Macintosh II and IIx have the same connectors with
two exceptions: The Macintosh II does not have a ROM
SIMM socket, and neither the Macintosh II or IIx have
the 120-pin processor-direct slot.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .9

Two other items concerning the internal connectors
should be noted:

• The SCSI hard disk power connector on the
Macintosh Ilfx is a 2-pin x 2-pin square connector,
while the Macintosh II and IIx use a 4-pin x 1-pin
rectangular connector. Be sure you have the correct
cable when exchanging SCSI hard disks.

• While the Macintosh Ilfx PDS connector is
physically the same as the cache memory card slot in
the Macintosh Ilci, these slots are electrically
different and cards designed for one computer
cannot be used in the other.

CAUTION: If a Macintosh Ilci cache card is installed
in the Macintosh Ilfx expansion slot, or vice-versa,
damage to the card and logic board are likely.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.11

□ THEORY OF OPERATION

Introduction The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx are made up of three

modules: the logic board, power supply, and FDHD
SuperDrive (Macintosh Ilx/IIfx) or 800K disk drive
(Macintosh II). This section presents an overview of
each of these modules and a functional description of
the system as a whole. The main logic boards for the
Macintosh II and IIx are similar and are described
together with differences noted where appropriate.

The Macintosh Ilfx logic board is different and is
described separately. The power supplies and floppy
disk drives used in all three computers are the same
and are described after the logic boards.

The information here will give you an understanding of
how each module of the computer works, as well as
how the system functions. This will assist you in
performing logical troubleshooting of the Macintosh II,
IIx, and Ilfx computers.

Macintosh II
and IIx Logic
Boards

The design and operation of the Macintosh II and IIx
logic boards is very similar. Differences between them
are noted where appropriate. Figure 1-7 is a simplified
block diagram. Figure 1-8 shows the major logic board
components.

Figure 1-7

1.12 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh Il/llx/llfx

Macintosh II and llx

Figure 1-8

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.13

Microprocessor

Math Coprocessor

Address

Management Unit
(Macintosh li oniy)

Paged Memory
Management Unit

The Macintosh II contains a 68020 microprocessor that
supports both 24- and 32-bit processing modes. The
68030 microprocessor in the Macintosh IIx is a true 32-
bit processor, yet it also supports 24- and 32-bit
processing modes. Both microprocessors run at 15.6672
MHz for high performance. When running in the 24-bit
processing mode, the Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx
are compatible with the majority of existing Macintosh
applications.

The 68030 is an enhanced version of the 68020. In
addition to the features of the 68020, the 68030 also
includes an integrated paged memory management unit
(PMMU) to support multitasking operating systems such
as Apple A/UX. The 68030 also features a 256-byte data
cache to provide fast access to commonly used
instructions. This data cache results in approximately a
15 percent increase in performance over the 68020.

The 68881 math coprocessor in the Macintosh II and the
68882 coprocessor in the Macintosh IIx are IEEE P754
standard floating-point ICs. Each provides a high
degree of precision and speed for Macintosh programs.

The address management unit (AMU) is in the
Macintosh II only. The AMU, also called the Hochsprung
memory management unit (HMMU), allows the Macintosh
II to run Macintosh software in the 24-bit address mode of
68000-based Macintoshes, and run Macintosh II software
in the 32-bit address mode.

The 68851 paged memory management unit (PMMU) is
available as an option to replace the HMMU in the
Macintosh II. In the Macintosh IIx, the PMMU is an
integral part of the 68030 microprocessor. The PMMU,
in addition to providing 24- to 32-bit address
translation, also provides memory management
capabilities to support multitasking capabilities such as
virtual, protected, and shared memory. These features
allow the use of the UNIX® operating system in the
form of Apple A/UX in addition to the Macintosh
operating system and compatibility with older
applications.

1.14/ Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

GLU Chip

RAM

ROM-
Macintosh II

The general logic unit (GLU) IC is an Apple-designed
custom gate array that performs a variety of support
functions for the microprocessor. The GLU chip
provides address decoding and chip select; RAM refresh;
CPU, see, and VIA clock signal generation; and NuBus,
VIA, see, power, and NMI switch interrupt handling.

Random-access memory (RAM) is provided in packages
known as single in-line memory modules (SIMMs). Each
SIMM consists of a small printed circuit board with
various configurations of surface-mounted dynamic RAM
(DRAM) chips. On one edge of each SIMM is a contact
that fits into the SIMM sockets located on the logic
board.

The amount of RAM on the logic board can be changed
by installing the same size SIMMs in either Bank A or
B, with the larger RAM size in Bank A (the first four
rows closest to the edge of the board).

Various RAM configurations are possible, depending on
how many SIMMs are used and on the size of the DRAM
chips.

Every time the Macintosh II or IIx is powered on, the
system ROMs performs a memory test to determine how
much RAM is present in the machine.

The Macintosh II has 256K of nonvolatile read-only
memory. Four 512K x 8-bit dual-in line (DIP) devices
are used. All four ROMs are read simultaneously,
providing a 32-bit data word. These ROMs contain the
Macintosh ToolBox, operating system support,
diagnostics, and self-tests.

ROM replacement and upgrades are performed by
replacing one or more ROMs. The Macintosh II logic
board is designed to also accept 1 megabit (128K
X 8-bit) devices providing a maximum of 512K of ROM.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.15

ROM-
Macintosh llx

Versatile

Interface

Adapters

Real-Time

Clock

The Macintosh IIx has 256K of nonvolatile read-only
memory. Four 512K x 8-bit surface-mount devices are
used. These four ROMs are then attached to a small
printed circuit board for installation in the ROM SIMM
socket provided. All four ROMs are read
simultaneously, providing a 32-bit data word. These
ROMs contain the Macintosh ToolBox, operating system
support, diagnostics, and self-tests. These ROM chips
also include code supporting the FDHD disk drive and
SWIM disk controller chip.

ROM replacement and upgrades are performed by
replacing the entire ROM SIMM. The Macintosh IIx
logic board is designed to also accept 1 megabit (128K
X 8-bit) devices providing a maximum of 512K of ROM.

The Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx contain two
SY6522A versatile interface adapters (VI As). These
chips, known as VIAl and VIA2, provide maximum
compatibility with existing Macintosh software.

VIAl provides the system with most of the signals from
the 68000-based Macintosh configuration. It also
provides access to new features, including an Apple
Desktop Bus interrupt and a synchronous modem signal.

VIA2 controls the HMMU (Macintosh II only); decodes
the NuBus slot interrupts, a SCSI interrupt, and the
Apple sound chip interrupt; powers the unit off; blocks
NuBus accesses to RAM; and determines errors that
occur in NuBus transactions.

The real-time clock is an Apple-custom chip. It contains
256 bytes of RAM that is powered by two lithium
batteries when external power is turned off. These
RAM bytes are called parameter RAM. They store the
configuration of ports, the clock setting, and other data
that need to be preserved even when external AC
power is not available.

1.16/ Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Input / Output
Interfaces

RS-422 Serial
Interfaces

The Macintosh II and IIx, like all Macintosh computers,

contain a number of input/output interfaces:

• Two RS-422 serial ports - The serial ports include
support for a synchronous modem and are controlled
by the serial communications controller (SCO
circuitry.

• Two Apple Desktop Bus ports - This is a low-speed
serial interface that provides communication
between the CPU and input devices.

• Floppy disk interface - The Macintosh IIx floppy
interface can support two internal FDHD disk drives
and is controlled by the SWIM chip. The Macintosh
II floppy interface can support two internal BOOK
disk drives and is controlled by the IWM chip.

• SCSI interface - Supports an optional internal SCSI
hard drive and up to six additional external SCSI
devices. This interface is controlled by the 53C80
SCSI controller circuitry.

• Stereo sound port - The Macintosh II and IIx have
stereo sound capability. Sound is controlled by the
Apple and Sony™ Sound Chip circuitry.

• NuBus expansion interface - The Macintosh II and
IIx have six NuBus expansion slots. NuBus is a 32-
bit bus designed by Texas Instruments for system
expansion.

The two serial ports are controlled by an 8530 serial
communications controller (SCC). Port 1, the modem
port, can be programmed for asynchronous or
synchronous protocols. Port 2, the printer port, can be
programmed for asynchronous or AppleTalk® operation.
The serial ports conform to the EIA RS-422 standard.
These ports are used mainly for (though not limited to)
connecting the Macintosh II and IIx to AppleTalk
networks, serial printers, and modems.

The Macintosh II and IIx use two mini DIN-8 connectors
for the two ports. These are the same connectors found
on all Macintosh computers since the Macintosh Plus.
The ports provide an output handshake but do not
provide the +5 and +12 volts found on the Macintosh
128K, 512K, and 512K enhanced serial ports.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.17

Apple

Desktop Bus

Floppy Interface -
Macintosh II

The Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) is a low-speed serial
communication bus used to connect input devices to the
computer. ADB can be used to connect devices such as
keyboards and pointing devices. ADB devices connect
to the computer via a mini DIN-4 connector on the rear
panel.

All devices that are made for the Apple Desktop Bus
have some kind of microprocessor that makes them
intelligent devices. All external ADB devices, except
the mouse, have a second ADB connector for connecting
to other ADB devices. Because it has no connector, the
mouse must be the last device attached to the Apple
Desktop Bus.

The Macintosh II is capable of supporting two internal
800K 3.5-inch drives. The disk interface uses the Apple
custom “Integrated Woz Machine” (IWM) chip to control
the drives. Together with the VIA, the IWM generates
all the signals needed to read, write, format, and eject
disks. The disk interface on the Macintosh II supports
up to two internal drives and no external drives.

The IWM is clocked at 15.6672 MHz, which is twice the
frequency used in previous Macintosh systems. An
internal "divide by two" circuit is used to access 400K
or 800K drives.

An upgrade is available that allows the Macintosh II to
use the 1.4 MB FDHD SuperDrive. The upgrade
replaces the IWM with a SWIM disk controller and
includes new system ROMs with extensions to support
the new disk controller and high-density drive.

1.18/ Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Floppy Interface -
Macintosh llx

Small Computer
System Interface
(SCSI)

The SWIA^ chip in the Macintosh IIx is a complete
multimode floppy disk interface on a single IC. The
SWIM is an enhanced version of its predecessor, the
IWM, found in the Macintosh, Macintosh Plus, SE, and
II. The SWIM chip incorporates the features of the
IWM and provides the additional capability to read,
write, and format in both group coded recording (GCR)
and modified frequency modulation (MEM) data formats.
The SWIM chip interprets, converts, and outputs dual-
disk (clock/time) and file (data) signals as appropriate
for either GCR (variable rotational speed) or MEM
(constant rotational speed) format. This arrangement
provides the capability to read, write, and format Apple
400K and 800K data disks (GCR), MS-DOS 720K data
disks (MEM), and Apple or MS-DOS high-density (1.4
MB) data disks (MEM). The disk interface on the
Macintosh IIx supports up to two internal drives and no
external drives.

The Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) consists
of the 53C80 SCSI controller IC, an internal 50-pin
connector to connect an optional internal SCSI hard
disk, and an external DB-25 connector to attach up to
six additional external SCSI devices. The SCSI
controller is connected directly to both connectors, and
it controls the high-speed parallel port for
communicating with up to seven SCSI peripherals. Each
SCSI device has a unique address. This address is used
to direct information between devices. The Macintosh
computer is always address 7. The optional internal
hard disk is address 0. External SCSI devices can be
addressed from 0 to 6. (If an internal hard disk is
installed, address 0 cannot be used.)

The Apple SCSI interface differs from the industry SCSI
standard in two ways:

• A DB-25 connector is used instead of the standard
50-pin “D” connector to attach external SCSI
devices. The Apple SCSI System Cable is available
to convert the connector to the standard.

• Power for termination resistors is not provided. If
the attached SCSI device does not have the required
terminator resistor, the external device must either
include a built-in terminator or provide power for
an external terminator.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.19

stereo The Apple sound chip generates a stereo audio signal.

Sound Port This signal is buffered by two Sony audio chips that

filter the pulse-width-modulated (PWM) signal and
drive the internal speaker (mono) or external audio
port (stereo).

NuBus The Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx have six expansion

Interface slots to support Apple standard peripherals and increase

RAM size. Each expansion slot is a 96-pin DIN
connector that uses the NuBus interface to communicate
with the system. The following are a few of the cards
that will go into the NuBus slots:

• Video cards

• Coprocessor cards

• RAM cards

• Ethernef*^”, Token Ring, and other network
interface cards

• Data acquisition cards

The NuBus has three major states of communication
with the Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx systems:

• Processor Bus to NuBus, which is activated
whenever the microprocessor generates a physical
slot address. If a device responds, the data is
transferred.

• NuBus to Processor Bus, which is for access to
RAM, ROM, and I/O to and from NuBus. Two
control functions are being performed for this
process. One tracks the changes on NuBus, and the
other lets the 68020/68030 tell NuBus what to do
next.

• NuBus timeout, which is required to prevent access
to empty slots. Accessing empty slots would hang
the system.

Every NuBus card should contain a ROM that provides
information to the operating system at startup. The
ROM information ensures that drivers are properly
installed and that the card is initialized and recognized
by the system.

1.20 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh il/llx/llfx

)

Macintosh lifx
Logic Board

There are two versions of the Macintosh Ilfic logic
board — one with the parity generator chip (PGC) and
one without. The logic boards are identical in all other
respects. Figure 1-9 shows the major logic board
components. Figure 1-10 is a simplified block diagram.

)

SCSI/DMA Apple SWIM SWIM PIC Serial PIC

see

VIA

DRAM

SIMMs

Fast

Memory

Controller

MC68030

ACT2157

Cache

Tag

Figure 1-9

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Mar 92

Basics / 1 .21

Figure 1-10

1.22/ Basics

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Microprocessor

Math Coprocessor

Operating System
Support (OSS)
ASIC

RAM

The Macintosh Ilfx contains a Motorola MC68030 1 6 -bit
microprocessor operating at 33 MHz. This processor is
completely software compatible with all versions of the
68000, 68020, and 68030 used in other computers in the
Macintosh family. The Macintosh Ilfx will run most
existing Macintosh applications without modification.

Another feature of the 68030 is burst-mode memory
access. This method of accessing memory allows the
processor to read and write groups of instructions or
data in less time than reading and writing individually.
When the instruction or data to be fetched isn’t in
either the internal 256-byte or the external 32K cache,
the processor performs a burst-mode access and fetches
four long-words (32-bit words) from memory. Data
latches are also used to improve throughput during
memory writes.

The 68882 math coprocessor in the Macintosh Ilfx is an
IEEE P754 standard floating-point IC. The 68882
provides a high degree of precision and speed for
Macintosh programs.

The operating system support (OSS) IC performs a
variety of support functions for the system. The OSS
includes elements of the 65C22 VIA, I/O device
decoding and timing, interrupt prioritization and
masking, a 56-bit system counter, bus timeout logic,
interface support for the real time clock chip, and
DSACK generation.

Random-access memory for the Macintosh Ilfx is
provided using the same SIMM technology that is used
in the Macintosh II and IIx. However, the manner in
which the microprocessor accesses this memory is
different. In the Macintosh II and IIx, the 68020/68030
reads and writes memory via the same data bus. In the
Macintosh Ilfx, memory reads and writes occur on
separate data buses. This separation allows memory to
be read and written simultaneously.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .23

RAM Cache

Fast Memory
Controller (FMC)

Parity Generator
Chip (PGC)

The amount of RAM on the logic board can be changed
by installing the same size SIMMs in either Bank A or
B, with the larger RAM size in Bank A (the four
sockets nearest the rear of the computer). Although the
rules for configuring memory are the same for the
Macintosh Ilfx as for the Macintosh II and IIx, the
possible memory configurations are different. This is
because the Macintosh Ilfx cannot use 25 6K SIMMs.
Therefore, it is not possible to have 1-, 2-, or 5-
megabyte systems.

Every time the Macintosh Ilfx is powered on, the
system software performs a memory test to determine
how much RAM is present in the machine.

The Macintosh Ilfx has a 32K RAM cache for storing the
most frequently used data and instructions. This cache
is an extension of the 68030’s internal 256-byte cache.
The RAM cache is made up of four 8K x 8-bit static
RAMs and an ACT2157 cache tag. The cache tag serves
as a pointer for the CPU to locate information stored in
the RAM cache. This RAM cache can be accessed by the
CPU in 25 nsec (vs. 60 or 80 nsec for SIMM RAM
accesses) with no wait states.

The Fast (Fitch) Memory Controller (FMC) is an
integrated dynamic RAM and cache memory controller.
It supports the MC68030 microprocessor’s burst mode
to access memory. The FMC supports two banks of 1-,
4-, or l6-megabit DRAMs and caches up to 128K.

The FMC also requires several other support ICs — the
tag RAM, four static RAMs (cache memory), and four
data latches.

The Macintosh Ilfx can be ordered with a parity
checking option. Parity is generated by the parity
generator chip (PGC). If the parity chip is installed and
parity checking is required, then the system must use
9-bit DRAM SIMMs. If parity checking is not needed,
then 8-bit DRAMs can be used and parity checking will
not take place.

1 .24 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ii/ilx/llfx

ROM

Peripheral Interface
Controllers

If the PGC is present, the parity bit is always written.
If the bit is not physically present (not using 9-bit
SIMMs), it is ignored. If 9-bit SIMMs are being used
when a read takes place in the RAM address space, the
PGC generates an internal parity bit from each byte of
the data bus, and compares it to the bit read from the
SIMM’s parity bit. If the two parity bits do not agree
and parity is enabled, the PGC generates two outputs:
one that interrupts the processor and the other that
indicates a parity error. If a parity error occurs, the
system will have to be reset.

The Macintosh Ilfx has 256K of nonvolatile read-only
memory. Four 512K x 8-bit surface-mount ROMs are
used. These four ROMs are then attached to a small
printed circuit board for installation in the ROM SIMM
socket. All four ROMs are read simultaneously,
providing a 32-bit data word. These ROMs contain the
Macintosh ToolBox; operating system support; 32-bit
QuickDraw™; support for 32-bit addressing, the
peripheral interface controllers, and SCSI DMA; FDHD
SuperDrive extensions; diagnostics; and self-tests.

ROM replacement and upgrades are performed by
replacing the entire ROM SIMM. The Macintosh Ilfx
logic board is designed to accept 1-megabit (128K x 8-
bit) devices providing 512K of ROM.

The Macintosh Ilfx is the first Macintosh computer to
include dedicated I/O processors. An input/output
processor (lOP) is a processor dedicated to a specific
task or tasks that are normally performed by the main
CPU. In all previous Macintosh computers, low-level
communications with external devices were handled by
the main processor. This resulted in reduced
performance since each time a peripheral required
attention, the main processor was diverted from its
primary function — running applications. lOPs provide
the ability to off-load some of the support required by
the peripheral device interfaces. A total of three lOPs
are utilized in the Macintosh Ilfx. Two lOPs are
implemented as stand-alone peripheral interface
controllers (PICs). One PIC supports the 8530 serial
communications controller (SCC); the other supports the
SWIM disk controller and Apple Desktop Bus interface.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .25

The third lOP is included in the same IC as the 5380
SCSI controller. This chip is described later in this
section.

Each PIC includes a 65CX02 microprocessor operating
at 2 MHz, a l6-bit timer, two DMA controllers, two
digital phase-locked loops (DPLLs), and a RAM
expansion bus to support an external 43256 32K x 8-bit
static RAM. The PIC communicates with the host 68030
via this RAM.

Real-Time

Clock

The real-time clock is the same custom Apple chip as
in the Macintosh II and IIx. Refer to the Macintosh
II/IIx logic board theory of operation for information
on the real-time clock.

Input / Output
Interfaces

• Two RS-422 serial ports - The serial ports include
support for a synchronous modem and are controlled
by the Serial Communications Controller (SCC),
Peripheral Interface Controller (PIC), and associated
circuitry.

• Floppy disk interface - The Macintosh Ilfx floppy
interface can support two internal FDHD disk drives
and is controlled by the SWIM and a second PIC
chip.

• SCSI interface — The Macintosh Ilfx SCSI interface
supports an optional internal SCSI hard drive and up
to six additional external SCSI devices. This
interface is controlled by the SCSI/DMA controller
chip.

• Apple Desktop Bus - This is a low-speed serial
interface used to provide communication between
the CPU and input devices.

• Stereo sound port - The Macintosh Ilfx has stereo
sound capability. Sound is controlled by the Apple
and Sony Sound Chip circuitry.

The Macintosh Ilfx has the same input/output interfaces
as the Macintosh II and IIx. However, each interface —
except the stereo sound port — has been enhanced to
improve performance.

1 .26 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

RS-422 Serial
Interfaces

Apple Desktop Bus
Interface

Floppy Interface

• 120-pin processor direct slot - This expansion slot
provides direct access to the MC68030
microprocessor bus and allows high-speed
interaction.

• NuBus expansion interface - The Macintosh Ilfx
uses the same NuBus expansion interface as on the
Macintosh II and IIx. The Ilfx implementation
supports full 32-bit address and data paths. In
addition, the processor-to-NuBus interface has
several new custom chips that have replaced
discrete components.

The two RS-422 serial interfaces are the same as those
on the Macintosh II and IIx with one exception — to
improve throughput on the Ilfx, an input/output
processor has been added. Refer to the Macintosh
II/IIx logic board theory of operation for information
on the RS-422 interfaces. Information on the serial lOP
can be found in “Peripheral Interface Controllers”
earlier in this section.

The Apple Desktop Bus interface on the Macintosh Ilfx
functions identically to the ADB interface on the
Macintosh II and IIx. However, ADB functions are
included in the SWIM/ADB lOP. Refer to the
Macintosh II/IIx logic board theory of operation for
information on the Apple Desktop Bus interface.
Information on the SWIM/ADB lOP can be found in
“Peripheral Interface Controllers” earlier in this
section.

The floppy interface used in the Macintosh Ilfx uses the
same SWIM disk controller chip used in the Macintosh
IIx. Improved performance is provided by the
SWIM/ADB lOP. Refer to the Macintosh II/IIx logic
board theory of operation for information on the floppy
interface. Information on the SWIM/ADB lOP can be
found in “Peripheral Interface Controllers” earlier in
this section.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .27

SCSI DMA

Stereo Sound
Port

Processor
Direct Slot

NuBus Interface

A custom version of the NCR 53C80 SCSI controller is
provided in the Macintosh Ilfic. This Apple-designed
ASIC includes the circuitry of the 53C80 plus direct
memory access (DMA) support and a peripheral
interface controller. This combination provides a high
speed interface between the Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI) and the 68030 bus. Data transfers and
bus arbitration are handled independently from the
MC68030. This new SCSI/DMA chip is fully compatible
with all features of and software written for the 53C80
SCSI chip. SCSI transfer times can be increased by up
to 400 percent. The SCSI/DMA chip also supports
greater bandwidth to support the future generation of
higher-speed SCSI devices.

The Apple and Sony Sound Chips used in the Macintosh
Ilfx are the same as in the Macintosh II and IIx. Refer
to the Macintosh II/IIx logic board theory of operation
for information on the sound chips.

The processor direct slot provides direct access to
the MC68030 microprocessor bus. Providing direct
access to the CPU bus rather than going through NuBus
results in increased throughput for the device. This
slot is similar to the PDS slot in the Macintosh SE/30
except they operate at different clock speeds.

Note that this slot is not electrically compatible with
the Ilci cache card slot — cards cannot be interchanged
between systems. Logic board damage can occur if a
Macintosh Ilex cache card is installed in a Macintosh
Ilfx or vice-versa.

To prevent the installation of all six NuBus cards plus a
PDS-type card, the PDS slot has been aligned with
NuBus slot E. This allows only a PDS-type card and
five NuBus cards or six NuBus cards to be installed.

The six NuBus slots on the Macintosh Ilfx function the
same as the slots in the Macintosh II and IIx. However,
a number of discrete components used to implement the
NuBus interface have been combined into three new
parts.

1.28/ Basics

Mar 90

Madrrtosh ll/llx/iifx

NuBus Bus
Interface Units
(BIUs)

NuBus Clock
Generator

Power Supply

Floppy Disk Drives

SCSI Hard
Disk Drives

NuBus interface support is provided by two ASICs —
BIU30 and BIU2. These two ICs provide the interface
between NuBus and the 68030. BIU30 contains the
control circuitry and latches for part of the address and
data bus. BIU2 contains the latches for the balance of
the address and data bus.

The NuBus clock generator generates the 10 MHz
NuBus clock signal and monitors the NuBus control
signals.

The power supply is a self-configuring switching-type
supply that operates on AC line voltages from and 90 to
140 VAC and 170 to 270 VAC. The supply outputs +5V,
+12V, and -12V DC voltages, which are used by the
logic board, fan, internal disk drives, peripheral ports,
and NuBus slots.

Floppy disk drives for the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx
are available in two capacities — 800K and 1.4 MB. The
Macintosh II is shipped to support the 800K drive. An
upgrade that supports the 1.4 MB drive is available.
The Macintosh IIx and Macintosh Ilfx are shipped with
1.4 MB drives and can use either 1.4 MB or 800K
drives.

Each internal floppy disk drive connects to the logic
board through a 20-pin connector. The flow of data
between the logic board and the disk drives is
channeled through the IWM or SWIM disk controller.
The IWM/SWIM controls reading and writing
operations.

The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx can be equipped with a
single, internal 3.5- or 5.25-inch half-height SCSI hard
disk drive. For information on SCSI hard disk drives,
refer to Apple Technical Procedures, “SCSI Hard Disk
Drives. ”

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1.29

Functional Overview

Power Control

System Startup

The following section describes the operation of the
power control circuitry and the events that occur
during system startup.

The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx have a hardware-
on/software-off circuit to control the power supply.

There are two power switches on the system: one on
the rear of the Macintosh II (power on and oj/), and a
second (power on only) on the Apple Desktop Bus
keyboard.

The computer can be powered on by either pressing the
power switch at the rear of the computer or the switch
on the Apple Desktop Bus keyboard.

The computer can be turned off by either selecting Shut
Down from the Finder^’s Special menu or by pressing
the power switch at the rear of the computer.
Occasionally, severe software crashes can cause both of
these methods to be inoperative. If the system crashes
and cannot be powered-off using one of these methods,
the computer should be unplugged. However, it is
recommended that the system always be turned off by
using the Shut Down command. Using Shut Down
enables the computer to save valuable file and folder
information before finishing.

The power supply is designed to protect itself and the
computer by shutting down if excessive heat, a short
circuit, or an excessive power drain is experienced.
After allowing the system to cool down, removing the
short circuit, or removing some of the load, the system
can be turned on again.

An elaborate series of events occurs inside a Macintosh
II, IIx, or Ilfx when the system is first turned.
Understanding what happens during this process can be
useful in quickly pinpointing the source of problems
that occur during system startup.

1 .30 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

when the computer is turned on, the system begins a
carefully synchronized sequence of events. First, the
processor is held in a wait state while a series of
circuits puts the system in a known state in preparation
for operation. During this time, the versatile interface
adapter and the SWIM chip are initialized, and the
mapping of RAM and ROM is altered temporarily in
order to test the system.

The software contained in the system ROMs then
performs a RAM test to determine how much RAM is
present and to verify the proper operation of that RAM.
Several other system tests are then performed. When
the system is fully tested and initialized, system RAM
is mapped for normal operation.

At this point the disk startup process begins. The
system looks for a readable disk in the available disk
drives in the following order;

1. Internal floppy disk drives — right drive first,
followed by the left drive

2. Startup device set in the control panel

3. SCSI devices — starting with internal drive, then in
declining order of device ID (6 to 0)

Note: The startup device will default to the device with
SCSI address 0 if the lithium batteries are exhausted.

Once a readable disk containing boot tracks and a
System Folder are found, the disk is read and the disk
startup process is completed.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .31

□ SYSTEM SOFTWARE

System Software

6.0.2

Installation

Materials Required

Procedure

The Macintosh II and IIx operate using Macintosh
Operating System version 6.0.2 or later. Installation
procedures for version 6.0.2 are provided here for
reference.

Before beginning to install system software, be sure to
make backup copies of the system software disks and
use the copies to perform the installation.

Macintosh System Software (version 6.0.2 or later)

System Tools, Printing Tools, Utilities 1, and Utilities 2

1. Insert the System Tools disk in any available floppy
disk drive.

2. Turn on the computer by pressing the power switch.

3. When the desktop appears, double-click on the
System Tools disk to open it.

4. Double-click on the Setup Folder to open it.

5. Double-click on the Installer to launch it.

6. Select the disk you want to install system software
onto. The name of the currently selected disk
appears above the buttons on the right side. If it’s
not the disk you want, click Drive until you see the
name of the disk you want.

7. Select the type of computer you are installing
system software on.

8. Click Install. The installer will place a complete set
of system software for the computer on the selected
disk.

9. When the Installation was successftil message
appears, click Quit.

10. Choose Restart from the Special menu. The
computer reboots.

1 .32 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

System Software
6.0.5

Installation

Materials Required

Procedure

Macintosh Ilfx systems require Macintosh Operating
System version 6.0.5 or later. Systems ordered with
either the 80- or I 6 O-MB internal SCSI hard disk drive
factory-installed will have the operating system and
HyperCard® installed. If replacement of the hard drive
becomes necessary, you should follow these procedures
to install the operating system and HyperCard on the
replacement drive.

Before beginning to install system software, be sure to
make backup copies of the system software disks and
use the copies to perform the installation.

Macintosh System Software (version 6.0.5 or later)

System Tools, Printing Tools, Utilities 1, and Utilities 2
HyperCard software

1. Insert the System Tools disk in any available floppy
disk drive.

2. Turn on the computer by pressing the power switch.

3 . When the desktop appears, double-click on the
System Tools disk to open it.

4. Double-click on the Installer to launch it.

5. When the welcome screen appears, click OK.

6. Select the disk you want to install system software
onto. The name of the currently selected disk
appears next to the disk icon. If it’s not the disk
you want, click Switch Disk until you see the name
of the disk you want.

7. Click Install. The installer will place a complete set
of system software for the computer and printer
software for all Apple printers on the selected disk.

8. When the Installation was successhil message
appears, click Quit.

9. Choose Restart from the Special menu. The
computer reboots.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .33

10. when the desktop appears, create a new folder on
the hard disk. Name the folder HyperCard.

11. Copy the four HyperCard floppy disks to the hard
disk.

System software and HyperCard installation is
complete.

□ OTHER INFORMATION

High-Density The FDHD SuperDrive can read, write, and format 400K

Media and 800K disks. However, special high-density, 3.5-

inch disks that take full advantage of the increased
capacity of the FDHD SuperDrive are also available. To
avoid media-related problems when using the FDHD
SuperDrive disk drive, Apple advises using high-
density media bearing the Apple label.

DRIVE AND MEDIA COMPATIBILITY MATRIX

Drive/Format

Media

Single-Sided

Double-Sided

High-Density

400K (GCR)

R/W/F

R/W/F (400K
format only)

800K (GCR)

R/W/F

1.4 MB (MFM)

R/W/F

1 .4 MB (MFM)

R/W (720K Media)

LEGEND: R = Read
W = Write
F = Format
X = Not Allowed
N R = Not Recommended
GC R = Apple Data Format
M F M= IBM Data Format

Figure 1-11

1 .34 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Figure 1-11. As shown in the drive and media
compatibility matrix, 400K drives can read, write, and
format single-sided media and double-sided media (in
400K format only). The 800K drives can also read,
write, and format single- and double-sided media.
However, Apple does not recommend using high-density
media in either 400K or 800K disk drives. Data saved
to high-density media using 400K or 800K drives is
unreliable and could be lost later. The 1.4 MB drives
can read, write, and format single-sided, double-sided,
and high-density media. In addition, 1.4 MB drives can
read and write 720K, double-sided MFM format media
(MS-DOS and OS/2).

CAUTION: High-density media are more likely to have
problems than low-density media. To avoid media-
related problems, use only known-good media or high-
density media bearing the Apple label.

Note: To help understand drive and media format
compatibility, try thinking in terms of the drive/media
of lowest capacity. For example, if your system has both
an 800K drive and an FDHD SuperDrive, to ensure media
format compatibility between the two drives you must
use 800K media (the drive and media of lowest capacity).

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .35

Programmer’s Switch

Figure 1-12. The programmer’s switch can be used to
reset the computer, place the computer in test monitor
mode, or generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) to the
microprocessor for software and hardware development.

• Reset switch - Pressing the reset switch resets the
microprocessor and reboots the computer. Doing so
causes any information in system RAM to be lost,

• Interrupt switch - Pressing the interrupt switch
generates a nonmaskable interrupt. If the interrupt
switch is pressed while the computer is booting, the
self-test monitor will be entered. The self-test
monitor is a program in system ROM that allows
another computer to communicate directly with the
Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx hardware to run
diagnostics.

Figure 1-12

1 .36 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/Ilx/llfx

Materials Required
to Service the
Macintosh ll/ltx/llfx

A minimum of tools are required to maintain and repair
the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx.

• *2 Phillips screwdriver

• Flat-blade screwdriver

• Grounded workstation pad

• Grounding wriststrap

• MacTest™ and AppleCAT® II/IIx

(Macintosh II and IIx)

• MacTest Ilfx (Macintosh Ilfx)

Certain procedures require other items such as
software or manuals. These items will be indicated
where required.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .37

□ SPECIFICATIONS

Macintosh n

Macintosh nx

Macintosh n£x

Processor

Type

MC68020

MC68030

Addressing

32-bit registers
32-bit address bus
32-bit data bus

Clock Rate

15.6772 MHz

40 MHz

Memory

RAM

1 MB standard

Four 256 k SIMMs;
expandable to

8 MB

1 MB standard

Four 256 k SIMMs;
expandable to

8 MB

4 MB standard

Four 1 MB SIMMs;
expandable to

8 MB

256-byte parameter
RAM

32K RAM cache

Four 8K X 8-bit
static RAMs

ROM

256k

Four 512K X 8-bit
DIP devices

256k

Four 512K x 8-bit
SOJ devices on a
ROM SIMM

256k

Four 512K X 8-bit
SOJ devices on a
ROM SIMM

I/O interfaces

Floppy

Disk Interface

Apple IWM chip
GCR modes

Apple SWIM chip
MFM/GCR modes
Support 800K and

1.4 MB drives

Apple SWIM chip
MFM/GCR modes
Support 800K and

1.4 MB drives

Expansion

Interface

120-pin processor
direct slot

SCSI Interface

7.5 MB/second
transfer rate

3 MB/second
transfer rate

1 .38 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

SCSI Interface
(continued)

Apple Desktop
Bus

Serial Interfaces

Stereo Audio

Floppy Disk Drive

800K Disk Drive

FDHD SuperDrive

Electrical

Line voltage

Line Frequency

Power

Altitude

Supports a maximum of 8 devices (The computer is always
device 7. Optional internal SCSI hard disk drive is device 0.)

Low-speed, synchronous serial interface

Two RS-232/RS-422
230.4K baud maximum

0.920 Mbit/second if external clock source is provided (modem
interface only)

Asynchronous, synchronous (modem only), and AppleTalk
(printer only) protocols supported

Stereo compatible

Output impedance of 8 to 600 ohms

Short-circuit protected

Disables internal speaker when in use

4-voice wave-table synthesis and stereo sampling generator

512 bytes per sector
9 sectors per track
368.64K/side
737.28K/disk

512 bytes per sector
18 sectors per track
737.28K/side
l474.56K/disk

90 to 140 VAC and 170 to 270 VAC, self-configuring power
supply

48 to 62 Hz

230 watts (maximum), not including monitor
0 to 10,000 feet

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Basics / 1 .39

Environmental

Operating

10° C to 35° C

Temperature

50° F to 95° F

Storage

-40° C to 47° C

Temperature

-40° F to 116.6° F

Relative

Humidity

5% to 95% noncondensing

Altitude

0 to 10,000 feet

0 to 3048 m

Physical

Dimensions

Weight

Width 18.66 in (474 mm)

Height 5.51 in (140 mm)

Depth 14.37 in (365 mm)

24 to 26 lbs. (10.9 to 11.8 kg)

Weight varies depending on configuration of RAM, floppy
drives, and hard drives. Does not include any NuBus
expansion cards.

1 .40 / Basics

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Section 2 - Take-Apart

□ CONTENTS

2.3 Top Cover

2.5 Power Supply

2.7 Floppy Disk Drives

2.9 SCSI Hard Disk Drive

2.11 Removing the Drive From Its Carrier

2.11 Replacing the Drive in Its Carrier

2.13 Identifying 20SC Revision A and B Drives

2.15 Drive Mount

2.17 SIMMs

2.21 Logic Board

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Aug 91

Take-Apart / 2.1

2.2 / Take-Apart

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ TOP COVER

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Turn off the computer, and disconnect all cables
except the power cord from the rear of the
computer.

2. Figure 2-lA. Remove the Phillips screw located at
the center-rear of the top cover.

3. Figure 2-1 A. Locate the two tabs at the rear of the
computer that secure the top cover to the case, one
on each side.

4. Figure 2-lB. Simultaneously push the tabs in with
your index fingers and lift the top cover, back first,
from the computer. No force is necessary. (Do not
push down on the top of the computer with your
thumbs.)

CAUTION: Do not rotate the rear of the top cover
more than 45 degrees. Rotating the cover more than
45 degrees will cause damage to the floppy disk
drives.

1. Figure 2-lC. Position the top cover on the case,
front first. Be sure to align the three notches on
the front of the cover with the three tabs on the
case.

CAUTION: Sheet metal tabs on the inside of the top
cover can be bent out of place easily and can damage
the floppy disk drives. Before replacing the top cover,
make sure none of the sheet metal tabs are bent
inward, toward the center of the cover.

2. Lower the top cover until the rear tabs snap into
position.

3. Replace the top cover screw.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Take-Apart / 2.3

(

Figure 2-2

(

2.4 / Take-Apart

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ POWER SUPPLY

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

Grounded workstation pad and wriststrap
#2 Phillips screwdriver
Small, flat-blade screwdriver

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Verify that the power is off and disconnect the
power cord.

3. Figure 2-2A. Disconnect the power supply cable
from the logic board. If necessary, use a small flat-
blade screwdriver to pry the cable loose.

4. Fig;ure 2-2B. Remove the Phillips screw that holds
the power supply in place.

5. Figure 2-2C. Slide the power supply toward the
front of the case, and lift the power supply, front
first, from the case.

1. Lower the power supply into the case, so that the
AC connectors align with the holes in the back
panel. Press down and slide the power supply
toward the back panel until the screw tab on the
power supply aligns with the screw hole on the
case.

2. Replace the Phillips screw that holds the power
supply in place.

3. Connect the power supply cable to the logic board.

4. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh li/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Take- Apart / 2.5

2.6 / Take-Apart

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ FLOPPY DISK DRIVES

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx can have two internal
floppy disk drives. Drive 1 is located on the right side
of the drive mount; its cable is connected to the right 20-
pin connector (farthest from the power supply). Drive 2
is located on the left side of the drive mount; its cable is
connected to the left 20-pin connector (nearest the power
supply). The disk drives and cables are shown in Figure
2-3A. The procedure for removing the internal floppy
disk drives, whether 800K or 1.4 MB, is the same.

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Figure 2-3B. Disconnect the cable from the floppy
disk drive to be removed.

3. Figure 2-3C. Remove the screw holding the drive to
be removed.

4. Figure 2-3D. Lift the rear of the drive, slide it
back, and lift it off the drive mount.

IMPORTANT: Apple strongly advises the use of dust
shields on 1.4 MB floppy drives in all Macintosh ll/llx/llfx
computers. All 1.4 MB replacement drives ship with the
dust shield already installed. If you plan to install a dust
shield on a current drive, however, you must clean the
drive first. Follow the procedure in "Cleaning the Drive" in
the Basics section of the FDHD/SuperDrive tab of the
Apple Service Technical Procedures.

1. Figure 2-3E. Position the front of the drive so that
the two tabs on the drive case slide into the two
holes on the drive mount. Lower the drive into
position, making sure that the screw holes line up.

2. Replace the screw that holds the drive in place.

3. Connect the cable to the drive.

4. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 92

Take-Apart / 2.7

□ SCSI HARD DISK DRIVE

Materials Required

Remove

The Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx can be configured with a
3.5-inch half-height, a 5.25-inch half-height, or a 3.5-inch
1 -inch-height SCSI hard disk drive. The procedure for
removing all Apple internal SCSI drives is the same.

Certain drives are oriented PCB-side down in their
carriers; thus, when removing the drive, the SCSI
power cable will be opposite its location in

Figure 2-4A.

Apple currently ships two versions of the internal Hard
Disk 20SC. To the customer, the Hard Disk 20SC
Revision A drive and the Hard Disk 20SC Revision B
drive are identical, but these drives must be replaced
like-for-like. To differentiate between the drives,
refer to "Identifying 20SC Revision A and B Drives."

For part numbers, refer to the Illustrated Parts List or
your Apple Service Programs binder.

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap

#2 Phillips screwdriver

Torque driver (for 1 -inch-height drives)

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Figure 2-4A. Disconnect the power and SCSI cables
from the hard disk drive.

Note: If the computer is a Macintosh Ilfx, be sure to
also remove the SCSI filter, if present.

3. Figure 2-4B. Remove the two Phillips screws that
hold the hard disk in position.

4. Figure 2-4C. Lift the hard disk from the side with
the cable connectors, slide the drive toward the
power supply, and lift it off the drive mount.

5. To remove the SCSI cable:

a) Figure 2-4D. Disconnect the floppy drive(s).

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Aug 91

Take- Apart / 2.9

b) Figure 2-5A. Remove the four drive mount
screws and lift out the drive mount.

c) Fig;ure 2-5B. Press outward on the two ejector
tabs on the SCSI connector (located on the main
logic board) and unplug the cable.

Note: There are a number of ways in which damaged
hard drives must be returned to Apple. For information
on the appropriate return configuration for your drive,
see SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical Procedures.

Removing the
Drive From
Its Carrier

To remove the drive from its carrier:

1. Figure 2-5C. Remove the four Phillips screws on
the lower sides of the carrier.

2. Lift the drive out of the carrier.

Replacing
the Drive in
Its Carrier

Most drives can be replaced in a carrier by reversing
the steps above. Because of the compact nature of
1-inch-height drives, special steps are required when
tightening the drives into their carriers. Use the
following steps to assure the proper functioning and
longevity of these drives.

1. Using the Phillips screws that you removed in
step 1, loosely secure the drive to its carrier.

2. Tighten the screws in the sequence shown in Figure
2-5C, and torque the four screws to 8.0 in-lbs.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Aug 91

Take-Apart/ 2.11

Figure 2-6

2.12/Take-Apart

rev. May 91

Macintosh Il/llx/llfx

Identifying 20SC
Revision A and B
Drives

Replace

Revision A and Revision B Hard Disk 20SC drives
must be replaced like-for-like. To differentiate
between drive versions, compare their circuit boards to
the drive installed in an internal carrier. For Revision
A drives (Figure 2-6A) the component side of the board
is up; for Revision B boards the solder side is up.

1. For the 3.5-Inch 160 MB drive, place the drive into
its carrier and replace the four screws on the lower
sides of the carrier.

2. If the SCSI cable was removed (step 5), connect the
SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the main logic
board, replace the drive mount and its four Phillips
screws, and reconnect the floppy drive(s).

3. Figure 2-6B. Position the front of the hard disk so
that the two tabs on the hard disk case slide into
the two holes on the drive mount. Lower the hard
disk into position.

4. Replace the two hard disk screws.

5. Connect the SCSI and power cables to the hard disk.

Note: If the computer is a Macintosh Ilfx, you may
have to install a SCSI filter. Refer to Section 5,
Additional Procedures, "Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI
Termination" for information.

6. Replace the ton cover .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart/ 2.13

Figure

2.14/Take-Apart

rev.

□ DRIVE MOUNT

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

The drive mount is a metal frame that holds the floppy
and hard disk drives. The drive mount installs in the
case.

The internal drives vary with the customer's
configuration. Disregard the instructions that do not
apply to the system you are working on.

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the top cover .

2. Figure 2-7A. Disconnect the cables from floppy disk
drive 1 and drive 2 (if installed).

3. Figure 2-7B. Disconnect the power and SCSI cables
from the SCSI hard disk, if installed.

4. Figure 2-7C. Remove the four Phillips screws that
hold the drive mount in position.

5. Figure 2-7D. Remove the drive mount.

1. Position the drive mount so that the screw holes
align with the holes on the support posts.

2. Replace the four Phillips screws that hold the drive
mount in place.

3. Connect the power and SCSI cables to the hard disk.

4. Connect the cables to floppy disk drive 1 and drive
2 (if installed).

5. Replace the top cover .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart/ 2.15

□ SIMMS

RAM memory in the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx is
packaged in Single In-line Memory Modules (SIMMs).
SIMMs for the Macintosh II and IIx can be either 256K
or 1 megabyte and must be 120 nanoseconds or faster.

For the Macintosh Ilfx, use only 1-megabyte SIMMs
with a speed of 80 nanoseconds or faster (nonparity
systems) or 60 nanoseconds or faster (parity systems).

The Macintosh II logic board is shown in Figure 2-8A;
the Macintosh IIx logic board in Figure 2-8B; the
Macintosh Ilfx logic board in Figure 2-8C.

Two banks of SIMM sockets are located on each of the
logic boards. For all logic boards, the banks are labeled
Bank A and Bank B. Each bank contains four slots.

When installing SIMMs, use either Bank A alone, or
Bank A and Bank B. Fill all four slots of each bank with
like-sized SIMMs. The following chart illustrates the
configurations each computer supports.

Macintosh n and IIx Macintosh nfx

RAM

Bank A

BankB

Bank A

BankB

1 MB

Four 256 k

Empty

2 MB

Four 256 k

4 MB

Four 1 MB

Empty

Four 1 MB

Empty

5 MB

Four 1 MB

Four 256 k

8 MB

Four 1 MB

For additional information on RAM identification and
upgrades, refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart/ 2.17

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap
SIMM removal tool

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from

ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

1. Place the computer on the grounded workbench pad
and put on your grounding wriststrap.

2. Remove the top cover and drive mount .

3. Figures 2-9A and 2-9B. To remove a SIMM you must
release the plastic tabs on the ends of the socket.
The correct tool is the SIMM removal tool. For
instructions see the You Oughta Know tab in Apple
Service Technical Procedures, Cross Family
Peripherals.

1. With the contacts on the SIMM pointing down, set
the SIMM into the connector at an angle. Push back
on the top corners of the SIMM. You will hear a
click when the SIMM snaps into place.

2. Replace the drive mount and top cover .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart/ 2.19

Il/llx/llfx

□ LOGIC BOARD

Materials Required

Remove

Macintosh II and IIx computers ship with various
revisions of main logic boards that vary slightly in
appearance but have no functional differences and can be
used interchangeably. Be sure to remove any SIMMs
installed on the old logic board and install them on the
new logic board. Refer to Section 5, Troubleshooting, for
further module exchange information.

CAUTION: The logic board contains components that are
very susceptible to BSD damage. Handle the board only
by its edges, and follow the precautions outlined for BSD
prevention in You Oughta Know.

#2 Phillips screwdriver

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap

Small, flat-blade screwdriver

1. Remove the top cover and drive mount .

2. Figure 2-lOA. Disconnect the floppy drive cables,
the SCSI hard drive cables, and the speaker cable
from the logic board.

3. Figure 2-1 OB. Disconnect the power supply cable
from the logic board. Use the flat-blade
screwdriver if necessary.

4. Figure 2-1 OB. Remove the programmer’s switch, if
installed.

5. Figure 2-lOC. Remove the two screws that hold the
logic board in place.

6. Figure 2-lOC. Starting at the front of the logic
board, gently lift the board as you push in each of
the nine tabs, one at a time.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart/ 2.21

7. Figure 2-llA. Slide the logic board toward you and
lift it from the case.

8. Figure 2-1 IB. Remove the power switch knob and
RFI shield.

Replace

1. Replace the power switch knob and RFI shield.

2. Position the logic board so that the port connectors
align with the rear of the case. Gently lower the
board into the case and press the board onto the tabs.

3. Replace the two logic board screws.

4. Connect the floppy drive cables, power supply cable,
SCSI hard drive cables, and speaker cable to the logic
board.

Note: If the computer is a Macintosh Ilfx, you may
have to install a SCSI filter and/or terminator.

Refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures,

"Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI Termination" for information.

5. Replace the programmer’s switch, if removed.

6. Replace the drive mount and top cover .

Macintosh ll/Ilx/!lfx

rev. May 91

Take-Apart / 2.23

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Section 3 - Diagnostics

□ CONTENTS

3.3 Introduction to MacTest II/IIx

3.4 Copying Mactest II/IIx Disk

3.4 Using Your Backup Disk

3.5 Running MacTest II/IIx

3.5 Materials Required

3.5 Starting MacTest II/IIx

3.7 Installing the Loopbacks

3.7 Using the MacTest II/IIx Menus

3.12 Running the Tests

3.14 Diagnostic Sound Sampler

3.14 Introduction

3.14 Materials Required

3.14 Procedure

3.15 Introduction to AppleCAT II/IIx

3.16 Running AppleCAT II/IIx

3.16 Materials Required

3.16 Setting Up Test Station and UUT

3.19 Establishing Communication

3.20 Using the AppleCAT II/IIx Menus

3.23 Running the Tests

3.25 Repair Confirmation Code (RCC)

3.26 SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure

3.26 To Determine If a Jumper Is Needed

3.27 To Install the Jumper

Note: These procedures cover the operation of MacTest
n/nx only. Refer to the MacTest MP section of the
Mac Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab in Volume II of
the Macintosh Family Technical Procedures for
instructions on using MacTest MP on the Macintosh

nfx.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Apr 91

Diagnostics/ 3.1

□ INTRODUCTION TO MACTEST ll/IIX

The MacTest™ II/IIx diagnostic disk (version 3.0 or
higher) is part of the AppleCAT® II/IIx diagnostic set,
but may also be used as a standalone functional test of
your Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx system. The MacTest
II/IIx disk includes the MacTest II/IIx program and the
Diagnostic Sound Sampler. The Diagnostic Sound
Sampler lets you listen to the various musical chord
sequences that are generated during a power-on failure.

MacTest II/IIx is a pass/fail functional test. As the test
progresses, messages on the screen indicate the tests
being performed and the test results. As soon as a
failure is detected, the test stops and the screen
indicates which module must be replaced before the test
can be completed. MacTest then terminates and returns
to the Finder (desktop).

The MacTest /////x program identifies the ROM version
of the system and tests the

• Main logic board

• Internal disk drives

• Video interface card

• SCSI bus

• HMMU/PMMU (Macintosh II only)

• Apple PC 5.25 Drive and Macintosh II PC Card

• Apple EtherTalk™ Card

MacTest II/IIx also provides test patterns for use in
adjusting the high-resolution monitors.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.3

Copying
MacTest ll/llx
Disk

Using Your

Backup

Disk

MacTest II/IIx does not test the internal SCSI hard disk.

To test the hard disk, use the Macintosh Hard Disk
Drive Diagnostic disk (see Section 3, Diagnostics, in
the SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical Procedures').

MacTest II/IIx tests an internal expansion slot only
when an Apple expansion card is installed. To test an
expansion slot, install an EtherTalk Card or a Macintosh
II PC Card (with an Apple PC 5.25 Drive) in the slot
and select the appropriate test from the Test Selections
window.

Use Finder to make a backup disk before you begin! When

testing a defective Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx, it is
possible to damage or erase a section of the MacTest II/IIx
disk.

Take the following precautions when using your

MacTest II/IIx disk copy:

• Do not write-protect your working copy of the
MacTest II/IIx disk. The program will not run
correctly if you do.

• Do not change the name of the diagnostic program
on the disk. During logic board testing, the machine
reboots, looks for, and restarts the diagnostic named
MacTest II/IIx. If the name has been changed, the
startup routine will not be able to locate it, and the
system will stay on the desktop.

Therefore, if the MacTest II/IIx window does not
reappear after a logic board test, check the name of
the diagnostic icon on the desktop. Correct it to
MacTest II/IIx, then select Set Startup from the
desktop Special menu. When you are asked if you
wish to change the name of the startup application
to MacTest II/IIx, click OK. Then double-click on
the corrected MacTest II/IIx icon to return to the
test program.

3.4 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ RUNNING MACTEST ll/IIX

Materials Required

Starting
MacTest il/llx

Testing

Complete System
or Logic Board

Testing

Single

Component

MacTest II/IIx diagnostic disk (backup)
Mini-DIN-8-to-mini-DIN-8 serial port cable
SCSI loopback test card (modified with jumper — see
"SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure")

Blank, 800K disk for drive test

Blank, 1.4 MB disk for high-density drive test

You can use MacTest II/IIx to perform a functional test
of the entire Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx system, or
you can use it to test a single component in a known-
good system. Follow the start-up steps below for the
testing you wish to perform.

1. If you are testing a complete Macintosh II or
Macintosh IIx system, or if you intend to run the
logic tests, turn the power off and remove all
expansion cards except the Macintosh II Video Card.

2. Install the loopback connectors as described under
"Installing the Loopbacks," later in this section.

3. Insert the MacTest II/IIx disk into the right internal
drive, and power on the system. MacTest II/IIx will
display the MacTest II/IIx Status, or Start, window.
From the Status window you can click on Start to
run the tests.

1. If you are testing a single component in a known-
good system, insert the MacTest II/IIx disk into
the right internal drive, and power on the system.

2. MacTest II/IIx will display a window that tells you
to turn off the power and connect the SCSI loopback
board. Click OK to get to the MacTest II/IIx Status,
or Start, window.

3. From the Status window you can use the MacTest
II/IIx menus. Go to the Options menu and use the
Test Selections submenu to select the tests you want
to run. Then click on Start. For more specific
information on the tests, see "Using the MacTest
II/IIx Menus" and "Running the Tests," later in this
section.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.5

Helpful Startup l. if any of the following problems are encountered,

Information refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for additional

information.

• The known-good MacTest II/IIx disk will not
boot.

• The Configuration window indicates there is no
interface card installed in any slot, and there is.

• The Configuration window indicates there are no
disk drives installed, and there are.

• The Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx system
intermittently locks up during the logic test.

• The Configuration window indicates the wrong
amount of RAM installed.

2. If you do not know whether the system you are

testing is good:

a) Run the MacTest II/IIx logic, drive, and video card
tests. (See "Using the MacTest II/IIx Menus" and
"Running the Tests," later in this section.) Complete
any needed repairs before you continue.

b) If you removed a Macintosh II PC Card, run the
Apple PC 5.25 Drive test as described in Section 3,
Diagnostics, of the Apple PC 5.25 Drive Technical
Procedures.

c) If you removed an EtherTalk Interface Card, run
the EtherTalk Interface Card test as described in
Section 2, Diagnostics, of the EtherTalk Interface
Card Technical Procedures.

d) If you removed any non-Apple expansion cards,
install them one at a time, and run the MacTest
II/IIx logic, drive, and monitor tests after each
card is installed. Repeat the install-and-test
process until all expansion cards are installed and
the Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx passes all tests.

3.6 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Installing the
Loopbacks

Using the
MacTest li/llx
Menus

Before beginning MacTest II/IIx, and with the power off,
connect the serial loopback cable, the SCSI loopback
card, the keyboard, the mouse, the video interface card,
and the monitor.

CAUTION: Always power off the system when you
connect or disconnect the SCSI loopback card.

The SCSI loopback card cable (Figure 3-1, ^1) must be
connected to the SCSI port (Figure 3-1, * 2 ') on the back
of the Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx. (No other
connections between the card and the Macintosh
II/Macintosh IIx are necessary.) To protect the SCSI
circuitry, you must have the power off when you connect
the SCSI card. The loopback cable (Figure 3-1, ^3) with
the mini DIN-8 connectors must be installed between
the modem and printer ports (Figure 3-1, ^4) on the rear
of the machine.

Figure 3-1

Before you start MacTest II/IIx, you may use the
MacTest II/IIx menus to select the tests you want to
run or to select other features of the diagnostic. You

cannot use the menus when the tests are running.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.7

Options Menu

The Options menu contains the Test Selections and
Configuration submenus.

1. Test Selections: The following window (Figure 3-2)
appears when Test Selections is chosen:

Test Selections

^ Logic test

□ Uideo Card in slot 1 1 |

® Short OLong

□ Uideo monitor

□ MC68851 PMMU

□ ripple?*' PC Driue (I- Cord

n Keyboard
□ Mouse

Disk Oriues:

□ l:UieiTellc-“ Interface Ceid

□ Tine- card Ltherlnlk cemrnunir ntion test

□ Left ^ Right

O <-i M O I''? M

Q Loop on selected tests

|[ OK H [ Cancel ]

Figure 3-2

Test Selections allows you to select the tests you wish to
run, and identifies the slot number in which each
expansion card is installed. If an EtherTalk Card or a
Macintosh II PC Card is not installed in an expansion
slot, the selection for that test will be dimmed.

To select a test, click in the box next to the name of
the item to be tested. The box will display an X. To
deselect the test, click again in the box to remove the
X. When you have selected all the tests you wish, click
in the OK box. You will be returned to the MacTest
II/IIx Status window.

3.8 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Test Selections includes the following tests:

a) Logic: This test will verify the correct
functioning of the following circuitry on the
logic board:

• VIA (Versatile Interface Adaptor)

• FPU (Floating Point Unit)

• Serial ports

• Clock

• SCSI bus

• RAM

You may select a short or long logic test. The running
time of the test will vary depending on how much
memory is installed. At the beginning of the RAM test,
MacTest II/IIx will indicate the maximum running time
of the test.

b) MC68851 PMMU: This selection tests the
circuitry and basic functions of the Paged
Memory Management Unit on the main logic
board of the Macintosh II only.

c) Keyboard: This selection activates the keyboard
self-tests that verify the functioning of the
keyboard.

d) Mouse: This selection activates the mouse self-
tests that verify the functioning of the mouse.

e) Disk Drives: This test verifies the proper
functioning of the right and left disk drives, or
whichever drive (right or left) is present. It
also tests both 800K and 1.4 MB disk drives.

0 Video Card in slot: This selection tests a

Macintosh II Video Card installed in one of the
expansion slots on the Macintosh II or Macintosh
IIx. If more than one video card is installed, you
must tell MacTest II/IIx which video card to test.
Enter the slot number of the video card you
want to test in the box after Video Card in slot.
Use the keyboard to type in the correct slot
number, or use the space bar to space to the
correct slot number.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.9

g) Video monitor: This selection displays test
patterns that are used to adjust the video picture
on the high-resolution monitors. Video monitor
displays test patterns on the main (default)
monitor only. If you are adjusting a second
monitor, select Monitors in the Control Panel,
drag the menu bar at the top of the monitor icon
into the icon of the second monitor, and reboot.

Note: Refer to Apple High-Res Monochrome
Monitor Technical Procedures or Apple High -Res
RGB Monitor Technical Procedures for
information about any necessary adjustments.

h) EtherTalk Interface Card: This selection tests
the EtherTalk Interface Card and the expansion
slot. To set up for this test, follow the
instructions in Section 2, Diagnostics, of the
EtherTalk Interface Card Technical Procedures.

i) Two-card EtherTalk communication test: This
selection tests the communication between a
known-good EtherTalk card and a suspect
EtherTalk card. To set up for this test, follow
the instructions in Section 2, Diagnostics, of the
EtherTalk Interface Card Technical Procedures.

j) Apple PC 5.25 Drive and Card: This test verifies
the correct functioning of the drive, the
Macintosh II PC Card, and the expansion slot. To
set up for this test, follow the instructions in
Section 3, Diagnostics, of the Apple PC 5.25
Drive Technical Procedures.

Note: The Apple PC 5.25 Drive test cannot
always determine which module caused a test to
fail. If the test reports that the drive and/or
card is bad, replace one module at a time as
described in Section 4, Troubleshooting, of the
Apple PC 5.25 Drive Technical Procedures.

k) Loop on all tests: This selection provides
continuous running (in sequence) of all selected
tests except the Video monitor. To stop the
looping, click the Stop box between tests (when
the screen displays an arrow and not a wristwatch).

Note: You cannot loop on both the logic board
and drive tests at the same time.

3.10 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/lltx

2 .

Configuration: The following window (Figure 3-3)
will appear when Configuration is selected.

MacTest^^ II/IIh u3.Q

Macintosh Mk

Memory Size 1 MB

ROM Uersion Reu 1.3

MC68851

PMMU Not applicable

Slot 1:

Macintosh II Uideo Card

Slot 2:

This card is not recognized

Slot 3:

No card detected

Slot 4:

No card detected

Slot 5:

No card detected

Slot 6:

No card detected

Left driue: 1.4 MB

Right driue: 1.4 MB

OK J

Figure 3-3

This window displays the amount of memory, the
version number of the ROMs, the cards installed in
expansion slots 1 through 6 of the Macintosh II or
Macintosh IIx, and the current disk drive configuration.

File Menu

The File menu displays the following items. Open,
Close, and Stop are dimmed.

•Open...

•Close

• Save Test Selections

•Stop

•Quit

1. Save Test Selections:

MacTest II/IIx disk by
for the next time you

[Command-O]

(Dimmed unless a desk
accessory is open)
[Command- S]

[Command-.]

[Command-Q]

Allows you to customize your
saving your selection of tests
jse MacTest II/IIx.

2. Stop: Select Stop to end the diagnostic and return
to the MacTest II/IIx Status window.

3. Quit: Returns you to the desktop.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.1 1

Apple Menu The Apple (#) menu contains the following three

selections:

1. About MacTest n/Hx: When selected, a dialog box
displays the diagnostic name, version number, date
of release, and a copy-protect statement.

2. Control Panel: This option allows you to set
preferences for speaker volume, monitor status,
desktop pattern, or mouse tracking.

3. Key Caps: When selected, Key Caps displays a
window with a keyboard. Press each key on the
keyboard and verify that the display block for the
key is highlighted. If the key is not highlighted,
the keyswitch is bad and should be replaced. If
numerous keys are not highlighted, exchange the
keyboard.

After selecting the tests you wish to run using
Test Selections, you are ready to start MacTest II/IIx.
Click on the Start box in the MacTest II/IIx Status
window. Please note the following:

• The Status line at the bottom of the MacTest II/IIx
window will keep you informed of the tests being
performed and the test results.

• While running, all tests display a wristwatch. There
is no other moving or flashing indicator that tells
you the test is in progress.

• If the SCSI loopback card is missing or improperly
installed, you will be instructed at once to turn off
the power, disconnect all external SCSI drives, and
connect the SCSI loopback card.

• If the serial loopback cable is missing or improperly
installed, the testing will begin, but the serial ports
test will fail. You will be instructed to make sure
the serial loopback cable is connected, then to click
on Continue to retry the failed test. (You can
connect the serial loopback cable without powering
off the system.)

Running
the Tests

3.12 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

• when testing the disk drives, you will be prompted
to insert and remove blank 800K and high-density
disks. Perform the disk swaps as directed on the
screen, and then click on OK.

Note: It is important to insert the requested low- or
high-density disk. If the wrong disk is inserted,
MacTest II/IIx will indicate that the disk drive is
malfunctioning when it may not be.

CA UTION: Do not press the reset or interrupt switch
whiie the RAM test is running. Pushing reset causes the
RAM test to fail, and pressing interrupt may damage the
MacTest ll/ilx disk.

• You may halt the testing by clicking on Stop or

Pause any time between tests:

- Choose Stop to halt the testing and to return to
the MacTest II/IIx Status window. Choose Start
when you wish to begin the testing sequence
again.

- Choose Pause if you wish to discontinue testing
temporarily. Choose Continue to resume the
tests from the point of interruption.

Replace any module that the test indicates is faulty (see
Section 2, Take-Apart). Before replacing the module,
use AppleCAT II/IIx or refer to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, to verify the diagnosis. If the system
is still not operating properly, turn to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, for more information.

If all tests pass, the Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx will
return to the MacTest II/IIx Status window. The
message All selected tests have passed will be
displayed on the Status line.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.13

□ DIAGNOSTIC SOUND SAMPLER

Introduction

Materials Required

Procedure

The Diagnostic Sound Sampler enables you to listen
and become familiar with the Macintosh II and
Macintosh IIx error chords. Error chords are brief,
musical tones that indicate whether the system is
functioning correctly or if there is a hardware problem.

Refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for complete
information on startup and error chords.

Known-good Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx system
MacTest II/IIx disk (backup)

1. Set up the Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx system.

2. Insert the MacTest II/IIx backup disk. A window
will appear telling you to connect a SCSI loopback
card.

3. Click OK. The desktop will appear.

4. Open the Diagnostic Sound Sampler. A window
listing the various chords and chord sequences will
be displayed. Select the ones you wish to hear.

5. On completion, click Quit.

3.14 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ INTRODUCTION TO APPLECAT ll/IIX

AppleCAT II/IIx is a diagnostic tool that uses a known-
good Macintosh to diagnose module failures in a
defective Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx. The known-
good Macintosh (test station) and defective Macintosh
II/IIx (unit under test, or UUT) are connected through
their communication ports. The test station performs
the following functions:

• Establishes communications with the UUT

• Calls tests in the UUT ROM

• Downloads tests to the faulty machine

• Calls tests for MacTest in the UUT disk drive

• Displays test results on the test station screen

• Identifies the failing module

• Prompts the technician for information

• Recommends a repair procedure

• Issues a repair confirmation code (RCC)

With AppleCAT II/IIx, the machine being tested does
not have to be fully operational. By using an
independent, working computer to do the diagnosis,
AppleCAT II/IIx depends very little on the unit under
test (UUT), and is more reliable and thorough than
traditional diagnostic methods.

Standard windows guide the technician through each
stage of the diagnostic. When the UUT fails a test or
indicates a problem, an AppleCAT II/IIx screen will ask
for more information or recommend a repair.

After each module replacement or adjustment, AppleCAT
II/IIx reruns the failed test to verify that the problem
has been fixed. If the UUT successfully completes a
final system verification, AppleCAT II/IIx issues a
repair confirmation code (RCC).

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.15

□ RUNNING APPLECAT ll/IIX

(

Materials Required

Setting Up
Test Station
and UUT

Macintosh II or Macintosh IIx (unit under test, or UUT)

Known-good Macintosh Plus, SE, II, or IIx (test station)

AppleCAT II/IIx diagnostic disk

MacTest II/IIx disk

Blank, 800K disk

Blank, 1.4 Megabyte disk

Programmer's switch for the UUT

Mini-DIN-8-to-mini-DIN-8 serial port cable

SCSI loopback card

Mini DIN-8 serial loopback plug

NuBus™ master card (installed in slot 2)

Digital multimeter or volt/ohmmeter
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Connect the test station to a wall socket with an
AC power cord.

2. Place the Macintosh II/Macintosh IIx (UUT) next to
the test station.

3. Connect the UUT to a wall socket with an AC power
cord.

4. Connect the SCSI loopback card to the SCSI port
(Figure 3-4, #1) on the UUT.

5. Connect the serial loopback plug to the printer port
(Figure 3-4, ^2) on the UUT.

3.16 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

6. Install the NuBus master card in the second slot
(Figure 3-5, #1) from the power supply of the UUT.
The card must be installed in slot 2 to work
correctly. The video card should be in slot 1
(Figure 3-5, #2).

7. Connect one end of the serial port cable (Figure 3-6,
#1) to the modem port (Figure 3-6, #2) on the UUT.

8. Connect the other end to the modem port (Figure
3-6, #3) on the test station.

9. Connect a keyboard or mouse (Figure 3-6, #4) to the
UUT.

Figure 3-6

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.17

10. Verify that the programmer's switch (Figure 3-7) is
installed. With the front of the Macintosh II or
Macintosh IIx (UUT) facing you, insert the two long
tabs of the programmer's switch into the 2nd and 5th
open slots from the back, along the right side of the
UUT. Push the switch until it snaps into place or
you are certain it is secure.

The programmer's switch has two parts. The front
part of the switch is a reset switch. Pressing it is
just like turning the power switch off 2 ind back on.
The back part of the switch is an interrupt switch.
Pressing the interrupt switch places the UUT in
interrupt mode.

Figure 3-7

3.18 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Establishing

Communication

1. Insert the AppleCAT II/IIx disk into the test
station, and power on the test station.

2. Open the disk icon and then the AppleCAT II/IIx
icon. The AppleCAT II/IIx Start window (Figure
3-8) will appear on the test station screen.

3. Make sure that all disks are ejected from the UUT.

4. Power on the UUT. If you hear only the boot tone (a
single chord), you are not in interrupt mode. To get
into interrupt mode, wait until an arrow appears in
the upper left corner of the UUT screen (about 4
seconds per megabyte of installed memory), and then
press the interrupt switch (see Figure 3-7). When in
interrupt mode, or test mode, the UUT can respond to
information received over the communication port.

IMPORTANT: If you hear any additional chords after the
single boot tone, you are already in interrupt/test mode.

Do not hit the interrupt switch. The Macintosh II/IIx will
automatically go into interrupt mode if an error is detected
at power on.

Note: If a MacTest II/IIx disk was left in the UUT
disk drive during power on, the MacTest II/IIx disk
may boot before you can press the interrupt switch
on the UUT. If this happens, eject the MacTest II/IIx
disk, power off the UUT, and start over at step 4.

flppleCRT II. Il»

Status:

Click Start to begin selected tests.

Figure 3-8

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.19

Using the
AppleCAT ll/llx
Menus

Options Menu

Before you start AppleCAT II/IIx, you may use the
AppleCAT II/IIx menus to select the tests you want to
run or to select other features of the diagnostic.

Note: You must make your test selections before
you start AppleCAT II/IIx. Changes to the test
selections cannot be made while AppleCAT II/IIx is
running. If you do not use the Test Selections menu,
the default test selection will include the following
tests:

• Logic Board

• Right Hand Internal Drive

IMPORTANT: Selecting specific tests shortens the
AppleCAT II/IIx test, but cannot find all faulty modules.
Only the default test selections will ensure a complete
system check.

The Options menu contains the Test Selections submenu
(Figure 3-9). When Test Selections is chosen, the
*")llowing window appears:

RppleCRT ll/IlK Test Selection

K Logic Board Internal Driues:

^ Right

□ Macintosh II Uideo Card □ Left

[( OK ]] [ Cancel )

Figure 3-9

Test Selections allows you to select and run certain
tests individually. To select a test, click in the box
next to the name of the item to be tested. The box will
display an X. To deselect the test, click again in the
box to remove the X. When you have selected all the
tests you wish, click the OK button. You will be
returned to the AppleCAT /////x Start window.

Note: Test Selections will remain unchanged until

you change them or you reboot AppleCAT II/IIx.

3.20 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

1. Logic Board: This test verifies the correct
functioning of the following circuitry on the
Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx logic boards:

• ROM

• Memory Size

• CPU Data Bus and Address Bus

• Memory (RAM)

• VIA (Versatile Interface Adaptor)

• Internal Clock

• Parameter RAM

• Serial Ports (SCC)

• SCSI Bus

• NuBus Control Circuitry

• IWM/SWIM (Disk Controller IC)

• FPU (Floating Point Unit)

• Apple Desktop Bus

• Sound Chip

Note: Although AppleCAT II/IIx tests the SCSI
circuitry on the logic board, it does not test the
internal SCSI hard disk. To test the hard disk,
use the Macintosh Hard Disk Drive Diagnostic
disk (see Section 3, Diagnostics, in the SCSI
Hard Disk Drives Technical Procedures).

2. Macintosh n Video Card: This test checks the video
RAM on the Macintosh II Video Card (for the
Macintosh II and Macintosh IIx), and the video DAC
(digital-to-analog converter). The Macintosh II Video
Card must be installed in Slot 1 before running this
test. (The NuBus master card should be in slot 2.)

3. Internal Drives: This test will verify the proper
functioning of both the right and left drives.

Note: Testing the internal, 3.5-inch drives will
require swapping blank disks in the UUT. Refer to
"Running the Tests" (step 5), for more information.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.21

File Menu

The File menu displays the following items. All are
dimmed except Stop and Quit.

Apple Menu

Help

3.22 / Diagnostics

• Open... [Command-O]

• Close (Dimmed unless a desk

accessory is open)

• Save Test Selections (Option not available)

• Stop [Command-.]

• Quit [Command-Q]

1. Stop: Select Stop to end the diagnostic and return
to the AppleCAT II/IIx Start window.

2. Quit: Select Quit to exit the program and return to
the desktop.

The Apple (4) menu contains the following three

choices:

1. About Diagnostic: When selected, a dialog box
displays the diagnostic name, version number, date
of release, serial number, and a copy-protect
statement.

2. Control Panel: With this option you can set
preferences for things such as speaker volume,
mouse tracking, whether or not AppleTalk is
connected, and the desktop pattern.

3. Key Caps: When selected. Key Caps displays a
window with a keyboard.

The Help menu will be available with a later release of
AppleCAT II/IIx. Until the help screens are
implemented, the Help menu will remain dimmed. Help
will contain the following items:

• What is AppleCAT II/IIx?

• Configuration of Unit Under Test

• Special Tools

• Setup

• Establishing Communication

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Running
the Tests

After selecting the tests you wish to run using

Test Selections, you are ready to start AppleCAT II/IIx.

Click on the Start button in the AppleCAT II/IIx

window. Please note the following:

1. The Status line at the bottom of the AppleCAT II/IIx
window will keep you informed of the tests being
performed and their results.

Note: If the message Could not establish
communication appears on the Status line, you may
have inserted the MacTest II/IIx disk in the UUT
disk drive before powering on. If this message
appears, follow the instructions given in the
AppleCAT II/IIx window.

2. AppleCAT II/IIx will interact with you throughout
each stage of the testing. When performing internal
drive tests, you will be required to perform setup
steps (see step 5). When the UUT fails a test or
indicates a problem, AppleCAT II/IIx will prompt
you for more information or recommend a repair.

3. AppleCAT II/IIx will ask you for information that it
cannot obtain electronically. The screen will
display a choice of answers. Select the most
appropriate answer in each situation. After
selecting a response, click OK to continue.

CAUTION: Do not click the OK button until you’ve
completed every instruction given on the screen. Failure
to complete the instructions may misdirect the diagnostic.

4. If the UUT is turned off to replace or reinstall a

module:

a) Verify that all cables and test fixtures are
reattached before powering on.

b) Eject all disks from the UUT before powering
on.

c) If you do not hear the test mode chimes, wait
until an arrow appears onscreen (about 4 seconds
per megabyte of RAM), and then press the
interrupt switch to get into the test mode.

d) Click Start at the test station to restart the test.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.23

It )l

Figure 3-10

5. AppleCAT II/IIx will also ask you to perform setup
steps. When the Setup Required window (Figure
3-10) appears, insert the requested disk. AppleCAT
II/IIx will specify which drive to use. After inserting
the disk, click Done to continue the test. AppleCAT
II/IIx will request the following disks:

• BOOK Disk (blank and write-enabled)

• High Density Disk (blank and write-enabled; for
FDHD drive testing only)

• Write-protected, MacTest II/IIx Disk

6. You may halt the testing by clicking on Stop or
Pause any time during the tests:

a) Choose Stop to halt the testing and to return to
the AppleCAT II/IIx window. Choose Start when
you wish to begin the testing sequence again
from the beginning.

b) Choose Pause if you wish to discontinue testing
temporarily. Choose Continue to resume testing
from the point of interruption.

IMPORTANT: Please read all messages and instructions
carefully. Do only what AppleCAT II/IIx specifically
instructs you to do.

3.24 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Repair
Confirmation
Code (RCC)

Helpful

Suggestions

when the UUT passes its final test, AppleCAT II/IIx
issues a repair confirmation code (RCC). The RCC is an
eight-digit information record that contains the
diagnostic name, the diagnostic version number, the
replaced module name, and the repair sequence the
program followed. This RCC should be entered on the
SRO form that accompanies the returned module.

If AppleCAT II/IIx finds no problems, one of the
following RCC codes will be displayed:

• All selected tests passed 20ZZ-019G

• All selected tests passed 0MZZ-019G

If AppleCAT II/IIx is unable to identify the problem
with the UUT, AppleCAT II/IIx will issue an RCC
beginning with one of these four-digit prefixes:

• 20ZZ-XXXX for the Macintosh II

• OMZZ-xxxx for the Macintosh IIx

If you receive an RCC with one of the prefixes shown
above, refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for
information that can help you isolate the problem. Also
keep in mind that AppleCAT II/IIx is unable to identify
a system failure if any of the following is true:

• The bad module is failing intermittently.

• The system configuration changes during the test
(memory is removed or added, or system power
is removed).

• Selected modules are tested; only the default
tests perform a complete system check.

• The replacement module itself is bad.

• You provide inaccurate input to AppleCAT II/IIx,
or set up the test station incorrectly.

Madmosh ll/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.25

□ SCSI LOOPBACK JUMPER PROCEDURE

To Determine
If a Jumper
Is Needed

To be used with MacTest II/IIx and AppleCAT II/IIx,
the SCSI loopback card must be jumpered between Pin 25
of J1 and Pin 14 of RPl. On new SCSI loopback cards,
the jumper has been etched into the printed circuit.

Only cards with the old PCB artwork need the jumper
procedure.

Note: This modification does not interfere with the
card's use on other Macintosh or Apple II family
systems, except that to work on Apple II systems
the card must be connected to a notched mouse
cable. (For further information on the notched
cable, refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures, Section 5, "SCSI Interface Card.")

To Identify To determine if you have a new card, which will not

a New Card need to be jumpered, look at the back of the card. If

the jumper is included in the artwork, there will be an
A instead of double zeros (00) at the end of the part
number, which is located under the words "APPLE
COMPUTER" (Figure 3-11, #1). These new cards do not
have to be jumpered.

Figure 3-11

3.26 / Diagnostics

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

External
Jumpers on
Old Cards

Some cards with the 00 part number and the old
artwork were modified with an external jumper
during the manufacturing process. Therefore, if your
card has a 00 part number, check to see if it has an
external jumper from Pin 25 of J1 to Pin 14 of RPl
(Figure 3-12, #1). If it has no external jumper, you
must install one yourself.

Fligure 3-12

Summary

To summarize:

If # on back Do this:
ends with:

A Nothing

Qumper is present in artwork.)

00 Check to see if external jumper

is present. If not, install jumper.

To Install If you find that the card must be jumpered, solder a

the Jumper wire connection between Pin 25 of J1 and Pin 14 of

RPl, as shown in Figure 12. (The pins are not numbered
on the board. In the orientation shown in Figure 12, Pin
25 is the pin closest to the upper left corner of the
card, and Pin 14 is in the middle line of pins, and
closest to the left edge of the card.)

Macintosh 11/llx/llfx

May 90

Diagnostics / 3.27

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Section 4 - Troubleshooting

□ CONTENTS

4.2 Introduction

4.2 Before You Start

4.2 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.2 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board

4.6 Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.6 Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs

4.7 Startup and Error Chords

4.7 Introduction

4.7 Startup Chord

4.7 Error Chords

4.8 Summary

4.10 Symptom Chart

4.10 System Problems

4.11 Video Problems

4.13 Floppy Disk Drive Problems

4.14 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.15 Peripheral Problems

4.17 Miscellaneous Problems

4.19 Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.28 SIMM Verification

4.28 Introduction

4.28 Isolating a Defective SIMM

4.29 Verification

4.30 Verification Flowchart Notes

4.32 Battery Verification

4.32 Introduction

4.32 Materials Required

4.32 Verification Procedure

4.34 Customer’s Configuration Chart

Note: If a step is underlined, detailed procedures for
that step can be found in Section 2, Take-Apart.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.1

□ INTRODUCTION

Before
You Start

How to Use the
Symptom Chart

How to Use the

Troubleshooting

Flowcharts

Use this troubleshooting section if you are unable to
boot the MacTest II/IIx (Macintosh II or IIx) or MacTest
MP (Macintosh Ilfx) disk, or if the diagnostic is unable
to detect a module failure. After you repair the system,
run the test disk again to verify system operation.

Read the articles and subarticles titled "Things to
Remember," "Module Exchange Information," "Startup
and Error Chords," "SIMM Verification," and "Battery
Verification" before you begin troubleshooting. You

need the information provided in these sections to
troubleshoot the Macintosh n, Hx, and nfx effectively.

If the symptoms displayed by the system are not listed
in the symptom chart or if the system is not displaying
a clearly defined problem, use the troubleshooting
flowcharts.

There are five numbered troubleshooting flowcharts for
the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx computers. These
flowcharts are useful in troubleshooting startup-related
problems.

The troubleshooting flowcharts are designed to verify
operation of the computer in its minimum configuration.
Therefore, before using the troubleshooting flowcharts,
remove any options installed and disconnect any
external peripherals.

4.2 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Each of the flowcharts includes references to notes on
the opposite page. These notes provide additional
instructions or referrals to other procedures.

Things to • Be sure to follow all electrostatic discharge

Remember precautions when working on the computer. Refer

to the You Oughta Know tab in Apple Service
Technical Procedures for additional information.

• If available, use a known-good monitor and video
interface card. Thus you will isolate the problem to
the CPU, internal drives, keyboard, and mouse.

• To ensure that customers receive the same computer
configurations that they bring in, record the
following information before beginning:

- Type and serial number of NuBus expansion
cards

- Size and capacity of internal SCSI hard disk, or
type (800K or 1.4 MB) of second floppy disk
drive, if installed

- Number and types of SIMMs installed

- Macintosh II only

- Whether an IWM or SWIM disk controller
chip is installed

- Version of ROM installed

- Whether an HMMU or PMMU is installed

- Macintosh Ilfx only

- Whether a SCSI filter and/or terminator is
installed

At the end of this section is a form you can use to
record the customer's system configuration.

• Before you begin troubleshooting, remove all NuBus
expansion cards and disconnect all external serial,
SCSI, and ADB devices (except the keyboard and
mouse).

Macintosh ll/I lx/1 Ifx

rev. Mar 92

Troubleshooting / 4.3

After the computer is fully operational, each option
card or peripheral should be installed and tested.
Install one device and test the system before adding
any others. Repeat the install-and-test process until
all devices have been installed and tested.

• Mark each known-good SIMM module on the
exchange logic board with white correction fluid or
a small sticker to prevent confusion during the
troubleshooting procedure.

• Use a known-good copy of the diagnostic disk.

• During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
soft chord is emitted. If you do not hear a medium-
pitched soft chord, refer to "Startup and Error
Chords" for additional information.

• The Macintosh II and IIx require system software

6.0. 2 or later. The Macintosh Ilfx requires version

6.0. 5 or later. If an earlier version of the system is
installed, install the correct version and reverify
the failure before beginning troubleshooting. Many
times problems that appear hardware related are
actually caused by software. System software
installation procedures are included in Section 1,
Basics.

• When instructed to replace the logic board only,
place the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Note: If you are removing SIMMs from the logic
board, use the SIMM removal tool. See You Ought a
Know for instructions.

Macintosh II When instructed to replace the logic board only on a

Only system with a 1.4 MB Apple FDHD disk drive,

remove the ROMs and SWIM chip included with the
replacement logic board, and install the customer's
SIMMs, ROMs, and SWIM chip on the replacement
logic board. If a PMMU upgrade is installed, swap
the customer’s PMMU for the HMMU on the
replacement logic board.

4.4 / Troubleshooting

rev. May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/Ilfx

Macintosh llfx - Make sure an internal SCSI terminator is installed

Only on any system that does not have an internal SCSI

hard disk installed.

- Systems containing an Apple internal SCSI hard disk
manufactured before March 19, 1990 may require the
use of an internal SCSI filter. See Section 5,
Additional Procedures, "Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI
Termination" for additional information.

- If an internal Apple SCSI hard disk drive is being
replaced, an internal SCSI filter may be required.

See Section 5, Additional Procedures, "Macintosh
Ilfx — SCSI Termination" for additional information.

□ MODULE EXCHANGE INFORMATION

At the end of this section is a form you can use to
record the customer's system configuration. Feel free
to copy it for your own use.

Logic Board To make sure the customer always receives the same

logic board configuration that he or she brought in, be

sure to record the following information before you
exchange any modules:

• The type of logic board exchanged; Macintosh II,
IIx, or Ilfx

• The amount of memory installed

• For the Macintosh II:

- ROM version

- Whether an IWM or SWIM is installed

- Type of memory management unit that is
installed: the HMMU (standard) or the PMMU (a
68851 IC upgrade)

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 90

Troubleshooting / 4.5

For the Macintosh Ilfx:

internal
SCSI Hard
Disk Drives

Macintosh Ilfx
1 MB SIMMs

- SCSI filter and/or terminator

Internal SCSI hard disks ship without the SCSI
cable connected. Be sure to keep the SCSI cable with
the customer's system. The cable sells as a separate
replacement part and is not part of any module.

The SCSI power cable is included with all internal SCSI
drive modules.

Some Macintosh Ilfx systems and 4 MB expansion
memory kits were manufactured with defective DRAM
chips from NEC. Systems using these defective NEC
SIMMs can experience a variety of failures. These
failures include:

• System doesn't boot

• System hangs on first application launch

• System boots but loses video (memory related)

• System sounds error chords

• Video display exhibits ghosting

• System displays an ID error and locks up

Macintosh Ilfx systems with NEC SIMMs that have date
codes up to and including 9052 will exhibit these
failures. Figure 4-1 shows the location of the date
code. Replace SIMMs that have date codes of 9052 and
below.

4.6 / Troubleshooting

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ STARTUP AND ERROR CHORDS

Introduction

Startup Chord

Error Chords

Initial Failure

when the computer is powered on, a series of self-tests
are performed. If any part of the self-test fails, a
sequence of chords will sound.

If you are unable to interpret the chords, use the
flowcharts and ignore the question about the startup
chord on Flowchart 1.

During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
chord is emitted; then a disk icon appears on the screen.
The disk icon will have a flashing question mark (if a
startup disk is not found) or a smiling face (if a startup
disk is found).

If a startup chord and additional chords sound, a blank
gray screen usually appears. There will always be
three chords played when an error is encountered
during startup: startup chord, error chord, and test
monitor chord.

Refer to the list of failure areas below. The list
includes a description of each error chord, the problem
it indicates, and what to do to correct the problem.

A short, harsh chord indicates a failure during the
initial hardware self-tests. To correct the problem:

1. Exchange the logic board. (Install the customer's
SIMM modules on the exchange board. Be sure you
mark the known-good SIMMs that you remove from
the exchange logic board.)

2. If exchanging the logic board doesn't work, use the
customer's logic board and exchange the SIMMs
only. (Refer to "SIMM Verification" in this section
for complete instructions.)

If the system still does not work, you will need to
verify the customer's SIMMs on the exchange logic
board. (Refer to "SIMM Verification" in this section
for complete instructions.)

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.7

RAM land 2
Failure

A long, medium-pitched chord (RAM 1) or a medium-
then-high pitched then high chord (RAM 2) indicates a
RAM self-test failure. To correct the problem:

Test Monitor

Summary

1. If the failure occurs on a Macintosh Ilfx, refer to
"Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs" under Module
Exchange Information.

2. Exchange only the SIMMs in Bank A. (Refer to
"SIMM Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

3. Exchange only the SIMMs in Bank B. (Refer to
"SIMM Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

4. If these exchanges do not work, exchange the logic
board. (Install the customer's SIMM modules on the
exchange board.)

5. If the system still does not work, you must do the
SIMM verification with the exchange logic board.

Four chords (from low to high) indicate that the system
has entered the test monitor.

The following chart summarizes all the preceding
information on error chords. The left column lists the
chords, and the right column lists the actions to be taken.

4.8 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Chord Sequences

Actions

• Startup, Initial,
Test Monitor

• Startup, RAM 1,
Test Monitor

• Startup, RAM 2,
Test Monitor

1. Replace logic board only .

2. Perform SIMM verification on customer's logic board.

1. If the failure occurs on a Macintosh Ilfx, refer to
Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs under "Module
Exchange Information."

2. Perform SIMM verification of Bank A, then of Bank
B on customer's logic board.

3. Replace logic board only .

4. Perform SIMM verification on replacement logic
board.

1. If the failure occurs on a Macintosh Ilfx, refer to
Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs under "Module
Exchange Information."

2. Perform SIMM verification of Bank A, then of Bank
B on customer's logic board.

3. Replace logic board only .

4. Perform SIMM verification on replacement logic board.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.9

□ SYMPTOM CHART

System Problems

• Does not power on —
screen Is black,
fan is not running,
and LED is not lit

• Clicking, chirping, or
thumping sound

• System shuts down
intermittently

• System intermittently
crashes or locks up

• System doesn’t boot
(Macintosh llfx only)

4.10 / Troubleshooting

Solutions

1. Check cables.

2. Plug the monitor directly into the wall socket, and
verify that the monitor has power.

3. Replace power cord.

4. Check batteries (refer to "Battery Verification").

5. Replace power supp ly.

6. Replace logic board only .

1. Replace power supply .

2. Replace logic board only .

1. Make sure air vents on the sides and top of the
system unit are kept clear. Thermal protection
circuitry may shut the system down. After 30 to 40
minutes the system should be OK.

2. Replace power cord.

3. Check batteries (refer to "Battery Verification").

4. Replace power supp ly.

5. Replace logic board only .

1. Make sure the correct version of system software is
being used.

2. Make sure software is known-good.

3. Replace logic board only .

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "SIMM Verification").

5. Replace power supply .

- Check whether Apple-labeled SIMMs manufactured
by NEC have a date code of 9052 or below. If any
NEC SIMMs have a date code of 9052 or below,
replace them. Refer to "Module Exchange
Information" for further information.

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

System Problems
(continued)

• System sounds error
chords at startup
(Macintosh llfx only)

Video Problems

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
operate, fan is
running, and LED
is lit

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
do not operate,
but fan is running
and LED is lit

• Partial or whole
screen is bright and
audio is present,
but no video
information is visible

• Screen is completely
dark, fan is not
running, and LED is
not lit

Solutions

1. Check whether Apple-labeled SIMMs manufactured
by NEC have a date code of 9052 or below. If

any NEC SIMMs have a date code of 9052 or below,
replace them. Refer to "Module Exchange
Information" for further information.

2. See "Startup and Error Chords" in this section.

Solutions

1. Adjust brightness on monitor.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace video cable.

4. Move video interface card to a different slot.

5. Replace video interface card.

6. Replace SIMMs (refer to "SIMM Verification").

7. Replace logic board .

8. Replace power sup ply.

1. Replace video cable.

2. Move video interface card to a different slot.

3. Replace video interface card (refer to Section 5,
Additional Procedures).

4. Replace SIMMs (refer to "SIMM Verification").

5. Replace logic board .

6. Replace power supp ly.

7. Replace monitor.

1. Replace monitor.

2. Replace video cable.

3. Move video interface card to a different slot.

4. Replace video interface card.

5. Replace logic board only .

1. Plug the monitor directly into the wall socket, and
verify that the monitor has power.

2. Check batteries (refer to "Battery Verification").

3. Replace power supply .

4. Replace logic board only .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.11

video Problems (continued)

Solutions

• Video display exhibits
"ghosting”

(Macintosh llfx only)

Check whether Apple-labeled SIMMs manufactured
by NEC have a date code of 9052 or below. If
any NEC SIMMs have a date code of 9052 or below,
replace them. Refer to "Module Exchange
Information" for further information.

• System boots and
then loses video
(Macintosh llfx only)

Note: If replacing the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate monitor Technical Procedures
for monitor troubleshooting information.

4.12 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Floppy Disk
Drive Problems

Solutions

• Internal disk drive
runs continuously

1. Replace bad disk.

2. Replace internal disk drive cable.

3. Replace internal floppy disk drive .

4. Replace logic board only .

• Audio and video l.

are present, but 2.

one internal floppy
drive does not 3.

operate 4.

6 .

• Audio and video l.

are present, but 2.

neither internai floppy
drive operates 3.

)

• Disk ejects; display 1.

shows icon with 2.

banking ”X" 3.

• Will not eject l.

disk

2 .

Replace bad disk.

Verify that all external SCSI devices are
disconnected.

Replace internal floppy drive cable.
Replace internal floppy drive .

Replace logic board only .

Replace power supply .

Replace bad disk.

Verify that all external SCSI devices are
disconnected.

Replace power supply .

Replace logic board only .

Replace disk with known-good system disk.
Replace internal disk drive cable.

Replace internal floppy disk drive .

Replace logic board only .

Switch power off and hold mouse button down
while switching power back on.

Replace floppy disk drive .

• Attempts to eject
disk but doesn’t

1. Reinsert disk.

2. Reseat top cover so drive slots line up correctly.

• MS-DOS® drive does
not recognize a disk
formatted on a 1.4 MB
FDHD drive

If compatibility in reading and writing files with
the 1.4 MB FDHD is desired, format all disks
with the MS-DOS drive first.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.13

SCSI Hard Disk
Drive Probiems

• Internal hard disk
will not operate: LED
doesn’t light; drive
doesn’t spin-up

• Drive does not
appear on the
desktop

• Data is lost or
corrupted

• Works with internal or
external SCSI device
but will not work with
both

4.14 / Troubleshooting

Soiutions

1. Replace SCSI signal cable.

2. Replace SCSI power cable.

3. Replace hard disk .

4. Replace logic board only .

- If the computer is a Macintosh Ilfx, there may be a
SCSI termination problem. Refer to Section 5,
Additional Procedures, "Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI
Termination" to verify that proper SCSI termination
is being used.

1. Check the SCSI device switch setting on the
external device and make sure it isn’t 0 (the
address of the internal hard disk) or 7 (the
computer’s address).

2. If the computer is a Macintosh Ilfx, there may be a
SCSI termination problem. Refer to Section 5,
Additional Procedures, "Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI
Termination" to verify that proper SCSI termination
is being used.

3. Replace the SCSI terminator on the external device.

4. Verify that a terminator is installed on the internal
SCSI drive.

5. Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drive Technical Procedures
for troubleshooting the external drive.

rev. May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Peripheral Problems

• Cursor does not
move

• Cursor moves, but
clicking the mouse
button has no effect

• No response to any
key on the keyboard

• Cannot double-click
to open an application,
disk, or server

Solutions

1. Check mouse connection.

2. Inspect the inside of the mouse for a buildup of dirt
and other contaminants. Clean the mouse if
necessary.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to a
rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in any ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board only .

1. Replace mouse.

2. Replace logic board only .

1. Check keyboard connection to ADB port.

2. Replace keyboard cable.

3. Replace keyboard.

4. Replace logic board only .

1. Remove any multiple system files on the hard disk.

2. Clear parameter RAM. Hold down the < Shift >
< Qption >< Command > keys and select Control Panel
from the Apple pull-down menu. Reset mouse
controls.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to a
rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in any ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.15

Peripheral

Problems (continued)

Solutions

• Known-good
ImageWriter® or
ImageWriter II
will not print

• Known-good
LaserWriter®
will not print

1. Make sure the correct version of system software is
being used.

2. Make sure that the Chooser and the Control Panel
are set correctly,

3. Replace printer interface cable.

4. Re place logic board only .

1. Make sure the correct version of system software is
being used.

2. Make sure that the Chooser and the Control Panel
are set correctly.

3. Refer to the Networks tab in Apple Service
Technical Procedures for more information.

4.16 / Troubleshooting

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Miscellaneous

Problems

• No sound from
speaker

• HMMU socket
does not allow
PMMU installation
(Macintosh II only)

• System hangs when
the first application is
launched

(Macintosh llfx only)

• System displays an
ID error and then
locks up

(Macintosh llfx only)

Solutions

1. Verify that the volume setting in the Control
Panel is set to one or above.

2. Replace speaker.

3. Replace logic board only .

- Replace logic board . Verify that the socket
is a 13 X 13-pin grid array package and that it
contains 132 gold contacts inside the socket.
(Sockets containing only 70 pins do not support the
PMMU.)

- Check whether Apple-labeled SIMMs manufactured
by NEC have a date code of 9052 or below. If
any NEC SIMMs have a date code of 9052 or below,
replace them. Refer to "Module Exchange
Informiation" for further information.

- Check whether Apple-labeled SIMMs manufactured
by NEC have a date code of 9052 or below. If
any NEC SIMMs have a date code of 9052 or below,
replace them. Refer to "Module Exchange
Information" for further information.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.17

1. Exchange video interface card

(see Note #3).

2. Exchange logic board only

(see Note #5).

3. Exchange SIMMs (see Note #4).

4. Exchange power supply.

Exchange monitor (see Note #2).
Exchange video cable.

Exchange video interface card
(see Note #3).

Exchange SIMMs (see Note #4).
Exchange logic board only
(see Note #5).

Exchange power supply.

Go to Flowchart 4A.

Go to Flowchart 3.

Flowchart 4-1

4.18 / Troubleshooting

rev. May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS

Flowchart 4-1
Notes

1. During a normal startup sequence, a medium-pitched
chord is emitted; then a disk icon appears on the
screen. The disk icon will have a flashing question
mark (if a startup disk is not found) or a smiling
face (if a startup disk is found). If either of these
things does not happen, refer to "Startup and Error
Chords" for additional information. If you cannot
interpret the chords, continue with the flowchart.

2. If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the Technical Procedures for the monitor to
isolate the monitor problem to the module level.

3. If exchanging the video interface card corrects the
problem, and if the customer's card has the video
expansion kit installed, refer to Macintosh Family
Cards Technical Procedures — Macintosh II Video
Cards, for information on troubleshooting the eight
replaceable RAMs.

4. There are two steps to perform when exchanging
the SIMM modules. Refer to "SIMM Verification"
for complete instructions on verifying and
troubleshooting the SIMMs.

5. If the known-good SIMMs did not correct the
problem, install the customer's SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jan 91

Troubleshooting / 4.19

Flowchart 4-2

4.20 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Flowchart 4-2
Notes

1. For MacTest II/IIx, refer to Section 3, Diagnostics,
for complete information. For MacTest MP, refer to
the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh Multiple-
Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures.

2. Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.21

1 . Exchange power supply.

2. Exchange logic board

only (see Note #6).

Go to Flowchart 4A.

1 . Exchange power supply.

2. Exchange logic board

only (see Note #6).

Go to Flowchart 4A.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Flowchart 4-3
Notes

1. Refer to "Battery Verification" for complete
instructions on checking the lithium batteries.

2. If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the Technical Procedures for the monitor to
isolate the monitor problem to the module level.

3. If exchanging the video interface card corrects the
problem, and if the customer's card has the video
expansion kit installed, refer to Macintosh Family
Cards Technical Procedures— Macintosh II Video
Cards, for information on troubleshooting the eight
replaceable RAMs.

4. There are two steps to perform when exchanging
the SIMM modules. Refer to "SIMM Verification"
for complete instructions on verifying and
troubleshooting the SIMMs.

5. If the known-good SIMMs did not correct the
problem, install the customer's SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

6. Exchange only the logic board by installing the

customer's SIMMs on the replacement logic board.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 90

Troubleshooting / 4.23

Insert MacTest ll/llx or MacTest MP disk. Power on.

(^Flowchart

Flowchart 4-4

1. Exchange drive 1 cable.

2. Exchange disk drive 1 .

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board only

(see Note #2).

1 . Exchange drive 2 cable.

2. Exchange disk drive 2.

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board only

(see Note #2).

1 . Exchange drive 2 cable.

2. Exchange disk drive 2.

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board only

(see Note #2).

4.24 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Flowchart 4-4
Notes

1. For MacTest II/IIx, refer to Section 3, Diagnostics
for complete information. For MacTest MP, refer to
the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh Multiple-
Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures.

2. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.25

Flowchart 4-5

4.26 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Flowchart 4-5

Notes

For MacTest II/IIx, refer to Section 3, Diagnostics
for complete information. For MacTest MP, refer to
the MacTest MP section of the Macintosh Multiple-
Product Diagnostics tab in the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures.

Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

The customer must always receive the same system
configuration he or she brings in. Refer to "Module
Exchange Information."

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.27

□ SIMM VERIFICATION

Introduction

Isolating a
Defective SIMM

The service exchange logic board comes without RAM
SIMMs.

The SIMMs installed on the customer's logic board may
be defective. To check for defective SIMMs, remove all
of the customer's SIMMs and install known-good
SIMMs. Mark each known-good SIMM with a dot of
white correction fluid or a small sticker. Whatever you
use, be sure it will not come off while you are testing.

Note: If the system is Macintosh Ilfx, refer to
Macintosh Ilfx 1 MB SIMMs under "Module Exchange
Information."

1. Remove the top cover and drive mount .

2. Remove the customer's SIMMs using the SIMM removal
tool. See You Oughta Know for instructions on how to
use this tool.

Note: Using the configuration chart located at the end
of this section, record the number and the sizes of the
SIMMs. The customer should get back the same number
and sizes. Refer to the Apple Technical Procedures
SIMMs Quick Reference Chart for information on
identifying the SIMMs.

3. Figure 4-2. Install the four known-good SIMMs in
Bank A.

4. Place the drive mount into position, and connect floppy
disk drive 1 only.

5. Power on the system.

6. Insert the MacTest II/IIx (Macintosh II and IIx) or
MacTest MP (Macintosh Ilfx) disk in floppy disk
drive 1.

If the test boots, run it. Then continue with the
appropriate verification procedure.

If the test does not boot, return to the appropriate
flowchart.

4.28 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jan 91

Macintosh ll/Ilx/llfx

Macintosh II and llx Macintosh llfx

Figure 4-2

Verification if the customer has 256K SIMMs or 1 MB SIMMs

installed, you must verify all SIMMs. Use
Flowchart 4-6 and the verification flowchart notes.

)

Materials Required if you are verifying 256 k SIMMs (Macintosh II and IIx

only), you will need four 256K known-good SIMMs.

If you are verifying 1 MB SIMMs, you will need four
1 MB known-good SIMMs of the correct speed (60, 80,
or 120 nanoseconds) and type (parity or nonparity).

)

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Jun 91

Troubleshooting / 4.29

Verification

Fiowchart

Notes

1. Figure 4-3. Locate Bank A on the logic board
and install three known-good SIMMs.

2. During a normal startup sequence, you hear a
medium-pitched chord; then a disk icon appears on
the screen. The disk icon will have a flashing
question mark if the computer cannot find a startup
disk, or a smiling face if the computer finds a
startup disk. Refer to "Startup and Error Chords"
for additional information.

Be sure to label the defective SIMM so you will not
confuse it with other SIMMs.

Figure 4-3. Return to the beginning of the
flowchart and perform the same procedure for the
SIMMs in Bank B.

Figure 4-3

4.30 / Troubleshooting

rev. Jun 91

Macintosh ll/lix/llfx

Remove another
known-good
marked SIMM.

Flowchart 4-6

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Troubleshooting / 4.31

□ BATTERY VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Procedure

There are two lithium batteries on the main logic board.
These batteries are part of the power-on circuit. If
either battery falls below specifications, both must be
removed and replaced.

WARNING: Lithium batteries, the type used in the
Macintosh ii/lix/iifx, have some potential for explosion If
improperly handled. Follow the procedure below exactly
as written.

Voltmeter

Figure 4-4. To check the lithium batteries with a

voltmeter:

1. Be sure power is off. Then remove the top cover .

2. Set the voltmeter range to measure 10 volts DC.

3. Touch and hold the positive probe of the voltmeter
to the positive side of one of the batteries.

4. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the same battery.

5. The reading for a good battery should be 3.2 volts
or h^her.

6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for the other battery.

If either battery falls below 3.2 volts, replace both

batteries. Refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures,

for replacement instructions.

4.32 / Troubleshooting

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ CUSTOMER'S CONFIGURATION CHART

The chart below can be copied and used to keep track
of a customer's system configuration. Once the chart
has been filled out, attach it to the system. The chart
will help you make absolutely sure that the customer
receives the same configuration that he or she brought
in.

Customer
Model
Serial Number

Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

□ 20 MB □ 160 MB
□40 MB Gaher:

□ 80 MB

Djsk

Size □ 5.25 Inch

Internal Floppy Drives

Left DsOOK
Drive [] 1.4 MB

Right n ^
Drive [^ 1.4 MB

NuBus Cards

Type

Serial Number

Slot1
Slot 2
Slots
Slot 4
Slots
Slots

SIMMs

□ 256 K

Bank A □ 1 MB

□ 256 K
Bank B I I 1 MB

Macintosh II Only

Memory [H HMMU
Management , — ,

Unit □ PMMU

Floppy □
Controller □ SWIM

ROM n ^

Rev Q Rev B

Macintosh llfx Only

ED Yes

SCSI

Filter I — I

Installed | | No

SCSI

Terminator

Installed

□ Yes

□ No

4.34 / Troubleshooting

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Section 5 - Additional Procedures

□ CONTENTS

5.3 Batteries

5.3 Introduction

5.3 Overview

5.5 Battery Holder Board Installation

5.9 Battery Replacement

5.10 Logic Board RAM Identification and Upgrades

5.10 Introduction

5.10 Identification

5.11 Upgrades

5.12 Logic Board Upgrades

5.12 Macintosh IIx Logic Board Upgrade

5.13 Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board Upgrade

5.14 Macintosh II

5.14 Paged Memory Management Unit Upgrade

5.15 FDHD SuperDrive Upgrade
5.18 Macintosh Ilfx

5.18 SCSI Termination

Note: If a step is underlined, detailed procedures for
that step can be found in Section 2, Take- Apart.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 90

Additional Procedures / 5.1

(

□ BATTERIES

Introduction

Overview

Lithium thionyl chloride batteries, the type used in the
Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx have some potential for
explosion if improperly handled. The following
precautions should be taken when storing, handling, or
disposing of lithium batteries:

• Lithium batteries should be stored in a designated,
well-marked area with limited access.

• Apple's lithium batteries are sealed in individual
zip-lock wrappers. Upon receipt, inspect the
integrity of the wrappers, and store the batteries in
the same packaging in which they were received.

• Lithium batteries cannot be recharged and,
therefore, require disposal when exhausted. In
addition to its explosive potential, lithium is water-
reactive and must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
Therefore, Apple recommends the following course
of action:

After removing an exhausted battery from the board,
clip off the lead wires (necessary for soldered
batteries) and place the battery into the zip-lock
wrapper and packaging from which the replacement
battery was taken. Mark the battery DEAD and
return it to Apple, where it will be disposed of
following EPA guidelines.

You can use a voltmeter to check the condition of the
two long-life lithium batteries in the Macintosh II, IIx,
and Ilfx. Refer to “Battery Verification,” in Section 4,
Troubleshooting, for directions.

On a Macintosh II or IIx that does not have a battery
holder board, the batteries are either soldered directly
to the logic board or encased in battery holders that are
soldered to the logic board. In either case, follow the
procedures in "Battery Holder Board Installation."

On a Macintosh II or IIx that has a battery holder board
already installed or on a Macintosh Ilfx, follow the
procedure in "Battery Replacement."

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Additional Procedures / 5.3

(

Batteries

Figure 5-1

5.4 / Additional Procedures

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Battery Holder Board
Installation

Materials Required

installation

To use the battery holder board, you must remove the
batteries (and battery holders, if present) from the
logic board, solder the battery holder board to the logic
board, and install the batteries and battery covers on
the battery holder board.

Soldering iron (50-watt maximum)

Desoldering tool

60/40 resin-core solder

Battery holder board

Small wire cutters

Grounded workbench and wriststrap

Two lithium batteries

Follow the steps below to remove the batteries from
the logic board, solder the battery holder board to the
logic board, and install the batteries in the battery
holders:

1. Remove the logic board .

2. Figure 5-1. Locate the two batteries or the two
battery holders on the front of the logic board.

Note: Be sure to leave the lead wire long enough
so that you can pull it out of the logic board when
you melt the solder that holds the lead wire in
place.

3. If the batteries are soldered to the logic board, cut
the lead wires that hold the batteries. Then follow
the battery disposal procedures explained in the
introduction to this section.

CAUTION: Use a 50-watt (or less) soldering iron.
Excessive heat may cause damage to the logic board.

4. Turn the logic board over. Locate the four soldered
leads that held the batteries or battery holders in
place.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Additional Procedures / 5.5

5. Desolder the four connections. If the batteries

were soldered to the logic board, be sure to remove
the wire from each hole and clear the hole of any
solder.

CAUTION: Do not force the connections free or you may
remove the traces from the board. Repeat step 5 if
necessary.

6. Figure 5-2. Insert the battery holder board so its
positive-marked end is inserted into the two
positive-marked holes on the logic board, and so the
battery holder board is flush with the logic board.

CAUTION: Be sure the positive side of the battery hoider
board is in the correct location. Faiiure to do so can result
in damage to the logic board.

7. Solder the battery holder board into place.

8. Install the batteries and the battery covers on the
battery holder board. If necessary, refer to "Battery
Replacement."

9. Replace the logic board .

10. Use the Control Panel to reset the clock, mouse,
desktop pattern, and volume control settings.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Additional Procedures / 5.7

Battery

Replacement

Materials Required

Remove

Replace

The following procedure covers the removal and
replacement of batteries installed in battery holders. If
you are changing batteries in a Macintosh II or IIx and
there is no battery holder board installed, refer to
"Battery Holder Board Installation."

Small flat-blade screwdriver
Two batteries

To remove the batteries from the plastic battery holder,

follow these steps:

1. Figure 5-3A. Remove the top cover from the
computer and locate the battery holders.

2. Figure 5-3B. If there is a cover on the battery
holder, remove it by inserting a small flat-blade
screwdriver between the cover latch and the battery
holder and gently prying the latch away from the
holder. The plastic cover will lift off.

3. Use your fingers to remove the batteries from the
battery^ holders.

To replace the batteries in the battery holder, follow

these steps:

1. Orient the new battery so that the end marked "+"
matches the on the main logic board. Insert the
battery in the battery holder, and, if applicable,
replace the plastic cover.

2. Replace the top cover .

3. Use the Control Panel to reset the clock, mouse,
desktop pattern, and volume control settings.

4. Package and label the old batteries as directed in
the introduction to this section, and return them to
Apple for proper disposal.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Additional Procedures / 5.9

□ LOGIC BOARD RAM IDENTIFICATION AND UPGRADES

Introduction

Identification

Speed

RAM for the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx is provided in
packages known as Single In-line Memory Modules
(SIMMs). A SIMM is a small, rectangular-shaped circuit
board, with two or eight memory chips. The memory
chips may be surface mounted, or mounted through the
board. Each SIMM board has contacts on one edge that
fit into sockets on the logic board.

Note: when you remove SIMMs, use the SIMM removal
tool. See the You Oughta Know tab for instructions on
using the removal tool.

The SIMMs are available with two sizes of RAM (256K
and 1 MB) and come in several configurations. Consult
the Quick Reference Chart: SIMM Compatibility to
obtain current SIMM identification information.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle SIMMs only by the edges!

You must use 120 ns (or faster) SIMMs on the
Macintosh n and Macintosh nx. The Macintosh nfx
uses 80 ns (or faster) SIMMs. SIMMs with a slower
rating will cause serious timing problems and cause
system crashes. The RAM speed is usually indicated by
the -XX number after the manufacturer's part number.
For example, -12 indicates 120 ns SIMMs, -10 indicates
100 ns SIMMs, -8 indicates 80 ns, and -6 indicates 60
ns.

CAUTION: Use Mitsubishi 1 MB SIMMs for the Macintosh
IIx, which are labeled 'Tor 030 Systems Only, " only in
systems with 68030 microprocessors. Therefore, do not
use the Mitsubishi 1 MB SIMM modules in the Macintosh
II. Do not use LaserWriter II SIMMs in the Macintosh Ilfx.
Although electrically interchangeable, Macintosh Ilfx
SIMMs are 80 ns; LaserWriter II SIMMs are 120 ns.

5.10 / Additional Procedures

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Upgrades

Various RAM upgrades are possible on the Macintosh II,
IIx, and Ilfx depending on the number and size of the
SIMMs that you install on the logic board.

Figure 5-4. Two banks of SIMM sockets are located on
the logic board and are labeled Bank A and Bank B.
Each bank contains four slots. When installing SIMMs,
the following rules apply:

• All four slots within a bank must be filled with
SIMMs of the same RAM size.

• A bank cannot be partially filled; all four slots of a
bank must be filled or left empty.

• If different size SIMMs are being used, the larger
SIMMs must be in Bank A.

• Bank A must be filled before Bank B.

The following chart summarizes the configurations that
the Macintosh II, IIx, and Ilfx support:

Macintosh n and nx Macintosh Ilfx

RAM

Bank A

BankB

Bank A

BankB

1 MB

Four 256 k

Empty

2 MB

Four 256 k

4 MB

Four 1 MB

Empty

Four 1 MB

Empty

5 MB

Four 1 MB

Four 256 k

8 MB

Four 1 MB

CAUTION: Other configurations, such as a single SIMM
or a pair of differently sized SIMMs, will not function
correctly.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Mar 91

Additional Procedures / 5.11

□ LOGIC BOARD UPGRADES

Macintosh llx Logic
Board Upgrade

Materials Required

Procedure

The Macintosh IIx and Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board
Upgrade Kits are available to Macintosh II and
Macintosh IIx owners. These upgrade kits convert a
Macintosh II to a Macintosh IIx or a Macintosh II or IIx
to a Macintosh Ilfx, respectively. In addition to a new
logic board, the kits also include an identification decal
that should be affixed to the bottom cover of the
upgraded system. Refer to Section 2, Take-Apart, to
replace the logic board.

The Macintosh IIx Logic Board Upgrade Kit converts a
Macintosh II to a Macintosh IIx.

Macintosh IIx Logic Board Upgrade Kit
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the Macintosh II logic board .

Note: Instructions for returning the Macintosh II
logic board are included in the upgrade kit.

2. Install the Macintosh IIx logic board .

3. Refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures, "Logic
Board RAM Identification and Upgrades" for RAM
SIMM installation procedures.

4. Install the identification decal on the bottom cover
as shown in Figure 5-5.

Macintosh'^lx

Apple Computer, Inc.
Cupertino, California

Made in U.S.A.
Model No.: M5840

— >. Listed

Equipment

100-240 V
50-60 Hz

I FCC ID: BCG9GRM5840

Certified to comply witi Class B limits.
Part 15 of FCC Rules. See instructions
if interference to radio reception
is suspected.

Figure 5-5

5.12 / Additional Procedures

rev. May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Macintosh llfx
Logic Board
Upgrade

The Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board Upgrade Kit converts a
Macintosh II or IIx to a Macintosh Ilfx.

Materials Required

Procedure

Macintosh Macintosh Ilfx Logic Board Upgrade Kit
#2 Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the Macintosh II or IIx lo 2 ic board .

Note: Instructions for returning the old logic board
are included in the upgrade kit.

2. If an upgrade is being performed on a system with
an internal SCSI hard disk, remove the power cable
connected to the hard disk and replace it with the
one provided in the upgrade kit.

3. Install the Macintosh Ilfx logic board .

4. Refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures,
"Macintosh Ilfx — SCSI Termination" for SCSI
termination options.

5. Refer to Section 5, Additional Procedures, "Logic
Board RAM Identification and Upgrades" for RAM
SIMM installation procedures.

6. Refer to Section 1, Basics, "System Software" for
Macintosh system software 6.0.5 installation
procedures.

7. Install the identification decal on the bottom cover
as shown in Figure 5-6.

Macintosh'^ ifx

Apple Computer, Inc.

Cupertino, California

Made in U.S.A.

Model No.: MS525

I'sied

( (J I ) EDP Equipment
61T0

100-240 V r-^

50-60 Hz

I FCC ID: BCGS525 \

Certified to comply with Class B limits,

Part 15 of FCC Rules. See instructions
if interference to radio reception
is suspected. w

Figure 5-6

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. May 90

Additional Procedures / 5.13

□ MACINTOSH II

Paged Memory
Management Unit
Upgrade

Materials Required

Installation

The 68851 Paged Memory Management Unit (PMMU)
replaces the HMMU on the Macintosh II logic board.
This upgrade is required to run Apple A/UX. The
PMMU supports both 32-bit and 24-bit address modes
and can run both Apple A/UX and the Macintosh
operating system.

Grounded workbench and wriststrap
Small flat-blade screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the top cover and the drive mount from the
Macintosh II .

2. Figure 5-7. Locate the HMMU. Use the small flat-
blade screwdriver to pry gently along the sides of
the chip to remove the HMMU from the socket.

CAUTION: Before pressing the new memory
management unit Into the socket, verify that the 1C is
positioned correctly!

3. Figure 5-7. With the front of the Macintosh II
facing you, position the PMMU so that the line on
its surface is facing the lower-right corner of the
board.

4. Line up the pins in the socket and gently press the
PMMU into the socket.

Figure 5-7

5.14 / Additional Procedures

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

FDHD SuperDrive
Upgrade

Materials Required

Installation

The FDHD SuperDrive is available to Macintosh II
owners. To upgrade a Macintosh II so it can support the
FDHD drive, you must install a Macintosh II Apple
FDHD Upgrade Kit.

The upgrade involves replacing the original four ROMs
with the revised 512K ROMs, and the IWM chip with
the SWIM chip. The BOOK disk drive remains in the
system as drive 1 or 2, and the FDHD drive mechanism
is added.

IMPORTANT: The FDHD SuperDrive requires that
system software must be version 6.0.2 or higher. If the
software is lower than 6.0, the drive will be recognized as
an 800K drive. To correct this problem, run the System
Installer (version 6.0.2 or higher) to upgrade the system
software.

Grounded workbench and wriststrap
Macintosh II Apple FDHD Upgrade Kit
#2 Phillips screwdriver
IWM/SWIM extraction tool
IC extractor

1. Place the Macintosh II on the grounded workbench
pad and put on your grounding wriststrap.

2. Remove the Macintosh II drive mount .

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Additional Procedures / 5.15

Figure

5.16 / Additional Procedures

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

3. Figure 5-8A. Locate the four ROMs. Using the IC
extractor, remove the ROMs from the logic board.

4. Figure 5-8A. Use the following chart to install the
four revised 512K ROMs:

ROM Part Number Location

HI 342-0639 C13

MED HI 342-0640 C12

MED LO 342-0641 E13

LO 342-0642 E12

Note: The notch at the end of each ROM should face
the front of the logic board.

5. Figure 5-8A and B. Locate the IWM chip. Insert the ||
two notched edges of the IWM/SWIM extractor into
the small openings on two corners of the chip.

Squeeze the handles and pull the IWM chip straight
up.

CAUTION: Before pressing the new SWIM chip into the
socket, verify that the chip is positioned correctly!

6. Figure 5-8C. With the computer facing you, position
the SWIM chip so that the beveled edge with the
dot is facing the power supply (or align the beveled
edge of the SWIM chip with the white dot on the
logic board beside the socket). Align the pins in
the socket and gently press straight down on the
SWIM chip until it is seated in the socket.

7. In.stall the FDHD SuperDrive onto the drive mount
as drive 1 or drive 2 .

8. Install the drive mount and replace the top cover .

9. Place the 1.4 MB label and 800K label in the
appropriate positions on the front of the Macintosh
II cover. If the 1.4 MB drive is in the left-drive
position, and the 800K drive is in the right-drive
position, place the labels as shown in Figure 5-8D.

10. Be sure the system software is version 6.0.2 or
later.

11. Run MacTest II/IIx to ensure that the upgrade is
installed and functioning correctly. Refer to
Section 3, Diagnostics, for further information.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Mar 91

Additional Procedures / 5.17

□ MACINTOSH llfx

SCSI Termination

A feature of the Macintosh Ilfx is the ability to transfer
data to and from SCSI devices faster than earlier
Macintosh computers. As a result of this increased
transfer rate, Apple has found it necessary to modify
the termination characteristics of the SCSI interface.
These termination changes are implemented utilizing
three new parts:

Apple SCSI Cable Terminator n - This is a revised
version of the present external SCSI cable terminator.
Using a SCSI Cable Terminator II provides the proper
termination required for external SCSI devices attached
to a Macintosh Ilfx. Rules for where and when to
install the terminator are identical to the original SCSI
terminator. The terminators can be distinguished from
each other by looking at the plastic around the
connector contacts. On the new terminator the plastic,
is black. On the original terminator, the plastic is blue.

CAUTION: Never connect more than one Cable
Terminator or Cable Terminator II on a SCSI daisy-chain.
Connecting more than one terminator can cause damage
to the computer.

Internal SCSI Termination Block - Provides internal
SCSI termination for systems without an internal SCSI
hard disk. All finished-goods Macintosh Ilfx computers
shipped without internal SCSI hard drives have the
filter attached to the logic board SCSI connector. This
termination block is removed when an internal SCSI
hard disk is present.

Internal SCSI Filter - Provides the proper termination
capacitance required for third-party drives and Apple
internal hard drives that shipped from Apple before
March 19, 1990. The SCSI filter is connected between
the SCSI signal cable and the mating connector on the
hard drive. All finished goods Macintosh Ilfx
computers shipped without internal SCSI hard drives
have the filter attached to the logic board SCSI
connector.

Note: The SCSI filter must be connected to the drive to
function correctly. Connecting the filter at the logic
board will cause SCSI failures.

5.18 / Additional Procedures

May 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

A Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Illustrated Parts List

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx - System Exploded View
(Figure 1)

IPL.5 Macintosh II - Logic Board (Figure 2)

IPL.7 Macintosh IIx - Logic Board (Figure 3)

IPL.9 Macintosh Ilfx - Logic Board (Figure 4)

IPL.ll Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx - Drives (Figure 5)

Note: The figures and lists in this section include all
piece parts that Apple sells separately for the Macintosh
II, IIx, and Ilfx computers. This list also shows part
numbers. All ADB input devices for these computers
now have their own section. Please refer to Macintosh
Family, Volume Four, for these parts. Refer to your
Apple Service Programs manual for prices.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1

□ MACINTOSH ll/llx/llfx - SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 1)

Ugm

Part No.

DescriDtion

590-0705

Apple SCSI Cable Terminator II, Mac Ilfx, Black

076-0439

Dust Shield, 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive, Package of 5

462-4100

Screws, M 3.5 x .6 x 8, PNCRS Rec

630-5229

Top Cover and Latch Assembly

590-0566

Cable, Internal Hard Disk

—

Drives for the Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx are listed under
"Macintosh Il/IIx/IIfx - Drives"

805-5051

Carrier, HDA, 5.25, SCSI

805-5066

Carrier, HDA, Internal, 3.5, SCSI, High Side-Mounting
Holes

805-0952

Carrier, HDA, Internal, 3.5, SCSI, Low Side-Mounting
Holes*

805-5050

Metal Housing/Shipping Fixture,

800K/Apple SuperDrive (for transporting)

661-0375

Power Supply, Macintosh II/IIx

661-0542

Power Supply, Macintosh Ilfx

805-5070

EMI Fence

815-6237

On/Off Button

661-0528

Logic Board, Macintosh II (without RAM; replaces part
number 661-0374)

661-0529

Logic Board, Macintosh IIx (without RAM; replaces part
number 661-0463)

661-0522

Logic Board, Macintosh Ilfx (without RAM)

590-0380

Cable, Power AC (smoke)

630-5227

Macintosh II Bottom Cover Assembly

630-5494

Macintosh IIx Bottom Cover Assembly

630-5806

Macintosh Ilfx Bottom Cover Assembly

815-6024

Reset/Interrupt Switch

630-5222

Speaker

805-5062

Drive Mount

003-0003

Packing Disk, 2-Sided (for transporting 800K
mechanisms)

661-0345

800K Mechanism, Apple 3.5 Drive

661-0474

Apple SuperDrive

462-3401

Screw, M 3 X 6, with two washers

590-0188

Cable, 3.5 Internal Drive (red or yellow stripe)

590-0505

Cable, Internal Hard Disk Power, Macintosh II/IIx

590-0512

Cable, Internal Hard Disk Power (2x2 pin), Macintosh
Ilfx

630-5302

Assembly, Disk Slot Plug

* The drive carrier with low side-mounting holes
(805-0952) fits the 3.5-inch l60 MB (661-0625) and
1-inch height drives (661-1629) exclusively.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.3

IPL.4 / Illustrated Parts List

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ MACINTOSH II - LOGIC BOARD (Figure 2)

[tern Part No. Description

8
9

661-0528 Logic Board

600-0530 Battery Holder Board

742-0011 Lithium Battery (without leads) (replaces part number
742-0009)

462-4100 Screws

661-0402 SIMM, 256k, 120 ns

661-0403 SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 120 ns

661-0410 SIMM, DIP, 1 MB, 120 ns

661-0494 SIMM, DIP, 256K, 120 ns

661-0519 SIMM, SOJ, 256k, 80 ns

661-0520 SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 80 ns

661-0546 SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 80 ns. Parity

661-0640 ROM, Med High, Macintosh II FDHD Upgrade

342-0106 IC, ROM, 512K, Med High

66 I-O 639 ROM, High, Macintosh II FDHD Upgrade

342-0105 IC, ROM, 512K, High

661-0642 ROM, Low, Macintosh II FDHD Upgrade

342-0108 IC, ROM, 512K, Low

661-0641 ROM, Med Low, Macintosh II FDHD Upgrade

342- 0107 IC, ROM, 512K, Med Low

343 - 0002 IC, HMMU

630-8221 IC, PMMU*

344S0043 IC, IWM

344S0062 IC, SWIM

^Included in the PMMU Upgrade

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Aug 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.5

FIGURES

IPL.6 / Illustrated Parts List

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ MACINTOSH llx - LOGIC BOARD (Figure 3)

ttem

Part No.

Description

661-0529

Logic Board

600-0530

Battery Holder Board

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads) i
742-0009)

462-4100

Screws

661-0402

SIMM, 256k, 120 ns

661-0403

SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 120 ns

661-0410

SIMM, DIP, 1 MB, 120 ns

661-0494

SIMM, DIP, 256k, 120 ns

661-0519

SIMM, SOJ, 256k, 80 ns

661-0520

SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 80 ns

661-0546

SIMM, SOJ, 1 MB, 80 ns, Parity

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Aug 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.7

FIGURE 4

IPL8 / Illustrated Parts List

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ MACINTOSH llfx— LOGIC BOARD (Figure 4)

Item

Part No.

Descriotion

661-0522

Logic Board

590-4515

Internal SCSI Termination Block

590-4516

Internal SCSI Filter

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads)

661-0548

661-0549

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns, 64 pin

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 60 ns, 64 pin. Parity

Note: Items 1 and 2 ship only with Macintosh
Ilfx systems without hard drives.

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

rev. Apr 90

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.9

FIGURE 5

IPL.10 / Illustrated Parts List

Mar 90

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ MACINTOSH llfx— LOGIC BOARD WITH PARITY (Figure 5)

Item

Part No.

Descriotion

—

661-0592

Logic Board with Parity

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads)

661-0549

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 60 ns, 64 pin. Parity

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

Mar 90

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1 1

FIGURE 6

IPL.12 / Illustrated Parts List

rev. Aug 91

Macintosh ll/llx/llfx

□ MACINTOSH ll/llx/llfx - DRIVES (Figure 5)

Item Part No. Description

661-0373

661-0612

661-0391

661-0464

661-1629

661-0457

66I-O56I

661-0613

661-0411

661-0600

661-0601

66I-O625

602-0164

602-0282

602-0148

HDA, 3.5-Inch, 20 MB, SCSI, Rev. A
HDA, 3.5-Inch, 20 MB, SCSI, Rev. B
HDA, 5.25-Inch, 40 MB, SCSI
HDA, 3.5-Inch, 40 MB, SCSI
HDA, 3.5-Inch, 1 -Inch-Height, 40 MB, SCSI*

HDA, 5.25-Inch, 80 MB, SCSI with A/UX, v.1.0
HDA, 3.5-Inch, 80 MB, SCSI with A/UX, v.1.1 (replaced
by 66I-O613)

HDA, 3.5-Inch, 80 MB, SCSI with A/UX, v.2.0
HDA, 5.25-Inch, 80 MB, SCSI
HDA, 3.5-Inch, 80 MB, SCSI
HDA, 5.25-Inch, I60 MB, SCSI
HDA, 3.5-Inch, I60 MB, SCSI*

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height (replaced
by 602-0282 or 602-0308)

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height; and 3.5-
Inch, 1 -Inch-Height, with Carrier
Service Packaging, HDA, 5.25-Inch

* Use the drive carrier with low side-mounting holes
(805-0952) with these drives.

Macintosh ll/llx/ilfx

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1 1

(

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 -
Basics

1.3 Product Descriptions

1.4 Features

1.5 Configurations

1.6 Connector Identification

1.6 Back Panel

1.7 Internal Connectors

1.8 Module Identification

1.9 Logic Board Features

1.9 Macintosh Ilex

1.10 Macintosh Ilci

1.11 Macintosh Quadra 700

1.12 Specifications - Macintosh Ilex

1.14 Specifications - Macintosh Ilci

I.l6 Specifications - Macintosh Quadra 700

1.18 Theory of Operation - Introduction

1.19 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Ilex

1.19 Introduction

1.19 System Startup

1.20 Logic Board

1.21 Input/Output Interface

1.24 Real-Time Clock

1.24 Apple Desktop Bus

1.25 NuBus Interface

1.26 Power Control

1.27 Power Supply

1.27 Fuses

1.27 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.28 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Contents / i

1.29 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Ilci

1.29 Introduction

1.29 System Startup

1.30 Logic Board

1.33 Input/Output Interface

1.35 Real-Time Clock

1.36 Apple Desktop Bus

1.36 NuBus Interface

1.38 Power Control

1.39 Power Supply

1.39 Fuses

1.39 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.39 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

1.40 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Quadra 700

1.40 Introduction

1.40 System Startup

1.41 Logic Board

1.42 Input/Output Interface

1.45 Real-Time Clock

1.45 Apple Desktop Bus

1.46 NuBus Interface

1.47 Processor-Direct Slot

1.48 Power Control

1.48 Power Supply

1.49 Fuses

1.49 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.49 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

Section 2 -

2.2

Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

Take-Apart

2.3

Lid

2.4

Interface Cards

2.5

Speaker Bracket and Speaker

2.7

Power Supply

2.9

Fan Bracket and Fan

2.11

Hard Disk Drive

2.15

Disk Drive Mount and Floppy Disk Drive

2.18

Reset/Interrupt Switch

2.19

Main Logic Board

ii / Contents

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Section 3 -
Diagnostics

3.2 Introduction

3.3 About MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.4 Copying the Disk

3.4 Using Your Backup Disk

3.5 Running MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.5 Materials Required

3.5 Starting MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.6 Helpful Startup Information

3.7 Installing the Loopbacks

3.8 Using the MacTest Ilcx/IIci Menus

3.13 Running the Tests

3.15 Diagnostic Sound Sampler

3.15 Introduction

3.15 Materials Required

3.15 Procedure

3.16 Introduction to AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci

3.17 Running AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci

3.17 Materials Required

3.17 Setting Up the Test Station and UUT

3.20 Establishing Communication

3.21 Using the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Menus

3.23 Running the Tests

3.25 Helpful Suggestions

3.26 SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure

3.26 Determining Whether You Need a Jumper

3.27 External Jumpers

3.27 Summary

3.27 Installing the Jumper

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Contents / iii

Section 4 -

4.2

Introduction

Troubleshooting

4.2

General Information

4.2

Troubleshooting Procedure

4.2

How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.3

How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3

Things to Remember

4.5

Module Exchange Information

4.5

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Logic Boards

4.5

Macintosh Quadra 700 Logic Board

4.5

Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.5

Macintosh Ilci Cache Card

4.6

Startup and Error Chords

4.6

Introduction

4.6

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Startup Chord

4.6

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Error Chords

4.6

Macintosh Quadra 700 Startup Chord

4.7

Macintosh Quadra 700 Error Chords

4.8

Symptom Chart

4.8

System Problems

4.9

Video Problems

4.10

Apple SuperDrive Problems

4.11

SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.12

Peripheral Problems

4.13

Miscellaneous Problems

4.15

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Flowcharts

4.24

DRAM SIMM Verification

4.24

Introduction

4.24

Materials Required

4.24

Verification

4.26

Battery Verification

4.26

Introduction

4.26

Materials Required

4.26

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Battery Verification

4.27

Macintosh Quadra 700 Battery Verification

Section 5 -

5.2

Battery Replacement

Additional

5.2

Storage and Handling

Procedures

5.2

Disposal

5.5

Memory Identification and Upgrades

5.5

Introduction

5.5

Identification

5.6

DRAM Upgrades - Macintosh Ilcx/IIci

5.8

DRAM Upgrades - Macintosh Quadra 700

5.9

VRAM Upgrades - Macintosh Quadra 700

5.10

Macintosh Ilex Upgrade to Macintosh Ilci

5.12

Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Upgrade to Macintosh

Quadra 700

iv / Contents

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Illustrated
Parts List

IPL.3 Macintosh Ilex - Exploded View (Figure 1)

IPL.5 Macintosh Ilci - Exploded View (Figure 2)

IPL.7 Macintosh Quadra 700 - Exploded View
(Figure 3)

IPL.9 Macintosh Ilex - Logic Board (Figure 4)

IPL.ll Macintosh Ilci - Logic Board (Figure 5)

IPL.ll Macintosh Ilci - Logic Board w/Parity (Figure 6)

IPL.13 Macintosh Quadra 700 - Logic Board (Figure 7)

IPL.15 Macintosh Ilci - Cache Card (Figure 8)

©Apple Computer, Inc., 1989-1991. No portion of this document may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleCAT, AppleTalk, A/UX, EtherTalk, and Macintosh are registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Desktop Bus, Finder, Macintosh Quadra, MacTest, QuickDraw, Sound Manager, and
SuperDrive are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

UNIX® is a registered trademark of UNIX Systems Laboratories.

NuBus^“ is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Contents / v

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Section 1 - Basics

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

1.3 Product Descriptions

1.4 Features

1.5 Configurations

1.6 Connector Identification

1.6 Back Panel

1.7 Internal Connectors

1.8 Module Identification

1.9 Logic Board Features

1.9 Macintosh Ilex

1.10 Macintosh Ilci

1.11 Macintosh Quadra 700

1.12 Specifications - Macintosh Ilex

1.14 Specifications - Macintosh Ilci

l.l6 Specifications - Macintosh Quadra 700

1.18 Theory of Operation - Introduction

1.19 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Ilex

1.19 Introduction

1.19 System Startup

1.20 Logic Board

1.21 Input/ Output Interface

1.24 Real-Time Clock

1.24 Apple Desktop Bus

1.25 NuBus Interface

1.26 Power Control

1.27 Power Supply

1.27 Fuses

1.27 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.28 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

...Continued on next page

Oct 91

Basics / 1.1

1.29 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Ilci

1.29 Introduction

1.29 System Startup

1.30 Logic Board

1.33 Input/Output Interface

1.35 Real-Time Clock

1.36 Apple Desktop Bus

1.36 NuBus Interface

1.38 Power Control

1.39 Power Supply

1.39 Fuses

1.39 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.39 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

1.40 Theory of Operation - Macintosh Quadra 700

1.40 Introduction

1.40 System Startup

1.41 Logic Board

1.42 Input/Output Interface

1.45 Real-Time Clock

1.45 Apple Desktop Bus

1.46 NuBus Interface

1.47 Processor-Direct Slot

1.48 Power Control

1.48 Power Supply

1.49 Fuses

1.49 Internal Floppy Disk Drive

1.49 Internal SCSI Hard Disk

1 .2 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS

The Apple® Macintosh® Ilex, Macintosh Ilci, and
Macintosh Quadra’'** 700 computers are high-
performance, open- architecture personal computers. All
three machines run existing Macintosh software.

Macintosh Ilex: The Macintosh Ilex is a 68030-based
machine that runs at 16 MHz. It offers paged memory
management and floating-point coprocessing for
calculation-intensive operations. The Macintosh Ilex
uses the NuBus™ interface (three slots) and DRAM
SIMMs for system expansion. The minimum memory
configuration on the Macintosh Ilex is 1 MB of DRAM
installed in DRAM SIMM sockets (expandable to 32
MB). The system ROM (256K) is soldered on the logic
board; the logic board also features a ROM SIMM
socket. The Macintosh Ilex supports 32-bit
QuickDraw™, stereo sound, and an external floppy
drive.

Macintosh Ilci: The Macintosh Ilci is a 68030-based
machine that runs at 25 MHz. In addition to the
features offered by the Macintosh Ilex, the Macintosh
Ilci offers built-in video, burst access mode, support for
parity RAM, and a RAM cache connector to enhance
performance. The Macintosh Ilci comes standard with
5 MB of DRAM installed in DRAM SIMM sockets
(expandable to 32 MB). The system ROM (512K) is
soldered on the logic board; the logic board also
features a ROM SIMM socket.

Macintosh Quadra 700: The Macintosh Quadra 700 is a
68040-based machine that runs at 25 MHz. Memory
management, memory cache, and math coprocessing are
built into the 68040 chip. The computer’s modular
design is very similar to that of the Macintosh Ilex and
Ilci but is intended to stand vertically rather than
horizontally. The Macintosh Quadra 700 features
VRAM-based on-board video, built-in Ethernet support,
and improved SCSI and NuBus interfaces. In addition to
two NuBus slots, the Macintosh Quadra 700 has an in-
line 68040 processor-direct slot (PDS). The Macintosh
Quadra 700 comes with 4 MB of DRAM soldered on the
logic board and four DRAM SIMM sockets for memory
expansion (up to 20 MB). The system ROM (1 MB) is
soldered on the logic board; the logic board also
features a ROM SIMM socket. The Macintosh Quadra
700 supports 32-bit QuickDraw and stereo sound.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .3

Features

This table compares the features of the Macintosh Ilex,
Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers.

Feature

Ilex

Ilci

Quadra 700

Processor

68030

68040

Processor speed

16 MHz

25 MHz

On-board ROM

256K

512K

1 MB

Standard DRAM

1 MB

SMB

4 MB

Maximum DRAM

32 MB

20 MB

Built-in video support

✓

Video monitor options (via NuBus)

✓

ROM SIMM connectors

✓

NuBus expansion slots

Built-in Ethernet p>ort

✓

Processor-direct slot

✓

Cache card connector

✓

Memory caching

Built in

Floating-p>oint coprocessor

68882

Math coprocessing

Built in

Burst access supp>ort

✓

Parity

✓**

True 32-bit support

✓

Internal Apple SuperDrive’’’**

✓

Optional internal hard disk

40 or

80 MB

40, 80 or
160 MB

80 or

160 MB

External floppy drive connector

✓

RS-422 serial ports

Sound input port

✓

Locking p>ower switch

✓

Compatiblity with other
operating systems

✓

* RS-232 compatible ** Optional feature

1 .4 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Configurations

The Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 are available
from Apple in a variety of configurations. (Other
configurations beyond those offered by Apple are also
possible.) The chart below shows the configurations
and enhancements available from Apple for the
Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers.

Note: You may see units with DRAM configurations not
shown below and with third-party internal SCSI hard

Internal Hard Disk

None
40 MB
80 MB

80 MB with A/UX® installed

None
40 MB
80 MB

80 MB with A/UX installed
160 MB

Macintosh Quadra 700

4 MB None

4 MB 80 MB

4 MB 160 MB

Note: All systems include one internal Apple
SuperDrive.

disk drives.

DRAM

Macintosh Ilex
1 MB
1 MB
4 MB

4 MB

Macintosh Ilci

5 MB
5 MB
5 MB
5 MB
5 MB

IMPORTANT: A/UX customers must use the appropriate
/VUX version for their system(s). Refer to A/UX
specifications in the Product Info Library on AppleLink, or
the A/l/X data sheet for specific version requirements.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .5

Macintosh Quadra 700 I Macintosh iici I Macintosh iicx

□ CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION

(

Back Panei Figure l-l indicates the back panel ports, connectors,

and switches on the Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra
700 computers.

Locking Power External SCSI Printer Modem Audio Apple
Switch Disk Drive (Stereo) Desktop Bus

Locking Video SCSI Ethernet Printer Modem Apple Audio Micro-
Power Desktop (Stereo) phone

Switch Bus Input

Figure 1-1 Back Panel Connectors

1 .6 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Internal Connectors

Figure 1-2 indicates the internal connectors on the
Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 logic boards.

ROM SIMM,
Connector

NuBus

Connectors

|UUUULJ li

□ ■■■■ 1

■s ■

Speaker

Connector

DRAM SIMM
Connectors

Power Supply
Connector

SCSI Connector

Internal SCSI
Power Connector

Internal Disk Drive
Connector

Cache Card
Connector

ROM SIMM.
Connector

NuBus

Connectors

mn fl n n O EilSZlLl ft

“.Si E53

Power Supply
Connector

SCSI Connector

Internal SCSI Power
Connector
Internal Disk Drive
Connector

Speaker DRAM SIMM
Connector Connectors

NuBu^

Connectors

68040,

Processor

Direct

Slot

Speaker ROM SIMM
Connector Connector

Power Supply
Connector

SCSI Connector

Internal Disk Drive
Connector

Internal SCSI
Power Connector
VRAM SIMM
Connectors
(3 Banks of 2 )

RAM SIMM
Connector
(1 Bank of 4)

Figure 1-2 Internal Connectors

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .7

□ MODULE IDENTIFICATION

Exploded View

Figure 1-3 shows the modular components that make up
the Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers.

HDA (SCSI)
Drive

LED Cable

Drive Mount

1 .4 MB Floppy
Disk Drive '

Speaker _
& Bracket

Reset/

Interrupt

Switch

(llcx/llci)

Reset/

Interrupt

Switch

(Quadra 700)

Top Cover

Power Supply

Logic Board
(Quadra 700
shown)

Bottom Case

Figure 1-3 Module Identification

1 .8 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ LOGIC BOARD FEATURES

Macintosh Ilex

This section details the logic board features for the
Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers. Refer
to Figures 1-4, 1-5, and 1-6 to locate components.

The Macintosh Ilex CPU is a Motorola 68030
microprocessor. The 68030 is a true 32-bit
microprocessor that is fully compatible with earlier
68000 series Macintosh computers. The Macintosh Ilex
68030 runs at 16 MHz and includes paged memory
management, thereby eliminating the paged memory
management unit (PMMU) necessary in some earlier
Macintosh computers.

The Macintosh Ilex logic board has four 28-pin soldered
ROM chips (total ROM size is 256K). The ROM chips
include code that supports the Apple SuperDrive and
the SWIM (Sanders-Wozniak integrated machine) disk
controller chip. The SWIM chip enables the Apple
SuperDrive to read and write both OCR (group-coded
recording) and MFM (modified frequency modulation)
data formats.

The logic board has a 64-pin ROM SIMM (single in-line
memory module) connector. When you install a ROM
SIMM, the existing ROM remains on the board. The
Macintosh Ilex recognizes the new ROM after you
remove the ROM jumper on the logic board.

see

ROM

SIMM

eonnector

68882

eoprocessor

ROM.

Jumper

256K ROM
(Soldered)

lUUQUU

D ra bs
OOO qbq

SeSI General Logic Unit

On/Off Switch

SWIM ehip

68030

Microprocessor
Nuehip 30

Battery

Reset Interrupt
Switch Switch

DRAM SIMM eonnectors

Figure 1-4 Macintosh ilex Logic Board Features

Maeintosh I lex/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .9

Macintosh llci

The Macintosh Ilci CPU is a Motorola 68030
microprocessor. The 68030 is a true 32-bit
microprocessor that is fully compatible with earlier
68000 series Macintosh computers. The Macintosh Ilci
68030 runs at 25 MHz and includes paged memory
management, thereby eliminating the PMMU necessary
in some earlier Macintosh computers. The 68030
processor in the Macintosh Ilci also features burst
access capability, which enables the CPU to read groups
of instructions or data in fewer clock cycles than in
normal access mode.

The Macintosh Ilci logic board has four 128K x 8-bit
32-pin DIP soldered ROM chips (total ROM size is
512K). The ROM chips include code that supports built-
in video, optional parity checking, virtual memory (used
on A/UX systems), and 32-bit QuickDraw routines.

The logic board has a 64-pin ROM SIMM connector.
When you install a ROM SIMM, the existing ROM
remains on the board. The Macintosh Ilci recognizes
the new ROM after you remove the ROM jumper on the
logic board.

Figure 1-5 Macintosh Ilci Logic Board Features

1.10/ Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Macintosh Quadra 700

The Macintosh Quadra 700 uses a Motorola 68040
processor that runs at 25 MHz. Memory management,
memory cache (8K), and math coprocessing are all built
into the 68040 chip. The 68040 is compatible with
earlier 68000 series Macintosh computers.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 logic board has two 4-Mbit
soldered ROM chips (total ROM size is 1 MB) running
at 150 ns. Each ROM chip is a 256K x 16 device.

The logic board has a 64-pin ROM SIMM connector.
When you install a ROM SIMM, the existing ROM
remains on the board. The Macintosh Quadra 700
recognizes the new ROM automatically; there is no
ROM jumper on the Quadra 700 logic board.

Enhanced Apple
Sound Chip

DFAC

VIA1

Relayer

68040

YANCC
(NuBus Chip)

ROM SIMM
Connector

1 MB ROM
(Soldered)

,SCSI Controller

On/Off Switch

DAFB

VRAM

MCU

VRAM

SIMM

j~ Connectors

I- DRAM
SIMM
Connectors

Reset

Switch

Interrupt

Switch

4 MB DRAM
(Soldered)

Battery

Figure 1-6 Macintosh Quadra 700 Logic Board Features

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Jan 92

Basics / 1.11

□ SPECIFICATIONS - Macintosh Ilex

Prcxiessor

Coprocessor

ROM

DRAM

Interfaces

Disk Drives

Video Dispiay

Sound

Keyboards

Mouse

MC68030 running at l6 MHz

32-bit address bus; 32-bit registers

Built-in paged memory management unit (PMMU)

MC68882 floating-point unit (FPU) on the logic board
Supports coprocessor expansion through NuBus

256k soldered on the logic board
ROM SIMM socket

1, 2, or 4 MB standard — expandable to 5 or 8 MB using
256 k or 1 MB DRAM SIMMs (80 to 120 ns)

(DRAM configurations greater than 8 MB require
DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers and
Mode 32 software)

Additional memory expansion through NuBus slots

Two ADB connectors (mini DIN-4) for keyboard, mouse,
and low-speed input devices
Three NuBus slots (96-pin Euro-DIN connector)

Two RS-422 serial ports (mini-8), 230.4 Kbaud maximum
SCSI interface (DB-25)

Stereo sound port

One internal Apple SuperDrive

External 3.5-inch floppy disk drive connector (800K or
1.4 MB)

Internal 3.5-inch SCSI hard disk (40 or 80 MB)

Supports multiple external color and monochrome
monitors via NuBus video cards

Apple sound chip (ASC), including four-voice wave-
table synthesis and stereo sampling generator
capable of driving stereo mini phone jack
headphones or stereo equipment
Mixed stereo monophonic output — internal speaker

Apple Keyboard, Apple Extended Keyboard, Apple
Keyboard II, or Apple Extended Keyboard II

ADB mouse (mini DIN-4)

1.12/ Basics

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Input Power

Output Power

Power Supply Ratings

Clock/Calendar

Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Altitude

Physical Dimensions

100 to 240 volts AC (rms), automatically configured
50-60 Hz single phase

130 watts maximum (not including monitor power
connector load), 90 watts maximum continuous

Output receptacle: 100-240 volts AC (rms)
(determined by actual input voltage)

DC output: 90 watts maximum

+5 volts 12.0 amps (60 watts)

+12 volts 1.5 amps 08 watts)

-12 volts 1.0 amps (12 watts)

Input voltage range: 85-135 volts (rms) and 170-270
volts (rms)

Input surge range: 300 volts (rms) for 100 ms
Input line transient immunity: 0-6 kilovolts with no
component failures

Peak inrush current: 40 amps for all load and line
conditions

Input line frequency: 47-63 Hz, single phase
Line dropout immiuiity: 20 ms minimum, for 85 volts
(rms); 50 Hz input and maximum load
Input/Output power efficiency: 70% minimum for all
line conditions and maximum load

CMOS custom chip with long-life lithium battery
256 bytes of parameter memory

50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

-40° F to 116.6° F (-40° C to 47° C)

5% to 95% (noncondensing)

0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 feet)

Height: 5.5 inches (140 millimeters)

Width: 11.9 inches (312 millimeters)

Depth: 14.4 inches (365 millimeters)

Weight: 13 pounds, 10 ounces (6.2 kilograms)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1.13

□ SPECIFICATIONS - Macintosh llci

Processor

Coprocessor

ROM

DRAM

Interfaces

Disk Drives

Video Dispiay

Sound

MC68030 running at 25.0 MHz

32-bit address bus; 32-bit registers

Built-in paged memory management unit (PMMU)

Supports burst access mode and parity error checking

25 MHz MC68882 floating-point unit on the logic board
Supports coprocessor expansion through NuBus

512K soldered on the logic board
ROM SIMM socket

5 MB standard — expandable to 8, 9, 10, or l6 MB using
256 k, 512K, 1 MB, or 2 MB DRAM SIMMs (80 ns
fast-page mode)

(DRAM configurations greater than l6 MB require
DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers)

Parity error detection DRAM optional
Additional memory expansion through NuBus slots

Two ADB connectors (mini DIN-4) for keyboard, mouse,
and low-speed input devices
Three NuBus slots (96-pin Euro-DIN connector)

Two RS-422 (RS-232 compatible) serial ports (mini-8),

230.4 Kbaud maximum

Cache connector (120-pin Euro-DIN)

Built-in video (DB-15)

SCSI interface (DB-25)

Stereo sound port

One internal Apple SuperDrive

External 3.5-inch floppy disk drive connector (800K or

1.4 MB)

Internal 3.5-inch SCSI hard disk (40, 80, or l60 MB)

Built-in video with external port to support the

Macintosh 12-inch Monochrome Display, Macintosh
12-inch RGB Display, Apple High-Resolution
Monochrome Monitor, AppleColor High-Resolution
RGB Monitor, and the Apple Portrait Display
System supports multiple external color and
monochrome monitors via NuBus cards

1.14/ Basics

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

)

Keyboards

Apple Keyboard, Apple Extended Keyboard, Apple
Keyboard II, or Apple Extended Keyboard II

Mouse

ADB mouse (mini DIN-4)

Input Power

Output Power

Power Supply Ratings

100 to 240 volts AC (rms), automatically configured

50-60 Hz single phase

130 watts maximum (not including monitor power
connector load), 90 watts maximum continuous

Output receptacle: 100-240 volts AC (rms)
(determined by actual input voltage)

DC output: 90 watts maximum

+5 volts 12.0 amps (60 watts)

+12 volts 1.5 amps (18 watts)

-12 volts 1.0 amps (12 watts)

Input voltage range: 85-135 volts (rms) and 170-270
volts (rms)

Input surge range: 300 volts (rms) for 100 ms

Input line transient immunity: 0-6 kilovolts with no
component failures

Peak inrush current: 40 amps for all load and line
conditions

Input line frequency: 47-63 Hz, single phase

Line dropout immunity: 20 ms minimum, for 85 volts
(rms); 50 Hz input and maximum load

Input/Output power efficiency: 70% minimum for all
line conditions and maximum load

Clock/Caiendar

Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Altitude

CMOS custom chip with long-life lithium battery
256 bytes of parameter memory

50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

-40° F to 116.6° F (-40° C to 47° C)

5% to 95% (noncondensing)

0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 feet)

Physical Dimensions Height:

Width:

Depth:

Weight:

5.5 inches (140 millimeters)

11.9 inches (312 millimeters)

14.4 inches (365 millimeters)

13 pounds, 10 ounces (6.2 kilograms)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1.15

□ SPECIFICATIONS -- Macintosh Quadra 700

Processor

ROM

DRAM

Video RAM

Interfaces

Disk Drives

Video Dispiay

Sound

1.16/ Basics

MC68040 running at 25.0 MHz
32-bit address bus; 32-bit registers
Built-in paged memory management unit (PMMU), math
coprocessor, and 8K cache architecture

1 MB soldered on the logic board
ROM SIMM socket

4 MB standard — expandable to 8 or 20 MB using 1 MB
or 4 MB DRAM SIMMs (80 ns fast-page mode)

(DRAM configurations of 20 MB or greater require
DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers)
Additional memory expansion through NuBus slots

512K standard — expandable to 1 or 2 MB using 512K
VRAM SIMMs (100 ns)

Two ADB connectors (mini DIN-4) for keyboard, mouse,
and low-speed input devices
Two NuBus slots (96-pin Euro-DIN connector)

One 68040 processor-direct slot (PDS)

Two RS-422 (RS-232-compatible) serial ports (mini-8),
230.4 Kbaud maximum
Built-in video (DB-15)

Built-in Ethernet connector (AUI-15)

SCSI interface (DB-25)

Stereo sound output port
Sound input port

Internal Apple SuperDrive

Internal 3.5-inch SCSI hard disk (80 or 160 MB)

Built-in VRAM video support for all Apple monitors; six
VRAM expansion slots (three banks)

Multiple external color and monochrome monitors
through NuBus expansion slots

Enhanced Apple sound chip (EASC), including four-voice
wave-table synthesis and stereo sampling generator
capable of driving stereo mini phone jack
headphones or stereo equipment
Mixed stereo monophonic output — internal speaker
Sound input — omnidirectional microphone (output
voltage is 4 millivolts, peak to peak, at normal
speaking volume)

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Keyboard

Mouse
Input Power

Output Power

Power Supply Ratings

Clock/Caiendar

Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Reiative Humidity
Altitude

Physical Specifications

Apple Keyboard, Apple Extended Keyboard, Apple
Keyboard II, or Apple Extended Keyboard II

ADB mouse (mini DIN-4)

100 to 240 volts AC (rms), automatically configured
50-60 Hz single phase

130 watts maximum (not including monitor power
connector load), 90 watts maximum continuous

Output receptacle: 100-240 volts AC (rms)
(determined by actual input voltage)

DC output: 90 watts maximum

+5 volts 12.0 amps (60 watts)

+12 volts 1.5 amps (18 watts)

-12 volts 1.0 amps (12 watts)

Input voltage range: 85-135 volts (rms) and 170-270
volts (rms)

Input surge range: 300 volts (rms) for 100 ms

Input line transient immunity: 0-6 kilovolts with no
component failures

Peak inrush current: 40 amps for all load and line
conditions

Input line frequency: 47-63 Hz, single phase
Line dropout immunity: 20 ms minimum, for 85 volts
(rms); 50 Hz input and maximum load
Input/Output power efficiency: 70% minimum for all
line conditions and maximum load

CMOS custom chip with long-life lithium battery
256 bytes of parameter memory

50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

-40° F to 116.6° F (-40° C to 47° C)

20% to 80% (noncondensing)

0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 feet)

Height: 5.5 inches (140 millimeters)

Width: 11.9 inches (312 millimeters)

Depth: 14.4 inches (365 millimeters)

Weight: 13 pounds, 10 ounces (6.2 kilograms)

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1.17

□ THEORY OF OPERATION - Introduction

The Theory of Operation sections explain how the
Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers work.
There is a separate section for each of the three
computers. The information in these sections will help
you in troubleshooting the systems.

The Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 computers
consist of three basic modules: the logic board, the
power supply, and the disk drive mount. The addition
of a video interface card (required for the Macintosh
Ilex) constitutes a fourth module. All three computers
support one internal floppy disk drive and one internal
SCSI hard disk.

The primary differences among the three computers are
in the main logic boards — the power supplies and disk
drives are the same in all three computers. For easier
reference, the information on power supplies and disk
drives is repeated for each computer.

1.18/ Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ THEORY OF OPERATION - Macintosh Ilex

Introduction

System Startup

The Macintosh Ilex computer system consists of four
basic modules: the logic board, the power supply, the
disk drive mount, and the video interface card. The
Macintosh Ilex supports one internal floppy disk drive
and one internal SCSI hard disk.

When you switch on the computer, the system begins a
synchronized sequence of events. First, the processor
waits while a series of circuits puts the system in a
known state in preparation for operation.

The initial startup sequence initializes the VI As
(versatile interface adapters) and the SWIM chip and
temporarily alters the mapping of RAM and ROM in
order to test the system.

The firmware in ROM performs a DRAM test to
determine how much DRAM is present and to verify its
proper operation. This information is then stored in a
global variable, and several other system tests are
performed. When the system is fully tested and
initialized, system DRAM is mapped for normal
operation.

After the initial startup sequence, the system looks for
a readable disk in the available disk drives in the
following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive

2. External floppy disk drive

3. Setup device set in the control panel

4. SCSI devices in declining order of device ID
(6 to 0)

Note: If the battery is removed or the contents of the
parameter RAM are wiped out, the setup device defaults
to the device with ID=0.

Once the system Finds a readable disk, the system reads
the disk and completes the disk startup process.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1.19

Logic Board

Microprocessor

Coprocessor

DRAM

The logic board is where all processing of information
takes place. This section describes the major logic
board components and the functions they perform.

The Macintosh Ilex uses a Motorola 68030
microprocessor that runs at 16 MHz. The 68030 is a
true 32-bit processor that also supports 16/32
processing mode.

When working in A/UX (the Apple UNIX® operating
system), the 68030 microprocessor incorporates
instruction sets for handling paged memory management,
thereby eliminating the need for a PMMU (as found in
the Macintosh II). When data is sought from a memory
location that is not in RAM, the 68030 swaps the page
containing the data from the disk to RAM.

The Macintosh Ilex uses a Motorola 68882 floating-
point coprocessor that performs computations in parallel
with the microprocessor. The coprocessor chip is in a
64-pin grid array.

The Macintosh Ilex contains DRAM in single in-line
memory modules (SIMMs). A SIMM is a small printed
circuit board with DRAM chips. On one edge of each
SIMM is a contact that fits into the SIMM sockets on
the logic board. There are two banks (A and B) of
DRAM.

On the Macintosh Ilex, bank A consists of the four
SIMM sockets closest to the disk drive mount (refer to
Figure 1-4). Bank B consists of the remaining four
SIMM sockets.

The RAM interface requires DRAM with CAS-before-
RAS refresh. The Macintosh Ilex requires 120 ns or
faster DRAM.

You can change the amount of DRAM on the logic board
by installing four additional (or larger) SIMMs in bank
A or bank B.

Note: SIMMs installed in an individual bank must be of
the same size (256 k, 1 MB, or 4 MB); however, the
SIMMs in bank A can be of a different size than those
in bank B.

1 .20 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

The Macintosh Ilex requires that the larger DRAM
SIMMs be in bank A.

ROM

Input/Output

Interface

Read-Only Memory (ROM) is the system’s permanent
memory. The ROM contains the routines for the
operating system, the Toolbox, virtual memory (VM),
32-bit QuickDraw routines, and other necessary system
routines. The ROM supports 32-bit addressing (that is,
it can address up to 1.2 gigabytes of addressable
memory).

The Macintosh Ilex has 256K of ROM. The ROM is
contained in four 64K chips in 28-pin DIP packages
(soldered). This configuration forms a 32-bit wide data
bus.

The logic board also features a 64-pin ROM SIMM
connector.

The system input/output interfaces are:

• The serial ports, controlled by the serial
communications controller (SCO circuitry

• The floppy disk, controlled by the SWIM circuitry

• The SCSI devices, controlled by the small computer
system interface (SCSI) circuitry

• The stereo sound port, controlled by Apple sound
chip (ASC) circuitry

The floating-point coprocessor and the VIA chips and
associated circuitry are, to some extent, input/output
devices; however, they provide input/output to the
processor only. They do not have external ports as the
system level input/output circuitry does.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .21

VIAs

SWIM Chip

SCSI

The Macintosh Ilex contains two versatile interface
adapters (VIAs). These chips, VIAl and VIA2, provide
maximum compatibility with existing Macintosh
software.

The Macintosh Ilex VIAl provides the system with most
of the signals designed into the 68000-based Macintosh
systems. It also provides access to additional features,
including an Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) interrupt and a
synchronous modem signal.

The Macintosh Ilex VIA2 does the following:

• Controls the fake memory mapping unit

• Decodes the NuBus slot, SCSI, and the digital sound
chip interrupts

• Disables the 68030 instruction and data cache

• Switches the unit off

• Blocks NuBus accesses to DRAM

• Decodes errors that occur in NuBus transactions

The access time between the two VIA chips and the
68030 is 500 ns. The internal frequency of the VIA is
783.36 KHz.

The SWIM chip incorporates the functionality of the
IWM (from the original Macintosh II). It provides the
capability to read, write, and format in GCR (Apple),
MFM (MS-DOS and Apple high-density), and ProDOS
data formats. The SWIM chip controls the one internal
floppy disk drive internal to the unit and the one
external floppy drive, if connected. The SWIM chip
uses a 15.667-MH2 clock when accessing the Apple
SuperDrive and uses a divide-by-two circuit when
accessing an 800K drive.

The small computer system interface (SCSI) consists of a
SCSI chip (53C80 CMOS version), an internal 50-pin
connector, and an external DB-25 connector. The chip
maps directly to both connectors and controls the high-
speed parallel port for communicating with up to seven
SCSI peripherals. This device supports arbitration of
the SCSI bus, including reselection. A set of memory-
mapped read-and-write registers controls the chip.

The external SCSI port differs from the industry SCSI
standard in two ways:

1 .22 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Serial

Communications

Controller

Apple

Sound Chip

1. It uses a DB-25 connector instead of the standard
50-pin connector. (An adapter is available to
convert the connector to the standard.)

2. It provides power for termination resistors. If an
attached SCSI device does not have the required
terminator resistor, you must install a terminator
block on the last device.

The serial communications controller (SCO controls
the two serial ports. The serial ports conform to EIA
standard RS-422. These ports are primarily for
connecting the computer to networks, printers, and
modems.

In the Macintosh Ilex, you can program the printer port
for asynchronous, synchronous, or AppleTalk®
protocols, and the modem port for asynchronous
operation only.

The two serial ports use Mini-DIN 8 connectors. Both
connectors interface with the SCC through serial driver
chips. Each signal pin passes through an RC filter
network. The ports provide an output handshake but do
not provide the +5 and +12 volts from the serial ports
on the Macintosh 128K, 512K, and 512K enhanced.

The Apple sound chip in the Macintosh Ilex generates a
stereo/audio signal. This signal is buffered by two
additional chips that filter the PWM (pulse width
modulated) signal and drive the internal speaker or
external stereo mini phone jack. When an external
stereo mini phone jack is not plugged into the
connector, channel A drives the internal speaker.

The sound generation system supports previous
Macintosh modes; it also offers a complete set of new
ROM tools in the software Sound Manager™ for
performing sound generation.

Macintosh Ilcx/Ilci/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .23

Real-Time

Clock

Apple

Desktop Bus

The real-time clock in the Macintosh Ilex is a custom
chip. It contains 256 bytes of RAM that receives power
from a battery when external power is off. These RAM
bytes are called parameter RAM (or PRAM). They store
the configuration of ports, the clock setting, and other
data that must be preserved even when the system
power is not available.

The Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) is a serial communication
bus for connecting keyboards, mouse devices, graphic
tablets, and other input devices to the system. It is a
single-master, multiple-slave serial bus using an
asynchronous protocol. The processor normally samples
the state of each of the devices by using the control
lines and shift register in VIAl to read or write bytes
over an internal serial link to the ADB modem chip. A
4-bit microprocessor drives the external bus and reads
the status of the selected device.

The microprocessor normally samples the state of each
device by using the control lines in VIAl to read or
write to the Apple Desktop Bus modem chip.

Except for the mouse, all ADB devices have some kind
of microprocessor that makes them intelligent devices.
The mini 4-pin ADB connector connects the devices to
the computer. All ADB devices, except the mouse, have
ports for connecting to other ADB devices. Because it
has no port, the mouse must be the last device attached
to the bus.

Apple keyboards connect to the ADB port on the back
of the computer. The keyboards have their own
microprocessors, which are called keyboard
microcontrollers. The keyboards operate
asynchronously, issuing commands on the ADB and
transmitting and receiving data to and from the ADB
devices.

1 .24 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

The Macintosh Ilex uses the NuBus architecture for
system expansion. The Macintosh Ilex has three NuBus
slots. These slots can be used to support Apple
standard peripherals and to increase DRAM size. Each
expansion slot has a 96-pin DIN connector that uses the
NuBus interface to communicate with the system. The
following are some of the types of cards that will go
into the NuBus slots:

• Video cards

• RAM expansion cards

• Network interface cards

• Add-on SCSI port cards

The NuBus interface supports the following features:

• Geographic Addressing - Each of the three slots has
a unique 4-bit value encoded into the slots, which
eliminates the need for DIP switches or other
devices to address each card uniquely.

• Distributed Arbitration - The computer does not
have a central bus master or daisy chain to assign
bus mastership. The bus mastership is performed
with the geographic addresses, thus allowing a
priority within a group of bus requesters but not an
overriding control of the bus. In theory, all
requesters will receive equal access to the bus over
time.

• Synchronous Transaction - All bus transactions are
timed relative to a single asymmetric 10-MHz clock.

• 32-bit Address/Data - The NuBus interface supports
up to 4 GB of address with justified 8-bit, l6-bit,
and 32-bit data transactions. The 68030 processor
supports all these data types through the use of
dynamic bus sizing. As a result, word and long-
word operations do not have to be aligned but
instead cause NuBus transactions that complete the
alignment. The data bus from the processor to
NuBus is byte-reversed to allow sequential byte
addresses to appear on the NuBus data ports in the
same order as the NuBus address would imply.

• Bus Timeout - The absence of a card on the NuBus
will not cause the processor to hang the bus by
waiting for a reply. A system resource will delete
any transaction taking longer than 25.6 /is.

NuBus

Interface

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .25

• Simple Interrapts - Each card has the ability to
generate simple, open-collector interrupts that
allow cards to gain system attention without having
to become the bus master.

The NuBus interface has three major states of
communication:

• Processor to NuBus, which happens whenever the
microprocessor generates a physical slot address. If
a device responds, the data is transferred.

• NuBus to processor bus, which is for access to RAM,
ROM, and I/O to and from NuBus. Two control
functions are performed for this process — one tracks
the changes on NuBus, and the other lets the
processor tell NuBus what to do next.

• NuBus time-out, which is required to prevent access
to empty slots. Such access would hang the system.

Every NuBus card should contain a ROM declaration
that provides information to the operating system at
startup. The ROM information ensures that drivers are
properly installed and that the card is initialized and
recognized by the system.

Power The Macintosh Ilex uses a switch-and-shut-down circuit

Control circuit to control the power supply. The circuit

controls the power supply through the power failure
warning signal on the NuBus interface.

The circuit attempts to switch on the power supply
when the power switch is pressed and for two seconds
afterward. ADB keyboards have a secondary power
switch. Pressing either power switch discharges a
capacitor (through a resistor) that activates the power-
on circuitry. The capacitor receives its charge through
a soft-power circuit that is active even when the
computer is off. As long as the computer is plugged in,
the power supply will switch on the computer within
two to four seconds.

This circuit works in conjunction with the locking
power switch on the rear of the computer. This switch
can be locked in an on position, which allows the
computer to restart as soon as it detects AC power. In
effect, if there is a power failure and the computer
shuts off, it will restart as soon as power is restored.

If this switch is in the off position, the computer will
not turn on automatically. This feature is most valuable
when using the computer as a file server.

1 .26 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

The power-off function is under software control. In
the Finder™, the Shut Down command from the Special
menu activates the power-off function. This software
control allows the computer to finish pending activity
before switching off. On the other hand, the power-
down switch generates a signal that turns off the
computer after two milliseconds without going through
software.

Power The power supply operates on 100-240 line input

Supply voltage and puts out +5V, +12V, and -12V DC voltages,

which are used by the logic board, the internal devices,
and the slots (respectively).

CA UTION: It is extremely important not to exceed the
ratings of the power suppiy. Exceeding the ratings couid
result in damage to the power supply and the logic board.
(See the specifications in this section for maximum ratings
for the system.) Take precautions against power surges.
For iocations outside the U.S., check locai power ratings.

Fuses The logic board has three fuses that protect the

external SCSI drive, floppy disk drive, and ADB
connectors. These are resettable fuses that require
about four seconds to reset.

Internal Floppy The flow of data between the logic board and the disk

Disk Drive drives is through the SWIM disk controller chip. The

SWIM chip controls reading and writing operations.

The SWIM chip enables the Apple SuperDrive to
exchange data between Apple and MS-DOS systems.

The SWIM chip interprets, converts, and outputs dual-
disk (clock/time) and file (data) signals as appropriate
for either GCR or ProDOS (Apple), or MFM (MS-DOS
and Apple high-density) formats. This arrangement
provides the capability to read, write, and format Apple
400K and 800K disks (GCR and ProDOS), MS-DOS 720K
disks (MFM), and Apple or MS-DOS high-density (1.4
MB) disks (MFM).

Translating data from one format to another for use in
an application requires an application-specific translator
within the Apple File Exchange utility, or a third-party
translator.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .27

Internal SCSI
Hard Disk

The internal hard disk connects to the logic board
through the internal SCSI connector. You can daisy-
chain up to six additional SCSI devices (a total of seven
SCSI devices, including the internal hard disk) through
the external SCSI port.

1 .28 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ THEORY OF OPERATION - Macintosh llci

Introduction

System Startup

The Macintosh Ilci computer consists of three basic
modules: the logic board, the power supply, and the
disk drive mount. A video interface card (optional for
the Macintosh Ilci) constitutes a fourth module. The
Macintosh Ilci supports an internal floppy disk drive
and one internal SCSI hard disk.

When you switch on the computer, the system begins a
synchronized sequence. First, the processor waits
while a series of circuits puts the system in a known
state in preparation for operation.

During system startup, the memory decode unit (MDU)
maps the ROM and enables the 68030 to recognize the
starting address. After the first access to the true ROM
address space, the MDU imposes the normal memory
map. The power-up map selects ROM for low
addresses, whereas the normal map selects RAM for low
addresses.

The software determines the memory size and compiles
a table describing the current memory configuration.

The processor then programs the MMU (memory
management unit), based on this table, to provide
contiguous logical memory from the potentially
noncontiguous physical segments in memory banks A
and B. The 24/32-bit memory map allows software to
use 24-bit or 32-bit address mode.

After the initial startup sequence, the system looks for
a readable disk in the available disk drives in the
following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive

2. External floppy disk drive

3. Setup device set in the control panel

4. SCSI devices in declining order of device ID
(6 to 0)

Note: If the battery is removed or the contents of the
parameter RAM are wiped out, the setup device defaults
to the device with ID=0.

Once the system finds a readable disk, the system reads
the disk and completes the disk startup process.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .29

Logic Board

Microprocessor

Coprocessor

DRAM

The logic board is where all processing of information
takes place. This section describes the major logic
board components and the functions they perform.

The Macintosh Ilci uses a Motorola 68030
microprocessor that runs at 25.0 MHz. The 68030 is a
true 32-bit processor that also supports 16/32
processing mode.

When working in A/UX (the Apple UNIX operating
system), the 68030 microprocessor incorporates
instruction sets for handling paged memory management,
thereby eliminating the need for a PMMU (as found in
the Macintosh II). When the computer seeks data from a
memory location that is not in RAM, the 68030 swaps
the page containing the data from the disk to RAM.

The Macintosh Ilci uses a Motorola 68882 floating-point
coprocessor that performs computations in parallel with
the microprocessor. The coprocessor chip in the
Macintosh Ilci is a surface mount quad-flat-pack.

The Macintosh Ilci contains DRAM in single in-line
memory modules (SIMMs). A SIMM is a small printed
circuit board with DRAM chips. On one edge of each
SIMM is a contact that fits into the SIMM sockets on
the logic board. There are two banks (A and B) of
memory.

On the Macintosh Ilci, bank A consists of the four
SIMM sockets closest to the disk drive (refer to Figure
1-5). Bank B consists of the remaining four SIMM
sockets.

The RAM interface requires DRAM with CAS-before-
RAS refresh. The Macintosh Ilci requires 80 ns or
faster fast-page mode DRAM.

You can change the amount of DRAM on the logic board
by installing four additional (or larger) SIMMs in bank
A or bank B. If both bank A and bank B contain DRAM
SIMMs, the Macintosh Ilci will operate more efficiently
with the larger DRAM SIMMs in bank B.

1 .30 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh ilcx/lici/Quadra 700

MMU

RAM-Based Video

Cache Connector

Note: SIMMs installed in an individual bank must be of
the same size (256K, 512K, 1 MB, 2 MB, or 4 MB);
however, the SIMMs in bank A can be a different size
than those in bank B.

The two banks of DRAM in the Macintosh Ilci do not
occupy contiguous address space. The 68030 memory
management unit (MMU) joins the discontiguous blocks
of physical memory to current contiguous logical
memory for application software.

The built-in video on the Macintosh Ilci is a RAM-based
video (RBV) system. The use of built-in video affects
how you configure the system and how the system
performs.

To use the built-in video feature on the Macintosh Ilci,
you must have DRAM in bank A. The operating system
decides at startup how much of bank A to devote to
video and how much to map to the system/application
RAM address space. The RBV buffer requires only
enough memory to hold the contents of the screen. The
RBV frame buffer varies in size, depending on the
selected bit depth and the size of the video monitor.

Video accesses affect only bank A because a bus buffer
can disconnect the data bus between the DRAM banks.
Disconnection allows the RBV to fetch data from bank A
without interrupting CPU access to bank B or the I/O
devices. Because the MDU accesses each bank of DRAM
independently, the MDU can decode addresses for the
CPU and the RBV at the same time without interference.

The cache connector is a 120-pin EuroDIN connector
that enables installation of a cache card to boost
performance. The main idea of adding a cache card is to
increase the effective speed of main memory by
providing the CPU with a copy of the most frequently
used data more quickly. The cache stores the most
recently accessed data and instructions in a small
(<64K) bank of high-speed memory. This storage is
especially useful in accessing looping routines. A cache
card should operate transparently to the user programs.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .31

CAUTION: Even though the cache connector is the same
connector used in the SE/30, the SE/30 cards are not
compatible with the cache connector. The pinouts are
different. Using an SE/30 card in the cache connector
will damage the computer and the card.

Parity Parity is generated by the parity generator chip (PGC),

which is optional on the Macintosh Ilci. The parity
feature requires 9-bit parity DRAM SIMMs.

Note: A Macintosh Ilci with a PGC can still use 8-bit
DRAM SIMMs, but parity checking will not take place.
Under these circumstances, a warning message appears
at startup to indicate that parity is not functioning.

If the PGC is present, the processor always writes the
parity bit. If the bit is not physically present (that is,
if 9-bit DRAM SIMMs are not installed), the processor
simply ignores the parity bit. If 9-bit DRAM SIMMs are
in use when a read takes place in the RAM address
space, the PGC generates an internal parity bit from
each byte of the data bus and compares it to the bit read
from the DRAM SIMM’s parity bit. If the two parity
bits do not agree, the PGC generates two outputs: one
that interrupts the processor and one that indicates a
parity error. A dialog appears on the screen, states that
a parity error has occurred, and offers the choice to
continue or restart.

ROM Read-only memory (ROM) is the system’s permanent

memory. The ROM contains the routines for the
operating system, the Toolbox, virtual memory (VM),
32-bit QuickDraw routines, and other necessary system
routines. The ROM supports 32-bit addressing (that is,
it can address up to 4 gigabytes of addressable memory).
The Macintosh Ilci ROM contains the routines for built-
in video and parity.

The Macintosh Ilci has 512K of ROM contained in four
128K X 8-bit ROM chips in 32-pin DIP packages. This
configuration forms a 32-bit-wide data bus.

The logic board also has a 64-pin ROM SIMM connector.

1 .32 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Input/Output

Interface

VIAs

The system input/output interfaces are;

• The serial ports, controlled by the SCC circuitry

• The floppy disk, controlled by the SWIM circuitry

• The SCSI devices, controlled by the SCSI circuitry

• The stereo sound port, controlled by the ASC circuitry

• Mono sound-in

The Macintosh Ilci contains two versatile interface
adapters (VIAs). These chips, VIAl and VIA2, provide
maximum compatibility with existing Macintosh
software.

VIAl provides the system with most of the signals
designed into the 68000-based Macintosh systems. The
VIAl appears to the software as the VIA chip in 68000-
based Macintosh computers. VIAl also provides access
to features such as an Apple Desktop Bus interrupt and
a synchronous modem signal.

The Macintosh Ilci VIA2 does the following;

• Decodes the NuBus slot, SCSI, and the Apple sound
chip interrupts

• Detects the external speaker or amplifier

• Disables the 68030 instruction and data cache

• Flushes and disables a cache card

• Tests the parity circuit

• Powers the unit off

• Blocks NuBus accesses to RAM

• Decodes errors that occur in NuBus transactions

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .33

SWIM Chip

The SWIM chip incorporates the functionality of the
IWM (from the original Macintosh II). It provides the
capability to read, write, and format in GCR (Apple),
MFM (MS-DOS and Apple high-density), and ProDOS
data formats. The SWIM chip controls the one internal
floppy disk drive internal to the unit and the one
external floppy drive, if connected. The SWIM chip
uses a 15.667 -MHz clock when accessing the Apple
SuperDrive and uses a divide-by-two circuit when
accessing an 800K drive.

SCSI The small computer system interface (SCSI) consists of a

SCSI chip (53C80 CMOS version), an internal 50-pin
connector, and an external DB-25 connector. The chip
maps directly to both connectors and controls the high-
speed parallel port for communicating with up to seven
SCSI peripherals. This device supports arbitration of
the SCSI bus, including reselection. A set of memory-
mapped, read-and-write registers controls the chip.

The external SCSI port differs from the industry SCSI
standard in two ways:

1. It uses a DB-25 connector instead of the standard
50-pin connector. (An adapter is available to
convert the connector to the standard.)

2. It provides power for termination resistors. If an
attached SCSI device does not have the required
terminator resistor, a terminator block must be
installed on the last device.

1 .34 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Serial

Communications

Controller

Apple

Sound Chip

Real-Time

Clock

The serial communications controller (SCC) controls
the two serial ports. The serial ports conform to EIA
standard RS-422 and are also RS-232 compatible. These
ports are primarily for connecting the computer to
networks, printers, and modems.

In the Macintosh Ilci, you can program each serial port
independently for asynchronous or synchronous
protocols. You can program the printer port for
AppleTalk protocols.

The Apple sound chip in the Macintosh Ilci generates a
stereo/audio signal. This signal is buffered by two
additional chips that filter the pulse width modulated
(PWM) signal and drive the internal speaker or
external stereo mini phone jack. If an external stereo
mini phone jack is not plugged into the connector, then
channel A sound output drives the internal speaker.

The sound generation system supports previous
Macintosh modes; it also offers a complete set of new
ROM tools in the software Sound Manager for
performing sound generation.

The real-time clock in the Macintosh Ilci is a custom
chip. It contains 256 bytes of RAM that is powered by a
battery when external power is off. These RAM bytes
are called parameter RAM (or PRAM). They store the
configuration of ports, the clock setting, and other data
that must be preserved even when system power is not
available.

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .35

Apple

Desktop Bus

NuBus

Interface

The Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) is a serial
communication bus for connecting keyboards, mouse
devices, graphic tablets, and other input devices to the
system. It is a single-master, multiple-slave serial bus
using an asynchronous protocol. The processor normally
samples the state of each of the devices by using the
control lines and shift register in VIAl to read or write
bytes over an internal serial link to the ADB modem
chip. A 4-bit microprocessor drives the external bus
and reads the status of the selected device.

The microprocessor normally samples the state of each
device by using the control lines in VIAl to read or
write to the Apple Desktop Bus modem chip.

The Macintosh Ilci uses the NuBus architecture for
system expansion. The Macintosh Ilci has three NuBus
slots. These slots can be used to support Apple
standard peripherals and to increase DRAM size. Each
expansion slot has a 96-pin DIN connector that uses the
NuBus interface to communicate with the system. The
following are some of the types of cards that will go
into the NuBus slots:

• Video cards

• RAM expansion cards

• Network interface cards

• Add-on SCSI port cards

1 .36 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

)

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

The NuBus interface supports the following features:

• Geographic Addressing - Each of the three slots has
a unique 4-bit value encoded into the slots, which
eliminates the need for DIP switches or other
devices to address each card uniquely.

• Synchronous Transaction - All bus transactions are
timed relative to a single asymmetric 10-MHz clock.

• 32-bit Address/Data - The NuBus interface supports
up to 4 GB of address with justified 8-bit, 1 6-bit,
and 32-bit data transactions. The 68030 processor
supports all these data types through the use of
dynamic bus sizing. As a result, word and long-
word operations do not have to be aligned but
instead cause NuBus transactions that complete the
alignment. The data bus from the processor to
NuBus is byte-reversed to allow sequential byte
addresses to appear on the NuBus data ports in the
same order as the NuBus address would imply.

• Bus Timeout - The absence of a card on the NuBus
will not cause the processor to hang the bus by
waiting for a reply. A system resource will delete
any transaction taking longer than 25.6 jds.

• Simple Interrupts - Each card has the ability to
generate simple, open-collector interrupts that
allow cards to gain system attention without having
to become the bus master.

The NuBus interface has three major states of

communication:

• Processor to NuBus, which happens whenever the
microprocessor generates a physical slot address. If
a device responds, the data is transferred.

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .37

• NuBus time-out, which is required to prevent access
to empty slots. Such access would hang the system.

The NuBus interface in the Macintosh Ilci allows direct
communications from one NuBus card to a second NuBus
card.

Power

Control

If this switch is in the off position, the computer will
not turn on automatically. This feature is most valuable
when using the computer as a file server.

The power-off function is under software control. In
the Finder, the Shut Down command from the Special
menu activates the power-off function. This software
control allows the computer to finish pending activity
before switching off. On the other hand, the power-
down switch generates a signal that turns off the
computer after two milliseconds without going through
software.

The Macintosh Ilci uses a switch-and-shut-down circuit
to control the power supply. The circuit controls the
power supply through the power failure warning signal
on the NuBus interface.

1 .38 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Power

Supply

Fuses

Internal Floppy
Disk Drive

Internal SCSI
Hard Disk

The power supply operates on 100-240 line input
voltage and puts out +5V, +12V, and -12V DC voltages,
which are used by the logic board, the internal devices,
and the slots (respectively).

CAUTION: It is extremely important not to exceed the
ratings of the power supply. Exceeding the ratings could
result in damage to the power supply and the logic board.
See the specifications in this section for maximum ratings
for the system.

The logic board has three fuses that protect the
external SCSI, floppy disk drive, and ADB connectors.
The three are resettable fuses that require about four
seconds to reset automatically.

The flow of data between the logic board and the disk
drives is through the SWIM disk controller chip. The
SWIM chip controls reading and writing operations.

The SWIM chip enables the Apple SuperDrive to
exchange data between Apple and MS-DOS systems.

Translating data from one format to another for use in
an application requires an application-specific translator
within the Apple File Exchange utility, or a third-party
translator.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .39

□ THEORY OF OPERATION - Macintosh Quadra 700

Introduction

System Startup

The Macintosh Quadra 700 computer consists of three
basic modules: the logic board, the power supply, and
the disk drive mount. A video interface card (optional
on the Macintosh Quadra 700) constitutes a fourth
module. The Macintosh Quadra 700 supports one
internal floppy disk drive and one internal SCSI hard
disk.

When you switch on the computer, the system begins a
synchronized sequence. First, the processor waits
while a series of circuits prepare the system for
operation.

During system startup, the memory control unit (MCU)
maps the ROM and enables the 68040 to recognize the
starting address. After the first access to the true ROM
address space, the MCU imposes the normal memory
map. The only change from one map to the other is that
the power-up map selects ROM for low addresses,
whereas the normal map selects RAM for the low
address space.

The firmware in ROM performs a test to determine how
much DRAM is present and to verify the proper
operation of the DRAM. The system stores this
information in a global variable and performs several
other system tests. When the system is fully tested and
initialized, it maps system DRAM for normal operation.

After the initial startup sequence, the system looks for
a readable disk in the available disk drives in the
following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive

2. Setup device set in the control panel

3. SCSI devices in declining order of device ID
(6 to 0)

Note: If the battery is removed or the contents of the
parameter RAM are wiped out, the setup device defaults
to the device with ID=0.

Once the system finds a readable disk, the system reads
the disk and completes the disk startup process.

1 .40 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Logic Board

Microprocessor

DRAM

VRAM-Based Video

The logic board handles all processing of information.
This section describes the major logic board components
and the functions they perform.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 uses a Motorola 68040
microprocessor that runs at 25 MHz. The 68040 is a
true 32-bit processor that also supports 16/32
processing mode. In addition to having memory
management built into the processor, the 68040 has a
math coprocessing unit and 8K of memory cache built in.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 has 4 MB of DRAM soldered
on the logic board. The logic board also has SIMM
sockets for DRAM expansion. A SIMM is a small
printed circuit board with DRAM chips. On one edge of
each SIMM is a contact that fits into the SIMM sockets
on the logic board.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 has two banks (A and B) of
memory: bank A is the 4 MB of memory soldered on
the logic board; bank B consists of the four DRAM
SIMM sockets located under the drive mount.

The RAM interface requires DRAM with CAS-before-
RAS refresh. The Macintosh Quadra 700 requires 80 ns
or faster DRAM.

You can increase the amount of DRAM on the logic
board by installing four DRAM SIMMs in bank B.

Note: SIMMs installed in bank B must be of the same
size (1 MB or 4 MB).

The built-in video on the Macintosh Quadra 700 is a
VRAM-based video system. A direct-access frame buffer
(DAFB) chip controls the system, which supports all
current Apple monitors as well as several non-Apple
monitors (VGA) and broadcast standards (NTSC and PAL).

The Macintosh Quadra 700 ships with one bank of
VRAM (512K) soldered on the logic board. The standard
configuration supports an 8 bpp (bits per pixel) display
on Apple’s 12-inch monochrome and 13-inch RGB
monitors and 4 bpp display on Apple’s Portrait and Two-
Page monitors.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .41

ROM

Input/Output

Interface

The Macintosh Quadra 700 frame buffer supports up to
four banks (2 MB) of VRAM. In addition to the one
bank of soldered VRAM, three banks of VRAM SIMM
sockets support expansion. When all expansion banks
are populated, the Quadra 700 will support a display of
up to 32 bpp, depending on the monitor.

Read-only memory (ROM) is the system’s permanent
memory. The ROM contains the routines for the
operating system, the Toolbox, virtual memory (VM),
32-bit QuickDraw routines, and other necessary system
routines. The ROM supports 32-bit addressing (that is,
it can address up to 1.2 gigabytes of addressable
memory).

The Macintosh Quadra 700 has 1 MB of ROM. The ROM
is contained in two 4-MBit chips (soldered) that run at
150 ns; each ROM device is 256K x l6-bit. The
Macintosh Quadra 700 ROM contains routines that
support the following;

• Math coprocessing, memory management, and cache
functions built into the 68040

• Sound capabilities and VRAM-based video

• Ethernet

• Support for a bootable RAM disk

• Higher performance SANE (standard Apple numerics
environment) math coprocessing (separate from the
math coprocessing built into the 68040)

The logic board also features a 64-pin ROM SIMM
connector.

The system input/output interfaces are:

• The serial ports, controlled by the SCC circuitry

• The floppy disk, controlled by the SWIM circuitry

• The SCSI devices, controlled by the SCSI circuitry

• The stereo sound port, controlled by the enhanced
Apple sound chip (EASC) circuitry

• Mono sound-in

• Ethernet

1 .42 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

VIAs

SWIM Chip

SCSI

The Macintosh Quadra 700 contains two versatile
interface adapters (VIAs), These chips, VIAl and VIA2,
provide maximum compatibility with existing Macintosh
software.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 VIAl performs almost
identically to the VIAl in the Macintosh Ilci. However,
the two bits supporting parity in the Macintosh Ilci
handle A/UX software and initialization in the
Macintosh Quadra 700.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 VIA2 does the following;

• Decodes the NuBus slot, SCSI, the enhanced Apple
sound chip (EASC), and the digitally filtered audio
chip (DFAC) interrupts

• Detects the external speaker or amplifier

• Disables the 68040 instruction and data cache

• Flushes and disables the 68040 memory cache

• Controls the direct-access frame buffer (for built-in
video) and built-in Ethernet support

• Powers the unit off

• Blocks NuBus accesses to RAM

• Decodes errors in NuBus transactions

The SWIM chip incorporates the functionality of the
IWM (from the original Macintosh II). It provides the
capability to read, write, and format in OCR (Apple),
MFM (MS-DOS and Apple high-density), and ProDOS
data formats. The SWIM chip controls the one internal
floppy disk drive. The SWIM chip uses a 15.667 MHz
clock when accessing the Apple SuperDrive,

The small computer system interface (SCSI) consists of a
SCSI chip (53C96), an internal 50-pin connector, and an
external DB-25 connector. The chip maps directly to
both connectors and controls the high-speed parallel
port for communicating with up to seven SCSI
peripherals. This device supports arbitration of the
SCSI bus, including reselection. A set of memory-
mapped, read-and-write registers controls the chip.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .43

Serial

Communica tions
Controller

Sound Chips

The external SCSI port differs from the industry SCSI
standard in two ways;

1. It uses a DB-25 connector instead of the standard
50-pin connector. (An adapter converts the
connector to the standard.)

2. It provides power for termination resistors. If an
attached SCSI device does not have the required
terminator resistor, install a terminator block on the
last device.

The serial communications controller (SCC) controls
the two serial ports. The serial ports conform to EIA
standard RS-422 and are RS-232 compatible. These ports
are primarily for connecting the computer to networks,
printers, and modems.

In the Macintosh Quadra 700, you can program each
serial port independently for asynchronous or
synchronous protocols. You can program the printer
port for AppleTalk protocols.

The sound technology in the Macintosh Quadra 700
incorporates three new sound chips;

• The enhanced Apple sound chip — an application-
specific integrated circuit (ASIC) that enables sound
input and an external digital/audio converter and
buffers playback and sound input samples

The enhanced Apple sound chip (EASC) supports
these features;

- ASC compatibility

- 1 6 -bit stereo output

- 8-bit sound input

- Low noise

- Low distortion analog circuitry

1 .44 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

A digitally filtered audio chip (DFAC) that provides
sound input functionality

Real-Time

Clock

Apple

Desktop Bus

• A custom analog chip (called “Sporty”) that is part of
the sound output path (this chip replaces two sound
chips used in previous Macintosh computers)

The real-time clock is a custom chip. It contains
256 bytes of RAM that is powered by a battery when
external power is off. These RAM bytes are called
parameter RAM (or PRAM). They store the
configuration of ports, the clock setting, and other data
that must be preserved even when the system power is
not available.

The microprocessor normally samples the state of each
device by using the control lines in VIAl to read or
write to the Apple Desktop Bus modem chip.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .45

NuBus The Macintosh Quadra 700 uses the NuBus

Interface architecture for system expansion. The machine has two

NuBus slots. These slots can be used to support Apple
standard peripherals and to increase DRAM size. Each
expansion slot has a 96-pin DIN connector that uses the
NuBus interface to communicate with the system. The
following are some of the types of cards that will go
into the NuBus slots:

• Video cards

• RAM expansion cards

• Network interface cards

• Add-on SCSI port cards

The NuBus interface supports the following features:

• Geographic Addressing - Both slots have a unique
4-bit value encoded into the slots, which eliminates
the need for DIP switches or other devices to
address each card uniquely.

• Synchronous Transaction - All bus transactions are
timed relative to a single asymmetric 10-MHz clock.

• 32-bit Address/Data - The NuBus interface supports
up to 4 GB of address with justified 8-bit, l6-bit,
and 32-bit data transactions. The 68040 processor
supports all these data types. As a result, word and
long-word operations do not have to be aligned but
instead cause NuBus transactions that complete the
alignment. The data bus from the processor to
NuBus is byte-reversed to allow sequential byte
addresses to appear on the NuBus data ports in the
same order as the NuBus address would imply.

• Bus Timeout - The absence of a card on the NuBus
will not cause the processor to hang the bus by
waiting for a reply. A system resource will delete
any transaction taking longer than 25.6 /is.

• Simple Interrupts - Each card has the ability to
generate simple, open-collector interrupts that
allow cards to gain system attention without having
to become the bus master.

1 .46 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

The NuBus interface has three major states of
communication:

Processor-Direct

Slot

• Processor to NuBus, which happens whenever the
microprocessor generates a physical slot address. If
a device responds, the data is transferred.

• NuBus time-out, which is required to prevent access
to empty slots. Such access would hang the system.

The NuBus interface in the Macintosh Quadra 700
allows direct communications from one NuBus card to a
second NuBus card.

All NuBus cards should contain a ROM declaration that
provides information to the operating system at startup.
The ROM information ensures that drivers are properly
installed and that the card is initialized and recognized
by the system.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 features a 68040 processor-
direct slot (PDS) that attaches to the pins of the 68040
without any buffers. The PDS feature allows for
expansion of the 68040 processor’s capabilities.

A typical PDS card works with the system software Slot
Manager. Such a card must contain a NuBus declaration
ROM and must notify the NuBus controller that it is
using the NuBus space by sending a signal to the PDS
connector.

Note: The location of the PDS connector on the logic
board is directly in line with one of the NuBus
connectors. Therefore, the use of the PDS slot reduces
the number of available NuBus slots from two to one.

IMPORTANT: Any PDS board used in the Macintosh
Quadra 700 must be designed to work with the 68040
processor. PDS cards designed for use with 68020 or
68030 processors wiii not work in the Macintosh Quadra
700. Aiso, any PDS card intended for use in a Macintosh
Quadra 700 can inciude a back-panel l/Q connector and
should have the same board outline as a NuBus card.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .47

Power The Macintosh Quadra 700 uses a switch-and-shut-down

Control circuit to control the power supply. The circuit

controls the power supply through the power failure
warning signal on the NuBus interface.

If this switch is in the off position, the computer will
not turn on automatically. This feature is most valuable
when using the computer as a file server.

The power-off function is under software control. In
the Finder the Shut Down command from the Special
menu activates the power-off function. This software
control allows the computer to finish pending activity
before switching off. On the other hand, the power-
down switch generates a signal that turns off the
computer after two milliseconds without going through
software.

Power

Supply

The power supply operates on 100-240 line input
voltage and puts out +5 V, +12 V, and -12 V DC
voltages, which are used by the logic board, the
internal devices, and the slots (respectively).

CA UTION: It is extremely important not to exceed the
ratings of the power suppiy. Exceeding the ratings could
result in damage to the power supply and the logic board.
See the specifications in this section for maximum ratings
for the system.

1 .48 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Fuses

Internal Floppy
Disk Drive

Internai SCSI
Hard Disk

The logic board has three fuses that protect the
external SCSI, Ethernet, and ADB connectors. The three
are resettable fuses that require about four seconds to
reset automatically.

The flow of data between the logic board and the disk
drives is through the SWIM disk controller chip. The
SWIM chip controls reading and writing operations.

The SWIM chip enables the Apple SuperDrive to
exchange data between Apple and MS-DOS systems.

The SWIM chip interprets, converts, and outputs dual-
disk (clock/time) and file (data) signals as appropriate
for GCR or ProDOS (both Apple) or MFM (MS-DOS and
Apple high-density) formats. This arrangement provides
the capability to read, write, and format Apple 400K and
800K disks (GCR and ProDOS), MS-DOS 720K disks
(MFM), and Apple or MS-DOS high-density (1.4 MB)
disks (MFM).

Translating data from one format to another for use in
an application requires an application-specific translator
within the Apple File Exchange utility, or a third-party
translator.

The internal hard disk connects to the logic board
through the internal SCSI connector. You can daisy-
chain up to six additional SCSI devices (a total of seven
SCSI devices in the system, including the internal hard
disk) through the external SCSI port.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .49

ft Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Section 2 - Take-Apart

□ CONTENTS

2.2 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

2.3 Lid

2.4 Interface Cards

2.5 Speaker Bracket and Speaker

2.7 Power Supply

2.9 Fan Bracket and Fan

2.11 Hard Disk Drive

2.15 Disk Drive Mount and Floppy Disk Drive

2.18 Reset/Interrupt Switch

2.19 Main Logic Board

Note: Detailed instructions for underlined steps can be
found elsewhere in this section.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.1

□ ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE PREVENTION

The Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and Quadra 700 contain CMOS
components, and DRAM is installed in SIMMs. The
CMOS components and the SIMM modules are very
susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge
(ESD).

You must take preventive measures to avoid ESD
damage. When you unwrap, install, or replace modules,
observe the appropriate ESD precautions.

For complete ESD prevention information, refer to the
You Oughta Know tab in Cross Family Peripherals
Technical Procedures.

If the proper ESD equipment is not available, do the
following;

1. Switch off the computer power.

2. Disconnect the power cord.

3. Remove the lid and touch the metal of the power
supply case.

2.2 /Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ LID

Materials Required
Remove

Replace

Phillips screwdriver

1. Remove the AC power cable.

2. Remove the rubber feet if they are the side-mount
type (standard on the Macintosh Quadra 700).

2. Remove the security screw (if present) at the top of
the back panel (see Figure 2-1).

3. Pull up the tabs on the back of the lid (see Figure
2-1) and lift — back to front — until the lid is free of
the front edge.

To replace the lid, simply reverse the above steps and
make sure the small tabs on the front of the lid fit into
their respective slots before you lower the lid.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take- Apart / 2.3

□ INTERFACE CARDS

Use the following procedure to remove or replace any
interface or expansion card that is installed in the
Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, or Quadra 700.

Remove

Remove the lid.

Follow ESD precautions in the You Oughta Know
tab. If you do not have ESD equipment, touch the
metal on the power supply case inside the computer
to discharge any static electricity that might be on
your body or clothing.

Carefully grasp each end of the card and pull
straight up to remove the card. Pull up evenly on
both sides of the card to avoid bending the
connector pins.

Replace

Position the card so the connector on the
bottom of the card aligns with the expansion slot
(that is, the NuBus, cache connector, or processor-
direct slot). Align the card so the metal guides at
the top and bottom of the rear slot opening fit
through the metal shield attached to the card.

Place one hand on the card, directly over the
connector area, and push down firmly until the
connector is fully seated.

CAUTION: Do not force the card. If the card does not seat
properly, remove the card and try again.

3. Replace the lid .

2.4 / Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ SPEAKER BRACKET AND SPEAKER

Remove

Macintosh llcx/lici/Quadra 700

The speaker is in a bracket that you must remove from
the case before you can remove the speaker itself.

1. Remove the lid .

2. Locate the speaker and speaker bracket (see Figure
2-2) at the front of the unit and disconnect the
speaker connector from the main logic board.

Note: To simplify the replacement procedure, note
how the speaker wire and speaker connector thread
through the speaker bracket.

Figure 2-2 Speaker and Speaker Bracket

3. Gently lift the tab in the center of the speaker
bracket (see Figure 2-2). Pull back on the top of
the bracket until the bracket is free of the bottom
panel.

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.5

Replace

CAUTION: In the next step, do not push on the heavy
paper portion of the speaker or you will damage the
speaker.

4. Gently push the speaker away from the bracket by
applying force to the back of the circular magnet at
the rear of the speaker (see Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-3 Speaker

To replace the speaker and speaker bracket, reverse
the above steps. To be sure the bracket is secure, try
pressing the top of the bracket forward. (The top
should not move forward.)

(

2.6 / Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ POWER SUPPLY

Materials Required
Remove

Flat-blade screwdriver

1. Remove the AC power cable.

2. Remove the lid .

3. While holding the underside of the power supply
with your right hand, slide the screwdriver along
the tab release (as shown in Figure 2-4). The
screwdriver will release the tab that holds the
power supply in place.

Figure 2-4 Power Supply

4. As the screwdriver releases the tab, lift the power
supply. (You will have to use force to free the
power supply from its connector.) If the power
supply won’t move, double-check the placement of
the screwdriver to be sure you have released the
tab.

Once the power supply begins to move, it will come
completely up and out of the case.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take- Apart / 2.7

Replace

Replacing the power supply requires proper alignment
of the guide posts and rails (as shown in Figure 2-5).
(The tab will click into place on its own, so you don’t
need a screwdriver for the replacement.)

Figure 2-5 Replace Power Supply

Note: Don’t worry about the connector on the bottom of
the power supply. This is a self-aligning connector that
will go automatically into the connector on the logic
board if you have properly aligned the power supply.

2.8 / Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ FAN BRACKET AND FAN

The fan and fan bracket are two separate units. To
remove the fan, you must first remove the fan bracket.

Remove l. Remove the power supply .

2. Unlatch the two bracket latches that protrude from
the bottom of the power supply by gently squeezing
them together (see Figure 2-6) until they clear the
metal tabs. As the tabs release, push up so that the
fan bracket separates from the power supply case.

Figure 2-6 Fan and Fan Bracket

3. Remove the bracket.

)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.9

4. Unplug the connector that attaches to the printed
circuit board inside the power supply case (see

Figure 2-7A).

5. On the fan side of the bracket (the side from which
the wires exit), unlatch the two fan tabs (one on
each side of the fan) and push the fan from the
bracket (see Figure 2-7B).

Figure 2-7 Fan and Fan Bracket

Replace

1. Reverse the removal steps.

Note: Make sure you push the fan wire into the
power supply to prevent the wire from contacting
the blades.

2.10/Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ HARD DISK DRIVE

The hard disk drive is on the top of the disk drive
mount (see Figure 2-8), You can remove the hard disk
drive with or without removing the drive mount. The
following procedure describes how to remove the hard
disk drive without removing the mount unit. (The
procedure for removing the mount unit is explained
later in these take-apart procedures.)

Note: If you are replacing the hard disk drive, you will
need a torque driver.

Figure 2-8 Hard Disk Drive/Diode/Mount

Remove

1. Remove the lid .

2. Gently remove the 50-pin connector from the back
of the hard disk drive (Figure 2-8).

3. Disconnect the HDA power cable (Figure 2-8).

4. Remove the diode drive light on the front of the
case by lifting the plastic holder and pulling the
diode from the holder (see inset on Figure 2-8).

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart/2.11

Note: If you are returning a defective HDA to
Apple, detach the SCSI and power cables from the
main logic board. Install the customer’s HDA power
cable on the replacement HDA. Return the
replacement HDA cable to Apple with the failed
HDA.

5. Grasp the two metals tabs (Figure 2-9) on the side
of the hard disk drive carrier. Squeeze the tabs and
gently pull up the carrier.

Figure 2-9 Hard Disk Drive Carrier

Note: On some hard disk drives, the power
connector may be on the back of the hard disk
drive, next to the 50-pin connector.

6. The hard disk drive (with its metal carrier) will
start to separate from the large plastic drive mount.
Remove the hard disk drive.

2.12/Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

7. Remove the hard disk drive from its metal carrier
by removing the four Phillips screws on the bottom
of the carrier (Figure 2-10).

You must remove the 3.5-inch l60 MB drive and the
1-inch height drives must be removed from their
carriers before you return the drives to Apple;
replacement drives do not have carriers.

For drives other than the 3.5-inch 160 MB drive and
the 1-inch height drives, you must return the
defective HDA to Apple along with the metal carrier
supplied with the replacement HDA.

Figure 2-10 Hard Disk Assembly (HDA) and Carrier

8 . For the 3.5-inch 160 MB drive and the 1-inch height
drives, package the drive for return to Apple. Do
not return the carrier or the LED. Skip steps 9-11.

9. For drives other than the 3.5-inch 160 MB drive and
the 1-inch height drives, remove the metal carrier
from the replacement hard disk drive by removing
the four Phillips screws on the bottom of the
carrier.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart/ 2.13

10. Position the customer’s metal carrier on the
replacement hard disk drive and secure the carrier
with the four Phillips screws.

11. Position the replacement drive’s metal carrier on
the defective hard disk drive and secure the carrier
with the four Phillips screws.

Note: when you return a half-height drive and
receive a 1-inch height drive as a replacement, the
half-height drive will not fit in the replacement
drive packaging. To make the half-height drive fit
in the packaging, detach the carrier and LED before
returning the drive to Apple.

Replace Reverse the take-apart steps.

CAUTION: Screws that attach the 1-inch height drive to
its carrier must be tightened in the order shown in Figure
2-10 and torqued to 8.0 in-ibs.

Note: If you are installing a hard disk in a Macintosh
Ilex, Ilci, or Quadra 700 that has not previously had
one, you must remove the SCSI terminator on the main
logic board SCSI connector before connecting the
internal SCSI hard disk cable to the main logic board.

Note: If you are removing a hard disk from a Macintosh
Ilex, Ilci, or Quadra 700 and not replacing it, you must
install a SCSI terminator on the main logic board SCSI
connector. To insert the terminator correctly, align the
white key icon on the terminator with the notch in the
cable connector.

2.1 4 /Take- Apart

rev. Jan 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ DISK DRIVE MOUNT AND FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

Remove To remove the floppy disk drive, you must remove the

entire plastic disk drive mount (Figure 2-11) that holds
the hard disk drive and the floppy disk drive.

3. Remove the Phillips screw (Figure 2-11) from the
disk drive mount.

4. Remove the diode from the lens (see Figure 2-11).

Figure 2-1 1 Disk Drive Mount

5. Pull up on the 50-pin connector tab (Figure 2-11) to
disconnect the signal cable from the main logic
board.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart/ 2.15

6. Disconnect the 20-pin connector (Figure 2-12) from
the logic board.

7. Disconnect the power cable connector from the hard
disk drive (Figure 2-12).

8. Unlatch the carrier (Figure 2-12) along the side of
the disk drive mount. At the same time, pull the
mount one half inch toward the rear of the case.

Lift the mount to remove it from the case.

Note: If you’re removing the hard disk drive,
follow the removal steps under “Hard Disk Drive,”
earlier in this section It doesn’t matter whether the
disk drive mount is in or out of the main case.

(

Figure 2-12 Removing the Disk Drive Mount

2.1 6 /Take- Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

9. Turn over the disk drive mount and gently push
down on the latch (Figure 2-13) that holds the front
of the floppy disk drive.

10. Move the floppy disk drive toward the front of the
mount one inch (see Figure 2-13). Pull the front of
the floppy drive away from the mount; the rest of
the drive will follow. Remove the drive.

Figure 2-13 Floppy Disk Drive

Replace l. Reverse the take-apart steps.

IMPORTANT: Apple strongly advises the use of dust
shields on 1.4 MB floppy drives in all Macintosh Ilex, llci,
and Quadra 700 computers. All 1.4 MB replacement drives
ship with the dust shield already installed. If you plan to
install a dust shield on the current drive, however, you must
clean the drive first. Follow the "Cleaning the Drive"
procedure in the Basics section of the FDHD/ SuperDrive
tab of the Apple Service Technical Procedures.

2. Replace the power supply .

3. Replace the lid .

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Jan 92

Take-Apart / 2.17

□ RESET / INTERRUPT SWITCH

If the reset/interrupt switch is installed, you must
remove it before you can remove the main logic board.

Remove l. using one finger, lift up on the center tab of the

switch (Figure 2-l4). This action releases the
switch from the logic board.

Figure 2-14 Reset/Interrupt Switch

2. Lift the rear of the loosened switch up and away
from the front of the case. You may have to wiggle
the switch to separate it from the case. Do not force
the switch as it is fragile.

Replace insert the front of the switch (Figure 2-14) down and

into the two slots at the right-front bottom of the case.
As the tabs on the front of the switch go into the slots,
push the rest of the switch down until it snaps under
the edge of the main logic board.

2.18/Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ MAIN LOGIC BOARD

Before removing the main logic board, you must take
preventive measures to avoid ESD damage. Observe the
appropriate ESD precautions. (For complete ESD
prevention information, refer to the You Ougbta Know
tab in Cross Family Peripherals Technical Procedures.')

If the proper ESD equipment is not available, do the
following:

1. Switch off the computer power.

2. Disconnect the power cord.

3. Remove the lid and touch the metal of the power
supply case.

Remove l. Remove the lid .

2. Remove interface cards .

CAUTION: If the computer has been on, let it cool for five
minutes before touching the power supply.

3. Remove the power supp ly.

4. Remove the disk drive mount .

5. Remove the reset/interrupt switch (if installed) .

6. Remove the speaker bracket .

...Continued on next page

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Take-Apart/2.19

7. Slide the logic board toward the front of the case
until it stops (Figure 2-15).

8. Gently begin lifting the rear of the logic board; the
front will follow. Lift the board completely out of
the case.

Figure 2-15 Removing the Logic Board

2.20/Take-Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

IMPORTANT: Two versions of the Macintosh Ilex logic
board exist under the same part number. One Macintosh
Ilex logic board has a 1 x 4-pin internal SCSI power
connector (Figure 2-1 6 A), the other version has a2x 2-
pin internal SCSI power connector (Figure 2-16B). If you
replace one version of the logic board with the other
version, you must also replace the hard drive power
cable.

1x4-Pin

Internal

SCSI

Power

Connector

2x2-Pin

Internal

SCSI

Power

Connector

Figure 2-16 Macintosh ilex Logic Board Versions

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Dec 91

Take-Apart / 2.21

FRONT

Replace

1. Insert the logic board into the case, back end first,
so that its connectors align with the openings in the
back of the bottom case (Figure 2-17).

2. Lay the board flat on the bottom. Make sure the
slots in the logic board fit over the gray tabs on the
bottom of the case (Figure 2-17).

Note: Before sliding the logic board toward the
rear of the case, make sure the metal grounding tabs
surrounding the port holes on the rear of the case
are not folded in front of the port holes. These
metal tabs should press against the connectors at the
rear of the logic board to form a common ground
shield when the board is in place. If a tab is folded
in front of the hole and you push the board against
the tab, the tab could break off or block the port
hole.

3. Slide the logic board toward the rear of the case as
far as it will go. You should feel and hear a slight
thump.

Figure 2-17 Replacing the Logic Board

4. Replace the reset/interrupt switch (if needed).

5. Replace the speaker and speaker bracket .

6. Replace the disk drive mount .

7. Replace the power supply .

8. Replace the interface cards (if removed).

9. Replace the lid .

2.22/Take-Apart

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

tl Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Section 3 - Diagnostics

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

3.2 Introduction

3.3 About MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.4 Copying the Disk

3.4 Using Your Backup Disk

3.5 Running MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.5 Materials Required

3.5 Starting MacTest Ilcx/IIci

3.6 Helpful Startup Information

3.7 Installing the Loopbacks

3.8 Using the MacTest Ilcx/IIci Menus

3.13 Running the Tests

3.15 Diagnostic Sound Sampler

3.15 Introduction

3.15 Materials Required

3.15 Procedure

3.16 Introduction to AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci

3.17 Running AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci

3.17 Materials Required

3.17 Setting Up the Test Station and UUT

3.20 Establishing Communication

3.21 Using the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Menus

3.23 Running the Tests

3.25 Helpful Suggestions

3.26 SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure

3.26 Determining Whether You Need a Jumper

3.27 External Jumpers

3.27 Summary

3.27 Installing the Jumper

Note: Currendy, diagnostics for the Macintosh Quadra
700 are not available but will be included in a future
Technical Procedures update.

Note: MacTest Ilcx/IIci version 2.0 does not include
test looping at this time. The looping feature will be
added to a future version of the program.

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.1

□ INTRODUCTION

This section contains diagnostic information for
Macintosh Ilex and Ilci computers. Diagnostic
procedures for these systems make use of two software
programs — MacTest™ Ilcx/IIci and AppleCAT® llcx/IIci.

Currently there are no diagnostics for the Macintosh
Quadra 700.

3.2 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ ABOUT MACTEST llcx/llci

The MacTest Ilcx/IIci diagnostic disk (version 2.0 or
higher) is part of the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci diagnostic set.
MacTest Ilcx/IIci is also usable as a stand-alone
confidence test of Macintosh Ilex or Ilci systems. The
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk includes the system folder, the
MacTest Ilcx/IIci program, and the Diagnostic Sound
Sampler. The Diagnostic Sound Sampler lets you listen
to the various musical chord sequences generated
during a startup failure.

MacTest Ilcx/IIci is a pass/fail confidence test program.
As the program progresses, messages on the screen
indicate the specific test in progress and its results. As
soon as the program detects a failure, the test stops and
the screen indicates which module you must replace.
When the test is complete, MacTest Ilcx/IIci terminates
and returns to the Finder.

The MacTest Ilcx/IIci program identifies the ROM
version of the system and tests the following items:

• Main logic board

• Internal disk drive

• External disk drive

• NuBus video cards for these monitor types:

- High-resolution color

- Color

- Monochrome

- Portrait

- Two-Page

• Apple PC 5.25 drive and Macintosh II PC card

MacTest Ilcx/IIci also provides test patterns for
adjusting the high-resolution monitors.

MacTest Ilcx/IIci does not test the internal or external
SCSI hard disk. To test the hard disk, use Macintosh
Hard Disk Test (see Section 3, Diagnostics, in SCSI
Hard Disk Drives Technical Procedure^.

MacTest Ilcx/IIci tests an internal NuBus expansion
slot only when an Apple expansion card is installed. To
test a NuBus expansion slot, install a NuBus video card,
an EtherTalk® card, or a Macintosh II PC card (with an
Apple PC 5.25 drive) in the slot and select the
appropriate test from the Test Selections window.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.3

Copying the
Disk

Using Your
Backup Disk

Make a backup disk before you begin! When testing a
defective Macintosh Ilex or Ilci, you may damage or
erase a section of the MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk.

Take the following precautions when using your backup
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk:

• Do not write-protect your working copy of the
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk. The program will not run
correctly if you do.

• Do not change the name of the diagnostic program
on the disk. During logic board testing, the machine
restarts, then looks for and restarts the diagnostic
named MacTest™ cx/ci (notice that “H” is omitted
from the CPU designations due to character string
constraints). If the name has been changed, the
startup routine will not be able to locate the
program and the system will stay at the desktop.

If the MacTest Ilcx/IIci window does not reappear after
a logic board test, check the name of the diagnostic icon
on the desktop. Correct it to MacTest Ilcx/IIci and
select Set Startup from the desktop Special menu.

When the message Upon Startup automatically open:
MacTest™ ncx/IIci appears, click OK. Double-click the
corrected MacTest Ilcx/IIci icon when you return to the
test program.

3.4 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ RUNNING MACTEST llcx/llci

Materials Required

Starting
MacTest llcx/llci

Testing the
Complete System
or Logic Board

MacTest Ilcx/IIci diagnostic disk (backup)
Mini-DIN-8-to-mini-DIN-8 serial port cable
SCSI loopback test card (modified with jumper — see
“SCSI Loopback Jumper Procedure” in this section)
Blank, known-good 800K disk for drive test
Blank, known-good 1.4 MB disk for SuperDrive test
Macintosh Ilex or Macintosh Ilci
Macintosh Display Card (required for Macintosh Ilex)

You can use MacTest Ilcx/IIci to perform a confidence
test of the entire system or to test a single component
in a known-good system. Follow the start-up steps
below for the testing you wish to perform.

1. If you are testing a complete system, or if you
intend to run the logic board tests, switch the
power off.

Note: The application ships with the default
setting to run all tests.

2. Install the loopback connectors as described in
“Installing the Loopbacks,” later in this section.

3. Insert the MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk into the internal
drive, and switch on the system. MacTest Ilcx/IIci
will display the Status window (Figure 3-1). Click
Start to run the tests.

Figure 3-1 MacTest llcx/llci Status Window

Macintosh I Icx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.5

Testing a

Single

Component

Helpful Startup
Information

1. If you are testing a single component in a known-
good system, insert the MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk into
the internal drive, and switch on the system,

2. If you selected the SCSI loopback test, MacTest
Ilcx/IIci displays a window that tells you to switch
off the power and connect the SCSI loopback board.
Click OK to display the MacTest Ilcx/IIci Status
window.

3. From the Status window you can use the MacTest
Ilcx/IIci menus. Go to the Options menu and use
the Test Selections submenu to select the tests you
want to run. Click OK to exit the Test Selections
window.

4. From the Status window, click Start. For more
specific information on the tests, see “Using the
MacTest Ilcx/IIci Menus” and “Running the Tests,”
in this section.

If you encounter any of the following problems,

refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for additional

information:

• The known-good MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk will not
start up.

• The Configuration window does not show the
installed card(s).

• The Configuration window indicates that no disk
drives are installed, or that fewer drives are
installed than is the case.

• The Macintosh Ilex or Ilci system intermittently
locks up during the tests.

• The Configuration window indicates that the wrong
amount of DRAM is installed.

If you do not know whether the system you are testing

is good:

• Run the MacTest Ilcx/IIci logic, drive, and video
card tests. (See “Using the MacTest Ilcx/IIci
Menus” and “Running the Tests,” in this section.)
Complete any needed repairs before you continue.

3.6 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Installing the
Ijoopbacks

• If you removed a Macintosh II PC card, run the
Apple PC 5.25 drive test as described in Section 3,
Diagnostics, of the Apple PC 5.25 Drive Technical
Procedures.

• If you removed any expansion cards, install them
one at a time, and run the MacTest Ilcx/IIci logic,
drive, and monitor tests after installing each card.
Repeat the install-and-test process until all
expansion cards are installed and the Macintosh Ilex
or Ilci passes all tests.

If you are running the serial loopback test or the SCSI
test, you must connect the serial loopback cable or the
SCSI loopback card — along with the keyboard, mouse,
and monitor.

CAUTION: Always switch off the system when you
connect or disconnect the SCSI loopback card.

You must connect the SCSI loopback card cable to the
SCSI port on the back of the computer (see Figure 3-2).
(No other connections between the card and the
computer are necessary.) To protect the SCSI circuitry,
you must have the power off when you connect the SCSI
card. You must also install the loopback cable with the
mini DIN-8 connectors between the modem and printer
ports on the rear of the machine (see Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2 Loopback Cables

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.7

Using the
MacTest llcx/llci
Menus

Options Menu

Before you start MacTest Ilcx/IIci, use the

MacTest Ilcx/IIci menus to select the tests you want to

run or to select other features of the diagnostic. You

cannot use the menus when the tests are running.

The Options menu contains the Test Selections and
Configuration submenus.

1. Test Selections - the following window (Figure 3-3)
appears when you choose Test Selections:

Macintosh lICK/llci Test Seloctions

^ Logic test

Uideo Tests:

® Short O Long RRM

^ Uideo Card In Slot

IS Uideo Monitor Connected to Selected Card
□ Uideo Muriiloi' Connec led to Built-In Uideo

Loopback Tests:

IS SCSI Loopback

SI Serial Loopback

Floppy Disk Drives:

□ CHternol FloppM B Internal Floppy

ROB Communication:

S Kegboard
^ Mouse

I I 1 "" I

Figure 3-3 Test Selections Window

Test Selections allows you to select the tests you
wish to run and indicates which slot contains the
card to be tested. If an expansion slot does not
contain an EtherTalk card, Macintosh II PC card, or a
NuBus video card, the selection for that test appears
dimmed.

To select a test, click the check box next to the
name of the item you wish to test. To deselect the
test, click the box again. When you have selected
all the tests you wish, click OK. The Status window
will appear.

3.8 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

)

Below are the tests you can select from the Test
Selections window:

a) Logic verifies the correct functioning of the
following circuitry on the logic board:

• VIAs (versatile interface adapters)

• Apple stereo sound chip

• Clock/PRAM

• FPU (floating-point unit)

• RAM

You can choose a short or a long RAM test when
you select the logic test. The running time of the
test depends on how much memory is installed. At
the beginning of the RAM test, MacTest Ilcx/IIci
indicates the maximum running time of the test.

During the VIA and sound chip test, the logic
board test generates a sound through sound
channel A that plays through the internal
speaker. (If necessary, use the Control Panel to
modify the volume.)

Note: Once the RAM test begins, you cannot
interrupt it.

b) SCSI Loopback tests the SCSI chip, the SCSI bus
signals, and the external SCSI connector. You
must have the SCSI loopback card connected to
the external SCSI port when you run this test.

c) Serial Loopback tests the SCC (serial controller
chip), serial communication signals, and the
serial connectors. You must have the serial
loopback cable connected when you run this test.

d) Keyboard Communications confirms that the logic
board can communicate correctly with the ADB
keyboard.

e) Mouse Communications confirms that the logic
board can communicate correctly with the ADB
mouse.

f) Floppy Disk Drives verifies the functioning of
the 1.4 MB internal, 800K external, or 1.4 MB
external disk drives and related circuitry on the
logic board.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.9

g) Video card in slot tests a Macintosh II video card
installed in one of the expansion slots on the
Macintosh Ilex or Ilci. If more than one video
card is installed, you must tell MacTest Ilcx/IIci
which video card to test. (If you do not specify
which card to test, the software will default to
the lowest slot number with a video card in it.)
Use the keyboard to enter the slot number of
the video card you want to test in the space next
to the Video card in slot option.

h) Video monitor connected to a selected card

displays test patterns used to adjust the video
picture on the high-resolution monitors. This
test displays test patterns on the monitor
connected to the selected video card. If you are
adjusting a second monitor, select the other card
slot on the video test control.

Note: The tests for the Apple Macintosh Portrait
Display and Two-Page Display monitors require
extended memory to display the test patterns.
These monitors must be connected when you
start up the system.

Note: Refer to the appropriate Technical
Procedures manual for your monitor for
information about necessary monitor adjustments.

i) Apple PC 5.25 Drive and Card verifies that the
drive, the Macintosh II PC card, and the
expansion slot are functioning correctly. To set
up for this test, follow the instructions in
Section 3, Diagnostics, in Apple PC 5.25 Drive
Technical Procedures.

Note: The Apple PC 5.25 drive test cannot
always determine which module is at fault when
a test fails. If the test reports that the drive
and/or card is bad, replace one module at a time
as described in Section 4, Troubleshooting, in
the Apple PC 5.25 Drive Technical Procedures.
Note that if you have two Apple PC 5.25 cards
installed, you must select the slot holding the
card to be tested.

3.10 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

2. Configuration - The following window (Figure 3-4)
appears when you select Configuration:

Figure 3-4 Configuration Window

The Configuration window displays the amount of
memory, the ROM version number, the cards
installed in expansion slots 1 through 3, and the
current disk drive configuration.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.11

File Menu

The list below shows the items in the File menu and
their key equivalents, if applicable.

Apple Menu

Open (always dimmed)

Close (always dimmed)

Save Test Selections [Command-S]

Stop [Command - . (period)]

Quit [Command - Q]

Note: Open and Close are always dimmed; Save and
Stop are sometimes dimmed.

Save Test Selections allows you to customize your
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk by saving your selection of tests
for the next time you use MacTest Ilcx/IIci. Save Test
Selections is dimmed if no changes have been made.

Stop ends the diagnostic and returns you to the MacTest
Ilcx/IIci Status window.

Quit returns you to the desktop.

The Apple (#) menu contains the following three

selections:

• About MacTest Ilcx/nci, which displays a dialog box
with the diagnostic name, the version number, the
date of release, and a copy-protect statement.

• Control Panel, which allows you to set preferences
for speaker volume, monitor status, desktop pattern,
and mouse tracking.

• Key Caps, which displays a window with a
keyboard. Press each key on the keyboard and
verify that the display block for each key
highlights. If the key does not highlight, the
keyswitch is bad and you must replace it. If
numerous keys do not highlight, exchange the
keyboard.

3.12 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Running
the Tests

After using Test Selections to select the tests you wish

to run, you are ready to start MacTest Ilcx/IIci. Click

the Start box in the MacTest Ilcx/IIci Status window.

Please note the following:

• The Status line at the bottom of the MacTest
Ilcx/IIci window indicates the tests that are running
and the test results.

• While running, all tests display a wristwatch. There
is no other moving or flashing indicator that tells
you the test is in progress.

• You cannot stop the diagnostic while the cursor is a
wristwatch; you can stop the diagnostic only while
the cursor is a pointer.

• If you select the SCSI test and the loopback card is
either missing or improperly installed, instructions
will tell you to switch off the power, disconnect all
external SCSI drives, and connect the SCSI loopback
card.

• If you select the serial test and the loopback cable
is either missing or improperly installed, testing
will begin but the serial ports test will fail.
Instructions will tell you to make sure the serial
loopback cable is connected and then to click
Continue to retry the failed test.

Note: You can connect the serial loopback cable
without switching off the system.

• During the disk drives test, the program prompts
you to insert and remove blank 800K and 1.4 MB
disks. Perform the disk swaps as directed on the
screen; then click OK.

Note: It is important to insert the low- or high-
density disk when requested. If you insert the
wrong disk, MacTest Ilcx/IIci will indicate that the
disk drive is malfunctioning when it may not be.

CAUTION: Do not press the reset or interrupt switch
while the RAM test is running. Pushing reset causes the
RAM test to fail, and pressing interrupt may damage the
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk.

Macintosh Ilcx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.13

• To stop testing, click Stop or Pause anytime
between tests while the cursor is a pointer.

- Choose Stop to stop testing and return to the
MacTest Ilcx/IIci Status window. Choose Start
to begin the testing sequence again.

- Choose Pause to discontinue testing temporarily.
Choose Continue to resume the tests from the
point of interruption.

Replace any module that the test indicates is faulty (see
Section 2, Take-Apart). Before replacing the module,
use AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci or refer to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, to verify the diagnosis. If the system
still does not operate properly, turn to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, for more information.

If all tests pass, the system returns to the MacTest
Ilcx/IIci Status window. The message All selected tests
have passed appears on the Status line.

When you choose Loop on all selected tests, a looping
counter shows the number of completed loops.

3.14 / Diagnostics

Octal

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ DIAGNOSTIC SOUND SAMPLER

Introduction

Materials Required

Procedure

The Diagnostic Sound Sampler enables you to listen to
and become familiar with the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci
error chords. Error chords are brief musical tones that
indicate whether the system is functioning correctly.

Refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting, for complete
information on startup and error chords.

Known-good Macintosh Ilex or Ilci system
MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk (backup)

To listen to the various Macintosh Ilex or Ilci error

chords, follow these steps:

1. Set up the Macintosh Ilex or Ilci system.

2. Insert the MacTest Ilcx/IIci backup disk. A window
appears.

3. Click Quit from the File menu. The desktop
appears.

4. Open the disk or folder and then open the
Diagnostic Sound Sampler. A window listing the
various chords and chord sequences appears. Select
the chords you wish to hear.

5. Upon completion, click Quit.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.15

□ INTRODUCTION TO APPLECAT llcx/llci

AppleCAT Ilcoc/IIci is a diagnostic tool that uses a
known-good Macintosh to diagnose module failures in a
defective Macintosh Ilex or Ilci. The known-good
Macintosh (test station) and defective Macintosh Ilex or
Ilci (unit under test, or UUT) are connected through
their communication ports. The test station performs
the following functions:

• Establishes communications with the UUT

• Calls tests in the ROM of the UUT

• Downloads tests to the faulty machine

• Calls MacTest Ilcx/IIci tests in the UUT disk drive

• Displays test results on the test station screen

• Identifies the failing module

• Prompts the technician for information

• Recommends a repair procedure

With AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci, the UUT does not have to be
fully operational. By using an independent, working
computer to do the diagnosis, AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci
depends very little on the UUT, making the test results
more reliable and thorough than traditional diagnostic
methods.

Standard windows guide the technician through each
stage of the diagnostic. When the UUT fails a test or
indicates a problem, an AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci screen asks
for more information or recommends a repair.

After each module replacement or adjustment, AppleCAT
Ilcx/IIci reruns all the prior tests to verify that the
problem is fixed. If the UUT successfully completes a
final system verification, an alert window reports All

selected tests passed, click start to begin.

A looping mode allows users to check for intermittent
RAM failures.

3.16 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ RUNNING APPLECAT llcx/llci

Materials Required

Setting Up the
Test Station
and UUT

Macintosh Ilex or Ilci (unit under test, or UUT)
Known-good Macintosh (Macintosh Plus or later) as a
test station

AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci diagnostic disk

MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk

Blank BOOK disk

Blank 1.4 MB disk

Reset/Interrupt switch for the UUT

Mini-DIN-8-to-mini-DIN-8 serial port cable

SCSI loopback card

Mini DIN-8 serial loopback plug

Video card in slot 1

Digital multimeter or volt/ohmmeter

*2 Phillips screwdriver

Monitor

Known-good ADB keyboard for the UUT
Known-good ADB mouse for the keyboard

1. Connect the test station to a wall socket with an
AC power cord.

2. Place the UUT next to the test station and connect
the UUT to a wall socket with an AC power cord.

3. Connect the SCSI loopback card cable to the SCSI
port on the back of the UUT (Figure 3-5).

4. Connect the serial loopback plug to the printer port
on the back of the UUT (Figure 3-5).

SCSI Port Printer Port

Figure 3-5 Loopback Cable and Plug

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics/ 3.17

5. Connect one end of the serial port cable to the
modem port on the UUT, and connect the other end
to the modem port on the test station (Figure 3-6).

6. Connect a known-good keyboard to the ADB port on
the UUT, and connect a known-good mouse to the
other ADB port on the UUT (Figure 3-6).

Note: You must connect a keyboard and a mouse in
order to test either device.

Figure 3-6 Modem and ADB Connections

3.18 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

7. Verify that the reset/interrupt switch (Figure 3-7)
is installed. With the front of the UUT facing you,
look at the lower-left corner where the two slots
are, and see if the switch is installed (see Figure 3-
7). If a switch is not installed, you must install one.
Refer to Section 2, Take-Apart, for installation
instructions.

Macintosh llcx/llci

View from Front ReseVInterrupt

Switch

Figure 3-7 Reset/Interrupt Switches

The reset/interrupt switch has two switches — the
reset switch and the interrupt switch (Figure 3-7).
Pressing the reset switch is the same as switching
the power off and back on. Pressing the interrupt
switch places the UUT in interrupt mode.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.19

Establishing

Communication

1. Insert the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci disk into the test
station, and switch on the test station.

2. Open the disk icon and then the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci
icon. The AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Start window
appears on the test station screen (Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8 AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Start Window

3. Make sure that all disks are ejected from the UUT.

4. Switch on the UUT. A four- tone chord (following
the startup chord) indicates that you are in test
mode. If you hear only the startup tone (a single
chord), you are not in test mode. To obtain test
mode, wait about four seconds for each megabyte of
installed memory, and then press the interrupt
switch (refer to Figure 3-7). When in test mode, the
UUT can respond to information it receives through
the modem port.

IMPORTANT: If you hear any additional chords after the
single startup tone, you are already in interrupt/test mode.
Do not press the interrupt switch. The Macintosh Ilex or
llci will automatically go into interrupt mode if it detects an
error at power-on.

Note: If the unit starts up with the hard disk or
with any bootable disk that was left in the UUT
disk drive during power-on, the window for
pressing the interrupt switch on the UUT does not
appear. If this situation occurs, press the reset
switch on the UUT, and repeat steps 3 and 4.

3.20 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Using the
AppleCAT llcx/lici
Menus

Options Menu

Before you start AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci, use the AppleCAT
Ilcx/IIci menus to select the tests you want to run or
to select other features of the diagnostic.

Note: You must make your test selections before you
start AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci. You cannot make changes to
the test selections while AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci is running.
If you do not use the Test Selections submenu, the
default test selection will include the following tests:

• Logic Board (which includes RAM testing)

• Internal Drive

IMPORTANT: Selecting specific tests shortens the
AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci test, but you may not find ail faulty
modules. The default test selections will ensure a
complete system check of all components except for the
video card.

The Options menu contains the Test Selections submenu.
When you choose Test Selections, the window in Figure
3-9 appears.

RppleCRT llci (no parity) Test Selections

(^Macintosh llci (non parity)

O Macintosh llci (parity)

O Macintosh IIch

^ Logic Board

□ l oop on HflM lest

^ Internal Disk Drive

O Slop it a SIMM toiis

□ NuBus llideo Card

O Coniiruie if a SIMM fails

f Cancel ) | OK ]|

Figure 3>9 AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci
Test Selections Window

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.21

Test Selections allows you to select certain tests
individually. To select a test, click the box next to the
name of the item to be tested. To deselect the test,
click the box again. When you have selected all the
tests you wish to run, click OK. AppleCAT will return
you to the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Start window.

Note: Your test selections remain in effect until you
change them or until you reboot AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci.

• UUT Selection allows you to select one of the
following:

- Ilex

- Ilci (nonparity)

- Ilci (parity)

• Logic Board verifies correct functioning of the
following circuitry on the Macintosh Ilex or Ilci
logic boards:

- ROM

- Memory size plus RAM testing

- CPU data bus and address bus

- VIAs (versatile interface adapters)

- Internal clock

- Parameter RAM

- Serial ports (SCC)

- External SCSI bus

- NuBus control circuitry

- SWIM (disk controller IC)

- FPU (floating-point unit)

- Apple stereo sound chip

Note: Although AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci tests the SCSI
circuitry on the logic board, it does not test the
internal SCSI hard disk. To test the hard disk, use
the Apple Hard Disk Test disk (see Section 3,
Diagnostics, in the SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures).

• NuBus Video Card runs only if a video card is
installed in slot 1. The test checks the video RAM
on the video card and the video DAC (digital-to-
analog converter).

• Internal Drive verifies the proper functioning of the
drive, cable, and SWIM circuitry.

3.22 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/lici/Quadra 700

File Menu

Apple Menu

Running
the Tests

The list below shows the items in the File menu and
their key commands if applicable. All are dimmed
except Stop and Quit.

Open

Save Test Selections

Stop

Quit

(always dimmed)
(always dimmed)
(always dimmed)
[Command - . (period)]
[Command - Q]

Stop ends the diagnostic and returns you to the
AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci Start window.

Quit exits the program and returns you to the desktop.

The Appie (#) menu contains the following three

choices:

• About Diagnostic displays the diagnostic name,
version number, date of release, serial number, and
a copy-protect statement.

• Control Panel sets preferences for speaker volume,
mouse tracking, whether or not AppleTalk is
connected, the desktop pattern, and so on.

• Key Caps displays a window with a keyboard.

After using Test Selections to select the tests you wish
to run, you are ready to start AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci. Click
Start in the AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci window. Please note
the following:

• The Status line at the bottom of the AppleCAT

Ilcx/IIci window indicates which test is in progress
and the test results.

Note: If the message Could not establish
conununication appears on the Status line, you may
have inserted a bootable disk in the UUT disk drive
before switching the unit on. If this message
appears, follow the instructions in the AppleCAT
Ilcx/IIci window.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.23

• AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci interacts with you throughout
each stage of the testing. When the UUT fails a test
or indicates a problem, AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci prompts
you for more information or recommends a repair.

• By displaying a choice of answers, AppleCAT
Ilcx/IIci asks you for information that it cannot
obtain electronically. Select the most appropriate
answer for each situation. After selecting a
response, click OK to continue.

CAUTION: Do not click the OK button until you've
completed every instruction on the screen. Failure to
complete the instructions may misdirect the diagnostic.

• If you turned off the UUT to replace or reinstall a
module, do the following;

a) Verify that all cables and test fixtures are
reattached before switching on the UUT. Do not
click the OK button until you've completed
every instruction on the screen.

b) Eject any disk from the UUT before switching on
the UUT.

c) If you do not hear the test mode chords, press
reset and wait four seconds per megabyte of
DRAM. Then press the interrupt switch to
establish test mode.

d) To restart the test, click Start at the test station.

• AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci will also ask you to perform
setup steps when checking drives, video cards, and
the ADB. When the Setup Required window
appears, insert the requested disk. AppleCAT
Ilcx/IIci will specify which drive to use. After
inserting the disk, click Done to continue the test.
AppleCAT Ilcoc/IIci will request the following disks:

- BOOK disk (blank and write-enabled)

- High-density disk (blank and write-enabled)

- Write-protected MacTest Ilcx/IIci disk

3.24 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh Ilcx/llci/Ouadra 700

• To stop testing, click Stop or Pause anytime during
the tests:

a) Choose Stop to stop testing and return to the
Status window. Choose Start to start the testing
sequence from the beginning.

b) Choose Pause to discontinue testing temporarily.
Choose Continue to resume testing from the
point of interruption.

IMPORTANT: Please read all messages and instructions
carefully. Do only whatAppleCAT llcx/llci specifically
instructs you to do.

when the UUT passes its final test, an alert window
displays the message All selected tests passed, click
start to begin.

Helpful

Suggestions

• The bad module fails intermittently.

• The system configuration changes during the test
(memory is removed or added, or system power is
removed).

• Selected modules are tested; except for the video
card, only the default tests perform a complete
system check.

• The replacement module itself is bad.

• You provided inaccurate input to AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci,
or set up the test station incorrectly.

If the unit passes AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci but is still not
running correctly, refer to Section 4, Troubleshooting,
for information that can help you isolate the problem.
Keep in mind that AppleCAT Ilcx/IIci is unable to
identify a system failure if any of the following is true:

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.25

□ SCSI LOOPBACK JUMPER PROCEDURE

Determining
Whether You
Need a Jumper

In order to use the SCSI loopback card with MacTest
Ilcx/IIci and AppleCAT Ilci, you must jumper the card
between pin 25 of J1 and pin 14 of RPl. On some SCSI
loopback cards, the jumper has been etched into the
printed circuit. Only cards with the old PCB circuitry
need the jumper procedure.

Note: This modification does not interfere with using
the card on other Macintosh or Apple II family systems.
For the card to work on Apple II systems, however, you
must connect the card to a notched mouse cable. (For
further information on the notched cable, refer to
Section 5, SCSI Interface Card, in the SCSI Hard Disk
Drives Technical Procedures^

To determine whether you have a card that does not
need to be jumpered, look at the back of the card. If
the circuitry includes the jumper, an A instead of two
zeros (00) appears at the end of the part number, which
is located under the words APPLE COMPUTER. If the
part number ends with an A, you do not need to jumper
the card (see Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 SCSI Loopback Card

3.26 / Diagnostics

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

External

Jumpers

SCSI loopback cards with the 00 part number were
modified with an external jumper during the
manufacturing process. Therefore, if your card has a 00
part number, check for an external jumper from pin 25
of J1 to pin 14 of RPl (Figure 3-12). If the card does
not have an external jumper, you must install one.

Summary To summarize:

If the number
ends with: Do this:

A Nothing

Qumper is present on the card)

00 Check to see if an external jumper

is present. If not, install a jumper.

installing if you find that the card requires a jumper, solder a

the Jumper wire connection between pin 25 of J1 and pin 14 of RPl

(as shown in Figure 3-11). (The pins are not numbered
on the board. In the orientation shown in Figure 3-11,
pin 25 is the pin closest to the upper-left corner of the
card; pin 14 is in the middle line of pins on the left end
of the row.)

)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700 C>ct 91 Diagnostics / 3.27

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Section 4 - Troubleshooting

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

4.2 Introduction

4.2 General Information

4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

4.2 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.3 How to Use the Troubleshooting Flowcharts

4.3 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Logic Boards

4.5 Macintosh Quadra 700 Logic Board

4.5 Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.5 Macintosh Ilci Cache Card

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Startup Chord

4.6 Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Error Chords

4.6 Macintosh Quadra 700 Startup Chord

4.7 Macintosh Quadra 700 Error Chords

4.8 Symptom Chart

4.8 System Problems

4.9 Video Problems

4.10 Apple SuperDrive Problems

4.11 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.12 Peripheral Problems

4.13 Miscellaneous Problems

4.15 Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Flowcharts

4.24 DRAM SIMM Verification

4.24 Introduction

4.24 Materials Required

4.24 Verification

4.26 Battery Verification

4.26 Introduction

4.26 Materials Required

4.26 Macintosh Ilcx/IIci Battery Verification

4.27 Macintosh Quadra 700 Battery Verification

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.1

□ INTRODUCTION

General

Information

Troubleshooting

Procedure

This troubleshooting section provides two methods for
detecting module failures on the Macintosh Ilex, Ilci,
and Quadra 700 computers: the symptom chart provides
descriptions of common problems and solutions, and the
troubleshooting flowcharts verify operation of the
computer in its minimum configuration.

Use this troubleshooting section if you are unable to
boot MacTest Ilcx/IIci or Macintosh Hard Disk Test, or
if the diagnostic is unable to detect a module failure.

To troubleshoot a Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, or Quadra 700

computer, follow these steps:

1. Read the subsections titled "Things to Remember,"
"Module Exchange Information," "Startup and Error
Chords," "DRAM SIMM Verification", and "Battery
Verification" before you begin troubleshooting.

2. To troubleshoot the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci
computers, begin with the symptom chart. If the
symptoms displayed by the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci
are not listed in the symptom chart, or if the system
is not displaying a clearly defined problem, use the
troubleshooting flowcharts.

To troubleshoot the Macintosh Quadra 700 computer,
use the the startup and error chords and the
symptom chart. Troubleshooting flowcharts and
diagnostics are not yet available for the Macintosh
Quadra 700.

3. If you replace a module or component and find that
the problem remains, reinstall the original module
or component before proceeding.

4. After you repair a Macintosh Ilex or Ilci computer,
run MacTest Ilcx/IIci to verify system operation.

4.2 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

How to Use
the Symptom
Chart

First, find the symptom that most nearly describes
the problem; then, perform the first corrective action
on the solution list. If that corrective action does
not fix the problem, go to the next action. If you

replace a module and find that the problem remains,
reinstall the original module before going on to the
next action.

How to Use the

Troubleshooting

Rowcharts

There are five numbered flowcharts for the Macintosh
Ilex and Ilci computers. On completion of Flowchart 1,
you will be instructed to continue to the next
flowchart. Continue until you complete Flowchart 5.

Each of the flowcharts includes references to notes on
the opposite page. These notes provide additional
instructions or refer you to other procedures.

Things to
Remember

• Follow all electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
when working on the computer. Refer to the You
Oughta Know tab in Apple Service Technical
Procedures for additional information.

• If available, use a known-good monitor and video
interface card, if either of these is installed. Using
these components, you can isolate the problem to
the CPU, internal drives, keyboard, or mouse.

• During a normal startup sequence, the Macintosh
Ilex and Ilci computers emit a medium-pitched chord
and the Macintosh Quadra 700 computer emits a
single, soft chord. If you do not hear these startup
chords, refer to "Startup and Error Chords" for
additional information.

• Before you begin troubleshooting, remove all
NuBus, cache, and processor direct slot cards and
disconnect all external serial, SCSI, and ADB
devices (except the keyboard and mouse). Also,
disconnect any devices connected to the microphone,
headphone, or line-in/out connectors.

After the system is fully operational, you must
install and test each card or peripheral. Install one
device and test the system before adding any others.
Repeat the install-and-test process until you have
installed and tested all devices.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.3

• To ensure that customers get back the same system
configuration that they bring in, record the
following information before beginning:

- Type and serial number of any NuBus, cache, or
processor direct slot cards

- Size, type, and capacity of internal SCSI hard
drive(s)

- Number and sizes of installed DRAM SIMMs

- Whether a VRAM upgrade is installed (available
on the Macintosh Quadra 700 only)

• Mark each known-good DRAM and/or VRAM SIMM
on the exchange logic board with white correction
fluid or a small sticker to prevent confusion during
the troubleshooting procedure.

• Use a known-good copy of the diagnostic disk.

• The Macintosh Ilex requires system software
version 6.0.3 or later, the Ilci requires version 6.0.4
or later, and the Quadra 700 requires version 7.0.1
or later. If you are using an earlier version of the
system software, install a compatible version and
reverify the failure before beginning the
troubleshooting process. Many times problems that
appear hardware related are actually caused by
software.

• When instructed to replace the logic board only,
install the customer's DRAM and VRAM SIMMs on
the replacement logic board.

Note: If you are removing DRAM or VRAM SIMMs
from the logic board, use the SIMM removal tool.
Refer to the You Oughta Know tab in Apple Service
Technical Procedures for instructions.

4.4 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ MODULE EXCHANGE INFORMATION

Macintosh llcx/llci
Logic Boards

Macintosh Quadra 700
Logic Board

Internal
SCSI Hard
Disk Drives

Macintosh llci
Cache Card

Apple ships the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci logic board
service exchange modules without DRAM SIMMs. To
make sure the customer always receives the same logic
board configuration that was brought in, be sure to
record the amount of memory installed and the size of
the DRAM SIMMs.

Apple ships the Macintosh Quadra 700 logic board
service exchange modules without DRAM SIMMs or
VRAM SIMMs. To make sure the customer always
receives the same logic board configuration that was
brought in, be sure to record the amount of memory and
size of the DRAM and VRAM SIMMs.

Apple ships internal SCSI hard disk drives without the
SCSI or power cables. Be sure to keep the SCSI and
power cables with the customer's system. They are sold
as separate replacement parts and are not part of any
module.

Macintosh Ilci cache cards containing serial numbers
with the "CF" prefix, e.g., CFXXXXXXX, can cause
frequent system crashes. Return these cards to Apple.
Refer to the Apple Programs icon on AppleLink for
additional information.

The revised Macintosh Ilci cache card has a serial
number with an "AF" prefix, e.g., AFXXXXXXX. This
revised card should function properly; if it fails, return
it to Apple through standard service channels.

For diagnostic information on testing the revised
Macintosh Ilci cache card, see Section 1, MacTest MP,
in the Mac Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.5

□ STARTUP AND ERROR CHORDS

Introduction

Macintosh ilcx/llci
Startup Chord

Macintosh llcx/ilci
Error Chords

DRAM SIMM
Failure

Macintosh Quadra 700
Startup Chord

when you switch on the computer, a series of self-tests
are performed. If any part of the self-test fails, a
sequence of chords will sound.

If you are unable to interpret the chords, use the
flowcharts and ignore the question about the startup
chord on Flowchart 1.

During normal system startup, a short, medium-pitched
chord plays; then a disk icon appears on the screen.

The disk icon will have a flashing question mark (if a
startup disk is not found) or a smiling face (if a startup
disk is found).

Three chords play when an error is encountered during
startup — a startup chord, an error chord (a short, harsh
chord), and a test monitor chord (four tones, from low
to high).

The above error sequence indicates a failure during

the initial hardware self-tests. To correct the problem;

1. Exchange the DRAM SIMMs. (Refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

2. If DRAM SIMM exchanges do not work, exchange
the logic board. (Install the customer's DRAM
SIMMs on the exchange board.)

3. If the system still does not work, perform the
DRAM SIMM verification with the exchange logic
board. (Refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification" in this
section.)

During normal system startup, a single, soft chord
plays; then a disk icon appears on the screen. The disk
icon will have a flashing question mark (if a startup
disk is not found) or a smiling face (if a startup disk is
found).

4.6 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Macintosh Quadra 700
Error Chords

DRAM SIMM
Failure

Hardware Failure

Two chords play when an error is encountered during
startup — a startup chord and an error chord. Depending
upon the type of failure, you will hear either a two-
part error chord sequence (eight tones) or a shorter,
one-part error chord sequence (four tones).

Refer to the list of failure areas below. The list
includes a description of each error chord, the problem
it indicates, and what to do to correct the problem.

When a DRAM SIMM failure occurs, you will hear a
two-part error chord sequence (eight tones) after the
startup chord. To correct the problem;

1. Exchange the DRAM SIMMs. (Refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification" in this section for complete
instructions.)

2. If DRAM SIMM exchanges do not work, exchange
the logic board. (Install the customer's DRAM and
VRAM (if any) SIMMs on the exchange board.)

3. If the system still does not work, perform the
DRAM SIMM verification with the exchange logic
board. (Refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification" in this
section.)

When a hardware failure occurs, you will hear a startup
chord and the one-part error chord sequence (four
tones), with a brief pause between the two sequences.

To correct the problem:

1. Disconnect the SCSI hard disk drive power and
cable connectors, and reboot the system. If the
startup sequence is normal, run Macintosh Hard
Disk Test and replace the hard drive, if necessary.

2. If the error chords still sound at system startup,
disconnect the floppy drive cable connector and
reboot the system. If the startup sequence is
normal, replace the floppy drive.

3. If you still hear the error chords at system startup,
exchange the logic board. (Install the customer's
DRAM and VRAM SIMMs on the exchange logic
board.)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.7

□ SYMPTOM CHART

System Problems

• Does not power on —
screen is black,
fan is not running,
and LED is not lit

• Does not start up
without monitor
attached

• Clicking, chirping, or
thumping sound

• System shuts down
intermittently

• System intermittently
crashes or locks up

4.8 / Troubleshooting

Solutions

1. Check cables.

2. Plug monitor directly into wall socket, and verify
that monitor has power.

3. Replace power cord.

4. Replace power supply.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

- Install Virtual Monitor Switch control panel.
(Applies to Macintosh Quadra 700 only)

1. Replace power supply.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Be sure that air vents on the sides and top of case
are unblocked. Thermal protection circuitry may
shut the system down. After 30 to 40 minutes, the
system should be OK.

2. Replace power cord.

3. Check battery (refer to "Battery Verification").

4. Replace power supply.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Make sure you are using the correct version of
system software.

2. Make sure you are using known-good software.

3. Identify and replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer
to "DRAM SIMM Verification").

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

5. Replace power supply.

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Video Problems

Solutions

Note: If replacing the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate monitor Apple Service
Technical Procedures for troubleshooting information.

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
operate, fan is
running, and LED
is lit

1. Adjust brightness on monitor.

2. Replace video cable.

3. If a video interface card is installed, move card to a
different slot.

4. Replace video interface card, if installed.

5. Replace VRAM SIMMS (Macintosh Quadra 700 only).

6. Replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification").

7. Replace monitor.

8. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

9. Replace power supply.

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
do not operate,
but fan is running
and LED is lit

1. Replace video cable.

2. If a video interface card is installed, move card to a
different slot.

3. Replace video interface card, if installed.

4. Replace VRAM SIMMS (Macintosh Quadra 700 only.

5. Replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification").

6. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

7. Replace power supply.

8. Replace monitor.

• Partial or whole
screen is bright and
audio is present,
but no video
information is visible

1. Replace video cable.

2. If a video card is installed, move card to a different
slot.

3. Replace video interface card, if installed.

4. Replace VRAM SIMMs (Macintosh Quadra 700 only).

5. Replace monitor.

6. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

• Screen is completely
dark, fan is not
running, and LED is
not at

1. Plug monitor directly into wall socket, and
verify that monitor has power.

2. Check battery (refer to "Battery Verification").

3. Replace power supply.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.9

Apple SuperDrive
Problems

• Internal floppy disk
drive runs
continuously

• Audio and video
are present, but
internal floppy
drive does not
operate

• Disk ejects; display
shows icon with
blinking "X"

• Will not eject
disk

• Attempts to eject
disk but can’t

• MS-DOS® drive does
not recognize a disk
formatted on a 1.4 MB
SuperDrive

4.10 / Troubleshooting

Solutions

1. Replace bad disk with known-good system disk.

2. Replace internal floppy disk drive cable.

3. Replace internal floppy disk drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace bad disk with known-good system disk.

2. Verify that all external SCSI devices are
disconnected.

3. Replace internal floppy disk drive cable.

4. Replace internal floppy disk drive.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

6. Replace power supply.

1. Replace bad disk with known-good system disk.

2. Replace internal floppy disk drive cable.

3. Replace internal floppy disk drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Switch power off and hold mouse button down
while switching power back on.

2. Replace internal floppy disk drive.

1. Reinsert disk and try to eject disk again.

2. Reseat floppy drive bezel and/or disk drive so the
slot in the bezel lines up correctly with the disk
drive.

- To ensure read/write compatibility with the 1.4 MB
SuperDrive, format all disks with the MS-DOS drive
first.

Oct 91 Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

SCSI Hard Disk
Drive Probiems

• Internal SCSI drive
will not operate;
drive doesn't spin up

• Drive does not
appear on the
desktop

• Works with internai
or externai SCSI
devices, but wiil not
work with both

Soiutions

1. Replace internal SCSI drive cable.

2. Replace SCSI power cable.

3. Replace SCSI drive.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMS.

1. Verify there are no duplicate SCSI device addresses.

2. Drive may not be initialized. If drive has just been
installed, initialize the drive with HD SC Setup and
install system software.

1. Make sure SCSI device switch setting on external
deviceCs) is not set to 7 (the computer's address)
or the same as any internal SCSI device.

2. Replace external SCSI terminator.

3. Verify that SCSI termination is installed on internal
SCSI drive.

4. Refer to appropriate Apple Service Technical
Procedures to troubleshoot the external device.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.11

Peripheral Problems

• Cursor does not
move

• Cursor moves, but

clicking the mouse
button has no effect

• No response to any
key on the keyboard

• Cannot double-click
to open an application,
disk, or server

Solutions

1. Check mouse connection.

2. Inspect inside of mouse for buildup of dirt or
other contaminants. Clean mouse if necessary.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to a
rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in any ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Replace mouse.

2. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Check keyboard connection to ADB port.

2. Replace keyboard cable.

3. Replace keyboard.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Remove any multiple system files on the hard disk.

2. Clear parameter RAM. Hold down < Command >
< Option ><R> keys while booting the system.
Release the keys when the computer generates the
startup chord a second time. Reset mouse controls.

3. If mouse was connected to keyboard, connect it to a
rear ADB port instead. If mouse works, replace
keyboard. If mouse does not work in any ADB port,
replace mouse.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

4.12 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Peripheral Problems
Continued

• Known-good
serial printer
will not print

• Known-good
LaserWriter on an
AppleTalk network
will not print

Miscellaneous

Problems

• No sound from
speaker

Solutions

1. Make sure you are using the correct version of
system software.

2. Make sure the Chooser and Control Panel are
set correctly.

3. Replace printer interface cable.

4. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

1. Make sure you are using the correct version of
system software.

2. Make sure the Chooser and Control Panel are
set correctly.

3. Refer to the Networks tab in Apple Service
Technical Procedures for more information.

Solutions

1. Verify that volume setting in the Control Panel
is set to one or above.

2. Replace speaker.

3. Replace logic board. Retain customer's SIMMs.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.13

(

4.14 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ MACINTOSH llcx/llci FLOWCHARTS

Flowchart 4-1
Notes

2. If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate Technical Procedures
manual to isolate the monitor problem to the module
level.

3. If exchanging the video interface card corrects the
problem, and if the customer's card has the video
expansion kit installed, refer to Section 1,

Macintosh II Video Cards, in the Macintosh Video
Cards tab section, for information on
troubleshooting the replaceable VRAMs.

4. Refer to "DRAM SIMM Verification" for complete
instructions on verifying and troubleshooting the
DRAM SIMMs.

5. If the known-good DRAM SIMMs did not correct the
problem, install the customer's DRAM SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.15

4.16 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Flowchart 4-2
Notes

1. Refer to Section 3, Diagnostics, for complete
information.

2. Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.17

1. Exchange monitor.

(See Note #2.)

2. Exchange video cable.

3. Exchange SIMMs.

(See Note #3.)

4. Exchange logic board.
(See Note #4.)

5. Exchange power supply.

4.18 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Flowchart 4-3
Notes

1. Refer to "Battery Verification" for complete
instructions on checking the lithium battery.

2. If exchanging the monitor corrects the problem,
refer to the appropriate Technical Procedures for
the monitor to isolate the monitor problem to the
module level.

3. There are two steps to perform when exchanging
the SIMM modules. Refer to "DRAM SIMM
Verification" for complete instructions on verifying
and troubleshooting the SIMMs.

4. Install the customer's DRAM SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.19

1. Exchange drive cable.

2. Exchange disk drive.

3. Exchange power supply.

4. Exchange logic board only.
(See Note #2.)

4.20 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Flowchart 4-4
Notes

1. Refer to Section 3, Diagnostics, for complete
information.

2. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.21

Flowchart 4-5

4.22 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

(

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Flowchart 4-5
Notes

1. Refer to Section 3, Diagnostics, for complete
information.

2. Refer to SCSI Hard Disk Drives Technical
Procedures for complete instructions.

3. Install the customer's SIMMs on the replacement
logic board.

)

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.23

□ DRAM SIMM VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Apple ships the service exchange logic board without
DRAM SIMMs.

The DRAM SIMMs installed on the customer's logic
board may be defective. To check for defective DRAM
SIMMs, remove all of the customer's DRAM SIMMs and
install known-good DRAM SIMMs. Mark each known-
good DRAM SIMM with a dot of white correction fluid
or a small sticker. Whatever you use, be sure it will
not come off while you are testing.

SIMM removal tool

Four or eight known-good DRAM SIMMs that are the
same size (e.g., 512K, 1 MB, or 4 MB) as the DRAM
SIMMs you are verifying.

1. If the computer is a Macintosh Ilex or Ilci, remove
the top cover . If the computer is a Macintosh
Quadra 700, remove the lid , the power supply , and
the disk drive mount .

CAUTION: Before removing the SIMMs, be sure to follow
proper BSD procedures. If an BSD pad is not available,
touch bare metal on the power supply before proceeding.
Failure to use proper BSD procedures can damage the
logic board.

2. Remove the customer's DRAM SIMMs by using the
SIMM removal tool. See the You Oughta Know tab
for SIMM tool use.

Note: Record the number and the sizes of the DRAM
SIMMs. The customer should receive the same
number and sizes back!

3. Figure 4-1. If the computer is a Macintosh Ilex or
Ilci, install four known-good DRAM SIMMs in Bank
A. If the computer is a Macintosh Quadra 700,
install four known-good DRAM SIMMs in Bank B.

Note: You must use 120 ns (or faster) DRAM SIMMs
on the Macintosh Ilex, and 80 ns (or faster) DRAM
SIMMs on the Macintosh Ilci and Quadra 700.

Slower SIMMs will cause serious timing problems.

4.24 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Macintosh Ilex

Macintosh lie!

Macintosh Quadra 700

(soldered)

Figure 4-1 DRAM SIMM Verification

4. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the system is working properly
and you can proceed to test the customer's DRAM
SIMMs.

5. Switch the system off, remove one of the known-
good DRAM SIMMs, and install one of the
customer's DRAM SIMMs.

6. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sequence, the customer's DRAM SIMM is
good.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to test each of the DRAM
SIMMs. Be sure not to mix defective DRAM SIMMs
with the good ones.

8. Figure 4-1. To verify DRAM SIMMs installed in
Bank B on the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci, install four
known-good DRAM SIMMs in Bank B and repeat the
procedure described in steps 4 through 7.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.25

□ BATTERY VERIFICATION

introduction

Materials Required

Macintosh licx/llci
Battery Verification

The lithium battery on the main logic board supplies
power to the power-on circuit, real time clock, and
parameter RAM. If the battery falls below
specifications, you must replace it.

WARNING: Lithium batteries have some potential for
explosion if improperly handled. Follow the procedure
below exactly as written.

Voltmeter

1. Switch off the computer and remove the top
cover.

2. Set the voltmeter to measure 10 volts DC.

3. Figure 4-2. Touch and hold the positive probe of
the voltmeter to the positive side of the battery.

4. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the battery.

5. The reading for a good battery should be 2.8 volts
or higher. If the reading falls below 2.8 volts,
replace the battery.

4.26 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Macintosh Quadra 700
Battery Verification

Figure 4-2 Battery Verification

1. Switch off the computer. Remove the lid, the
power supply, and the disk drive mount.

2. Set the voltmeter to measure 10 volts DC.

3. Figure 4-2. Touch and hold the positive probe of
the voltmeter to the positive side of the battery.

4. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the battery.

5. The reading for a good battery should be 3-2 volts
or higher. If the reading falls below 3.2 volts,
replace the battery.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.27

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh licx/ilci/Quadra 700

Section 5 - Additional Procedures

□ CONTENTS

5.2 Battery Replacement

5.2 Storage and Handling

5.2 Disposal

5.5 Memor)^ Identification and Upgrades

5.5 Introduction

5.5 Identification

5.6 DRi\M Upgrades - Macintosh Ilcx/IIci

5.8 DRAM Upgrades - Macintosh Quadra 700

5.9 VltAM Upgrades ~ Macintosh Quadra 700

5.10 Macintosh Ilex Upgrade to Macintosh Ilci
5.12 Macintosh Ilcx/Uci Upgrade to Macintosh

Quadra 700

Note: Detailed instructions for underlined steps can
be found in Section 2, Take-Apart.

Macintcsn !icx/!!ci/Quadre 700

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.1

□ BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Storage and
Handling

Disposal

WARNING: The type of lithium battery used in the
Macintosh Ilex, lid, and Quadra 700 computers could
explode if improperly handled.

Take the following precautions when storing and

handling lithium batteries:

• A lithium battery from Apple is sealed in an
individual zip-lock wrapper. When you receive it,
check to make sure the wrapper is intact. If it is
not, mend the wrapper with tape or replace it
before you store the battery.

• Store the battery in the packaging in which it was
shipped.

• Be certain that the storage area for lithium batteries
is well-marked and that access to the area is
restricted.

A lithium battery is not rechargeable and requires
proper disposal when it is “dead.” Because lithium is
water-reactive and potentially explosive, lithium
batteries must be treated as hazardous waste.

WARNING: “Dead” lithium batteries are considered
hazardous waste and must be returned to Apple in their
original packaging for disposal according to
Environmental Protectiori Agency (EPA) guidelines.

Because of this hazard, Apple recommends the following
course of action:

• After removing a “dead” lithium battery from a logic
board, place the battery in the zip-lock wrapper and
original packaging from the replacement battery.

Mark the old battery DEAD and return it to Apple
for disposal according to EPA guidelines.

WARNING: DO NOT ship a leaking battery to Apple, if the
battery is leaking, dispose of it according to local
hazardous waste disposal guidelines.

5.2 / Additional Procedures

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

• The long-life lithium battery should last about seven
years. Refer to “Battery Verification” in Section 4,
Troubleshooting, to check the condition of the
battery. If the battery fails, replace it according to
the following procedure.

Materials Required Grounded workbench and wriststrap

CAUTION: Use ESD precautions before removing or
replacing the battery. Failure to do so may result in la
ogic board failure.

Remove

1. Remove the logic board.

2. Locate the battery holder and battery on the front of
the logic board (Figure 5-1).

Figure 5-1 Battery Holder and Battery

3. Remove the cover from the holder by gently
squeezing one end of the cover, then the other.

4. (}rasp the battery' between the thumb and fore
finger and remove it.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.3

Replace

1. Insert the new battery with the positive side of the
battery in the side of the holder marked positive
(refer to Figure 5-1).

CAUTION: Be sure the positive side of the battery is in
the correct location (Figure 5-1). An incorrectly placed
battery can damage the logic board.

2. Replace the logic board .

3. After restarting the machine, set the clock using the
Control Panel.

5.4 / Additional Procedures

Oct 91

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

□ MEMORY IDENTIFICATION AND UPGRADES

Introduction

Identification

Size

Speed

Note: This section covers memory upgrades by way of
the DRAM SIMM sockets on the logic board. It does
not address upgrading system memory by way of NuBus
expansion slots.

Changing the DRAM configuration on a Macintosh Ilex,
Ilci, or Quadra 700 involves the use of DRAM SIMMs.
DRAM SIMMs have memory chips that are either
surface mounted or mounted through the board. Each
SIMM has a connector that fits into the SIMM sockets
on the main logic board of the computer.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

DRAM SIMMs are available in a number of sizes and
speeds. Refer to the SIMM Compatibility Chart for a
list of all the SIMMs available from Apple.

The SIMM size indicates the amount of memory in the
SIMM. Apple provides SIMMs in various sizes from
256 k to 2 MB. Some third parties provide even larger-
sized SIMMs.

You must follow the SIMM speed requirements for each
machine. Slower SIMMs than those recommended will
cause serious timing problems. On the SIMM itself, the
“-x” or “-xx” number after the manufacturer’s part
number usually indicates RAM speed. For example, “-8”
indicates 80 ns SIMMs and “-12” indicates 120 ns
SIMMs.

Note: when you remove SIMMs from the logic board,
use the SIMM removal tool. Instructions for using this
tool are located under the You Oughta Know tab in the
Apple Service Technical Procedures.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.5

DRAM Upgrades -
Macintosh llcx/lici

Macintosh Ilex

The Macintosh Ilex and Ilci logic boards each have two
banks of DRAM SIMM sockets labeled Bank A and Bank
B, which consist of four slots each (Figure 5-2). Each
bank, if populated, requires same-sized SIMMs in all
four slots.

^ ca ca I— J

Figure 5-2 Macintosh iicx/lici Memory Banks

The following chart shows memory configurations and
SIMM sizes that the Macintosh Ilex supports:

DRAM

Bank A

BankB

1 MB

Four 256 k SIMMs

Empty

2 MB

Four 256 k SIMMs

4 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Empty

5 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Four 256 k SIMMs

8 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Note:

DRAM configurations greater than 8 MB require

DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers and Mode
32 software.

IMPORTANT: A bank cannot be partially filled (such as
with a single SIMM); nor can a bank contain different-
sized SIMMs.

5.6 / Additional Procedures

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Macintosh I Id

The following chart shows memory configurations and
SIMM sizes that the Macintosh Ilci supports:

DRAM

Bank A

BankB

1 MB

Four 256 k SIMMs

Empty

2 MB

Four 256 k SIMMs

Four 256K SIMMs

2 MB

Four 512K SIMMs

Empty

3 MB

Four 512K SIMMs

Four 256 k SIMMs

4 MB

Four 512K SIMMs

4 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Empty

5 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Four 256 k SIMMs

6 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

Four 512K SIMMs

8 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

8 MB

Four 2 MB SIMMs

Empty

9 MB

Four 2 MB SIMMs

Four 256 k SIMMs

10 MB

Four 2 MB SIMMs

Four 512K SIMMs

16 MB

Four 2 MB SIMMs

Note:

DRAM configurations greater than l6 MB require

DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers.

IMPORTANT: A bank cannot be partially filled (such as
with a single SIMM), nor can a bank contain different-
sized SIMMs.

If you use built-in video on the Macintosh Ilci, you
must have SIMMs in bank A because the built-in video
uses bank A for video framing. If you use a video card,
then putting SIMMs in bank A is optional.

Note: On a Macintosh Ilci that has different-sized
SIMMs in banks A and B, built-in video works most
efficiently with the larger SIMMs in bank B.

If the Macintosh Ilci is a parity system, you must use
parity SIMMs (1 MB x 9-bit SOJ SIMMs) to upgrade
memory. Nonparity SIMMs disable the parity function.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Mar 92

Additional Procedures / 5.7

DRAM Upgrades -
Macintosh
Quadra 700

(

Various DRAM configurations are possible on the
Macintosh Quadra 700. The number and size of the
DRAM SIMMs added to the logic board determine the
total memory size.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 has two DRAM memory
banks. Bank A consists of 4 MB of DRAM soldered on
the logic board. Bank B consists of four SIMM sockets
for DRAM expansion (see Figure 5-3). All four sockets
within bank B must contain either no SIMMs or four
same-sized SIMMs.

Bank A
(soldered)

Figure 5-3 Macintosh Quadra 700 Memory Banks

The following chart shows memory configurations that
the Macintosh Quadra 700 supports:

RAM

Bank A (soldered)

BankB

4 MB

Empty

8 MB

4 MB

Four 1 MB SIMMs

20 MB

4 MB

Four 4 MB SIMMs

Note: DRAM configurations of 20 MB or greater
require DRAM SIMMs from third-party manufacturers.

5.8 / Additional Procedures rev. Mar 92 Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

VRAM Upgrades -
Macintosh
Quadra 700

Various VRAM configurations are possible on the
Macintosh Quadra 700. The number and size of the
DRAM SIMMs added to the logic board determines the
total memory size.

The Macintosh Quadra 700 has four VRAM memory
banks. Bank A consists of 51 2K of VRAM soldered on
the logic board. In addition, banks B, C, and D consist
of two VRAM SIMM sockets for VRAM expansion (see
Figure 5-4). Both sockets within a bank must contain
either no SIMMs or two same-sized SIMMs.

VRAM
Bank A
{soldered)

VRAM

SIMM

Connectors

Figure 5-4 Macintosh Quadra 700
VRAM Memory Banks

The following chart shows VRAM configurations that
the Macintosh Quadra 700 supports:

VRAM

Bank A
(soldered)

BankB

BankC

BankD

512K

Empty

1 MB

512K

Two 256 k SIMMs

Empty

2 MB

512K

Two 256 k SIMMs

Note: The Macintosh Quadra 700 does not support a
1.5 MB VRAM configuration.

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.9

□ MACINTOSH Ilex UPGRADE TO MACINTOSH llci

Use this procedure to upgrade a Macintosh Ilex to a
Macintosh Ilci. The procedure involves changing the
logic board, RAM SIMMs, bottom case, and the HDA
power cable as explained below.

Materials

Required

Phillips screwdriver
RAM SIMM removal tool
Macintosh Ilci Upgrade Kit
Necessary DRAM SIMMs

Procedure Upgrading a Macintosh Ilex to a Macintosh Ilci requires

the Macintosh Ilci Upgrade Kit. The kit includes a
Macintosh Ilci logic board, a new bottom case, and a
new HDA power cable. Use the procedures in Section
2, Take-Apart, to take apart the Macintosh Ilex and then
rebuild the new Macintosh Ilci unit. The major
differences between the Macintosh Ilex and Ilci are:

• The Macintosh Ilci logic board has a different layout
and one additional connector (video port).

• The Macintosh Ilci requires different DRAM SIMMs
than the Macintosh Ilex. Therefore, you cannot use
the DRAM SIMMs from the Macintosh Ilex unless
they are 80 ns fast-page mode DRAM SIMMs.

• A new HDA (hard disk assembly) power cable
accommodates the new connector on the logic board.

• A new bottom case accommodates the new video port
connector.

Take-Apart

1. Remove the Macintosh Ilex logic board .

2. Using the SIMM removal tool, remove the DRAM
SIMMs from the logic board. If they are not the
specific kind of DRAM SIMMs required for the
Macintosh Ilci (refer to the SIMM Compatibility
Chart), give them to the customer.

3. Discard the bottom case. (You need not return the
bottom case to Apple.)

4. Return the logic board (without SIMMs) to Apple.

5.10 / Additional Procedures

rev. Jan 92

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Rebuild

Insert the Macintosh Ilci logic board into the new
bottom case.

1 .

2. Insert the necessary DRAM SIMMs into the
Macintosh Ilci logic board.

CAUTION: You cannot use the DRAM SIMMs from the
Macintosh Ilex unless they are 80 ns fast-page mode
DRAM SIMMs.

Note: Unlike the Macintosh Ilex, the Macintosh Ilci
does not require that the larger DRAM SIMMs be in
bank A. In fact, if the customer plans to use the
built-in video feature, the system will function most
efficiently with the larger SIMMs in bank B.

3. Install the speaker, disk driveCs'). drive mount.

power .supply, and reset/interrupt switch. (Use the
new disk drive power cable included in the upgrade
kit.)

Note: If the computer contains a hard drive, transfer
the hard drive light pipe from the old Macintosh
Ilex case to the Macintosh Ilci bottom case.

Macintosh I lcx/1 Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Jan 92

Additional Procedures / 5.11

□ MACINTOSH llcx/llci UPGRADE TO MACINTOSH QUADRA 700

Materials

Required

Procedure

5.12 / Additional Procedures

Use this procedure to upgrade a Macintosh Ilex or Ilci
to a Macintosh Quadra 700. The procedure involves
changing the logic board, bottom case, HDA power
cable, and speaker and installing an internal SCSI
terminator.

IMPORTANT: The Macintosh Quadra 700 requires
System software version 7.0.1 or greater. Instructions for
installing system software are in the Getting Started With
Your Macintosh Quadra 700 manual.

Phillips screwdriver
DRAM SIMM removal tool
Macintosh Quadra 700 Upgrade Kit

Upgrading a Macintosh Ilex or Ilci to a Macintosh
Quadra 700 requires the Macintosh Quadra 700 Upgrade
Kit. The kit includes a Macintosh Quadra 700 logic
board, a new bottom case, a new HDA power cable, a
new speaker, and an internal SCSI terminator. Use the
procedures in Section 2, Take-Apart, to take apart the
Macintosh Ilex or Ilci and to rebuild the new Macintosh
Quadra 700 unit. The major differences between the
Macintosh Ilcx/IIci and the Macintosh Quadra 700 are:

• The Macintosh Quadra 700 logic board has a
different layout and different connectors.

• The Macintosh Quadra 700 has 4 MB of DRAM
soldered on the logic board and only one bank of
DRAM SIMMs for expansion. It also requires
different DRAM SIMMs than a Macintosh Ilex.
Therefore, you cannot use the DRAM SIMMs from a
Macintosh Ilex unless they are 80 ns fast-page mode
DRAM SIMMs.

• The Macintosh Quadra 700 speaker provides higher
output.

• The Macintosh Quadra 700 HDA (hard disk
assembly) power cable accommodates the connector
on the Macintosh Quadra 700 logic board.

• The Macintosh Quadra 700 bottom case
accommodates the different port connectors.

rev. Jan 92 Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Take Apart

1. Remove the Macintosh Ilcx/IIci lo gic board .

2. Using the SIMM removal tool, remove the DRAM
SIMMs from the logic board. If they are not useable
in the Macintosh Quadra 700, give them to the
customer.

3. Discard the bottom case. (You need not return the
bottom case to Apple.)

Rebuild l. Insert the Macintosh Quadra 700 logic board into

the new bottom case.

2. If the DRAM SIMMs from the Macintosh Ilcx/IIci
are useable in the Macintosh Quadra 700, insert
them into the Quadra 700 logic board.

CAUTION: You cannot use the DRAM SIMMs from a
Macintosh Ilex unless they are 80 ns (or faster) fast-page
mode DRAM SIMMs.

3. Install additional VRAM SIMMs in the Macintosh
Quadra 700 logic board, if applicable.

4. Install the new speaker, disk driveCs). drive mount,
power supply, and reset/interrupt switch . (Use the
new disk drive power cable included in the upgrade
kit.)

Rebuild Note: if you are not installing a hard disk in
the upgraded system, you must install the SCSI
terminator (included in the upgrade kit) on the main
logic board SCSI connector. To insert the connector
correctly, align the white key icon on the terminator
with the notch in the cable connector.

Note: If you are upgrading a Macintosh Ilci with a l60
MB hard disk to a Macintosh Quadra 700, you must run
the Quadra 700 Upgrade 160 MB Update software
application. The application is available on AppleLink
on the Service and Support bulletin board in the Apple
Support folder. If you do not have access to AppleLink,
contact the Apple Assistance Center.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Jan 92

Additional Procedures / 5.13

< Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Illustrated Parts List

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 Macintosh Ilex - Exploded View (Figure 1)

IPL.5 Macintosh Ilci - Exploded View (Figure 2)

IPL.7 Macintosh Quadra 700 - Exploded View
(Figure 3)

IPL.9 Macintosh Ilex - Logic Board (Figure 4)

IPL.ll Macintosh Ilci - Logic Board (Figure 5)

IPL.ll Macintosh Ilci - Logic Board w/Parity (Figure 6)

IPL.13 Macintosh Quadra 700 - Logic Board (Figure 7)

IPL.15 Macintosh Ilci - Cache Card (Figure 8)

Note: The figures and lists in this section include all piece
parts that Apple sells for the Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, and
Quadra 700 along with their part numbers. These are the
only parts available from Apple. Refer to your Apple
Service Programs manual for prices.

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1

□ MACINTOSH Ilex - EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 1)

Item

Part No.

Descriotion

602-0164

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height (replaced
by 602-0282 or 602-0308)

—

602-0282

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height; and
3.5-Inch, 1-Inch-Height, with Carrier

076-0439

Dust Shield, Package of 5

416-1412

Screw, M 3.5 X .6 X 8 (top cover, drive mount to
bottom case)

590-0505

Cable, Internal HDA Power (1 x 4-pin)

590-0512

Cable, Internal HDA Power (2 x 2-pin)

590-0609

Cable, Internal HDA

815-5071

Bracket, Power Supply Fan

982-0023

Power Supply Fan

444-6104

Screw, 6-32 x .250 (HDA to HDA bracket)

661-0467

Power Supply with Fan

815-6033

On-Off Button

661-0537

Logic Board (without RAM; replaces part number
661-0459)

630-5502

Bottom Case

815-6032

Light Pipe, Power On

590-0380

Cable, Power AC (smoke)

865-0026

Rubber Feet

815-6031

Speaker Bracket

630-5503

Speaker

1 6

815-6034

Reset/Interrupt Switch

661-0474

1.4 MB Mechanism, Apple SuperDrive

844-0018

Screw, Socket, Phillips (1.4 MB mechanism)

805-0961

Shield, Internal 1.4 MB Mechanism

590-0607

Cable, Internal Floppy Drive (yellow stripe)

815-6030

Drive Mount

815-6036

HDA Light Pipe

590-0506

Cable, HDA LED (amber)

590-0527

Cable, HDA LED (fits 1-Inch-Height drives)

661-0373

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 20 MB

661-0464

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 40 MB

661-1629

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 1-Inch-Height, 40 MB

66I-O56I

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB with A/UX, v. 1.1
(replaced by 66I-O613)

66I-O6OO

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB

66I-O613

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB with A/UX, v. 2.0

805-5078

Carrier, HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch, SCSI

810-6028

Top Cover

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.3

1PL.4/ Illustrated Parts List

rev. Mar 92

Macintosh 1 1 cx/l Ici/Quadra 700

□ MACINTOSH llci - EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 2)

Item

Part No.

Description

602-0164

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height (replaced
by 602-0282 or 602-0308)

—

602-0282

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height; and

3.5-Inch, 1-Inch-Height, with carrier

076-0439

Dust Shield, Package of 5

416-1412

Screw, Metric, 3.5 x .6 x 8 (top cover, drive mount to
bottom case)

590-0512

Cable, Internal HDA Power

590-0609

Cable, Internal HDA

815-5071

Bracket, Power Supply Fan

982-0023

Power Supply Fan

444-6104

Screw, 6-32 x .250 (HDA to HDA bracket)

661-0467

Power Supply with Fan

815-6033

On-Off Button

661-0532

Logic Board

661-0583

Parity Logic Board

590-0380

Cable, AC Power (smoke)

630-5662

Bottom Case

815-6032

Light Pipe, Power On

865-0026

Rubber Feet

815-6031

Speaker Bracket

630-5503

Speaker

815-6034

Reset/Interrupt Switch

875-0110

EMI Gasket

661-0474

1.4 MB Mechanism, Apple SuperDrive

844-0018

Screw, Socket, Phillips (1.4 MB mechanism)

805-0961

Shield, Internal 1.4 MB Mechanism

590-0607

Cable, Internal Floppy Drive (yellow stripe)

815-6030

Drive Mount

815-6036

HDA Light Pipe

590-0506

Cable, HDA LED (amber)

590-0527

Cable, HDA LED (fits 1-Inch-Height drives)

661-0373

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 20 MB

661-0464

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 40 MB

66I-I629

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 1-Inch-Height, 40 MB

66I-O56I

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB with A/UX v.1.1
(replaced by 66I-O613)

66I-O6OO

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB

66I-O624

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 1-lnch-Height, 80 MB |

661-0613

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 80 MB with A/UX v. 2.0

66I-O625

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, I60 MB (replaced by

66l-l64l)

661-1639

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, I60 MB with A/UX v. 2.0.1

66l-l64l

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, I60 MB

805-5078

Carrier, HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch, SCSI

810-6028

Top Cover

Macintosh llcx/llci/Quadra 700 rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.5

I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ MACINTOSH QUADRA 700 - EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 3)

Item

Part No.

Description

602-0164

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height (replaced
by 602-0282 or 602 - 0308 )

—

602-0282

Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height; and
3.5-Inch, 1 -Inch-Height, with carrier

076-0439

Dust Shield, Package of 5

810-6038

Lid

590-0512

Cable, Internal HDA Power (2x2 pin)

590-0609

Cable, Internal HDA

815-5071

Bracket, Power Supply Fan

982-0023

Power Supply Fan

444-6104

Screw, 6-32 x .250 (HDA to HDA bracket)

661-0467

Power Supply with Fan

815-6033

On-Off Button

66 I-O 666

Logic Board

590-0380

Cable, AC Power (smoke)

630-5992

Bottom Case

815-6272

Light Pipe, Power On

865-0026

Rubber Feet

815-6271

HDA Light Pipe

815-6031

Speaker Bracket

l 6

630-5999

Speaker

865-0800

Rubber Foot

815-6270

Reset/Interrupt Switch

875-0110

EMI Gasket

661-0474

1.4 MB Mechanism, Apple SuperDrive

844-0018

Screw, Socket, Phillips (1.4 MB mechanism)

805-0961

Shield, Internal 1.4 MB Mechanism

590-0607

Cable, Internal Floppy Drive (yellow stripe)

810-6040

Drive Mount

416-1412

Screw, Metric, 3.5 x .6 x 8 (drive mount to bottom case)

590-0506

590-0527

590-0248

Cable, HDA LED (amber)

Cable, HDA LED (fits 1-Inch-Height drives)

Cable, HDA LED, 400 MB HDA

66 I-O 624

66l-l64l

66 I-I 636

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 1-Inch-Height, 80 MB

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, I 60 MB

HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch SCSI, 400 MB

805-5078

Carrier, HDA, Internal 3.5-Inch, SCSI

699-5071

Microphone Assembly

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.7

□ MACINTOSH Ilex - LOGIC BOARD (Figure 4)

Item

Part No.

Description

—

661-0537

Logic Board

742-0011

Lithium Battery (without leads)

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

661-0402

SIMM, 256k, SOJ, 120 ns

661-0494

SIMM, DIP, 256k, 120 ns

661-0403

SIMM, 1 MB, DIP, 120 ns

661-0410

SIMM, 1 MB, DIP, 120 ns

661-0520

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0719

SIMM, 1 MB, 80 ns

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.9

Figure 5 Macintosh llci - Logic Board

IPL.10 / Illustrated Parts List

Oct 91

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

□ MACINTOSH llci - LOGIC BOARD (Figure 5)

jigm

Part No.

Descriotion

661-0532

Logic Board

742-0011

Lithium Battery

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

661-0519

SIMM, 256k, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0646

SIMM, 512K, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0520

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0546

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns, Parity

661-0643

SIMM, 2 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0719

SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

IMPORTANT: Refer to the Quick Reference: SIMM
Compatibility chart for SIMM compatibility. Follow this
chart carefully! Some SIMMs that may appear to be
interchanpeable with others are not.

□ MACINTOSH llci - LOGiC BOARD WITH PARITY (Figure 6)

Item Part No. Description

661-0583 Parity Logic Board

742-0011 Lithium Battery

520-0344 Battery Holder Cover

661-0546 SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns. Parity

Macintosh llcx/l Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Nov 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.11

□ MACINTOSH QUADRA 700 - LOGIC BOARD (Figure 7)

ttem

Part No.

Description

661-0666

Logic Board

661-0609

VRAM SIMM, 256k, 100 ns

661-0722

VRAM SIMM, 256k, 80 ns

661-0520

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

661-0719

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, SOJ, 80 ns

742-0011

Lithium Battery

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

rev. Jan 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.13

□ MACINTOSH llci - CACHE CARD (Figure 8)

jlgm Part No. E)escrlDtlon

- 66I-I619 Macintosh Ilci Cache Card, Revised

Note: The original Macintosh Ilci cache card (661-1602)
can cause frequent system crashes. This card has a "CF"
serial number prefix — e.g., CF#######. Return these
cards to Apple. Additional information is available on
AppleLink under the Apple Programs icon.

The serial number on the revised Macintosh Ilci cache
card (66 1-1 6 19) begins with an "AF" prefix — e.g.,
AF#######. This revised card should function
properly; if it fails, return it to Apple through standard
service channels.

Macintosh I Icx/I Ici/Quadra 700

Oct 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.15

)

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 - 1.3

Basics 1.3

1.4

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.11

1.12

1.22

1.23

1.23
1.25

Section 2 - 2.3

Take-Apart 2.3

2.5

2.7

2.9

2.11

2.13

2.15

Product Description
Features
Configurations
VRAM Upgrade
Module Identification
External Connectors
Internal Connectors
Keyswitch

Interrupt and Reset Switches
Theory of Operation
Logic Board
Power Supply
Apple SuperDrive
SCSI Hard Disk Drives
Functional Overview
Specifications

Introduction

Materials Required
Side Cover

Drive Shelf and Disk Drives
Drive Shelf
Apple SuperDrive
SCSI Disk Drive
Power Supply and Fan
Power Supply
Fan

Logic Board

Section 3 -
Diagnostics

There are currendy no diagnostics to test the Macintosh
Quadra 900. When diagnostics are available, instructions
will be in the Macintosh Family Technical Procedures
under the Macintosh Multiple-Product Diagnostics tab.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Contents / i

Section 4 -

4.3

Introduction

Troubleshooting

4.3

Before You Start

4.3

Things to Remember

4.5

Module Exchange Information

4.5

Logic Board

4.5

Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.6

Apple SuperDrive

4.6

Power Supply

4.6

Startup and Error Chords

4.6

Introduction

4.6

Startup Chord

4.6

Error Chords

4.8

Symptom Chart

4.8

How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.9

System Problems

4.10

Video Problems

4.11

Apple SuperDrive Problems

4.12

SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.13

Peripheral Problems

4.14

Miscellaneous Problems

4.15

DRAM SIMM Verification

4.15

Introduction

4.15

Materials Required

4.15

Isolating a Defective DRAM SIMM

4.16

Battery Verification

4.16

Introduction

4.16

Materials Required

4.16

Verification Procedure

4.17

Customer’s Configuration Chart

Section 5 -

5.2

DRAM SIMM Upgrades

Additional

5.2

Introduction

Procedures

5.2

Installation and Handling

5.2

Configurations

5.4

VRAM SIMM Upgrades

5.4

Introduction

5.5

Installation and Handling

5.5

Configurations

Illustrated

IPL.3

System Exploded View (Figure 1)

Parts List

IPL.5

Logic Board Components (Figure 2)

IPL.6

Miscellaneous Items

ii / Contents

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

©Apple Computer, Inc., 1991. No portion of this document may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Desktop Bus, Finder, Quadra, QuickDraw, SuperDrive are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc.

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleLink, AppleTalk, AAJX, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc., and are registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Corporation.

NuBus is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Contents / iii

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Section 1 - Basics

□ CONTENTS

)

Macintosh Quadra 900

1.3 Product Description

1.3 Features

1.4 Configurations

1.6 VRAM Upgrade

1.7 Module Identification

1.8 External Connectors

1.9 Internal Connectors

1.9 Keyswitch

1.11 Interrupt and Reset Switches

1.12 Theory of Operation

1.12 Logic Board

1.22 Power Supply

1.22 Apple SuperDrive

1.23 SCSI Hard Disk Drives

1.23 Functional Overview

1.25 Specifications

Oct 91

Basics / 1.1

(

Apple

SuperDrive

□ PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Apple® Macintosh® Quadra'^’^ 900 is a high-
performance Motorola® 68040-based Macintosh
computer designed for maximum power, expansion, and
flexibility. The system supports up to four internal
mass storage devices — two can be removeable-media
devices. All systems include an Apple SuperDrive™ 1.4
megabyte floppy disk drive. An additional removeable-
media device (such as a DAT Idigital audio tape],
magneto-optical, or tape drive) can be installed below
the Apple SuperDrive.

Features The Macintosh Quadra 900 has the following features:

• Floor-standing tower design that supports up to four
internal mass storage devices, including removeable-
media, half-height, and full-height drives

• 303-watt power supply

• Two serial and one Apple Desktop Bus™ interfaces

• 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive floppy disk drive

• Keylock security switch

• Motorola 68040 operating at 25 MHz with integral
memory management, floating-point unit, and memory
cache

• 68040 processor-direct slot (PDS)

• DRAM SIMM capacity from 4 to 64 MB using
standard 80 nsec DRAM (4 MB standard)

• Five NuBus™ slots with improved performance and
support for burst mode, processor write buffer,
oversized boards, and NuBus '90 compatibility

• Built-in 8-bit (upgradeable to 24-bit) video circuitry
with performance approaching that of the Apple
8*24 GC Display Card and support for all Apple
monitors

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1 .3

Configurations

• Dual-channel (one internal and one external) SCSI
interface that supports high-speed SCSI transfers
and implements a controlled impedance internal
cable system

• Input/output processors for the Apple Desktop Bus,
serial ports, and floppy disk interface

• Built-in Ethernet interface using the Apple Ethernet
Cable System

• Improved sound capabilities — including a built-in
4-inch speaker, 8- and/or 1 6-bit stereo sound
output, 8-bit monaural sound input with microphone
and line-in connectors, and real-time decompression
hardware

The Macintosh Quadra 900 is available from Apple in
three configurations;

• 4 MB RAM and an Apple SuperDrive

• 4 MB RAM, an Apple SuperDrive, and a l60 MB
SCSI hard disk drive

• 4 MB RAM, an Apple SuperDrive, and a 400 MB
SCSI hard disk drive.

These are not the only possible configurations. Apple
offers a number of options to enhance the operation and
performance of the Macintosh Quadra 900. These
options are described later in this section. Also, third-
party manufacturers offer a wide variety of products
that can be installed. You may see systems with
different amounts of RAM, different sizes and capacities
of hard disk drives, NuBus cards, and external
peripherals.

1 .4 / Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Internal The Macintosh Quadra 900 offers a high degree of

Mass Storage flexibility in the configuration of internal mass storage

devices. The system has a total of four half-height
mounting locations.

The two front locations accommodate removable-media
devices, such as floppy drives, CD-ROM drives, or
magneto-optical drives. The top front position contains
an Apple SuperDrive. In systems with an optional
Apple internal l60 or 400 megabyte SCSI hard disk
drive, the hard drive is installed beneath the floppy
drive.

The two rear locations accommodate two half-height or
a single full-height drive.

Each of the four locations accommodates 3.5- or 5.25-
inch devices.

Figure 1-2 Internal Disk Drive Locations

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1 .5

Internal SCSI
Bus Termination

VRAM Upgrade

To make installing SCSI devices as straightforward as
possible and to reduce the potential for SCSI bus
problems, the internal SCSI cable has built-in
termination. Before installing a SCSI device, make sure
the device does not have termination resistors installed.
(SCSI hard drives ordered from Apple Service ship with
termination resistor packs installed.) Refer to Section 2,
Take-Apart for instructions on how to remove the built-
in termination for the 160 and 400 MB hard drives.

WARNING: Failure to remove the termination resistors
can result in damage to the Macintosh Quadra 900 logic
board.

Apple provides VRAM upgrade kits that increase the
video RAM from 1 to 2 MB. This additional VRAM
increases the number of bits per pixel.

For instructions on installing the VRAM upgrade, see
Section 5, Additional Procedures.

1 .6 / Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Module Identification

Figure 1-3 is an exploded view of the Macintosh
Quadra 900 field-serviceable modules. Additional
module identification is in the Apple Service Technical
Procedures Module Identification manual. Information
in the Module Identification manual supersedes the
information available in this manual.

Apple

SuperDrive

Figure 1-3 Modules

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1 .7

External Figure 1-4. The Macintosh Quadra 900 has 10 interface

Connectors connectors, two power connectors, and five NuBus card

openings on the rear panel. The Apple Service
Technical Procedures Peripheral Interface Guide
contains pin-outs and signal descriptions for the
interface connectors.

Figure 1-4 External Connectors

1 .8 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Internal Figure 1-5. The Macintosh Quadra 900 has a variety of

Connectors internal expansion connectors — including five NuBus

slots, a 68040 processor-direct slot (PDS), sixteen
DRAM SIMM connectors, a ROM SIMM connector, and
four VRAM SIMM connectors. The logic board also has
connectors for the SCSI drives, Apple SuperDrive,
speaker, keyswitch, and power supply.

Keyswitch

Connector

DRAM SIMMJ
Connectors

Speaker

Connector

ROM

SIMM

Connector

VRAM
SIMM
Con pectors

Apple Processor-
SuperDrive Direct Slot
Connector Connector

NuBus

Connectors

Auxiliary

SCSI

Connector

Power Supply
Connector

SCSI

Connector

Figure 1-5 Internal Connectors

Keyswitch Figure 1-5. The Macintosh Quadra 900 includes a

keyswitch to limit access to the system. The keyswitch
has three positions; off, on, and secure.

• Off - When the keyswitch is in the off position, the
computer cannot be turned on. Turning the
keyswitch from on or secure to off turns the
computer off.

IMPORTANT: Turning the keyswitch off when the
computer is running turns the power off immediately. If
you use the keyswitch to switch the computer off, you risk
losing data in RAM and possibly corrupting files on the
hard or floppy disk.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .9

• On - With the keyswitch in the on position, you
may switch on the computer from the keyboard and
switch it off from the Shut Down menu item of the
Finder™.

• Secure - When the keyswitch is in the secure
position, the ADB devices and the floppy disk are
disabled. The computer automatically turns on when
the keyswitch is set to secure and AC power is
available. Note that the interrupt and reset
switches remain active when the secure mode is
selected.

In the event the keys are lost, the customer can contact
the keyswitch manufacturer and order replacement
keys. The Apple Service Programs manual contains
ordering information. Alternately, you can replace the
keyswitch assembly, or a locksmith can create a new
key.

Figure 1-6 Keyswitch

1.10/ Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Interrupt and
Reset Switches

Figure 1-7. The reset and interrupt switches are
on the front of the computer below the keyswitch.

These switches reset the computer, place the computer
in test monitor mode, or generate a nonmaskable
interrupt (NMI) to the microprocessor for software and
hardware development.

• Reset switch - Pressing the reset switch resets the
microprocessor and reboots the computer. When you
press the reset switch, data in system RAM
disappears.

• Interrupt switch - Pressing the interrupt switch
generates a nonmaskable interrupt. If you press the
interrupt switch while the computer is booting, the
computer enters the test monitor program — a
program in system ROM that allows another
computer to communicate directly with the
Macintosh Quadra 900 hardware to run diagnostics.

Figure 1-7 Reset and NMI Switches

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1.11

□ THEORY OF OPERATION

(

This section includes an overview of the major modules
of the Macintosh Quadra 900: the logic board, power
supply, Apple SuperDrive, and optional SCSI hard disk
drive.

The information here will give you an understanding of
how each module of the computer works, as well as
how the system functions. This information will assist
you in performing logical troubleshooting of the
Macintosh Quadra 900 computer.

Logic Board Figure 1-8 shows the Macintosh Quadra 900 logic board

and its major components. Figure 1-9 is a block diagram
of the logic board.

Video 1 MB

Motorola Clock Video RAM

MC68040 Generator (soldered) CLUT/DAC

Sonic

Ethernet

Controller

SCSI

Controller

SRAM

see

PIC

SRAM

(

Figure 1-8 Logic Board Major Components

1.12/ Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

NuBus Connectors

CPU

Motorola
MC68040
(25 MHz)

I Bidirectional
I Bus
i Transceivers

(IPLO-2) &
Address Bus g

(AO-31) I
Data Bus I

(Do-31)

NuBus (ADO-31)

Memory

RAM

(AO-31)

Control

Unit

(MCU)

Bank A
Memory
0-16 MB

BankB
Memory
0-16 MB

BankC
Memory
0-16 MB

Bank D
Memory
0-16 MB

(DO-31)

J L

(AO-22)

(DO-31)

Bidirectional

Bus

Transceivers

(BDO-31)

Bank > (4 SIMMs)

(AO-31)

DAFB

Frame
Buffer
Controller I

VRAM

Soldered

■

SIMM

Memory

0.5 MB

Video

AC/DC I Port
I C LUT/D AC

|(BA4 -7) 0 53C 96

Internal SCSI Port

3 Aux SCSI Connector
17 External SCSI Port

Bidirectional

Bus

Transceivers

JDB

I/O Bus

Ethernet

SONIC

DP83932

lOD

(31:0)

lOA
(31 :0)

AAUI

Data Path

lOD
(31 :24)

lOA

1 ( 11 : 0 )

lOD
(31 :24)

lOA

(12:9)

lOA

(12:9)

lOA ■
(5:1)

lOD
(31 :24)

lOA ■■
(5:1)

Relayer

I/O Bus

Adapter n Adapter

Control &
Arbitration

Processor-
Direct Slot

Power

Amplifier

TDA7056

Enhanced

Apple

Sound

Chip

VIA1

65C22

VIA 2

65C22

Floppy
lOP

Processor |

D/A |_J

TDA1543

Sporty

Analog

Buffer

DFAC

A/D RIter

Caboose

Real-Time Clock
Power Control

SWIM

Floppy

Disk

I Controller I

see

8530
Serial
I Communi-
cations
1 Controller

ICh.A

Ch. B

Drivers

and

Receivers

Internal

Speaker

(^ Stereo Audio Output

Microphone Input
Line Input

CD-ROM Connector
Keyswitch Connector

Internal/External
■ Mimm Floppy

Connectors

ADB Port

Serial Port A (Modem)

Serial Port B (Printer)

Figure 1-9 Logic Board Block Diagram

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1.13

Microprocessor

Bus Architecture

The Macintosh Quadra 900 contains a Motorola
MC68040 32-bit microprocessor operating at 25 MHz.
This processor is completely software compatible with
all 68000, 68020, and 68030 versions used in other
Macintosh computers. The Macintosh Quadra 900 runs
most Macintosh applications without modification.
(However, programs with self-modifying code may be
incompatible with the 68040 memory cache.) A list of
compatible applications ships with every Macintosh
Quadra 900. AppleLink® contains the most up-to-date
list of compatible applications.

The 68040 microprocessor includes an integrated
floating-point unit (FPU), a memory management unit
(MMU), and 8K of instruction and data cache.

The integrated FPU eliminates the separate
68881/68882 math coprocessor in 68020/68030-based
Macintosh computers. The optimized FPU in the 68040
executes the most commonly used subset of the 68882
instruction set and includes additional instruction
formats for single- and double-precision rounding of
results.

The integrated MMU eliminates the paged memory
management unit in 68020-based Macintosh computers.
The MMU provides support for System 7.0 virtual
memory, A/UX® (Apple's implementation of UNIX®),
and memory addressing of up to one gigabyte.

The built-in data and instruction cache of the 68040
eliminates the need for an external cache like that used
in the Macintosh Ilci and Ilfx.

The Macintosh Quadra 900 uses three separate buses;
the system bus, I/O bus, and NuBus.

The system bus is the native 68040 bus, which operates
at the same clock rate as the 68040 (25 MHz). It is a
high-performance synchronous bus connecting the 68040
to the memory control unit, the I/O bus (through the
JOB and Relayer ASICs), and the processor-direct slot.
The system can support up to four bus masters: three
on the system bus and one on the I/O bus. The Relayer
ASIC contains the bus arbitration circuitry.

1.14/ Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

The I/O bus is fully buffered from and is asynchronous
with the system bus. The I/O bus connects the 68040 to
the input/output processors for the serial, ADB, and
floppy interfaces; the VIAs; and the Enhanced Apple
Sound Chip. The bus operates at 15.6672 MHz. The I/O
bus connects to the system bus via two ASICs — the
Relayer and the JDB (junction data bus).

The system bus and I/O bus allow alternate bus masters
to request the bus and to transfer data to and from main
memory (DRAM SIMMs). Supporting alternate bus
masters allows NuBus cards requiring fast memory
transfers — such as graphics and network cards — to
transfer data much faster than would be possible with
CPU transfers.

The NuBus is the same expansion bus as in Macintosh II
computers. The bus is fully buffered and connects to
the system bus via the YANCC (Yet Another NuBus
Controller Chip) chip and two bus transceivers.

RAM Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) provide system

memory for the Macintosh Quadra 900. Each SIMM
contains 1 or 4 MB of dynamic RAM (DRAM). Memory is
in four groups, called banks, of four SIMM sockets each.
A system can contain a maximum of 64 MB of system
memory (sixteen 4 MB DRAM SIMMs). The system ships
with four 1 MB DRAM SIMMs installed in Bank A.

(These 1 MB DRAM SIMMs are the same as those in the
Macintosh Ilci and Quadra 700.)

When installing DRAM SIMMs, the following rules
apply:

• Each DRAM SIMM must be 80 nsec or faster.

• All four slots within a bank must be empty or have
four DRAM SIMMs of the same RAM size (1 MB or
4 MB).

• Do not partially fill a bank; fill all four slots of a
bank or leave all four slots empty.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1.15

ROM

Memory

Controller

Real-Time

Clock

Input/Output

Interfaces

Every time you switch on the Macintosh Quadra 900,
the system runs a memory test to determine how much
RAM is present.

You can determine the amount of memory by visual
inspection of the SIMMs or by using About This
Macintosh under the Apple menu of the Finder.

The system has 1 MB of nonvolatile read-only memory
in two 256 k x 1 6-bit surface-mount ROMs. These
ROMs contain the Macintosh ToolBox, operating system
support, 32-bit QuickDraw™, support for 32-bit
addressing and the peripheral interface controllers,
Apple SuperDrive extensions, diagnostics, and self-
tests.

You can replace or upgrade the ROM by installing a
ROM SIMM card in the ROM SIMM slot.

The memory controller unit (MCU) connects to the
system bus and provides the control and timing signals
for system ROM and RAM.

Caboose, an application-specific integrated circuit
(ASIC), replaces the real-time clock chip of earlier
Macintosh computers. Caboose also includes parameter
RAM, DFAC (digital filter audio chip) control, support
for the keyswitch, and power control.

The Macintosh Quadra 900 includes the standard set of
Macintosh interfaces — two serial, one Apple Desktop
Bus, one SCSI, and one stereo sound output. The system
also provides a video interface, a microphone input,
line inputs, and an Ethernet network interface.

1.16/ Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Built-in Video The built-in video port provides performance

approaching that of the 8»24 GC card. The interface
uses a video-RAM-based frame buffer supporting high-
resolution graphics on all Apple monitors. The
interface supports several non-Apple monitor types —
including NTSC and PAL broadcast standards and VGA
(used on IBM-compatible computers and monitors). To
reduce flicker, convolution is an option for NTSC and
PAL.

The standard 1 MB of video RAM supports up to 8 bits
per pixel (BPP) on all Apple monitors. By adding an
additional 1 MB of video RAM, the Macintosh Quadra
900 will support up to 32 BPP on all Apple monitors
except the Apple Macintosh Portrait Display, Apple
Two-Page Monochrome Monitor, and 21 -Inch Color
Display.

Number of colors or shades of gray

Monitor

1 MB VRAM

2 MB VRAM

Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome

256

millions

Macintosh 12-Inch RGB

millions

Apple High-Res RGB (13-Inch)

256

millions

Apple Macintosh Portrait Display

256

Apple Two-Page Monochrome

256

Macintosh 21 -Inch Color

256

16-Inch Color

256

millions

VGA

256

millions

Super VGA

256

millions

NTSC

256

millions

NTSC with convolution

256

PAL

256

millions

PAL with convolution

256

millions

Table 1-1 Video RAM Configurations for Monitor Size and Pixel Depth

Table 1-2 indicates the amount of video RAM needed for
various monitor sizes and pixel depth combinations.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1.17

Floppy Interface

The floppy disk controller chip in the Macintosh
Quadra 900 is the SWIM chip of other Macintosh
computers. The SWIM is a complete multimode floppy
disk interface on a single IC that provides the
capability to read, write, and format in group-coded
recording (GCR) and modified frequency modulation
(MFM) data formats. The SWIM chip interprets,
converts, and outputs dual-disk (clock/time) and file
(data) signals as appropriate for GCR (variable
rotational speed) or MFM (constant rotational speed)
formats. This arrangement provides the capability to
read, write, and format Apple 400K and 800K data disks
(GCR), MS-DOS® 720K data disks (MFM), and Apple or
MS-DOS high-density (1.4 MB) data disks (MFM). The
Macintosh Quadra 900 supports one internal floppy
drive. The system does not support an external floppy
drive.

SCSI The Macintosh Quadra 900 features a dual SCSI

controller architecture. One controller supports
internal SCSI devices, and a second controller supports
external SCSI devices. This design provides improved
SCSI signal quality and greater reliability. Although
the SCSI interface utilizes two channels, it still
supports a maximum of eight devices. (The computer
uses SCSI device address 7, leaving seven available
addresses for other devices.)

The 53C96 SCSI controller chip is faster than the 53C80
of previous Macintosh computers. The 53C96 supports
data transfer rates of up to 5 MB per second.

The internal SCSI bus is actively terminated and
electrically isolated from the external bus. By isolating
the two buses, changes in external devices, cabling, and
termination do not impact the performance of the
internal devices.

The external SCSI bus provides a more uniform
impedance and cleaner signal termination than on
previous Macintosh computers. The external SCSI bus
also has a connector inside the computer. The internal
SCSI connector supports third-party special applications
such as mirrored disks (for fault tolerance) and disk
arrays (for faster throughput). To prevent possible
termination problems, do not use the internal auxiliary
SCSI connector and the external connector
simultaneously.

1.18/ Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Serial Interfaces

Apple Desktop Bus
Interface

Ethernet

An 8530 serial communications controller (SCC) controls
the two serial ports. You can program port 1, the
modem port, for asynchronous or synchronous protocols.
You can program port 2, the printer port, for
asynchronous or AppleTalk® operation. The serial
ports conform to the EIA RS-422 standard. These ports
are used mainly for (though not limited to) connecting
the Macintosh Quadra 900 to AppleTalk networks,
serial printers, and modems.

The Macintosh Quadra 900 uses two mini DIN-8
connectors for the two ports. These are the same
connectors as on all Macintosh computers since the
Macintosh Plus. The ports provide an output handshake
but do not provide the +5 and +12 volts found on the
Macintosh 128K, 512K, and 512K enhanced serial ports.

The Apple Desktop Bus interface on the Macintosh
Quadra 900 functions identically to the ADB interface
on other Macintosh computers. However, ADB functions
are included in the SWIM/ADB input/output processor.
Information on the SWIM/ADB lOP is in Peripheral
Interface Controllers later in this section.

A National Semiconductor DP83932 SONIC Ethernet
controller chip implements the Ethernet network
interface. The SONIC chip includes an IEEE 802.3
encoder/decoder (ENDEC); a media access control
(MAC) unit; separate 32-byte send-and-receive, first-in-
first-out (FIFO) buffers; and a direct memory access
(DMA) controller. A separate ROM provides the
Ethernet global address (which provides a unique 48-bit
identity for each Ethernet device).

The interface connector is an Apple AAUI connector.

This connector supports the Apple Ethernet Network
Cable System which supports thicknet, thinnet, or
lOBaseT cable systems. The Ethernet Networks tab in
Cross Family Service Technical Procedures contains
additional information on the Apple Ethernet Cable
System.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1.19

Line Input Connectors

Microphone Input

Audio Output and
Internal Speaker

The line input connectors provide sampling of line
input devices such as a CD player, VCR audio output, or
tape deck. These inputs are mixed internally to form a
monaural signal. This monaural signal is combined with
the input from the microphone and connected to the 8-
bit sound input circuit. Even though the system has two
line-in connectors, the stereo channels combine into a
single monaural input and the stereo information is lost.
The two connectors are provided so that an external
mixer is not required.

The microphone input connector supports the connection
of an electret microphone. The microphone is included
with the Macintosh Quadra 900.

CAUTION: The microphone input connector provides +8
volts on one of its pins. This is a nonstandard use for this
pin. Do not plug any device into the microphone input
except the microphone included with the Macintosh
Quadra 900.

The audio output connector provides for the attachment
of external audio equipment such as headphones,
powered speakers, or an amplifier. The connector is a
3.66 mm stereo miniature phone plug.

A four-inch internal speaker provides a built-in
monaural source. This speaker is driven by a more
powerful amplifier than on previous Macintosh
computers. The higher power is required to drive the
larger speaker. Because most Macintosh Quadra 900
computers will sit on the floor, they must produce
higher sound levels to give users the same perceived
sound as on a desktop system.

1 .20 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Peripheral Interface
Controllers

NuBus and
the Processor-
Direct Slot

The Macintosh Quadra 900 uses the same peripheral
interface controllers (PICs) that were introduced in the
Macintosh Ilfx. The PICs are input/output processors
that reduce the workload on the 68040. An
input/output processor (lOP) is a processor dedicated
to a specific task or tasks that are normally performed
by the main CPU. In all previous Macintosh computers,
low-level communications with external devices were
handled by the main processor. This resulted in
reduced performance because each time a peripheral
required attention, the main processor was diverted
from its primary function — running applications. lOPs
provide the ability to off-load some of the support
required by peripheral-device interfaces. The
Macintosh Quadra 900 has two PICs — one supports the
8530 serial communications controller (SCC); the other
supports the SWIM disk controller and Apple Desktop
Bus interface.

Each PIC includes a 65CX02 microprocessor operating
at 2 MHz, a l6-bit timer, two DMA controllers, two
digital phase-locked loops (DPLLs), and a RAM
expansion bus to support an external 32K x 8-bit static
RAM chip. The PIC communicates with the host 68040
via this RAM.

The Macintosh Quadra 900 has two types of system
expansion slots:

• One 120-pin 68040 processor-direct slot (PDS)

• Five NuBus expansion slots

The processor-direct slot provides direct access to
the 68040 microprocessor bus. Providing direct access
to the CPU bus rather than going through NuBus results
in increased throughput for the device.

To prevent the installation of all five NuBus cards plus
a PDS-type card, the PDS slot has been aligned with
NuBus slot E. By aligning the fifth NuBus slot and the
processor-direct slot, only four NuBus cards and a PDS
card — or five NuBus cards — can be installed. This
design prevents too many cards from being installed and
thus potentially overloading the power supply.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1.21

Power Supply

Apple SuperDrIve

The NuBus expansion slots in the Macintosh Quadra
900 implement the same expansion bus in other
Macintosh II computers. However, NuBus in the
Macintosh Quadra 900 has a number of new features.

Macintosh Quadra 900 NuBus slots support standard or
oversized cards. The oversized cards are approximately
two-inches higher than earlier NuBus cards. Card
guides installed on the side cover hold standard-sized
cards in place. NuBus in the Macintosh Quadra 900
supports block transfers between NuBus cards at twice
the speed of earlier systems.

The power supply in the Macintosh Quadra 900
provides power for two 25-watt cards and three 15-watt
cards (a maximum of 95 watts).

The interface between the five NuBus slots and the
system bus is provided by three chips: the YANCC and
two l6-bit NuBus transceiver chips.

The power supply is a self-configuring switching supply
that operates on AC line voltages from 90 to 140 VAC
and 170 to 270 VAC. The supply outputs +5 VDC, +12
VDC, and -12 VDC voltages, which are used by the logic
board, fan, internal disk drives, peripheral ports, and
the NuBus and processor-direct slots. A switched
convenience outlet provides power for a monitor.

The power supply also provides a +5 volt trickle
voltage for the power-on circuit, NuBus standby power,
a real-time clock, and parameter RAM. This voltage is
supplied when the computer is off but still connected to
an AC outlet. When AC power is not available, the
parameter RAM and real-time clock receive power from
a lithium battery on the logic board to retain their
settings.

The system contains a single Apple SuperDrive 1.4 MB
megabyte floppy disk drive.

The drive connects to the logic board through a 20-pin
connector. The flow of data between the logic board
and the disk drive is controlled by the SWIM (Sanders
Wozniak Integrated Machine) disk controller chip. The
SWIM controls reading and writing operations.

1 .22 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

SCSI Hard
Disk Drives

Functionai Overview

Power Control

The Macintosh Quadra 900 can be equipped with up to
three internal 3.5- or 5.25-inch half-height or full-
height SCSI hard disk drives. For information on SCSI
hard disk drives, refer to the SCSI Hard Disk Drives
Technical Procedures.

The following section describes the operation of the
power control circuitry and the events that occur
during system startup.

The Macintosh Quadra 900, like other Macintosh II
computers, has a hardware-on/software-off circuit to
control the power supply.

There are two power switches: the keyswitch on the
front (power on and off), and a second (power on only)
on the Apple Desktop Bus keyboard.

The computer can be powered on by turning the
keyswitch to the on position or pressing the soft
power-on switch on the Apple Desktop Bus keyboard.

The computer can be turned off either by selecting Shut
Down from the Special menu of the Finder or by
turning the keyswitch to the off position. However,
Apple recommends that you always use the Shut Down
command. Using Shut Down enables the computer to
save valuable file and folder information.

The power supply protects itself and the computer by
shutting down in response to excessive heat, a short
circuit, or an excessive power drain. To correct the
problem, allow the computer to cool, remove the short
circuit, or adjust the power load. After five to ten
minutes, you can switch the system on again.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .23

System Startup

Understanding what happens during system startup can
be useful in quickly pinpointing the source of startup
problems.

When you switch the computer on, the system begins a
carefully synchronized sequence. First, the processor
waits while a series of circuits initializes the system in
preparation for operation. During this time, the
versatile interface adapter and the SWIM chip
initialize, and the mapping of RAM and ROM alters
temporarily in order to test the system.

The software in the system ROMs then performs a RAM
test to determine how much RAM is present and verify
proper RAM operation. Several other system tests run.
When the system is fully tested and initialized, system
RAM maps for normal operation.

At this point the disk startup process begins. The
system looks for a readable disk in the available disk
drives in the following order:

1. Internal floppy disk drive

2. Startup device set in the control panel

3. SCSI devices — starting with internal drive; then in
declining order of device ID (6 to 0)

Note: The startup device will default to the device with
SCSI address 0 if a startup device is not selected or the
SCSI device address is invalid.

If the Macintosh Quadra 900 finds a readable disk
containing boot tracks and a System Folder, the disk is
read and the disk startup process is completed.

1 .24 / Basics

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ SPECIFICATIONS

Processor

Type

Addressing

Clock Rate

Memory

DRAM SIMM

Parameter RAM

Video RAM

ROM

I/O Interfaces

NuBus

Expansion

Interface

Floppy
Disk Interface

Motorola MC68040 with integral floating-point unit, memory
management unit, 4K data cache, and 4K instruction cache

32-bit registers
32-bit address bus
32-bit data bus

25 MHz

4 MB standard using four 1 MB, 80 nsec SIMMs; expandable to
64 MB (using 4 MB SIMMs)

256 bytes

1 MB; expandable to 2 MB
1 MB using two 150 nsec, 256K x l6-bit chips

5 slots support standard and oversize cards, burst mode
transfers, a processor write buffer, and NuBus '90

140-pin 68040 processor-direct slot

Supports 800K and 1.4 MB internal disk drives using GCR
(group-coded recording) and MFM (modified frequency
modulation — 1.4 MB drive only) recording standards

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Basics / 1 .25

SCSI Interface

Up to 5 MB/second transfer rate (asynchronous)

Apple Desktop
Bus

Serial Interfaces

Video Interface

Ethernet

Audio

Dual SCSI interface chips support internal and external SCSI
buses

Controlled-impedance internal cable system with active
termination

Supports a maximum of eight devices, including the computer,
which is always device 7

Low-speed, synchronous serial interface

Two RS-232/RS-422 ports
Mini DIN-8 connectors
230.4 k baud maximum

0.920 Mbit/second if external clock source is provided (modem
interface only)

Asynchronous, synchronous (modem only), and AppleTalk
(printer only) protocols supported

Supports all current Apple monitors (8-bit)

Supports VGA monitors and NTSC and PAL video standards
1 MB video RAM (VRAM) standard, expandable to 2 MB (for
increased pixel depth)

AUI-15 connector

8-bit stereo output via miniature phone plug connector
8-bit monaural input via miniature phone plug connector;

supports supplied electret-type microphone
8-bit monaural input via two RCA connectors (left and right
channels mix internally to yield a monaural signal)

Built-in 4" speaker
4-voice wave-table synthesis
Stereo sampling generator

1 .26 / Basics

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Floppy Disk Drive

Apple SuperDrive

512 bytes per sector

18 sectors per track

737.28K/side

l474.56K/disk

Microphone

Type

Electret, omnidirectional

Output Voltage

4 millivolts, peak to peak, at normal speaking volume

Electrical

Line Voltage

85 to 270 VAC, RMS, self-configuring power supply

Line Frequency

50 to 60 Hz, single phase

Power

303 watts (maximum), not including monitor

Environmental

Operating

10° C to 40° C

Temperature

50° F to 104° F

Storage

-40° C to 47° C

Temperature

-40° F to 116.6° F

Relative

Humidity

20% to 80% noncondensing

Altitude

0 to 10,000 feet

0 to 3048 m

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Basics / 1 .27

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Section 2 - Take-Apart

□ CONTENTS

2.3 Introduction

2.3 Materials Required

2.5 Side Cover

2.7 Drive Shelf and Disk Drives

2.7 Drive Shelf

2.9 Apple SuperDrive

2.11 SCSI Disk Drive

2.13 Power Supply and Fan

2.13 Power Supply

2.13 Fan

2.15 Logic Board

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.1

2.2 / Take- Apart

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ INTRODUCTION

Materials Required

The following items contain important information
necessary to successfully disassemble and reassemble
the Macintosh Quadra 900:

• If a step or part of a step is underlined, detailed
procedures for that procedure are earlier in this
section.

• Place the system on an antistatic mat with the left
side on the mat, as shown in Figure 2-1. With the
system on its side, you'll be able to work without the
risk of tipping the system over.

• A DRAM SIMM configuration chart is in Section 5,
Additional Procedures. Use the chart to determine
the number and size of DRAM SIMMs for different
memory sizes.

Grounded workbench pad and wriststrap
Flat-blade screwdriver
#2 Phillips screwdriver
SIMM removal tool

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart/ 2.3

□ SIDE COVER

To perform any of the take-apart procedures on the

Macintosh Quadra 900, you must remove the side cover.

This procedure is illustrated in Figure 2-2.

1. If the system is still set up, unplug all cables
attached to the rear of the unit.

2. Place the computer, left side down, on the grounded
workstation pad.

3. Press the two latches and lift the cover to remove it
from the main housing.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.5

Metal

Tab

2.6/Take-Apart

Ocl

□ DRIVE SHELF AND DISK DRIVES

To remove or install disk drives, you must remove the
drive shelf. Also remove the drive shelf prior to
removing the power supply. Removing the drive shelf
is illustrated in Figure 2-3.

Drive Shelf

1. Disconnect the following cables:

• Internal floppy disk drive cable from the logic
board

• SCSI cable from the logic board

• SCSI power cable(s), if present, from the power
supply

2. Remove the two drive shelf screws.

3. Slide the drive shelf toward the rear of the
computer.

4. Grasp the cable tie on the lower-front drive carrier
and the metal tab at the right of the drive shelf.

Lift the drive shelf out of the case. Be careful that
none of the cables catches on the case while you're
removing the drive shelf.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.7

Apple

SuperDrive

The removal of the Apple SuperDrive is illustrated in

Figure 2-4.

1. Disconnect the internal floppy disk drive cable from
the floppy disk drive.

2. Remove the screw and spacer that secure the drive.

3. Pull up the rear of the floppy drive and slide the
drive toward the rear of the drive shelf. Remove
the drive from the drive carrier.

IMPORTANT: Apple strongly advises the use of dust
shields on 1.4 MB floppy drives in all Macintosh Quadra
900 computers. All 1.4 MB replacement drives ship with
the dust shield already installed. If you plan to install a
dust shield on a current drive, however, you must clean
the drive first. Follow the procedure in "Cleaning the
Drive" in the Basics section of the FDHD/SuperDrive tab
of the Apple Service Technical Procedures.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Jan 92

Take- Apart / 2.9

2.10 / Take-Apart

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

SCSI Hard
Disk Drive

Drive Carrier

Termination

Notes

Figure 2-5A illustrates removal of the drive carrier.
This procedure assumes the disk drive is in the bottom-
front drive position. The drive can also be in the top-
or bottom-rear position; removal procedures are the
same or analogous.

1. Remove the Apple SuperPrive .

2. Disconnect the SCSI cable and power cable from the
hard disk drive.

3. Remove the Phillips screw that secures the drive
carrier to the drive shelf and remove the drive
carrier.

4. Gently place the drive carrier and hard disk drive
upside down on the static mat.

Figures 2-5B and 2-5C illustrate removal of the 160 MB
and 400 MB hard disk drives from the drive carrier.

1. Disconnect the SCSI select cable from the disk
drive.

2. Remove the four Phillips screws that secure the
drive to the drive carrier.

• On 3.5-inch drives, the screws are on the bottom
of the drive carrier.

• On 5.25-inch drives, the screws are on the long
sides of the drive carrier.

3. Slide the drive from the end of the drive carrier
opposite the SCSI select switch.

Before installing a replacement SCSI hard drive, remove
the termination resistors. Apple ships all replacement
SCSI hard drives with the termination resistors
installed. Refer to Figures 2-5B and 2-5C to remove the
resistors.

WARNING: Failure to remove the termination resistors
can result in damage to the Macintosh Quadra 900 logic
board.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Take-Apart/ 2.11

Figure 2-6 Removing the Power Supply

Figure 2-7 Removing the Fan

2.12/Take-Apail

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ POWER SUPPLY AND FAN

Power Supply

Fan

Figure 2-6 illustrates removal of the power supply.

1. Remove the drive shelf .

2. Remove the speaker bezel as follows:

• Disconnect the speaker cable from the logic
board.

• Press up and out on the two plastic latches at
the top of the speaker bezel.

• Use a screwdriver to release the two latches at
the bottom of the speaker bezel.

3. Disconnect the power supply cable from the logic
board.

4. Remove the three screws that secure the power
supply to the case.

5. Grasp the two plastic handles and pull the power
supply from the case. To keep the power supply
from binding, pull it evenly.

Figure 2-7 illustrates removal of the fan.

1. Press the fan connector latch and pull the connector
from its mating socket.

2. Remove the four screws that secure the fan and fan
grille. Remove the fan.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.13

□ LOGIC BOARD

Figure 2-8 illustrates removal of the logic board.

1. Remove the drive shelf and power supply .

2. Remove the interrupt and reset actuators by
pressing the sides of the actuators and pushing the
actuators away from the logic board and out of the
case.

3. Disconnect the keyswitch cable from the logic
board.

4. To remove the logic board

• Press down on the latch that holds the logic
board in place and slide the logic board toward
the front of the case.

• Raise the front of the logic board up and out of
the case.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Take-Apart / 2.15

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Section 3 - Diagnostics

□ CONTENTS

There are currently no diagnostics available to test the
Macintosh Quadra 900. When diagnostics are available,
instructions will be provided in the Macintosh Family
Technical Procedures under the Macintosh Multiple-
Product Diagnostics tab.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Diagnostics / 3.1

ft Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Section 4 - Troubleshooting

□ CONTENTS

4.3 Introduction

4.3 Before You Start

4.3 Things to Remember

4.5 Module Exchange Information

4.5 Logic Board

4.5 Internal SCSI Hard Disk Drives

4.6 Apple SuperDrive

4.6 Power Supply

4.6 Startup and Error Chords

4.6 Introduction

4.6 Startup Chord

4.6 Error Chords

4.8 Symptom Chart

4.8 How to Use the Symptom Chart

4.9 System Problems

4.10 Video Problems

4.11 Apple SuperDrive Problems

4.12 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Problems

4.13 Peripheral Problems

4.14 Miscellaneous Problems

4.15 DRAM SIMM Verification

4.15 Introduction

4.15 Materials Required

4.15 Isolating a Defective DRAM SIMM

4.16 Battery Verification

4.16 Introduction

4.16 Materials Required

4.16 Verification Procedure

4.17 Customer’s Configuration Chart

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Troubleshooting / 4.1

□ INTRODUCTION

Before
You Start

Things to
Remember

)

Macintosh Quadra

Before you begin troubleshooting, read the sections
titled "Things to Remember," "Module Exchange
Information," "Startup and Error Chords," "DRAM SIMM
Verification," and "Battery Verification." You need the
information provided in these sections to troubleshoot
the Macintosh Quadra 900 effectively.

• Follow all electrostatic discharge precautions when
working on the Macintosh Quadra 900. Refer to the
You Oughta Know tab in Apple Service Technical
Procedures for additional information.

• Use a known-good monitor (if available) and connect
it to the built-in video port. This strategy will
isolate the problem to the CPU, internal drives,
keyboard, and mouse.

• To ensure that customers get back the same
configurations that they brought in, record the
following information before beginning:

- Type and serial number of NuBus or processor-
direct slot cards

- Size (3.5- or 5.25-inch) and capacity of internal
SCSI drive(s)

- Number (sets of four) and sizes (1 or 4 MB) of
DRAM SIMMs installed

- Whether a VRAM upgrade is installed

At the end of this section is a form you can use to
record the customer's system configuration.

900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.3

• Before you begin troubleshooting, remove all NuBus
and processor-direct slot cards and disconnect all
external serial, Ethernet, SCSI, and ADB devices
(except the keyboard and mouse). Detach the
microphone and any devices connected to the audio
output or line-input connectors.

After the system is fully operational, install and test
each option card or peripheral. Install one device
and test the system before adding others. Repeat
the install-and-test process until you install and test
all devices.

• Mark each known-good DRAM SIMM on the
exchange logic board with white correction fluid or
a small sticker to prevent confusion during the
troubleshooting procedure.

• During a normal startup sequence, a single, soft
chord plays. If you do not hear a single, soft chord,
refer to "Startup and Error Chords" for additional
information.

• The Macintosh Quadra 900 requires system software
7.0.1 or later. If an earlier version of the system
software is installed, install the correct version and
reverify the failure before beginning
troubleshooting. Many times, problems that appear
hardware related are actually caused by software.

• When instructed to replace the logic board, install
the customer's DRAM and VRAM SIMMs on the
replacement logic board.

Note: If you are removing DRAM or VRAM SIMMs
from the logic board, use the SIMM removal tool.

See the You Oughta Know tab for instructions.

4.4 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ MODULE EXCHANGE INFORMATION

Logic Board

Internal
SCSI Hard
Disk Drives

At the end of this section is a form you can use to
record the customer's system configuration. Feel free
to copy the form for your own use.

Procedures for removing and installing modules are in
Section 2, Take-Apart.

To make sure the customer always receives the same
logic board configuration that he or she brought in, be
sure to record the following information before you
exchange the logic board:

• The amount of DRAM SIMM memory

• Whether a VRAM upgrade is installed

Apple ships some replacement SCSI hard disks without
a power cable. If the replacement hard disk comes
without a power cable, be sure to keep the power
cable with the customer’s system. For drives shipped
without a power cable, the power cable sells as a
separate replacement part and is not part of any module.

Return the defective module to Apple in the same
packaging the replacement module arrives in. This
packaging protects the module from damage during
transit. Failure to properly package returned modules
can result in additional charges.

Apple ships SCSI hard disks with the termination
resistors installed. The termination resistors must be
removed prior to installing the drive in the system.
Procedures for removing the termination resistors are
in Section 2, Take-Apart.

WARNING: Failure to remove the termination resistors
can result in damage to the Macintosh Quadra 900 logic
board.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Troubleshooting / 4.5

Apple SuperDrive

Apple ships the Apple SuperDrive in a mounting
bracket. To minimize possible damage, return drives to
Apple with the mounting bracket attached.

Power Supply

The power supply module includes the fan. The fan and
screws are also available as separate replacement parts.

□ STARTUP AND ERROR CHORDS

Introduction when you switch on the Macintosh Quadra 900, a sound

resource stored in system ROM plays. This sound is
called the startup chord and consists of a single, soft
chord. After the startup chord plays, the computer runs
a series of self-tests. If any part of the self-test fails, a
sequence of error chords will sound.

Startup Chord During a normal startup sequence, a single, soft chord

plays; then a disk icon appears on the screen. The disk
icon will have a flashing question mark (if a startup
disk is not found) or a smiling face (if a startup disk is
found).

Error Chords One or two sets of chords play when an error occurs

during startup. Depending upon the type of failure, you
will hear either a two-part error chord (eight tones) or
a shorter one-part error chord (four tones).

Refer to the list of failure areas below. The list
includes a description of each error chord, the problem
it indicates, and what to do to correct the problem.

Hardware Failure when a hardware error occurs during the initial self-

tests, the one-part error chord (four tones) plays after
the startup chord. To correct the problem;

1. If the system boots from an internal SCSI disk drive,
disconnect the SCSI cable from the logic board and
restart the system. If the startup sequence is
normal, try reinitializing the hard disk. If an error
chord still sounds, replace the hard disk drive.

4.6 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

DRAM SIMM
Failure

2. If the system boots from the internal floppy drive,
disconnect the floppy drive cable and restart the
system. If the startup sequence is normal, replace
the floppy drive.

3. If you still hear the error chords at system startup,
exchange the logic board. (Install the customer's
DRAM and VRAM (if any) SIMMs on the exchange
board.

When a DRAM SIMM failure occurs during the initial
self-tests, a two-part error chord sequence, with a
pause between the two sequences, plays after the
startup chord. To correct the problem, refer to "DRAM
SIMM Verification" later in this section.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.7

□ SYMPTOM CHART

How to Use the
Symptom Chart

First find the symptom that most nearly describes the
problem; then perform the first corrective action on the
list. If the first corrective action does not fix the
problem, go to the next action. If you replace a module
and find that the problem remains, reinstall the original
module before you procede.

Note: When instructed to replace the logic board,
install the customer's DRAM and VRAM SIMMs on the
exchange board.

4.8 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

System Problems

Solutions

• Does not power on —
screen is black,
fan is not running,
and LED is not lit

• Clicking, chirping, or
thumping sound

• System shuts down
intermittently

• System intermittently
crashes or hangs

1. Check the power cables.

2. Plug the monitor directly into the wall socket, and
verify that the monitor has power.

3. Replace power cord.

4. Replace po wer supply.

5. Replace logic board .

1. Replace power supply .

2. Replace logic board .

3. Replace floppy disk drive cable.

4. Replace floppy disk drive .

1. Make sure that the air vents on the side cover and
at the rear of the system unit are clear. Thermal
protection circuitry may shut the system down.
After 30 to 40 minutes the system should be OK.

2. Replace power cord.

3. Check the voltage of the lithium battery on the
logic board. If the battery voltage is below 3.2
volts, replace the battery.

4. Replace power supply .

5. Replace logic board.

1. Make sure system software is version 7.0.1 or later.

2. Verify that the software (applications, INITs, CDEVs,
RDEVs, etc.) is System 7 compatible.

3. Identify and replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer
to "DRAM SIMM Verification").

4. Replace logic board .

5. Replace power supply .

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.9

Video Problems

Solutions

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
operate, fan is
running, and LED
is lit

1. Adjust brightness on monitor.

2. Replace monitor.

3. Replace video cable.

4. If a video interface card is being used with the
monitor, move the card to a different slot.

5. If a video interface card is being used with the
monitor, replace card.

6. Identify and replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer
to "DRAM SIMM Verification").

7. Replace logic board .

8. Replace power supply .

• Screen is black,
audio and drive
do not operate,
fan is running,
and LED is lit

1. Replace video cable.

2. Move video interface card (if installed) to a
different slot.

3. Replace video interface card (if installed).

4. Identify and replace defective DRAM SIMMs (refer
to "DRAM SIMM Verification").

5. Replace logic board .

6. Replace power supply .

• Partiai or whoie
screen is bright and
audio is present,
but no video
information is visible

1. Replace monitor.

2. Replace video cable.

3. Move video interface card (if installed) to a
different slot.

4. Replace video interface card (if installed).

5. Replace logic board .

Note: If replacing the monitor corrects the video
problem, refer to the appropriate monitor Technical
Procedures for monitor troubleshooting information.

4.10 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Apple SuperDrive
Problems

• Drive runs
continuously

• Drive does not
operate

• During system startup,
disk ejects; display
shows icon with
blinking "X"

• Will not eject
disk

• Drive attempts to
eject disk, but disk
does not eject

• MS-DOS drive does
not recognize a disk
formatted on an
Apple SuperDrive

Solutions

1. Replace bad floppy disk.

2. Replace floppy disk drive cable.

3. Replace floppy disk drive .

4. Replace logic board .

1. Verify that the keyswitch is not set to secure.

2. Replace bad floppy disk.

3. Replace floppy disk drive cable.

4. Replace floppy disk drive .

5. R ep lac e lo gic b oar d -

6. Re place power supply .

1. Replace disk with known-good system disk.

2. Replace floppy disk drive cable.

3. Replace floppy disk drive .

4. Replace lo 2 ic board .

1. Verify that the keyswitch is not set to secure.

2. Switch power off and hold mouse button down
while switching power back on.

3. Replace floppy disk drive .

4. Replace floppy disk drive cable.

5. Replace logic board .

1. Reinsert disk and try to eject disk again.

2. Reseat floppy drive bezel and/or disk drive so the
slot in the bezel aligns correctly with the disk
drive.

3. Try ejecting disk manually with a paper clip.

— Format all disks with the MS-DOS drive first.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.11

SCSI Hard Disk
Drive Problems

• A single internal SCSI
drive will not operate;
drive doesn't spin

• No internal SCSI
drives will operate

• Drive does not
appear on the
desktop

• Works with internal or
external SCSI devices
but will not work with
both

Solutions

1. Replace SCSI cable.

2. Replace SCSI power cable.

3. Replace SCSI drive .

1. Verify that each SCSI device has a unique SCSI
device address.

2. Replace SCSI cable.

3. Replace power .supply .

4. Replace logic board .

1. Verify that each SCSI device has a unique SCSI
device address.

2. The drive may not be initialized. Use HD SC Setup
to initialize the drive.

1. Verify that each SCSI device has a unique SCSI
device address.

2. Replace the external SCSI terminator.

3. Verify that the internal SCSI drives are not
terminated.

4. Refer to the apropriate Apple Service Technical
Procedures for troubleshooting the external device.

4.12 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Peripheral Problems

Solutions

)

• Cursor does not
move

1. Verify that the keyswitch is not set to secure.

2. Check mouse connection.

3. Inspect the inside of the mouse for a buildup of dirt
and other contaminants. Clean the mouse if
necessary.

4. If the mouse was connected to the keyboard, connect
the mouse to the rear ADB port instead. If the
mouse works, replace the keyboard.

5. If the mouse does not work in any ADB port,
replace the mouse.

6. Replace logic board .

• Cursor moves, but
clicking the mouse
button has no effect

1. Replace the mouse.

2. Replace logic board .

• No response to any
key on the keyboard

1. Verify that the keyswitch is not set to secure.

2. Verify the keyboard connection to the ADB port.

3. Replace keyboard cable.

4. Replace keyboard.

5. Replace logic board .

• Cannot double-click
to open an application,
disk, or server

1. Remove multiple system files on the hard disk.

2. Clear parameter RAM. Hold down the < Option >
< Command ><R> and keys during system
startup. Reset mouse controls.

3. If the mouse was connected to the keyboard, connect
the mouse to a rear ADB port instead. If mouse
works, replace keyboard.

4. If mouse does not work in any ADB port, replace
mouse.

5. Replace logic board.

)

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.13

• Known-good
serial printer
will not print

• Known-good
printer on an
AppleTalk network
will not print

Miscellaneous

Problems

• No sound from
speaker

1. Make sure the system software is version 7.0.1 or
later.

2. Make sure that the Chooser settings are correct.

3. Replace printer interface cable.

4. Replace logic board.

1. Make sure the system software is version 7.0.1 or
later.

2. Make sure that the Chooser settings are correct.

3. Refer to the Networks tab in Apple Service
Technical Procedures for more information.

Solutions

1. Verify that the Speaker Volume setting in the Sound
Control Panel is one or above.

2. Replace speaker.

3. Replace logic board.

4.14 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ DRAM SIMM VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Isolating a
Defective
DRAM SIMM

SIMM removal tool

Four known-good DRAM SIMMs (80 nsec or faster) that
are the same size (1 or 4 megabyte) as the DRAM
SIMMs you are verifying. If the system has both sizes
of DRAM SIMMs, you'll need four of each size.

1. Remove the side cover.

2. Remove all the customer's DRAM SIMMs.

Note: Use the configuration chart at the end of this
section to record the number and the sizes of the
DRAM SIMMs. The customer should get back the
same number and sizes. Refer to the Apple
Technical Procedures SIMM Quick Reference Chart
for information on identifying the DRAM SIMMs.

3. Figure 4-1. Install four known-good DRAM SIMMs
in Bank A and switch on the system.

If you hear the normal startup sound, the system is
working properly and you can proceed to test the
customer's DRAM SIMMs.

4. Switch the system off, remove one of the known-
good DRAM SIMMs, and install one of the
customer's DRAM SIMMs.

5. Switch on the system. If you hear the normal
startup sound, the customer's DRAM SIMM is good.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to test each DRAM SIMM. Be
sure to set defective DRAM SIMMs where you will
not mix them with good ones.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.15

□ BATTERY VERIFICATION

Introduction

Materials Required

Verification

Procedure

The lithium battery on the main logic board supplies
power to the real-time clock and parameter RAM. If the
battery falls below specifications, you must remove and
replace the battery.

WARNING: Lithium batteries have a potentiai for
expiosion if improperly handled Follow the procedure
below exactly.

Voltmeter

1. Remove the side cover.

2. Remove the battery cover.

3. Set the voltmeter range to 10 volts DC.

4. Touch and hold the positive probe of the voltmeter
to the positive side of the battery.

5. Touch and hold the ground probe of the voltmeter to
the negative side of the battery.

6. The reading for a good battery should be 3-2 volts
or higher. If the battery measures below 3.2 volts,
replace the battery.

4.16 / Troubleshooting

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

□ CUSTOMER'S CONFIGURATION CHART

You may copy the chart on the following page and use
it to keep track of a customer's system configuration.
Attach the completed chart to the system. The chart
will help you make absolutely sure that the customer
receives the same configuration that he or she brought
in.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Troubleshooting / 4.17

CUSTOMER CONFIGURATION CHART

Internal Disk Drives
Top Front

[~~~| Apple SuperDrive
□ SCSI Hard Disk
[*~~] 3.5-Inch
r~| 5.25-Inch
I I Other

Bottom Front

□ SCSI Hard Disk
[~~| 3.5-Inch

r~| 5.25-Inch
I I Other

Top Rear

Q SCSI Hard Disk
r~| 3.5-lnch
rn 5.25-Inch
Other

Rear Front

□ SCSI Hard Disk
[~~| 3.5-lnch
r~| 5.25-Inch
I I Other

Serial Number

NuBus / PDS Cards

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slots
Slot 4
Slots
Slots
PDS Slot

DRAM SIMMs

Bank A

Bank B

Bank C

Bar

□ iMB

[ [l MB

1 |l MB

□

1 |4MB

[ |4MB

1 |4MB

□

1 MB
4 MB

VRAM SIMMs Upgrade []] installed Not installed

4.18 / Troubleshooting

Macintosh Quadra 900

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Section 5 - Additional Procedures

□ CONTENTS

5.2 DRAM SIMM Upgrades

5.2 Introduction

5.2 Installation and Handling

5.2 Configurations

5.4 VRAM SIMM Upgrades

5.4 Introduction

5.5 Installation and Handling

5.5 Configurations

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.1

□ DRAM SIMM UPGRADES

Introduction

Installation
and Handling

Configurations

DRAM SIMMs for the Macintosh Quadra 900 are
available with two sizes of RAM (1 MB and 4 MB) and
come in several configurations that you can use
interchangeably. Consult the Apple Service Technical
Procedures SIMM Quick Reference Chart for current
SIMM identification information.

You must use 80 ns (or faster) DRAM SIMMs on the
Macintosh Quadra 900. DRAM SIMMs with a slower
rating will cause serious timing problems and system
crashes. The RAM speed is usually indicated by the -xx
number after the manufacturer's part number. For
example, -12 indicates 120 ns DRAMs, -10 indicates 100
ns DRAMs, -8 indicates 80 ns, and -6 indicates 60 ns.

Note: Use the SIMM removal tool to remove SIMMs.

See the You Oughta Know tab for instructions on using
the removal tool.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

Various DRAM SIMM configurations are possible,
depending on the number and size of the DRAM SIMMs
that you install on the logic board.

Figure 5-1. The logic board has four banks of DRAM
SIMM sockets (Bank A, Bank B, Bank C, and Bank D).
Each bank contains four slots.

5.2 / Additional Procedures

Oct 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

DRAM

Sockets

Location

Figure 5-1 DRAM SIMM Socket Locations

when installing DRAM SIMMs, the following rules
apply:

• All four slots within a bank must be empty or have
four DRAM SIMMs of the same RAM size (1 MB or
4 MB).

• Do not partially fill a bank; fill all four slots of a
bank or leave all four slots empty.

CAUTION: Other configurations, such as a single SIMM
or differently sized SIMMs in a bank, will not function
correctly.

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Dec 91

Additional Procedures / 5.3

□ VRAM SIMM UPGRADES

Introduction The Macintosh Quadra 900 ships with 1 megabyte of

video RAM (VRAM) standard. You may increase video
RAM to 2 megabytes by installing four VRAM SIMMs.

You must use 100 ns (or faster) VRAM SIMMs on the
Macintosh Quadra 900. VRAM SIMMs with a slower
rating will cause video timing problems.

Table 5-1 indicates the amount of video RAM needed for
various monitor sizes and pixel depth combinations.

Number of colors or shades of gray

Monitor

1 MB VRAM

2 MB VRAM

Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome

256

millions

Macintosh 12-Inch RGB

millions

Apple High-Res RGB (13-Inch)

256

millions

Apple Macintosh Portrait Display

256

Apple Two-Page Monochrome

256

Macintosh 21-Inch Color

256

l6-Inch Color

256

millions

VGA

256

millions

Super VGA

256

millions

NTSC

256

millions

NTSC with convolution

256

PAL

256

millions

PAL with convolution

256

millions

Table 5-1 Video RAM Configurations for Monitor Size and Pixel Depth

5.4 / Additional Procedures

rev. Dec 91

Macintosh Quadra 900

Installation
and Handling

To install the VRAM SIMMs, you must first remove the
drive shelf and power supply. Instructions are in
Section 2, Take-Apart.

Note: Use the SIMM removal tool to remove VRAM
SIMMs. See the You Oughta Know tab for instructions
on using the removal tool.

CAUTION: SIMMs are very susceptible to damage from
ESP and skin acid. Handle only by the edges!

Configurations To upgrade the VRAM to 2 MB, you must install four

VRAM SIMMs (one upgrade kit in socket J3 and one in
socket J4). Refer to Figure 5-2 for VRAM SIMM socket
locations.

VRAM

Sockets

Location

Figure 5-2 VRAM SIMM Socket Locations

)

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Additional Procedures / 5.5

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Quadra 900

Illustrated Parts List

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 System Exploded View (Figure 1)
IPL.5 Logic Board Components (Figure 2)
IPL.6 Miscellaneous Items

Note: The figures and lists in this section include all
piece parts that you can purchase separately from Apple
for the Macintosh Quadra 900, along with their part
numbers. ADB input devices for Macintosh computers
now have their own tab section. Please refer to
Macintosh Family Technical Procedures for ADB input
devices. The items listed in this section are the only
parts available from Apple. Refer to your Apple Service
Programs manual for prices.

Macintosh Quadra 900

Oct 91

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.1

□ SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW (Figure 1)

Jlem

Part No.

Description

076-0434

Main Housing Assembly (includes product label, NuBus
slot covers, fan exhaust vent cover, and light pipe)

076-0432

Cover, Fan Exhaust Vent (also included with main
housing)

590-0518

590-0790

Cable, SCSI Device Select (for use with 661-1641)
Cable, SCSI Device Select (for use with 66I-I636)

444-6104

Screw, 6-32 x .25

805-5106

Hard Drive Carrier (3.5- or 5.25-Inch)

661-0474

Apple SuperDrive (1.4 MB floppy drive)

805-5113

Apple SuperDrive Spacer (included in screw kit)

705-0045

Switch, SCSI Device Select

590-0515

Cable, Apple SuperDrive

66l-l64l

66I-I636

HDA, 160 MB, 3.5-Inch (without carrier)

HDA, 400 MB, 3.5-Inch (without carrier)

590-0517

Cable, HDA Power

590-0528

Cable, SCSI (with terminator)

630-6097

Drive Shelf Assembly (includes Velcro cable straps)

462-4100

Screw, Metric 3.5 x .6 x .8 PNCR Rec

815-6262

Side Cover Latch

076-0436

Side Cover Assembly (includes NuBus card guides)

661-0664

Power Supply (includes fan)

720-0518

Power Supply Fan

462-4400

Screw, Metric 3.5 x 45 SEM Machine (included in
screw kit)

66I-O665

Logic Board (without DRAM/VRAM SIMMs)

420-1001

Screw, Metric 3.5 x .610, Self-Tapping (included in
screw kit)

815-6251

Light Pipe, Power LED (also included with main
housing)

462-4101

Screw, Metric 3.5 x 6, Pan-Head Machine (included in
screw kit)

630-6011

Speaker Assembly

076-0433

Speaker Bezel Assembly

825-1256

Apple Logo

076-0431

Blank Bezel Assembly

076-0437

Floppy Drive Bezel Assembly

815-6249

Reset Actuator

815-6250

Interrupt Actuator

705-0175

Keyswitch (with two keys)

590-0760

Cable, AC Power

699-5073

Microphone Assembly

590-0152

Cable, ADB, 2 Meter

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Mar 92 Illustrated Parts List / IPL.C

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.3

□ LOGIC BOARD COMPONENTS (Figure 2)

Item

Part No.

Descriotion

742-0011

Lithium Battery

520-0344

Battery Holder Cover

661-0609

661-0722

VRAM SIMM, 256k, 100 ns

VRAM SIMM, 256k, 80 ns

661-0520

661-0719

661-0546

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, 80 ns

DRAM SIMM, 1 MB, 80 ns. Parity

517-0546

Jumper Connector (package of 10)

Macintosh Quadra 900

rev. Mar 92

Illustrated Parts List / IPL.5

□ MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

Item Part No. Description

- 076-0439 Dust Shield, 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive, Package of 5

- 602-0282 Service Packaging, HDA, 3.5-Inch, Half-Height

- 602-0210 Service Packaging, 3.5-Inch Floppy Drives

- 805-5050 Shipping Fixture, Apple SuperDrive

- 003-0003 Packing Disk, Apple SuperDrive

- 076-0435 Miscellaneous Screw Kit

Includes:

420-1001 Screw, Metric 3.5 x .610, Self-Tapping

462-4101 Screw, Metric 3.5 x 6, Pan-Head Machine

462-4400 Screw, Metric 3.5 x 45, SEM Machine

805-5113 Apple SuperDrive Spacer

IPL.6/ Illustrated Parts List

rev. Jan 92

Macintosh Quadra 900

(

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Technical Procedures

□ TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1 - 1.2

MacTestMP 1.2

1.4

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.11

1.12

1.13

1.14

1.15
1.18

Introduction to MacTest MP
Overview
Features

Starting MacTest MP
Materials Required
Test Setup

Operating MacTest MP

System Configuration Information
Macintosh Test Selections
Other Test Selections
Setting Looping Options
Setting Preferences
Using the Controls
As the Tests Are Running

MacTest MP Reference
Quick Reference
Menus and Keyboard Equivalents
System Software Compatibility

Illustrated Parts List — IPL.3 Apple TechStep (Figure 1 )

Apple TechStep

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

rev. Mar 92

Contents / i

©Apple Computer, Inc., 1990, 1991, and 1992. No portion of this document may be reproduced
in any form without the written permission of Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, A/UX, EtherTalk, Macintosh, and MultiFinder are registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AppleColor, Apple Desktop Bus, Apple TechStep, Finder,
QuickDraw, and SuperDrive are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Classic is a registered
trademark that is licensed to Apple Computer, Inc.

UNIX® is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories. NuBus™ is a trademark of Texas
Instruments. MS-DOS® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

ii / Contents

rev. Mar 92

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

4 Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Illustrated Parts List - Apple TechStep

□ CONTENTS

IPL.3 Apple TechStep (Figure 1)

Note: The figures and lists in this section include all
piece parts that you can purchase separately from Apple
for Apple TechStep, along with part numbers. The items
in this section are the only parts available from Apple.
Refer to your Apple Service Programs manual for
prices.

Multiple- Product Diagnostics

Mar 92

Apple TechStep / IPL.1

□ Apple TechStep (Figure 1)

Item Part No. Description

699-0578

076-0574

590-0623

076-0572

076- 0573
661-0703

077- 8668
B077-8668
JA077-8668
X077-8668
Z077-8668
590-4512
590-0552
590-4501

Carrying Case
Port Pack
Cable, SCSI

ROM Pack, CPU Tests, Volume 1, v. 1,0
ROM Pack, SCSI HD Tests, v. 1.0

Assembly, Apple TechStep (without port or ROM packs)
Power Adapter, U.S.

Power Adapter, U.K.

Power Adapter, Japan
Power Adapter, Australia
Power Adapter, Europe
Cable, Stereo

Cable, Mini DIN-8, 2-meter
Cable, ADB, 2-meter

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Mar 92

Apple TechStep / IPL.3

# Apple Technical Procedures

Macintosh Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Section 1 - MacTest MP

□ CONTENTS

1.2 Introduction to MacTest MP

1.2 Overview

1.4 Features

1.7 Starting MacTest MP

1.7 Materials Required

1.7 Test Setup

1.8 Operating MacTest MP

1.8 System Configuration Information

1.9 Macintosh Test Selections

1.11 Other Test Selections

1.12 Setting Looping Options

1.12 Setting Preferences

1.13 Using the Controls

1.14 As the Tests Are Running

1.14 MacTest MP Reference

1.14 Quick Reference

1.15 Menus and Keyboard Equivalents

1.18 System Software Compatibility

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

MacTest MP / 1.1

□ INTRODUCTION TO MACTEST MP

Overview

1 .2 / MacTest MP

MacTest™ MP is a disk-based confidence program that
isolates and identifies faults in malfunctioning
Macintosh nfx, Macintosh nsi, Macintosh LC, and
Macintosh Classic® II computers. After completing
repairs, use the program to verify proper system
operation.

In addition, use MacTest MP with any Macintosh II
family computer to test the following Apple peripherals
and monitors:

• Internal and external floppy disk drives

• Apple monitors (adjustment test patterns)

• Apple video cards

MacTest MP does not test hard disk drives. To test a
hard disk drive, use the Macintosh Hard Disk Test.
Procedures for using Macintosh Hard Disk Test are in
Section 3, Diagnostics, in SCSI Hard Disk Drives
Technical Procedures.

IMPORTANT: If your customer's Macintosh llfx or
Macintosh llsi contains a Macintosh Display Card
8*24GC, you must remove 8*24GC INITs from the System
Folder before running MacTest MP. Failure to remove
8*24GC INITs from the System Folder will hang
MacTest MP.

The MacTest MP main window in Figure 3-1 includes
the following functions:

• Program controls

• System configuration information

• Logic board test selections

• Other test selections (floppy drive, ADB
communications, Apple expansion and video cards,
and Apple monitors)

• Testing status indicator

• Test log indicator

rev. Nov 91 Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Note: The arrangement of items within the main
window will depend on the size of the monitor and the
system to which the monitor is connected.

MacTest'^ MP 2.D

System vers:

7.0.1

System type:

Mad rrtosh UC

ROM Size: 512 KB

AppleTalk vers:

Parity:

Not Available

RAM size: 2 MB

QuIckDrav vers:

2.3

CPU/rPUtype:

68020

Pover-an hours: 238

ROM vers:

67c.13t1

Video RAM Size:

256 KB

Production Date: 2/25/9I

Select MaciiitosiL Tests

Select OUier Tests

— Lofic Btard

— Floppy Drives

Slot 1;

^Campanent teats

S Right

BIV: lTjT^P)

Monitor connected to built-i n video

E ram teat

□

H Serial loopback

[— ADB Part

S Mouse

H Video RAM teat

SUtiu: Press "Stirt" to begin yoir Session.

Test Log:

Figure 3-1 Main Window for 12-Inch Monitor with Macintosh LC

Each time a test sequence runs, MacTest MP stores the
results temporarily in a test log. By selecting
(highlighting) the Log icon, you can display a window
containing the contents of the current test log. You can
save, print, and customize the test log in this window
to include the name and address of the customer and the
service center (see Setting Preferences under
"Operating MacTest MP"). You can also open, add to (if
the system configuration and tests selected are the
same), and print saved test logs.

Note: If you are unable to print an open Test Log, save
the Test Log, reboot MacTest MP, and try printing the
log again.

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1 .3

Features

Figure 3-2. MacTest MP has the following features;

• Easy-to-use program controls. The bar of icons
along the top of the main window controls the
operation of the diagnostic program (Start, Stop, and
Pause) and includes three additional features:

- A Log icon, which when selected (highlighted)
displays a log of the test in progress or just
completed. You can print test logs, save them,
and customize them with service center and
customer data.

- A Looping icon, which when selected
(highlighted) repeats the selected tests to find
problems that occur intermittently or after a
delay.

- A Question Mark icon, which provides assistance
for some test failures. The Question Mark icon
is gray except when it contains additional
service information.

System v»r»: 7,0.1

Applerall vert: Not Qp«n»d
QuickDraw vers: 2.2
RGM vera: 67c. 1 1f2

Syaitn type: Micintosh I Ifx

Parity: Mot Availabla

CPUyPPU type: 6aD3Q / 6&8B2
Videa RAM Size: Mot Available

RDMsizt: S12KB

D&Maizt: 4 MB

Paver-on haurs: 0
Productioi Date: 10/9/91

Select Macintosh Tests

— Logic Doam

S Component tests

— Floppy Drives

S Right

H ftAM tc»t

Hlen

^Serial loopback

r— ADD Port

S Mouse

Select Other Teats

' • I " Macintosh II Hlgli Resolution ndeo

Card

Slot 2 :

Slot 3 :

Slot 4:

Slot 5:

Slot 6:

Stniuc: ' ’Start" to btgri ycur Stcsicn.

Test Log;

Figure 3-2 Main Window for 13-Inch Monitor with Macintosh llfx

1 .4 / MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

• System configuration information — including system
software, AppleTalk, QuickDraw, and ROM versions;
system and processor types; amount of system RAM
and ROM; parity checking; amount of video RAM;
date of manufacture; and the number of hours under
power.

• Selectable logic board tests — for components, system
RAM, serial loopback circuitry, and video RAM. The
logic board component tests examine Macintosh
computers as follows.

Tested on the Ilfx. Ilsi. and LC :

- ROM (read-only memory) chips

- see (serial communications controller) chip

- SWIM (Sanders-Woz Integrated Machine) disk
drive controller chip

- VIA (versatile interface adaptor) chip

- SeSI registers

Tested on the Macintosh Ilfx :

- FPU (floating-point unit) chip

- ASe (Apple sound chip)

- FMe (fast memory controller) chip

- OSS (operating system support) chip

Tested on the Macintosh Ilsi :

- RBV (RAM-based video) chip

- FPU (floating-point unit)

Tested on the Macintosh LC :

- BIV (built-in video) chips

- GLUT (color look-up table) chip

Tested on the Macintosh Classic II :

- VIA (versatile interface adaptor) chip

- see (serial communications controller) chip

- RBV (RAM-based video) chips

- ADB communication

• Selectable tests of the internal and external floppy
drives (external on the Macintosh Ilex, Ilci, Ilsi, and
Classic II only) and of system-to-mouse Apple
Desktop Bus (ADB) communications.

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP/ 1.5

• Tests for Apple video cards in the NuBus slots.

MacTest MP tests these Apple video cards;

- Macintosh II Monochrome Video Card

- Macintosh II Video Card

- Macintosh II High-Resolution Display Video Card

- Macintosh II Extended High-Resolution Display
Video Card

- Macintosh II Two-Page Monochrome Video Card

- Macintosh Display Card 4*8

- Macintosh Display Card 8*24

- Macintosh Display Card 8*24GC (Before testing
this card, be sure to remove 8*24GC INITs from
the System Folder.)

- Macintosh II Portrait Video Card (You must
attach a monitor to the installed card. For the
monitor test patterns to function, you must
use a Video Card Expansion Kit (8 RAM chips)
to upgrade the Macintosh Portrait Video Card.)

• Tests for other Apple cards:

- Macintosh Ilci Cache Card Revised

- Apple He Card (Macintosh LC only)

- EtherTalk® NB Card (test works on the
Macintosh II, IIx, Ilex, and Ilfx — but not on the
Ilci and Ilsi)

• Test patterns for adjusting Macintosh monitors (select

the Monitor icon and click Start). MacTest MP

contains test patterns for adjusting the following

Apple Macintosh monitors:

- Apple High-Resolution Monochrome Monitor

- AppleColor™ High-Resolution RGB Monitor

- Apple Macintosh Portrait Display

- Apple Two-Page Monochrome Monitor

- Macintosh 12-Inch Monochrome Display

- Macintosh 12-Inch RGB Display

1 .6 / MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

□ STARTING MACTEST MP

Materials Required

Test

Setup

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Macintosh Ilfx, Ilsi, LC, or Classic II (You can run
MacTest MP on a Macintosh II, IIx, Ilex, or Ilci
to test cards and monitors, but MacTest MP will not
test the II, IIx, Ilex, and Ilci logic boards.)

Macintosh monitor and video cable

ADB keyboard and mouse

MacTest MP diagnostic disk (backup copy)

Peripheral-8 serial interface cable (required only for
serial loopback test)

Blank 800K or 1.4 MB floppy disk (required only for
floppy drive test)

Note: Make a backup copy of the MacTest MP diagnostic
disk before you begin. When testing a defective system,
you can damage or erase the disk.

Note: If you plan to test system RAM or loop on tests
including the RAM test, make MacTest MP the boot disk
and application. Select the MacTest MP Application icon,
select Set Startup from the Special menu, and click OK.
You must unlock (write-enable) your MacTest copy.

If you need more information, refer to the appropriate

Macintosh Owner's Guide.

1. Connect AC power cords from an AC outlet to the
computer, and from an outlet to the monitor.

Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer.

2. Connect the video cable to the monitor. Connect the
the video cable to the Macintosh external video
port or the connector on the Macintosh video card.

3. If you want to run the serial loopback test, connect
the serial cable between the printer port and the
modem port.

4. Insert a copy of the MacTest MP disk into the right
or left internal (or external) drive and switch on
system power.

5. Double-click the MacTest MP icon and the MacTest
MP application. (If you followed the instructions in
Materials Required to adjust Set Startup, skip this
step.)

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.7

□ OPERATING MACTEST MP

System Configuration Figure 3-3. The main window area displays a variety of

Information useful information concerning the hardware and

software configuration of the system under test. Before
running the tests, verify that the information is
accurate.

System vers: The version of the system software in the
System Folder on the startup disk.

AppleTalk vers: The version of AppleTalk (if the
computer is connected to an AppleTalk network).

QuickDraw vers: The version of QuickDraw in the
System Folder on the startup drive or in ROM.

ROM vers: The version of firmware in the system ROM
chips.

System type: The type of Macintosh computer that is
running MacTest MP.

Parity: Not available for MacTest MP.

CPU/FPU type: The type (68000, 68020, or 68030) of
central processing unit (CPU), and the type of floating-
point math coprocessor (FPU) (if installed).

Video RAM size: The amount of RAM in the video RAM
banks. To obtain the video RAM size of video cards,
double-click the Card icon.

ROM size: The amount of ROM in the computer.

RAM size: The amount of RAM in the main RAM banks.
On the Macintosh Ilsi and Ilci, some RAM can be for
video.

Power-on hours: The number of hours that the
computer has been powered on since manufacture.

Note: when you clear parameter RAM, the power-on
hours revert to zero and the production
date disappears. On the Macintosh II, power-on
hours remain at zero.

Production Date: The computer's date of manufacture.

1 .8 / MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Macintosh Test
Selections

Figure 3-3. Select Macintosh Tests allows you to select
the tests you want to run. To select a test, click the
box next to the name of the test. An X appears in the
box. To deselect the test, click the box again and the X
disappears. If a selection is dimmed, the test is not
available. The following section explains each test and
describes special requirements.

Syatem vara: g ^

ApplaTal k vers: Hot Optned
QuickDraw vers: 2.2
ROM ver*: SlcA Ul

Sytttn typa: Mccintoah ilfx

Parity: NotAvailablr

CPJ;FP11 type: E8Q30 / £8882
Vide* RAM Size: Not Available

nOHaiza: S12KB

DAM aiza: 4 MB

Pover-on Knurs: Q
Pradiictioa Date: 10/9/91

Select Mtkcintosli Tests

— Logic Boird

S Component tests

— Floppy Drives

ElRigtit

S RAM test

E Left

^ Serial loopback

[— &DB Port

^ Mouse

Select Otlier Tests

3lot 1: | IHclntosh II High Reiolutlon Vldep

Card

Slot Z: Med ntDsh 1 1 Mb noch ro me Yl deo

Card

Slot 3:

Slot 4:

Slot 5:

Slot 6:

Status: Prase to bagri yojr Stscidn.

Test Loj^:

Figure 3-3 Main Window for 12-lnch Monitor with Macintosh ilfx

Logic Board The logic board tests are divided into the following

selections:

Component tests - Tests all logic board circuitry and
most components. Refer to Features under "Introduction
to MacTest MP" for a complete list of logic board
components and circuits that MacTest MP tests.

You can separately select data transfer tests for the
serial interfaces.

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.9

Floppy Drives

RAM test - Performs a test of the system memory
indicated by RAM size. The test takes thirty seconds
per megabyte and reboots the system afterward.

IMPORTANT: To run the RAM test, you must unlock
(write-enable) your copy of the MacTest disk.

Video RAM test - Tests the VRAM (video RAM) chips
on the 68-pin VRAM SIMM (Macintosh LC only) or on
the video card. Video RAM size indicates the amount of
VRAM memory tested. (This test is not applicable to
the Macintosh Classic II.)

Serial loopback - Tests the two serial interfaces by
performing a series of bidirectional data transfers
between the modem and printer serial ports. This test
requires a peripheral-8 serial cable between the modem
and printer ports.

Screen patterns - Displays test patterns for the
Macintosh Classic n only.

To display the monitor test patterns :

- Click the Screen Patterns box under Logic Board
tests.

- Click Start.

To move forward through the test patterns :

- Press the Space bar.

- Press < Shift > <±>.

- Click the mouse.

To return to a previous test pattern :

- Press < Qption > and click the mouse.

- Press < Hvphen >.

Note: In the backward direction you can loop through
the five test patterns as many times as you wish.
However, in the forward direction the main window
appears after the fifth pattern.

Right/Internal and Lefl/External - Perform a write/
read/verify test of the right and left (optional) internal
800K and 1.4 MB Apple SuperDrive disk drives.
Right/Internal and Left/External examine floppy drives
connected to the external disk drive port on the
Macintosh Ilsi. Use a formatted 1.4 MB floppy disk
with at least 27K available.

1.10/ MacTest MP

rev. Jan 92

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

AD B Port Mouse - Tests the Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) circuitry

by establishing communication with a known-good ADB
keyboard and mouse. Note that this is not a test of the
mouse itself. 'I’he mouse test checks only for
communication between the mouse and computer.

Other Test Use Select Other Tests (see Figure 3-3) in the MacTest

Selections MP main window for the Macintosh Ilfx, Ilsi, and LC

(the Macintosh Classic II main window has no Select
Other Tests) to identify and test Apple video cards. If a
card is in an expansion slot and MacTest MP recognizes
the card, a Card icon and name appear next to the slot
number. Otherwise the message Unfamiliar Card
appears. If MacTest MP does not test the card, the Card
icon dims. If a slot is empty, no icon or card name
appears.

For additional information about a card, double-click on
the slot number. Card icon, or card name.

Monitor Test Patterns To display tCvSt patterns for the Macintosh Classic II,

(except Classic II) see Screen Patterns under Logic Board (above). For the

Macintosh Ilfx, Ilsi, or LC, the Select Other Tests area
of the main window enables you to adjust monitors
connected to the system's built-in video port (BIV) or to
a video card. To display the test patterns, select the
appropriate Monitor icon and click Start. You can
access additional information about the selected monitor
or the test patterns by double-clicking BIV or the
Monitor icon.

To display the monitor test patterns :

- Select the Monitor icon.

- Click Start.

lo move forward through the test patterns :

- Press the Space bar.

- Press < Shift > <±>.

- Click the mouse.

To return to a previous test pattern :

- Press < Option > and click the mouse.

- Press < Hvphen >.

Multi pie -Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.11

Setting Looping
Options

Setting Preferences

Note: In the backward direction you can loop through
the six test patterns as many times as you wish.
However, in the forward direction the main window
appears after the sixth test pattern.

The looping options in MacTest MP allow you to test
modules repeatedly. Use looping to isolate intermittent
or nonimmediate failures. Looping provides two
choices — setting a specific number of times to repeat
the selected tests, or looping until you give a stop
signal. Setup Looping is under the Options menu.

If you loop on the RAM test, you must unlock (write-
enable) your copy of the MacTest floppy disk.

If you loop on the RAM test, MacTest MP automatically
reboots the computer at the end of each pass. The
MacTest MP program automatically reboots if MacTest
MP is the startup disk and startup application (see the
note under "Starting MacTest MP"). For several seconds,
MacTest MP displays the test results. During this
display you can stop the looping. If you do not stop the
looping, MacTest MP runs another RAM test.

Note: when you run the RAM test, MacTest MP saves
the current selections, and the previous selections
disappear.

You can customize MacTest MP test logs to include
service center and customer information, system
configuration, and a time stamp. Customize test logs by
selecting Preferences from the Log menu. However,
the Log menu is deactivated (dimmed) unless a test log
is open and selected (the log is the front window).

To begin a new test log, select New from the File
menu. To select an existing test log, click the Log icon,
use Open to select a saved test log from the File menu,
or select an open log from the Windows menu. With
the desired test log open on your screen, select
Preferences from the Log menu. You can now enter the
service center and customer information, and set test
log options. Figure 3-4 shows the Test Log Preferences
dialog box.

Note: when you close the log, dealer information saves
as a default, but customer information disappears.

1.12 /MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Sholu in Test Log: Test Log-2

^ Dealer Information
^ Customer Information
System Configuration
^ Time/Date

Dealer Information: Customer Information:

Sam & Daue's Mac ^

Doug Jones

Shop ^

1 1 Riuerfront Driue

1 500 Studio Plaza

Land '0 Lakes, DJI

Land '0 Lakes, ILII

53121

53121 ^

Cancel]

Figure 3-4 Test Log Preferences Dialog Box

Using the Controls After selecting tests, setting preferences, and choosing

looping options, you can start testing. Activate the

following controls by clicking:

• Start - Runs the selected tests.

• Stop - Terminates the test(s) in process.

• Pause - Temporarily suspends the tests. Click
Pause again to resume testing.

• Log - Turns the display of the test log window on
or off. If no open log exists, a new log appears.

• ? icon - Contains additional information about the
test failure. When MacTest MP has no additional
information, the icon is dimmed.

• Loop - Indicates whether looping is ON (the
circular, Looping Arrow icon highlights) or OFF (the
circular arrow is white/clear). A loop counter is
beneath the icon.

Multi pie -Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.13

As the Tests
Are Running

□ MACTEST

Quick Reference

The Status line at the lower-left corner of the main
window indicates the progress of MacTest MP. You can
temporarily suspend tests by clicking Pause. You can
end tests by clicking Stop or typing - < Period >.

Note: During the RAM test and video card tests, the
mouse and keyboard do not operate. The RAM and
video card tests must run to completion.

If MacTest MP finds no problems, it displays the
message All Tests Passed.

If MacTest MP encounters a problem, the test stops and
displays an error message on the Status line and in the
test log. If MacTest MP has more information, the
Question Mark icon highlights. Click the question
mark for assistance. If information from MacTest MP
doesn't correct the problem, refer to Section 4,
Troubleshooting, of the Apple Service Technical
Procedures for the Apple product you are testing.

MP REFERENCE

To set up and run MacTest MP, follow the steps below.

Detailed procedures are under "Operating MacTest MP."

Remember to use a copy of MacTest MP and to use Set

Startup to automatically open the MacTest MP

application.

1. Set up the Macintosh Ilfx, Ilsi, LC, or Classic II.

You will need a video monitor, video cable,
keyboard, and mouse. You may need a video card.

2. Connect a serial loopback cable if you plan to run
the Serial Loopback test.

3. Insert the MacTest MP disk in the right (or left)
internal or external disk drive. Switch on the
computer.

4. If the desktop appears, double-click the MacTest MP
disk icon.

1.14/ MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Menus and

Keyboard Equivalents

Apple Menu

File Menu

5. Double-click the MacTest MP application.

6. Verify that the system configuration information is
correct.

7. Select the tests you wish to run.

8. If you desire, select Setup Looping under the
Options menu.

9. Click Start.

10. Click Stop or Pause.

11. Print and save the test log. Use Preferences under
the Log menu to enter service center and customer
information.

12. If a test fails and the Question Mark icon
highlights, click the icon for information.

The MacTest MP menus and menu selections appear
below. Keyboard equivalents are indicated.

The Apple (#) menu contains the following selection:

About MacTest MP - Displays a dialog box that shows
the diagnostic name and version number.

The File menu contains the following selections:

New (§§ - li) - Creates a test log that will be current
until you close it, create a new log, or open another.

Open (§§ - O) - Opens a saved test log. You can open
a saved test log for display, printing, or appending.

Close (§6 - W) - Closes the current test log. If you
haven't saved the contents, a dialog box will appear.

Save (3C - S) - Displays a dialog box that asks you for a
file name to save the test log contents.

Multi pie -Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.15

Save As - Displays a dialog box that asks for a file
name. MacTest MP s 2 iVQs the log under the new name.

Controls Menu

Revert to Saved - Opens the most recently saved test
log.

Save Selections - Saves the current test and looping
selections.

Page Setup - Displays the printer Page Setup dialog
box. See the Macintosh System Software User's Guide.

Print (§§ - P) - Prints the active test log to the printer
selected in the Chooser.

Quit (§§ - Q) - Terminates the program and returns to
the Finder™ (desktop).

Eject (§§ - E) - Ejects the right floppy disk or internal
floppy disk.

Eject Left (§C - 2) - Ejects disks from the left floppy
drive or external floppy drive.

The Controls menu contains the following selections:

Start (36 - G) - Runs the selected logic board and
peripheral tests.

Stop (36 - < Per i od >) - Terminates the test(s) in
process.

Pause (36 - < Apostr ophe >) - Suspends
(dark/highlighted button) the test in process. Click
Pause again to resume testing (light button).

Log (36 - L) - Displays (dark/highlighted button) or
hides (light button) the contents of the current test log.

Loop (36-1) - Switches looping on (dark/highlighted
button) or off (light button).

? icon (36 - Y) - When the icon is highlighted, MacTest
MP has information about test failures; click the icon.
When the icon is dimmed, MacTest MP has no
information.

1.16/ MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Options Menu

The Options menu contains the following selections;

Windows Menu

Setup Looping - Displays the Looping Options dialog
box shown in Figure 3-5. You can set the number of
loops, or you can loop on the selected tests until you
enter the stop command.

Brightness - (Macintosh Classic n only) Lets you
adjust screen brightness. (Refer to Section 3,
Adjustments, of the Macintosh Classic and Classic II
Technical Procedures.) To advance to the next
brightness adjustment screen, click the mouse or Space
bar. After the third screen, you will return to the main
window.

Shut Down - Quits MacTest MP and runs the safe
shutdown sequence as if you had selected Shut Down
from the Finder.

Loop

Loop until stopped.

Cancel

Figure 3-5 Looping Options Dialog Box

The Windows menu contains the following selections:

Main Window (§€ -M) - Brings the MacTest MP main
window to the front and makes it the active window.

Test Log 1-x - If test logs are open, MacTest MP adds
their names to the Windows menu. To bring a test log
to the front (active window), select that test log entry
from the menu.

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

rev. Nov 91

MacTest MP / 1.17

Log Menu

The Log menu contains the following selection:

Illustrations Menu

System Software
Compatibility

MultiFinder Compatibility

Preferences - Contains selections for including the
service center, customer information, system
configuration, time, and date in the test log.

Unless memory limitations dictate otherwise, the
Illustrations menu displays drawings of Macintosh
modules and video cards.

Note: You must have 733K of available memory to run
MacTest MP 2.0. This 733K provides enough memory to
display the Macintosh LC, Ilsi, or Ilfx logic boards from
the Illustrations menu; the other illustrations are not
shown. If you increase the application memory size to
1200K, all illustrations will become available. To
increase the available memory, select the MacTest MP
icon and choose Get Info (3€ - 1) from the File menu.
Under Application Memory Size (K), type 1200. Close
the Get Info window.

To run MacTest MP, you must use system software
version 6.0.7 or later. The System Folder on the
MacTest MP disk should not contain non-Apple startup
or control panel documents, desk accessories, device
drivers, or other system software modifications. Apple
cannot guarantee the accuracy of test results for
systems with third-party operating-system modifications.

MacTest MP is MultiFinder® compatible. In fact.
System 7 computers run MultiFinder only.

1.18 / MacTest MP

rev. Nov 91

Multiple-Product Diagnostics

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "apple :: service :: PN 072-0228 Apple Service Technical Procedures Macintosh Family Volume Two-Mar 1992"

See other formats